% \iffalse meta-comment
%
% memoir.dtx
% Author: Peter Wilson (Herries Press) herries dot press at earthlink dot net
% Copyright 2001--2005 Peter R. Wilson
%
% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any
% later version.
% The latest version of the license is in
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
% LaTeX version 2003/06/01 or later.
%
% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
%
% This work consists of the files listed in the README file.
%
% \fi
% \CheckSum{20643}
%
% \changes{v0.1}{2001/05/20}{First public alpha release}
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{First beta release}
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Bug fixing}
% \changes{v0.31}{2001/07/09}{Bug fixing}
% \changes{v0.32}{2001/08/03}{Fix for old versions of amsmath package}
% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/03}{Added controllable chapter/LoF spacing}
% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/03}{Fixed bug in \cs{appendixpage}}
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/30}{First production release}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/12/07}{Feature fixes} ^^A never released
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{More fixups}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Replaced all the subfigure code}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added sidebars}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Upgraded verse typesetting}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added 17pt option}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added extra \cs{provide} commands}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Major verbatim, box and file additions}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Removed extraneous space from change marks}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Extra optarg in \cs{chapter} and \cs{chapter*}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Twiddled font sizes a little}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/27}{Fixed 12pt bug}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/09/27}{Minor tweaks wrt v1.2}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Extra trimming styles}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Major extensions for indexing}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Automatically call a patch file}
% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Fixed nasty figure/table bug}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added patches v1.1}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added patches v1.3}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Including current patches}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added patches v1.2}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added patches v1.4}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added patches v1.5}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added patches v1.6}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added patches v1.7}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/30}{Added patches v1.8}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/30}{Added patches v1.9}
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/31}{Decided to issue v1.4 as v1.6 on the way to
% the golden section}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Changes to clo files, and footnotes}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/21}{Removed a potential problem with the
% hangul package}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Folded in all v1.61 patches}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/15}{Some minor extensions}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Support for glossaries}
%
% \def\dtxfile{memoir.dtx}
%
% \def\fileversion{v0.1} \def\filedate{2001/05/20}
% \def\fileversion{v0.2} \def\filedate{2001/06/03}
% \def\fileversion{v0.3} \def\filedate{2001/07/14}
% \def\fileversion{v0.31} \def\filedate{2001/07/24}
% \def\fileversion{v0.32} \def\filedate{2001/08/03}
% \def\fileversion{v0.33} \def\filedate{2001/08/31}
% \def\fileversion{v1.0} \def\filedate{2001/11/17}
% \def\fileversion{v1.0a} \def\filedate{2001/12/07}
% \def\fileversion{v1.1} \def\filedate{2002/03/28}
% \def\fileversion{v1.1a} \def\filedate{2002/04/28}
% \def\fileversion{v1.2} \def\filedate{2002/08/10}
% \def\fileversion{v1.2} \def\filedate{2002/08/27}
% \def\fileversion{v1.3} \def\filedate{2002/11/14}
% \def\fileversion{v1.3a} \def\filedate{2002/11/22}
% \def\fileversion{v1.4} \def\filedate{2003/12/18}
% \def\fileversion{v1.6} \def\filedate{2004/01/31}
% \def\fileversion{v1.61} \def\filedate{2004/04/04}
% \def\fileversion{v1.618} \def\filedate{2005/09/27}
% \title{The LaTeX \Lpack{memoir} class for configurable book
% typesetting: Source code\thanks{This
% file (\texttt{\dtxfile}) has version number \fileversion, last revised
% \filedate.}}
%
% \author{%
% Peter Wilson\thanks{\texttt{herries dot press at earthlink dot net}}\\
% Herries Press}
% \date{\filedate}
% \maketitle
%
% \begin{abstract}
% The \Lpack{memoir} class is designed for typesetting
% general books such as novels, biographies, histories,
% and so on, although as it supports all the functionality of the
% standard \Lpack{book} class it can also be used for technical writing.
% It provides more functions than the standard class as well as
% presenting a more friendly interface for the book designer.
% It can also simulate the typesetting style of the standard \Lpack{article}
% class.
%
% The class was first released in mid 2001 and has been well used ever
% since.
% \end{abstract}
%
% \tableofcontents
% \listoftables
%
% \StopEventually{}
%
%
%
% \section{Introduction}
%
% This document provides the commented source
% for the LaTeX \Lpack{memoir} class, which is designed for typesetting
% general books such as novels, biographies, histories,
% and so on. It has all the functionality of the standard \Lpack{book}
% class and, as well as providing some extra functions, also provides
% a more friendly interface for the document designer. As it can encompass
% everything that the \Lpack{book} class provides it may also be used
% for technical writing.
%
% The default appearance of a document typeset with this class is
% the same as if it had been typeset with the \Lpack{book} class and
% it can be made to simulate the \Lpack{article} class..
% The class, though, includes extra facilities that make it easy to
% change the appearance of such things as the page headers and footers,
% the style of chapter and other sectional headings, and the style of
% captions. It also makes it easy to both change the style of the
% Table of Contents, List of Figures, etc., as well as creating new
% kinds of `List of\ldots'. New types of floats, if needed, can be
% created very simply. Epigraphs can be put into the document in a
% variety of styles.
%
% The class provides a variety of page, chapter and captioning
% styles that you can choose from if you don't want to create your own.
%
% Documents can be typeset in 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt, 14pt or 17pt font
% sizes and there is a reasonably intuitive means of setting the margins
% and placement of the text on a page. There is an option to put
% trim marks on the printed pages if the stock sheets need to be trimmed
% down to the final page size. For those whose publishers like a
% manuscript to look as though it was typewritten, there is an option
% to do this (double spacing, ragged right, no hyphenation,
% fixed width font). There is also an unsophisticated means of flagging any
% revisions to the text.
%
% As this is a new class, by default it does not support the old
% LaTeX v2.09
% font commands, namely the |\bf|, |\sl|, |\it| and |\sc| commands;
% it warns about using the |\em| command but does support it.
%
%
% I hope that apart from the font commands the class
% is compatible with
% `standard' LaTeX.
%
% Development of this class would never have been started without
% the wonderful work done by Leslie Lamport and others~\cite{CLASSES}
% from whom I have learned a great deal and borrowed much code.
%
% Sections~\ref{sec:docstrip} through~\ref{sec:ic} describe some
% administrative elements and code for general use later in the
% specification.
% The macros forming the class file are defined in sections~\ref{sec:opt}
% through~\ref{sec:init}.
%
% This manual is typeset according to the conventions of the
% \LaTeX{} \textsc{docstrip} utility which enables the automatic
% extraction of the \LaTeX{} macro source files~\cite{GOOSSENS94}.
%
%
% \section{A driver for this document} \label{sec:docstrip}
%
% The next series of code contains the documentation driver file for
% \LaTeX, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you are
% currently reading. This will be extracted from this file by the
% \textsc{docstrip} program.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*driver>
\documentclass[twoside]{ltxdoc}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage{url}
%%\usepackage[draft=false,
%% plainpages=false,
%% pdfpagelabels,
%% bookmarksnumbered,
%% hyperindex=true
%% ]{hyperref} % Doesn't work with indexing of \DescribeMacro
\providecommand{\phantomsection}{} % just in case hyperref not used
% \end{macrocode}
%
% We do want an index, using linenumbers, but not update information.
% \begin{macrocode}
\EnableCrossrefs
\CodelineIndex
%% \RecordChanges
% \end{macrocode}
% We had better have page headings to aid navigation, but I don't
% like Uppercased titles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeatletter
\@mparswitchfalse
\makeatother
\renewcommand{\MakeUppercase}[1]{#1}
\pagestyle{headings}
% \end{macrocode}
% We may use so many \file{docstrip} modules that we set the
% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
% \end{macrocode}
% Some commonly used abbreviations
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf {#1}} % typeset an option
\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt {#1}} % typeset a file
\newcommand*{\Lcount}[1]{\textsl {\small#1}} % typeset a counter
\newcommand*{\pstyle}[1]{\textsl {#1}} % typeset a pagestyle
\newcommand*{\Lenv}[1]{\texttt {#1}} % typeset an environment
\newcommand*{\Lpack}[1]{\textsf {#1}} % typeset a package
\newcommand*{\ctt}{\textsc{ctt}} % comp.text.tex
\newenvironment{PW}{\em}{}
\newcommand*{\theTeXbook}{\textit{The \TeX book}}
% \end{macrocode}
% We want the full details printed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begin{document}
\raggedbottom
\raggedright
\DocInput{memoir.dtx}
\PrintIndex
%% \PrintChanges
\end{document}
%
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% ^^A There are some elements we do not want to appear in the index.
% \DoNotIndex{\',\.,\@M,\@@input,\@addtoreset,\@arabic,\@badmath}
% \DoNotIndex{\@centercr,\@cite}
% \DoNotIndex{\@dotsep,\@empty,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@ignoretrue}
% \DoNotIndex{\@input,\@ixpt,\@m}
% \DoNotIndex{\@minus,\@ne,\@nil,\@nomath,\@plus,\@set@topoint}
% \DoNotIndex{\@tempboxa,\@tempcnta,\@tempdima,\@tempdimb}
% \DoNotIndex{\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@viipt,\@viiipt,\@vipt}
% \DoNotIndex{\@vpt,\@warning,\@xiipt,\@xipt,\@xivpt,\@xpt,\@xviipt}
% \DoNotIndex{\@xxpt,\@xxvpt,\\,\ ,\addpenalty,\addtolength,\addvspace}
% \DoNotIndex{\advance,\Alph,\alph}
% \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\ast,\begin,\begingroup,\bfseries,\bgroup,\box}
% \DoNotIndex{\bullet}
% \DoNotIndex{\cdot,\cite,\CodelineIndex,\cr,\day,\DeclareOption}
% \DoNotIndex{\def,\DisableCrossrefs,\divide,\DocInput,\documentclass}
% \DoNotIndex{\DoNotIndex,\egroup,\ifdim,\else,\fi,\em,\endtrivlist}
% \DoNotIndex{\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\endgroup}
% \DoNotIndex{\endlist,\everycr,\everypar,\ExecuteOptions,\expandafter}
% \DoNotIndex{\fbox}
% \DoNotIndex{\filedate,\filename,\fileversion,\fontsize,\framebox,\gdef}
% \DoNotIndex{\global,\halign,\hbox,\hfil,\hfill,\hrule}
% \DoNotIndex{\hsize,\hskip,\hspace,\hss,\if@tempswa,\ifcase,\or,\fi,\fi}
% \DoNotIndex{\ifhmode,\ifvmode,\ifnum,\iftrue,\ifx,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi}
% \DoNotIndex{\input}
% \DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\let}
% \DoNotIndex{\list,\llap,\long,\m@ne,\m@th}
% \DoNotIndex{\month,\newcommand,\newcounter,\newenvironment}
% \DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\newdimen}
% \DoNotIndex{\newlength,\newpage,\nobreak,\noindent,\null,\number}
% \DoNotIndex{\numberline,\OldMakeindex,\OnlyDescription,\p@}
% \DoNotIndex{\par,\paragraph,\paragraphmark,\parfillskip}
% \DoNotIndex{\penalty,\PrintChanges,\PrintIndex,\ProcessOptions}
% \DoNotIndex{\protect,\ProvidesClass}
% \DoNotIndex{\refstepcounter,\relax,\renewcommand,\reset@font}
% \DoNotIndex{\rightskip,\rlap,\rmfamily,\roman}
% \DoNotIndex{\roman,\secdef,\selectfont,\setbox,\setcounter,\setlength}
% \DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\sfcode,\skip,\sloppy,\slshape,\space}
% \DoNotIndex{\symbol,\the,\trivlist,\typeout,\tw@,\undefined,\uppercase}
% \DoNotIndex{\usecounter,\usefont,\usepackage,\vfil,\vfill,\viiipt}
% \DoNotIndex{\viipt,\vipt,\vskip,\vspace}
% \DoNotIndex{\wd,\xiipt,\year,\z@}
% \DoNotIndex{\@namedef,\@nameuse,\csname,\endcsname}
%
%
%
% \section{Identification} \label{sec:id}
%
% The \Lpack{memoir} document class can only be used with LaTeX2e,
% so we make
% sure that an appropriate message is displayed when another \TeX{}
% format is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Announce the name, option files and version for LaTeX2e files:
% \begin{macrocode}
%\ProvidesClass{memoir}%
% [2005/09/25 v1.618 configurable document class]
%<9pt>\ProvidesFile{mem9.clo}%
%<9pt> [2004/03/12 v0.3 memoir class 9pt size option]
%<10pt>\ProvidesFile{mem10.clo}%
%<10pt> [2002/07/27 v0.2 memoir class 10pt size option]
%<11pt>\ProvidesFile{mem11.clo}%
%<11pt> [2002/07/27 v0.2 memoir class 11pt size option]
%<12pt>\ProvidesFile{mem12.clo}%
%<12pt> [2004/03/12 v0.3 memoir class 12pt size option]
%<14pt>\ProvidesFile{mem14.clo}%
%<14pt> [2004/03/12 v0.3 memoir class 14pt size option]
%<17pt>\ProvidesFile{mem17.clo}%
%<17pt> [2004/03/12 v0.2 memoir class 17pt size option]
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \section{Initial Code} \label{sec:ic}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Note (2001/08/03): Old versions of the \Lpack{amsmath} package did odd
% things with \cs{@tempa}, \cs{@tempb} and \cs{@tempc}. I have now replaced
% any use of these with \cs{@memtempa}, etc.
%
% In this part we define a few commands that are used later on.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ptsize}
% This control sequence is used to store the second digit of the
% pointsize we are typesetting in. So, normally, it's value is one
% of 0, 1 or 2.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@ptsize}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Any new lengths that depend on the point size option must be declared
% before the options are executed.
% \begin{macro}{\onelineskip}
% \begin{macro}{\lxvchars}
% \begin{macro}{\xlvchars}
% The length \cs{onelineskip} is the vertical space taken
% by a normal line of text. The lengths \cs{lxvchars} and \cs{xlvchars} are
% the approximate lengths required for typesetting lines with either 65 or 45
% characters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\onelineskip}
\newlength{\lxvchars}
\newlength{\xlvchars}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memcnta}
% We need a scratch count register.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\@memcnta
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/11/28}{Deleted count register \cs{@memtempa}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@restonecol}
% When the document has to be printed in two columns, we sometimes
% have to temporarily switch to one column. This switch is used to
% remember to switch back.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@restonecol
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@openright}
% This is TRUE if chapters are to start on righthand (recto) pages;
% this is the default. FALSE means chapters can start on any page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@openright
\@openrighttrue
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@openleft}
% This is TRUE if chapters are to start on lefthand (verso) pages.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@openleft
\@openleftfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@mainmatter}
% This is TRUE if the main part of the document is being currently procesed;
% this is the default.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@mainmatter
\@mainmattertrue
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@memoldfont}
% This is TRUE if the \Lopt{oldfontcommands} option is used.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added \cs{if@memoldfont}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@memoldfont
\@memoldfontfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memerror}
% \begin{macro}{\@memwarn}
% Two macros to save some space when reporting errors or warnings.
% The macros take the same arguments, ignoring the first in each case,
% as |\ClassError| and |\ClassWarning|, e.g., \\
% |\@memwarn{Message}| \\
% instead of \\
% |\ClassWarning{memoir}{Message}|.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{@memerror} and \cs{@memwarn}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memerror}{\ClassError{memoir}}
\newcommand*{\@memwarn}{\ClassWarning{memoir}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifsamename}
% \begin{macro}{\nametest}
% The macro |\nametest{|\meta{name1}|}{|\meta{name2}|}| tests whether the
% characters forming the two arguments are the same or not. If they are the
% same then |\ifsamename| is set TRUE, otherwise it is set FALSE. \meta{name1}
% and \meta{name2} must both be either macro names (including the backslash)
% or must both not be macro names. That is, you cannot do |\nametest{\cs}{cs}|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifsamename
\newcommand{\nametest}[2]{%
\samenamefalse
\begingroup
\def\@memtempa{#1} \def\@memtempb{#2}
\ifx \@memtempa\@memtempb
\endgroup
\samenametrue
\else
\endgroup
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@m@And}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Andtrue}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Andfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@m@Or}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Ortrue}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Orfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@m@Xor}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Xortrue}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Xorfalse}
% These are for `if A and B', `if A or B' and `if A xor B'.
%
% For A and B:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \m@m@Andfalse
% \ifA
% \ifB
% \m@mAndtrue
% \fi
% \fi
% \end{verbatim}
% For A or B:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \m@m@Ortrue
% \ifA
% \else
% \ifB
% \else
% \m@m@Orfalse
% \fi
% \fi
% \end{verbatim}
% For A xor B:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \m@m@Xortrue
% \ifA
% \ifB
% \m@m@Xfalse
% \fi
% \else
% \ifB
% \else
% \m@m@Xorfalse
% \fi
% \fi
% \end{verbatim}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/09}{Added \cs{ifm@m@And}, \cs{ifm@m@Or} and \cs{ifm@m@Xor}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifm@m@And
\newif\ifm@m@Or
\newif\ifm@m@Xor
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Deleted \cs{fillline} and \cs{makecommand} as
% they were not used}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\kill@lastcounter}
% |\kill@lastcounter{|\meta{cntr}|}|\footnote{With thanks to Stefan Ulrich
% (\texttt{ulrich@cis.uni-muenchen.de}) who answered a question on this
% on \ctt, 2001/07/09. (Also answered by Heiko Oberdiek,
% \texttt{oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de}).}
% kills the counter \meta{cntr}. This macro is an extension to the
% suggestions as it also makes the last count register reusable.
% \emph{The macro must only be used when the last allocated counter is to
% be killed.}
% For example with:\\
% |\newcounter{fred} \kill@lastcounter{fred} \newcounter{fred}| \\
% there is no error with the second |\newcounter|.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added \cs{kill@counter}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Ensured \cs{kill@counter} zeroed the counter}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\kill@lastcounter}[1]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Deallocate the last counter register. From \theTeXbook, |\count10| is
% the number of the last register. The counter should be zeroed before being
% deallocated otherwise an immediatally following \cs{newcount} may not
% be zero when allocated\footnote{Discovered and fix provided by Robert
% Schlicht on 2005/08/31.}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\count\count10 \z@
\advance\count10 \m@ne
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the internal counter definition to |\relax|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\let\csname c@#1\endcsname\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@name@p@xdf}
% \begin{macro}{\@name@unresp@xdef}
% \begin{macro}{\@namelet}
% \begin{macro}{\@namelongdef}
% Utility definition macros, along the lines of the kernel's \cs{@namedef}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{@namelet} and friends (from patch v1.8)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@name@p@xdef}[1]{%
\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname #1\endcsname}
\newcommand{\@name@unresp@xdef}[1]{%
\expandafter\unrestored@protected@xdef\csname #1\endcsname}
\newcommand{\@namelet}[1]{%
\expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname}
\newcommand{\@namelongdef}[1]{%
\long\expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memjustarg}
% \begin{macro}{\memgobble}
% Utility macros \emph{that are not to be changed by any user!}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Added \cs{memjustarg} and \cs{memgobble}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memjustarg}[1]{#1}
\newcommand{\memgobble}[1]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memfakeusepackage}
% \cs{@memfakeusepackage}\marg{pack} fools \LaTeX{} into thinking
% that the \meta{pack.sty} package has been loaded.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{@memfakeusepackage} (from patch v1.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memfakeusepackage}[1]{%
\@namelet{ver@#1.sty}\@empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\EmulatedPackage}
% \begin{macro}{\EmulatedPackageWithOptions}
% There was some discussion on CTT\footnote{\textit{Re: breakurl + pdfetex
% for generating .dvi}, March 2005.} about how to prevent loading of
% a package. My response was to use \cs{@memfakusepackage}. Donald Arseneau
% came up with this comprehensive solution (there was a little discussion
% about naming with my final suggestion as here). \\
% \cs{EmulatedPackage}\marg{package}\oarg{date} \\
% \cs{EmulatedPackageWithOptions}\marg{option-list}\marg{package}\oarg{date} \\
%
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/04}{Added \cs{EmulatedPackage} and
% \cs{EmulatedPackageWithOptions}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\EmulatedPackage}{}
\renewcommand*{\EmulatedPackage}[1]{%
\@ifnextchar[{\@emulated@package{#1}}%
{\@emulated@package{#1}[]}%]
}
\providecommand*{\EmulatedPackageWithOptions}{}
\renewcommand*{\EmulatedPackageWithOptions}[2]{%
\PassOptionsToPackage{#1}{#2}%
\EmulatedPackage{#2}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@emulated@package}
% The workhorse for the user commands.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@emulated@package#1[#2]{%
\expandafter\xdef\csname ver@#1.\@pkgextension\endcsname{#2}%
\@ifundefined{opt@#1.\@pkgextension}%
{\@namedef{opt@#1.\@pkgextension}{}}{}%
\wlog{Package #1 \if,\csname opt@#1.\@pkgextension\endcsname,\else
(with options \csname opt@#1.\@pkgextension\endcsname)\fi
emulated by \@currname.}%
}
\@onlypreamble\EmulatedPackage
\@onlypreamble\EmulatedPackageWithOptions
\@onlypreamble\@emulated@package
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifpdf}
% This can be used to check whether or not a document is being processed
% by \LaTeX{} or pdf\LaTeX.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Made checking of \cs{pdfouput} more robust}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Prohibit loading the ifpdf package (mempatch v3.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifpdf
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
\else
\ifx\pdfoutput\relax
\else
\ifcase\pdfoutput
\else
\pdftrue
\fi
\fi
\fi
%%\@memfakeusepackage{ifpdf}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\phantomsection}
% A command needed if the \Lpack{hyperref} package is used, for putting
% before certain |\addcontentsline| commands.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\phantomsection}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nofiles}
% The kernel's \cs{nofiles}, which surprisingly may be called \emph{before}
% the class is loaded, lets \cs{makeindex} to \cs{relax}. This could
% cause problems\footnote{As reported by Heiko Oberdiek on 2005/07/09.}
% with my initial version of \cs{makeindex}.
% Here's the kernel \cs{nofiles} definition:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\nofiles{%
% \@fileswfalse% flag for suppressing \immediate \writes
% \typeout{No auxiliary output files.^^J}%
% \long\def\protected@write##1##2##3%
% {\write\m@ne{}\if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}%
% \let\makeindex\relax
% \let\makeglossary\relax}
% \end{verbatim}
% To get it to work for when \cs{makeindex}es optional argument is
% used I let \cs{makeindex} itself deal with \cs{nofiles} (and
% also \cs{makeglossary}).
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Modified the kernel's \cs{nofiles}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\nofiles}{%
\@fileswfalse% flag for suppressing \immediate \writes
\typeout{No auxiliary output files.^^J}%
\long\def\protected@write##1##2##3%
{\write\m@ne{}\if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Extending an existing macro}
%
%
% My usual technique for modifying the code of an existing
% macro was to use |\renewcommand|. However it slowly became apparent that
% many of such modifications merely consisted of adding some code at
% either the start or end of the existing definition. In June 2000 I
% posed a question
% on the |comp.text.tex| newsgroup about this, and
% Michael Downes\footnote{\texttt{epsmjd@ams.org}} and
% Heiko Oberdiek\footnote{\texttt{oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de}}
% were kind enough to respond.
% The responses arrived almost simultaneously, both
% supplying methods for adding code at the end of a macro defined to take
% one argument. Michael Downes' response included a remark about it probably
% being too much effort to formulate a general way of doing this.
% Heiko Oberdiek almost immediately replied with such a generalisation.
%
% The following code, which I have extracted from a package that I
% wrote but which I did not submit to CTAN, incorporates the work of both
% Michael and Heiko. I have added a bit. All errors are my responsibility.
% Michael went on the write the \Lpack{patchcmd} package which is
% a generalisation of the facilities below and so there was no need for
% my more restricted package.
% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/31}{Replaced \cs{appendiarg} with \cs{addtodef}
% and friends}
%
% \begin{macro}{\wo@dmacro}
% Heiko Oberdiek suggested\footnote{Via email on 2000/07/12.} that
% \meta{macro} should be tested for being the name of a macro, rather than
% using the normal \LaTeX{} test against it being undefined. He supplied
% the code for performing the macro name test.
%
% |\wo@dmacro| is a helper for handling the string `macro:'.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\wo@dmacro{%
\string m\string a\string c\string r\string o\string :%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\wo@difmacro@begingroup}
% This seems to take two arguments:
% \cs{wo@difmacro@begingroup}\marg{macro}\marg{code}, where
% \meta{macro} should be the name of a defined macro and \meta{code}
% is code to be executed if and only if \meta{macro} \emph{is} a
% defined macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\wo@difmacro@begingroup#1{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Start a group.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
% \end{macrocode}
% Test if |#1| is a defined macro; |\wo@dparsemacro| does most of the work.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\x{%
\noexpand\wo@dparsemacro\meaning#1\wo@dmacro\string -%
}%
\x\@nil{#1}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\wo@dparsemacro}
% This is called by |\wo@difmacro@begingroup|. If \meta{macro} is not
% a defined macro it prints a warning and closes the group begun by
% |\wo@difmacro@begingroup|. Otherwise it process the \meta{code} which
% \emph{must} close the group.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\edef\x{\endgroup
\def\noexpand\wo@dparsemacro##1\wo@dmacro##2\string -}%
\x#3\@nil#4{%
\ifx\\#3\\%
\endgroup
\@memwarn{\string `\string #4\string ' is not a macro}%
\expandafter\@gobble
\else
\expandafter\@firstofone
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addtodef}
% \begin{macro}{\addtodef*}
% \begin{macro}{\wo@daddtodef}
% The command |\addtodef{|\meta{macro}|}{|\meta{start-stuff}|}{|\meta{end-stuff}|}|
% adds stuff at the start and/or end of an argumentless macro.
% Initially the code for appending was a reimplementation of the
% kernel |\g@addto@macro| command (from \file{ltclass.dtx}).
% Later, at Michael Downes' suggestion, I combined
% appending and prepending stuff into a single command.
% Actually, there is no real need to have both
% |\addtodef| and |\addtodef*| as the body of the command
% being amended has no argument,
% but both versions are provided for consistency.
%
% The kernel |\@star@or@long| and |\l@ngrel@x| commands
% (in \file{ltdefns.dtx}) are used to handle
% the potential |*| after the command name.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\addtodef{\@star@or@long\wo@daddtodef}
% \end{macrocode}
% The |\@star@or@long| command dealt with a possible |*| and now
% |\wo@daddtodef| does the work. It picks up the three arguments
% that the user thinks belong to |\addtodef|, namely \meta{macro},
% \meta{start-stuff} and \meta{end-stuff}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\wo@daddtodef#1#2#3{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Check if \meta{macro} has been defined.
% \begin{macrocode}
\wo@difmacro@begingroup{#1}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% If \meta{macro} is defined then store the tokens corresponding to the
% body of \meta{macro} and the extra \meta{-stuff} in token registers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@temptokena{#2}%
\toks@\expandafter{#1#3}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do an expanded definition for |\x|, so that calling |\x|
% will |\def| a new version of \meta{macro}, whose body consists of the
% saved tokens (i.e., the orginal body plus the extra stuff).
% As Michael Downes noted, single letter control sequences do not take any of
% \TeX's hash table space.
% |\l@ngrel@x|
% has been previously set to either |\long| or |\relax| by |\@star@or@long|,
% and so may make the new definition of \meta{macro} to be |\long|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\x{\endgroup
\l@ngrel@x\def\noexpand#1{\the\@temptokena \the\toks@}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally, call |\x| to perform the new definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\x
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addtoiargdef}
% \begin{macro}{\addtoiargdef*}
% \begin{macro}{\wo@daddtoiargdef}
% This adds stuff at the start and/or end of a macro that takes one argument.
% It is a modification of Michael Downes' appending
% code\footnote{Posted to \ctt{} on 15~June 2000,\\
% URL: \url{http://www.dejanews.com/getdoc.xp?AN=635057844}.}
% which was:
% \begin{small}\begin{verbatim}
% \def\appendef#1#2{%
% \begingroup
% \toks@\expandafter{#1{##1}#2}%
% \edef\x{\endgroup \def\noexpand#1####1{\the\toks@}}%
% \x}
% \end{verbatim}
% \par\end{small}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\addtoiargdef{\@star@or@long\wo@daddtoiargdef}
\long\def\wo@daddtoiargdef#1#2#3{%
\wo@difmacro@begingroup{#1}{%
\@temptokena{#2}%
\toks@\expandafter{#1{##1}#3}%
\edef\x{\endgroup
\l@ngrel@x\def\noexpand#1####1{\the\@temptokena \the\toks@}}%
\x
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% For the record, Heiko Oberdiek produced the following
% version\footnote{Posted to \ctt{} on 16~June 2000,\\
% URL: \url{http://www.dejanews.com/getdoc.xp?AN=635095381}.}
% which avoids the use of a token register.
% \begin{small}\begin{verbatim}
% \newcommand{\appendiargdef}[2]{%
% \long\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter
% ##\expandafter1\expandafter{#1{##1}#2}}
% \end{verbatim}
% \par\end{small}
%
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Continuing the saga, Michael came up with a pretty general solution for
% modifying a macro with any number (up to 9) of arguments which he
% sent to me on 2000/07/13; this became
% the \Lpack{patchcmd} package which is on CTAN. I'm sure that Michael
% would have given me permission to include it here if he had not tragically
% passed away in 2003. I miss his encouragement, advice, and skills.
%
% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd}
% \cs{patchcmd}\marg{macro}\marg{start-stuff}\marg{end-stuff} inserts
% \meta{start-stuff} at the beginning of the definition of \meta{macro}
% and \meta{end-stuff} at the end of the definition. \meta{macro}
% can have 0--9 arguments and be defined by \cs{newcommand} (and associates)
% or with \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}. For macros that use \cs{futurelet}
% (e.g., those with starred forms or optional arguments) only prepending
% works --- any non-empty \meta{end-stuff} will mess things up. \cs{patchcmd}
% does not work with macros that have delimited arguments.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/05}{Added \cs{patchcmd}}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Michael Downes' patchcmd 2000/07/31 v1.03 %%%%%%%%
\newcommand{\patchcommand}[1]{%
\expandafter\patchcmd@a\meaning#1??->@\@nil#1%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd@a}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\patchcmd@a#1#2#3->#4#5\@nil#6{%
\ifx @#4\relax \patchcmdError#6#1%
\expandafter\@gobbletwo % discard the other two arguments
\else
\if l#2\toks@{\patchcmd@e{}#6}% l in this position means \long
\else \toks@{\patchcmd@e*#6}% not \long
\fi
\patchcmd@b #3@#4#5 ? ? ? \@nil#6%
\expandafter\the\expandafter\toks@
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd@b}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\patchcmd@b#1:#2@#3#4 #5#6 #7 #8\@nil#9{%
\if \ifx @#7@\expandafter
\ifx\csname #6\endcsname#9T\else F\fi\else F\fi T%
\toks@\expandafter{\expandafter\patchcommand\csname #6 \endcsname}%
\else
\ifx @#2@% No arguments
\toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@ 0}%
\else
\patchcmd@c 0#2{\string##}0%
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd@c}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\patchcmd@c#1#2#3{%
\if\string###2% % yes it's a # token
\ifodd 0#31 % and it's followed by a number
\if 0#3\patchcmd@d#1\fi % number=0? then we're done
\else \patchcmd@d D% # not a number: must be a delimited arg
\fi
\else \patchcmd@d D% not a # token: must be a delmited arg
\fi
\patchcmd@c#3}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd@d}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\patchcmd@d#1{%
\if D#1%
%%% \PackageError{patchcmd}{Cannot change a macro that has
%%% delimited arguments}\@ehd
\@memerror{%
Cannot change a macro that has delimited arguments}{\@ehd}
\else
\toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@ #1}%
\fi
\begingroup
\aftergroup\@gobble
\let\patchcmd@c\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd@e}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\patchcmd@e#1#2#3#4#5{%
\begingroup
\edef\@##1{%
\@temptokena\noexpand\expandafter{%
\noexpand#2%
\ifnum#3>0 {####1}\ifnum#3>1 {####2}\ifnum#3>2 {####3}%
\ifnum#3>3 {####4}\ifnum#3>4 {####5}\ifnum#3>5 {####6}%
\ifnum#3>6 {####7}\ifnum#3>7 {####8}\ifnum#3>8 {####9}%
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
##1%
}%
}
\@{#5}%
\edef\@##1{\endgroup
\noexpand\renewcommand#1\noexpand#2\ifcase#3 \else [#3]\fi
{##1\the\@temptokena}}%
\@{#4}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\patchcmdError}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\patchcmdError#1#2{%
\begingroup
\toks@{Not redefinable}%
\ifcat\relax\noexpand#1% Is it a control sequence?
\begingroup
\let#1=?\ifx ?\relax % Is it "\relax"?
\endgroup % accept current value of \toks@
\else \endgroup
\if\ifx\relax#1u\else #2\fi u%
\toks@{Not defined}%
\fi
\fi
\fi
\edef\@{\endgroup
%%% \noexpand\PackageError{patchcmd}{%
%%% \the\toks@: \string#1}\noexpand\@ehd}%
\noexpand\@memerror{%
\the\toks@: \string#1}\noexpand\@ehd}%
\@}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% end of patchcmd code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Prevent later loading of the original \Lpack{patchcmd} package.
% \begin{macrocode}
%%\@memfakeusepackage{patchcmd}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \section{Declaration of Options} \label{sec:opt}
%
%
% \subsection{Setting Paper Sizes}
%
% The variables |\paperheight| and |\paperwidth| should reflect the
% physical paper size after trimming.
%
% Option \Lopt{letterpaper} will be the default.
%
% \begin{macro}{\stockheight}
% \begin{macro}{\stockwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\trimtop}
% \begin{macro}{\trimedge}
% The lengths |\stockheight| and |\stockwidth| should be the height and
% width of the stock sheet before trimming. For example, this is the
% physical size
% of a single sheet that might be laser-printed. The lengths |\trimtop|
% and |\trimedge| are the amount that will be trimmed off the top and fore
% edge of the physical sheet.
% For desk printer output the size of the trimmed sheet is often the
% same as the physical sheet. In other words the |\paper...| and |\stock...|
% sizes are the same and the trims are zero. This class assumes that this
% is the normal case.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\stockheight}
\newlength{\stockwidth}
\newlength{\trimtop}
\newlength{\trimedge}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Declare the stock size options.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{a3paper}
{\setlength\stockheight {420mm}%
\setlength\stockwidth {297mm}}
\DeclareOption{a4paper}
{\setlength\stockheight {297mm}%
\setlength\stockwidth {210mm}}
\DeclareOption{a5paper}
{\setlength\stockheight {210mm}%
\setlength\stockwidth {148mm}}
\DeclareOption{a6paper}
{\setlength\stockheight {148mm}%
\setlength\stockwidth {105mm}}
\DeclareOption{b3paper}
{\setlength\stockheight {500mm}%
\setlength\stockwidth {353mm}}
\DeclareOption{b4paper}
{\setlength\stockheight {353mm}%
\setlength\stockwidth {250mm}}
\DeclareOption{b5paper}
{\setlength\stockheight {250mm}%
\setlength\stockwidth {176mm}}
\DeclareOption{b6paper}
{\setlength\stockheight {176mm}%
\setlength\stockwidth {125mm}}
\DeclareOption{letterpaper}
{\setlength\stockheight {11in}%
\setlength\stockwidth {8.5in}}
\DeclareOption{legalpaper}
{\setlength\stockheight {14in}%
\setlength\stockwidth {8.5in}}
\DeclareOption{executivepaper}
{\setlength\stockheight {10.5in}%
\setlength\stockwidth {7.25in}}
\DeclareOption{ebook}
{\setlength\stockheight {9in}%
\setlength\stockwidth {6in}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The \Lopt{landscape} option switches the values of the height and width,
% assuming that the dimensions were originally given for portrait
% orientation.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{landscape}
{\setlength\@tempdima {\stockheight}
\setlength\stockheight{\stockwidth}
\setlength\stockwidth {\@tempdima}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Choosing the type size}
%
% The type size options are handled by defining |\@ptsize| to contain
% the last digit of the size in question and branching on |\ifcase|
% statements. This is done for historical reasons to stay compatible
% with other packages that use the |\@ptsize| variable to select
% special actions. It makes the declarations of size options less
% than 10pt difficult. In this class \texttt{9} is used for the
% \Lopt{9pt} option, assuming that the class will never define a
% \Lopt{19pt} option.
%
% Option \Lopt{10pt} will be the default.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added 17pt option}
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{0}
\DeclareOption{9pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{9}}
\DeclareOption{10pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{0}}
\DeclareOption{11pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{1}}
\DeclareOption{12pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{2}}
\DeclareOption{14pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{4}}
\DeclareOption{17pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{7}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Two-side or one-side printing}
%
% For two-sided printing we use the switch |\if@twoside|. In
% addition we have to set the |\if@mparswitch| to get any margin
% paragraphs into the outside margin. The default is \Lopt{twoside}.
% \begin{macro}{\if@twoside}
% \begin{macro}{\if@mparswitch}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue \@mparswitchtrue}
\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse \@mparswitchfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Two column printing}
%
% Two-column and one-column printing is again realized via a switch
% which is defined in the kernel. The default is single column printing.
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\@twocolumnfalse}
\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\@twocolumntrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{draft} option}
%
% If the user requests \Lopt{draft} we show any overfull boxes,
% marginal notes are allowed, and any copyright notices are not
% printed. For symmetry, we also define a \Lopt{final} option
% which is the default.
%
% The user can use the |\ifdraftdoc| flag to add additional effects: \\
% |\ifdraftdoc \fi|
% \begin{macro}{\ifdraftdoc}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifdraftdoc\draftdocfalse
\setlength{\overfullrule}{\z@}
\DeclareOption{final}{\setlength{\overfullrule}{\z@}
\draftdocfalse
\msdocfalse}
\DeclareOption{draft}{\setlength\overfullrule{5pt}%
\draftdoctrue
\msdocfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{ms} option}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifmsdoc}
% The \Lopt{ms} option makes the document look as though it was produced
% on a typewriter. We use a flag for remembering this. The user may also
% use the flag for specifying \Lopt{ms} effects.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifmsdoc
\msdocfalse
\DeclareOption{ms}{%
\msdoctrue
\draftdocfalse
\setlength\overfullrule{\z@}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{showtrims} option}
%
% The \Lopt{showtrims} option will display crosses at the corners
% of the logical pages showing where the stock should be trimmed.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifshowtrims}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifshowtrims
\showtrimsfalse
\DeclareOption{showtrims}{\showtrimstrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{article} option}
%
% The \Lopt{article} option typesets as a simulation of the
% \Lpack{article} class.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added article option}
% \begin{macro}{\ifartopt}
% |\ifartopt| is a flag (TRUE) if the \Lopt{article} option is called.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifartopt
\artoptfalse
\DeclareOption{article}{\artopttrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{subfigure} option}
%
% The \Lopt{subfigure} option has been made a no-op since version 1.1.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added subfigure option}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Effectively removed subfigure option}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{subfigure}{%
\ClassWarningNoLine{memoir}{The subfigure option is not required}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{The openright, openleft and openany options}
%
% The \Lopt{openright} option specifies that Chapters must begin on
% recto pages. The \Lopt{openleft} option specifies that Chapters
% must begin on verso pages and the \Lopt{openany} option lets Chapters
% start on any page.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/24}{Added the openleft option}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{openright}{\@openrighttrue}
\DeclareOption{openany}{\@openrightfalse}
\DeclareOption{openleft}{\@openlefttrue}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\openright}
% \begin{macro}{\openany}
% \begin{macro}{\openleft}
% Commands that can be used to change the option in the middle of the
% document\footnote{Openleft provided to meet a request by
% Vladimir G.~Ivanovic (\texttt{vladimir@acm.org}) in September 2001.}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\openright}{\@openrighttrue\@openleftfalse%
\gdef\clearforchapter{\cleartorecto}}
\newcommand{\openany}{\@openrightfalse\@openleftfalse%
\gdef\clearforchapter{\clearpage}}
\newcommand{\openleft}{\@openlefttrue
\gdef\clearforchapter{\cleartoverso}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Equation numbering on the left}
%
% The \Lopt{leqno} option prints equation numbers on the left. This
% is implemented via an external class option file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{leqno}{\input{leqno.clo}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Flush left math displays}
%
% The \Lopt{fleqn} option redefines the displayed math environments
% so that they are left adjusted with an indent of |\mathindent|
% from the current left margin. This
% is implemented via an external class option file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{fleqn}{\input{fleqn.clo}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Open bibliography}
%
% The \Lopt{openbib} option redefines the |thebibliography| so that each
% block starts on a new line, and succeeding lines in a block are
% indented by |\bibindent|.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/11/28}{Replaced \cs{AtEndOfPackage} with \cs{AtEndOfClass}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{openbib}{%
\AtEndOfClass{%
\renewcommand\@openbib@code{%
\advance\leftmargin\bibindent
\itemindent -\bibindent
\listparindent \itemindent
\parsep \z@
}%
\renewcommand\newblock{\par}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Old font commands}
%
% The \Lopt{oldfontcommands} option enables commands like |\bf| and friends.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added the oldfontcommands option}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{oldfontcommands}{%
\@memoldfonttrue}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \section{Executing Options} \label{sec:xopt}
%
% Here we execute the default options to initialize certain
% variables.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ExecuteOptions{final,letterpaper,10pt,onecolumn,openright,twoside}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The |\ProcessOptions| command causes the execution of the code
% for every option \Lopt{foo}
% which is declared and for which the user typed
% the \Lopt{foo} option in his
% |\documentclass| command. For every option \Lopt{bar} he typed,
% which is not declared, the option is assumed to be a global option.
% All options will be passed as document options to any
% |\usepackage| command in the document preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ProcessOptions
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleartorecto}
% A repeat of |\cleardoublepage|; clears to a recto (odd-numbered) page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\cleartorecto{\clearpage\if@twoside \ifodd\c@page\else
\hbox{}\thispagestyle{cleared}%
\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleartoverso}
% Clears to a verso (even-numbered) page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\cleartoverso{\clearpage\if@twoside
\ifodd\c@page\hbox{}\thispagestyle{cleared}%
\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Set |\clearforchapter| according to the options.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@openleft
\openleft
\else
\if@openright
\openright
\else
\openany
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Now that all the options have been executed we can load the
% chosen class option file that contains all size dependent code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\@ptsize = 9\relax
\input{mem\@ptsize.clo}
\else
\input{mem1\@ptsize.clo}
\fi
%
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \section{Fonts and spaces} \label{sec:docl}
% \label{sec:maincode}
%
% In this section we deal with most of the aspects that are related
% to font sizes, and spacing that is related to the size of the body font.
%
% \subsection{Fonts}
%
% \LaTeX\ offers the user commands to change the size of the font,
% relative to the `main' size. Each relative size changing command
% |\size| executes the command
% |\@setfontsize||\size|\meta{font-size}\meta{baselineskip} where:
%
% \begin{description}
% \item[\meta{font-size}] The absolute size of the font to use from
% now on.
%
% \item[\meta{baselineskip}] The normal value of |\baselineskip|
% for the size of the font selected. (The actual value will be
% |\baselinestretch| * \meta{baselineskip}.)
% \end{description}
%
% A number of commands, defined in the \LaTeX\ kernel, shorten the
% following definitions and are used throughout. They are listed in
% Table~\ref{tab:sh}.
%
% \begin{table}
% \centering
% \caption{Shorthand font point size commands}\label{tab:sh}
% \begin{tabular}{ll@{\qquad}ll@{\qquad}ll}
% \verb=\@vpt= & 5 & \verb=\@vipt= & 6 & \verb=\@viipt= & 7 \\
% \verb=\@viiipt= & 8 & \verb=\@ixpt= & 9 & \verb=\@xpt= & 10 \\
% \verb=\@xipt= & 10.95 & \verb=\@xiipt= & 12 & \verb=\@xivpt= & 14.4\\
% \verb=\@xviipt= & 17.28 & \verb=\@xxpt= & 20.74 & \verb=\@xxvpt= & 24.88\\
% \end{tabular}
% \end{table}
%
% \begin{macro}{\normalsize}
% \begin{macro}{\@normalsize}
%
% The user level command for the main size is |\normalsize|.
% Internally \LaTeX\ uses |\@normalsize| when it refers to the
% main size. |\@normalsize| will be defined to work like
% |\normalsize| if the latter is redefined from its default
% definition (that just issues an error message). Otherwise
% |\@normalsize| simply selects a 9pt/11pt size.
%
% The |\normalsize| macro also sets new values for\\
% |\abovedisplayskip|, |\abovedisplayshortskip| and
% |\belowdisplayshortskip|.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v0.11 (mem14.clo)}{2001/10/30}{Changed baseline skip from 17.28pt to 17.5pt}
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\normalsize}{%
%<*9pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@ixpt\@xpt
\abovedisplayskip 9\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4.5\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus 3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 5.5\p@ \@plus 2.5\p@ \@minus 3\p@
%
%<*10pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt\@xiipt
\abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
%
%<*11pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xipt{13.6}%
\abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
%
%<*12pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xiipt{14.5}%
\abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
%
%<*14pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xivpt{17.5}%
\abovedisplayskip 14\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus8\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 7\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
%
%<*17pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xviipt{22}%
\abovedisplayskip 15\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus8\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus4\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 8\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus3\p@
%
% \end{macrocode}
% The |\belowdisplayskip| is always equal to the
% |\abovedisplayskip|. The parameters of the first level list are
% always given by |\@listI|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\let\@listi\@listI}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% We initially choose the normalsize font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\normalsize
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\small}
% This code is similar to that for |\normalsize|.
% (Robert Schlicht\footnote{\texttt{w.m.l@gmx.net}, via email on 2004/03/11.}
% noted that in some cases \% signs were missing after \verb?\@setfontsize?).
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/12}{Added missing percent signs to some uses of
% \cs{@setfontsize}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\small}{%
%<*9pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@viiipt{9.5}%
\abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus 2\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 2\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
\parsep 1\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*10pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@ixpt{11}%
\abovedisplayskip 8.5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus2\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
\parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*11pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@xpt\@xiipt
\abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
\parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*12pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@xipt{13.6}%
\abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 9\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@
\parsep 4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*14pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@xiipt{14.5}%
\abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 11\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus6\p@
\parsep 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*17pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@xivpt{17}%
\abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 7\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 11\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus6\p@
\parsep 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footnotesize}
% This code is similar to that for |\normalsize|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\footnotesize}{%
%<*9pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@viipt{8}%
\abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus 2\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 2\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
\parsep 1\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*10pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@viiipt{9.5}%
\abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus2\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*11pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@ixpt{11}%
\abovedisplayskip 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
\parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*12pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xpt\@xiipt
\abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
\parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*14pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xipt{13.6}%
\abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
\parsep 4\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*17pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xiipt{14}%
\abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
\parsep 4\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\miniscule}
% \begin{macro}{\scriptsize}
% \begin{macro}{\tiny}
% \begin{macro}{\large}
% \begin{macro}{\Large}
% \begin{macro}{\LARGE}
% \begin{macro}{\huge}
% \begin{macro}{\Huge}
% \begin{macro}{\HUGE}
% These are all much simpler than the previous macros, they just
% select a new fontsize, but leave the parameters for displays and
% lists alone. The class provides two additional sizes, \cs{miniscule}
% and \cs{HUGE}, with respect to the usual set.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{miniscule} and \cs{HUGE} font sizes}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Twiddled some font sizes to get regular steps}
% \changes{v1.2a}{2002/08/27}{Fixed 12pt scriptsize bug}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt>
\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@vpt{6}}
\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@vpt{6}}
\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@vipt{7}}
\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xpt{12}}
\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xipt{13.6}}
\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xiipt{14.5}}
\newcommand{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xivpt{18}}
\newcommand{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@xxpt{25}}
%
%<*10pt>
\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@vpt{6}}
\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt{7}}
\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viipt{8}}
\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xipt{13.6}}
\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xiipt{14.5}}
\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xivpt{18}}
\newcommand{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@xxvpt{30}}
%
%<*11pt>
\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@vipt{7}}
\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@viipt{8}}
\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5}}
\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14.5}}
\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18}}
\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30}}
\let\HUGE=\Huge
%
%<*12pt>
\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@viipt{8}}
\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@viiipt{9.5}}
\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@ixpt\@xpt}
\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xivpt{18}}
\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxvpt{30}}
\let\Huge=\huge
\let\HUGE=\huge
%
%<*14pt>
\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@viiipt{9.5}}
\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@ixpt{10}}
\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@xpt{12}}
\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxvpt{30}}
\let\huge=\LARGE
\let\Huge=\LARGE
\let\HUGE=\LARGE
%
%<*17pt>
\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@ixpt{10}}
\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@xpt{12}}
\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@xipt{13.6}}
\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xxvpt{30}}
\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxvpt{30}}
\let\LARGE=\Large
\let\huge=\Large
\let\Huge=\Large
\let\HUGE=\Large
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%
%<*class>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captionsize}
% This internal command holds the font size for captions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\captionsize}{\normalsize}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Paragraphing}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lineskip}
% \begin{macro}{\normallineskip}
% These parameters control \TeX's behaviour when two lines tend to
% come too close together.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\lineskip{1\p@}
\setlength\normallineskip{1\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\baselinestretch}
% This is used as a multiplier for |\baselineskip|. The default is
% to \emph{not} stretch the baselines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
% \begin{macro}{\onelineskip}
%
% |\parskip| is additional vertical space between paragraphs; default
% is zero.
%
%
% |\onelineskip| is the default space between baselines.
% \changes{v0.11 (mem14.clo)}{2001/10/30}{Changed \cs{onelineskip} from 17.28pt to 17.5pt}
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\parskip{0\p@ \@plus \p@}
%
%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
%<9pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{\@xpt\p@}
%<10pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{\@xiipt\p@}
%<11pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{13.6\p@}
%<12pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{14.5\p@}
%<14pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{17.5\p@}
%<17pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{22\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\parindent}
% |\parskip| gives extra vertical space between paragraphs and
% |\parindent| is the width of the paragraph indentation.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
\setlength\parindent{1em}
\else
%<9pt> \setlength\parindent{12\p@}
%<10pt> \setlength\parindent{15\p@}
%<11pt> \setlength\parindent{17\p@}
%<12pt> \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
%<14pt> \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
%<17pt> \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\smallskipamount}
% \begin{macro}{\medskipamount}
% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount}
% The values for these three parameters are set in the LaTeX kernel.
% Historically they have been size invariant.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\smallskipamount{3\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
\setlength\medskipamount{6\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\bigskipamount{12\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@lowpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\@medpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\@highpenalty}%
% The commands |\nopagebreak| and |\nolinebreak| put in penalties
% to discourage these breaks at the point they are put in.
% They use |\@lowpenalty|, |\@medpenalty| or |\@highpenalty|,
% dependent on their argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
\@lowpenalty 51
\@medpenalty 151
\@highpenalty 301
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\clubpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\widowpenalty}
% These penalties are used to discourage club and widow lines.
% The default values are 150 each, but we want stronger discouragement.
% \begin{macrocode}
\clubpenalty 1000
\widowpenalty 1000
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\displaywidowpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\predisplaypenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\postdisplaypenalty}
% Discourage, but do not prevent, widows in front of a math display
% and forbid breaking directly in front of a display. Allow break
% after a display without a penalty. The default values are
% used, therefore we only show them here.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \displaywidowpenalty 50
% \predisplaypenalty 10000
% \postdisplaypenalty 0
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\interlinepenalty}
% Allow the breaking of a page in the middle of a paragraph.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \interlinepenalty 0
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\brokenpenalty}
% We allow the breaking of a page after a hyphenated line.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \brokenpenalty 100
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \subsection{Vertical spacing}
%
% \begin{macro}{\headheight}
% \begin{macro}{\headsep}
% \begin{macro}{\topskip}
% \begin{macro}{\footskip}
% The |\headheight| is the height of the box that will contain the
% running head. In this class it is point size dependent (normally it
% is a constant 12pt).
%
% The |\headsep| is the distance between the bottom
% of the running head and the top of the text.
%
% The |\topskip| is the
% |\baselineskip| for the first line on a page;
% \LaTeX's output routine will not work properly if it has the
% value 0pt, so do not do that!
%
% The distance from the baseline of the box which contains the
% running footer to the baseline of last line of text is controlled
% by the |\footskip|.
% \changes{v0.11 (mem14.clo)}{2001/10/30}{Changed \cs{headheight} from 16pt to 17.5pt}
% \changes{v0.11 (mem11.clo)}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{headheight} from 13pt to 13.6pt}
% \begin{macrocode}
%
%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
%<*9pt>
\setlength\headheight{11\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.225in}
\setlength\topskip{9\p@}
\setlength\footskip{.33in}
%
%<*10pt>
\setlength\headheight{12\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.25in}
\setlength\topskip{10\p@}
\setlength\footskip{.35in}
%
%<*11pt>
\setlength\headheight{13.6\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.275in}
\setlength\topskip{11\p@}
\setlength\footskip{.38in}
%
%<*12pt>
\setlength\headheight{14\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.275in}
\setlength\topskip{12\p@}
\setlength\footskip{30\p@}
%
%<*14pt>
\setlength\headheight{17.5\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.30in}
\setlength\topskip{14.4\p@}
\setlength\footskip{.4in}
%
%<*17pt>
\setlength\headheight{22\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.30in}
\setlength\topskip{14.4\p@}
\setlength\footskip{.4in}
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\maxdepth}
% \begin{macro}{\@maxdepth}
% The \TeX\ primitive register |\maxdepth| has a function that is
% similar to that of |\topskip|. The register |\@maxdepth| should
% always contain a copy of |\maxdepth|. In both plain \TeX\ and
% \LaTeX~2.09 |\maxdepth| had a fixed value of \texttt{4pt}; in
% native \LaTeX 2e mode we let the value depend on the typesize. We
% set it so that |\maxdepth| $+$ |\topskip| $=$ typesize $\times
% 1.5$. As it happens, in these classes |\topskip| is equal to the
% typesize, therefor we set |\maxdepth| to half the value of
% |\topskip|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\maxdepth{.5\topskip}
\setlength\@maxdepth\maxdepth
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsection{Footnotes}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footnotesep}
% |\footnotesep| is the height of the strut placed at the beginning
% of every footnote. It equals the height of a normal |\footnotesize|
% strut, so no extra space appears between footnotes
% \begin{macrocode}
%<9pt>\setlength\footnotesep{6.0\p@} %% ????????
%<10pt>\setlength\footnotesep{6.65\p@}
%<11pt>\setlength\footnotesep{7.7\p@}
%<12pt>\setlength\footnotesep{8.4\p@}
%<14pt>\setlength\footnotesep{10.0\p@} %% ????????
%<17pt>\setlength\footnotesep{12\p@} %% ????????
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footins}
% |\skip\footins| is the space between the last line of the main
% text and the top of the first footnote.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<9pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{8\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%<10pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{9\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%<11pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{10\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%<12pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{10.8\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%<14pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{13\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%<17pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{14\p@ \@plus 5\p@ \@minus 3\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Floats}
%
% \paragraph{Floats on a text page}
%
% \begin{macro}{\floatsep}
% \begin{macro}{\textfloatsep}
% \begin{macro}{\intextsep}
% When a floating object is placed on a page with text, these
% parameters control the separation between the float and the other
% objects on the page. These parameters are used for both
% one-column mode and single-column floats in two-column mode.
%
% |\floatsep| is the space between adjacent floats that are moved
% to the top or bottom of the text page.
%
% |\textfloatsep| is the space between the main text and floats
% at the top or bottom of the page.
%
% |\intextsep| is the space between in-text floats and the text.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt>
\setlength\floatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\intextsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%
%<*10pt>
\setlength\floatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\intextsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%
%<*11pt>
\setlength\floatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\intextsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%
%<*12pt>
\setlength\floatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\intextsep {14\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
%<*14pt>
\setlength\floatsep {14\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\intextsep {14\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
%<*17pt>
\setlength\floatsep {15\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{25\p@ \@plus 5\p@ \@minus 5\p@}
\setlength\intextsep {16\p@ \@plus 5\p@ \@minus 5\p@}
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dblfloatsep}
% \begin{macro}{\dbltextfloatsep}
% When floating objects that span the whole |\textwidth| are placed
% on a text page and \LaTeX{} is in twocolumn mode the separation
% between the float and the text is controlled by |\dblfloatsep|
% and |\dbltextfloatsep|.
%
% |\dblfloatsep| is the space between adjacent floats that are moved
% to the top or bottom of the text page.
%
% |\dbltextfloatsep| is the space between the main text and floats
% at the top or bottom of the page.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
%<*10pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
%<*11pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
%<*12pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep {14\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
%<*14pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep {14\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
%<*17pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep {15\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{25\p@ \@plus 5\p@ \@minus 5\p@}
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \paragraph{Floats on their own page or column}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@fptop}
% \begin{macro}{\@fpsep}
% \begin{macro}{\@fpbot}
% When floating objects are placed on separate pages the layout of
% such pages is controlled by these parameters. At the top of the
% page |\@fptop| amount of stretchable whitespace is inserted, at
% the bottom of the page we get an |\@fpbot| amount of stretchable
% whitespace. Between adjacent floats the |\@fpsep| is inserted.
%
% These parameters are used for the placement of floating objects
% in one column mode, or in single column floats in two column
% mode.
%
% Note that at least one of the two parameters |\@fptop| and
% |\@fpbot| should contain a |plus ...fil| to allow filling the
% remaining empty space.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{9\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*10pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*11pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*12pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{10\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*14pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{10\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*17pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{12\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@dblfptop}
% \begin{macro}{\@dblfpsep}
% \begin{macro}{\@dblfpbot}
% Double column floats in two column mode are handled with similar
% parameters.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{7\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*10pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*11pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*12pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{10\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*14pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{12\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*17pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{12\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The measure}
%
% The width of a line of text (and therefore the text block) is termed
% the \emph{measure}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\lxvchars}
% The length |\lxvchars| is the approximate length of a normal
% text line containing 65 characters (a typesetters rule of thumb is
% that there should be about 60--70 characters per line).
% \begin{macrocode}
%<9pt>\setlength\lxvchars{276\p@} %
%<10pt>\setlength\lxvchars{300\p@} % standard 345pt
%<11pt>\setlength\lxvchars{324\p@} % standard 360pt
%<12pt>\setlength\lxvchars{336\p@} % standard 390pt
%<14pt>\setlength\lxvchars{408\p@} %
%<17pt>\setlength\lxvchars{444\p@} %
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\xlvchars}
% The length |\xlvchars| is the approximate length of a normal
% double column text line containing 45 characters
% (a typesetters rule of thumb is
% that there should be about 40--50 characters per column line).
% \begin{macrocode}
%<9pt>\setlength\xlvchars{192\p@} %
%<10pt>\setlength\xlvchars{204\p@} %
%<11pt>\setlength\xlvchars{216\p@} %
%<12pt>\setlength\xlvchars{240\p@} %
%<14pt>\setlength\xlvchars{288\p@} %
%<17pt>\setlength\xlvchars{312\p@} %
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\marginparsep}
% \begin{macro}{\marginparpush}
% |\marginparsep| is the horizontal space between the text block and
% marginal notes, while |\marginparpush| is the minimum vertical
% separation between the notes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
\setlength\marginparsep{10\p@}
\else
\setlength\marginparsep{7\p@}
\fi
%<9pt|10pt|11pt>\setlength{\marginparpush}{5\p@}
%<12pt|14pt>\setlength{\marginparpush}{7\p@}
%<17pt>\setlength{\marginparpush}{10\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%
%<*class>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{Page Layout}
%
%
% \subsection{The typeblock and margins}
%
% All margin dimensions are measured from a point one inch from the
% top and lefthand side of the page.
%
% \begin{macro}{\setlxvchars}
% \begin{macro}{\setxlvchars}
% These were suggested and supplied by Morten H{\o}gholm (18 May 2003).
%
% |\setlxvchars|\oarg{fontspec} sets |\lxvchars| to the length of a line
% containing 65 characters in the \meta{fontspec}.
%
% Similarly
% |\setxlvchars|\oarg{fontspec} sets |\xlvchars| for 45 characters.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{setlxvchars} and \cs{setxlvchars}
% (from patch v1.6)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setlxvchars}[1][\normalfont]{\begingroup
#1
\settowidth{\lxvchars}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}%
\setlength{\lxvchars}{2.042\lxvchars}%
\addtolength{\lxvchars}{33.41pt}%
\global\lxvchars=\lxvchars
\endgroup}
\newcommand{\setxlvchars}[1][\normalfont]{\begingroup
#1
\settowidth{\xlvchars}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}%
\setlength{\xlvchars}{1.415\xlvchars}%
\addtolength{\xlvchars}{23.03pt}%
\global\xlvchars=\xlvchars
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setrectanglesize}
% The macro |\setrectanglesize{|\meta{H}|}{|\meta{W}|}{|\meta{r}|}|
% calculates the height and width of a rectangle given any two out of
% the three arguments. An unvalued argument is denoted by |*|.
%
% Table~\ref{tab:setrect} shows the argument combinations and the result
% for each combination.
% \begin{table}
% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
% \centering
% \caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setrectanglesize}}\label{tab:setrect}
% \begin{tabular}{ccc|l} \hline
% H & W & r & Result \\ \hline
% * & W & r & $H = rW$ \\{}
% * & W & * & $H = W$ \\{}
% * & * & r & ambiguous \\{}
% * & * & * & ambiguous \\{}
% H & W & r & $H, W$ \\
% H & W & * & $H, W$ \\
% H & * & r & $W = rH$ \\
% H & * & * & $W = H$ \\
% \hline
% \end{tabular}
% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
% \end{table}
%
% The
% calculated height and width are stored in |\@tempdima| and |\@tempdimb|
% respectively. Both lengths are set to zero if there is an error.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setrectanglesize}[3]{%
\nametest{#1}{*}%
\ifsamename % H = *
\nametest{#2}{*}%
\ifsamename % W = *
\@memerror{%
The combination of argument values is ambiguous.\MessageBreak
The lengths will be set to zero}{\@ehd}
\@tempdima = \z@
\@tempdimb = \z@
\else % W
\nametest{#3}{*}%
\ifsamename % r = *
\@tempdimb = #2\relax
\@tempdima = \@tempdimb
\else % r
\@tempdimb = #2\relax
\@tempdima = #3\@tempdimb
\fi
\fi
\else % H
\nametest{#2}{*}%
\ifsamename % W = *
\nametest{#3}{*}%
\ifsamename % r = *
\@tempdima = #1\relax
\@tempdimb = \@tempdima
\else % r
\@tempdima = #1\relax
\@tempdimb = #3\@tempdima
\fi
\else % W
\@tempdima = #1\relax
\@tempdimb = #2\relax
\fi
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setfillsize}
% Consider a set of 4 lengths, $T$, $L$, $C$, and $R$, such that
% $T = L + C + R$, where $T$ is a fixed size and normally $C$ is also fixed.
% Also $L$ and $R$ may be specified independently of each other or as a
% ratio (i.e., $L = rR$ or $R = rL$).
% The macro
% |\setfillsize{|\meta{T}|}{|\meta{C}|}{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}|
% maintains these constraints among the variables, where an unvalued
% argument is denoted by |*|.
%
% Table~\ref{tab:setfill} shows the argument combinations and the result
% for each combination.
% \begin{table}
% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
% \centering
% \caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setfillsize}}\label{tab:setfill}
% \begin{tabular}{cccc|ll} \hline
% C & L & R & r & Result & \\ \hline
% * & * & R & r & $L = rR$, & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
% * & * & R & * & $L = R$, & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
% * & * & * & r & ambigous & \\{}
% * & * & * & * & ambiguous & \\{}
% * & L & R & r & $L$, $R$, & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
% * & L & R & * & $L$, $R$, & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
% * & L & * & r & $R = rL$, & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
% * & L & * & * & $R = L$, & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
% C & * & R & r & $L = T - C - R$ & $C$ \\
% C & * & R & * & $L = T - C - R$, & $C$ \\
% C & * & * & r & $L + R = T - C$, $R = rL$, & $C$ \\
% C & * & * & * & $L + R = T - C$, $R = L$, & $C$ \\
% C & L & R & r & ambiguous & $C$ \\
% C & L & R & * & ambiguous & $C$ \\
% C & L & * & r & $R = T - C - L$, & $C$ \\
% C & L & * & * & $R = T - C - L$, & $C$ \\
% \hline
% \end{tabular}
% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
% \end{table}
%
%
% The
% calculated values of |C|, |L| and |R| are stored |\@tempdimc|,
% |\@tempdima| and |\@tempdimb| respectively. If there is an error
% the lengths are set to zero.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setfillsize}[5]{%
\nametest{#2}{*}%
\ifsamename % C = *
\nametest{#3}{*}%
\ifsamename % L = *
\nametest{#4}{*}%
\ifsamename % R = *
\@memerror{%
The combination of argument values is ambiguous.\MessageBreak
The lengths will be set to zero}{\@ehd}
\@tempdima = \z@
\@tempdimb = \z@
\@tempdimc = \z@
\else % R
\nametest{#5}{*}%
\ifsamename % r = *
\@tempdimb = #4\relax
\@tempdima = \@tempdimb
\@tempdimc = #1\relax
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
\else % r
\@tempdimb = #4\relax
\@tempdima = #5\@tempdimb
\@tempdimc = #1\relax
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
\fi
\fi
\else % L
\nametest{#4}{*}%
\ifsamename % R = *
\nametest{#5}{*}%
\ifsamename % r = *
\@tempdima = #3\relax
\@tempdimb = \@tempdima
\@tempdimc = #1\relax
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
\else % r
\@tempdima = #3\relax
\@tempdimb = #5\@tempdima
\@tempdimc = #1\relax
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
\fi
\else % R
\@tempdima = #3\relax
\@tempdimb = #4\relax
\@tempdimc = #1\relax
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
\fi
\fi
\else % C is valued
\nametest{#3}{*}%
\ifsamename % L = *
\nametest{#4}{*}%
\ifsamename % R = *
\nametest{#5}{*}%
\ifsamename % r = *
\@tempdimc = #2\relax
\@tempdima = #1\relax
\advance\@tempdima -\@tempdimc
\@tempdima = 0.5\@tempdima
\@tempdimb = \@tempdima
\else % r (CODE PERHAPS FIXED)
\@tempdimc = #2\relax % C
\@tempdimb = #1\relax % T
\advance\@tempdimb -\@tempdimc % T - C
\@tempdima = 1000sp
\@tempdima = #5\@tempdima % 1000r sp
\advance\@tempdima by 1000sp % 1000(1+r)sp
\@tempcnta = \@tempdima % 1000(1+r)
\@tempdima = \@tempdimb % T - C
\divide\@tempdima by \@tempcnta % (T-C)/1000(1+r) pts
\@tempdima = 1000\@tempdima % (T-C)/(1+r) pts = L
\advance\@tempdimb by -\@tempdima % = R
\fi
\else % R
\@tempdimc = #2\relax
\@tempdimb = #4\relax
\@tempdima = #1\relax
\advance\@tempdima -\@tempdimc
\advance\@tempdima -\@tempdimb
\fi
\else % L
\nametest{#4}{*}%
\ifsamename % R = *
\@tempdimc = #2\relax
\@tempdima = #3\relax
\@tempdimb = #1\relax
\advance\@tempdimb -\@tempdimc
\advance\@tempdimb -\@tempdima
\else % R
\@memerror{%
The combination of argument values is ambiguous.\MessageBreak
The lengths will be set to zero}{\@ehd}%
\@tempdima = \z@
\@tempdimb = \z@
\@tempdimc = #2\relax
\fi
\fi
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setstocksize}
% \begin{macro}{\settrims}
% \begin{macro}{\settrimmedsize}
% |\setstocksize{|\meta{height}|}{|\meta{width}|}| sets the height
% and width of the stock material and
% |\settrims{|\meta{top}|}{|\meta{edge}|}| sets the trim lengths
% for the top and side (fore edge) of the stock.
% The macro |\settrimmedsize{|\meta{height}|}{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{ratio}|}|
% sets the size for the trimmed page, based on |\setrectanglesize|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setstocksize}[2]{%
\setlength{\stockheight}{#1}%
\setlength{\stockwidth}{#2}}
\newcommand{\settrims}[2]{%
\setlength{\trimtop}{#1}%
\setlength{\trimedge}{#2}}
\newcommand{\settrimmedsize}[3]{%
\setrectanglesize{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\setlength{\paperheight}{\@tempdima}%
\setlength{\paperwidth}{\@tempdimb}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\settypeblocksize}
% |\settypeblocksize{|\meta{height}|}{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{ratio}|}|
% calulates the |\textheight| and |\textwidth| from two out of the
% three arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\settypeblocksize}[3]{%
\setrectanglesize{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\setlength{\textheight}{\@tempdima}%
\setlength{\textwidth}{\@tempdimb}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\spinemargin}
% \begin{macro}{\foremargin}
% \begin{macro}{\setlrmargins}
% |\setlrmargins{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}| sets the Left (spine)
% and Right (fore edge) margins with constant typeblock.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\spinemargin}
\newlength{\foremargin}
\newcommand{\setlrmargins}[3]{%
\setfillsize{\paperwidth}{\textwidth}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\setlength{\textwidth}{\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\spinemargin}{\@tempdima}%
\setlength{\foremargin}{\@tempdimb}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setlrmarginsandblock}
% |\setlrmarginsandblock{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}| sets the Left (spine)
% and Right (fore edge) margins with variable typeblock.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setlrmarginsandblock}[3]{%
\setfillsize{\paperwidth}{*}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\setlength{\textwidth}{\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\spinemargin}{\@tempdima}%
\setlength{\foremargin}{\@tempdimb}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\uppermargin}
% \begin{macro}{\lowermargin}
% \begin{macro}{\setulmargins}
% |\setulmargins{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}| sets the Left (upper)
% and Right (lower) margins with constant typeblock.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\uppermargin}
\newlength{\lowermargin}
\newcommand{\setulmargins}[3]{%
\setfillsize{\paperheight}{\textheight}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\setlength{\textheight}{\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\uppermargin}{\@tempdima}%
\setlength{\lowermargin}{\@tempdimb}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setulmarginsandblock}
% |\setulmarginsandblock{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}| sets the Left (upper)
% and Right (lower) margins with variable typeblock.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setulmarginsandblock}[3]{%
\setfillsize{\paperheight}{*}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\setlength{\textheight}{\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\uppermargin}{\@tempdima}%
\setlength{\lowermargin}{\@tempdimb}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\headdrop}
% \begin{macro}{\setheaderspaces}
% |\setheaderspaces{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}| sets the Left (head margin)
% and Right (headsep) spacing with constant headheight.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\headdrop}
\newcommand{\setheaderspaces}[3]{%
\setfillsize{\uppermargin}{\headheight}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\setlength{\headheight}{\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\headdrop}{\@tempdima}%
\setlength{\headsep}{\@tempdimb}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setheadfoot}
% |\setheadfoot{|\meta{headheight}|}{|\meta{footskip}|}|
% sets the headheight and the footskip.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setheadfoot}[2]{%
\setlength{\headheight}{#1}%
\setlength{\footskip}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setcolsepandrule}
% |\setcolsepandrule{|\meta{colsep}|}{|\meta{thickness}|}|
% sets the column separation and the rule thickness.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/20}{Changed \cs{setcolseprule} to
% \cs{setcolsepandrule} to match the documentation.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setcolsepandrule}[2]{%
\setlength{\columnsep}{#1}%
\setlength{\columnseprule}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setmarginnotes}
% |\setmarginnotes{|\meta{sep}|}{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{push}|}|
% sets the marginpar parameters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setmarginnotes}[3]{%
\setlength{\marginparsep}{#1}%
\setlength{\marginparwidth}{#2}%
\setlength{\marginparpush}{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% Initialise the paper size and trimming to their default values.
% \begin{macrocode}
\settrimmedsize{\stockheight}{\stockwidth}{*}
\settrims{\z@}{\z@}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
%
% What now follows is the standard class's method for setting up
% the dimensions.
%
% Set |\@tempdimb| to size-dependent initial line length and
% set |\@tempdima| to the maximum textwidth for the paper width,
% an inch margin on either side. In the standard classes the initial
% line length is about 14\% greater than |\lxvchars|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{1.14\lxvchars}
\setlength\@tempdima{\paperwidth}
\addtolength\@tempdima{-2in}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\textwidth}
% Now set the |\textwidth| depending on the number of columns. In twocolumn
% mode each column should be no wider than |\@tempdimb|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
\ifdim\@tempdima>2\@tempdimb\relax
\setlength\textwidth{2\@tempdimb}
\else
\setlength\textwidth{\@tempdima}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% In onecolumn
% the text should not be wider than the minumum of the paperwidth (less
% 2in for the margins) and the maximum length of the character line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
\ifdim\@tempdima>\@tempdimb\relax
\setlength\textwidth{\@tempdimb}
\else
\setlength\textwidth{\@tempdima}
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Adjust the width to be a whole number of points.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@settopoint\textwidth
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\textheight}
% The |\textheight| is the height of the text block, excluding
% headers and footers. This is set according to the |\paperheight|,
% to an integral number of lines, and allowing a 1in margin at the
% top and bottom and a further 1.5in for headers and footers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\@tempdima{\paperheight}
\addtolength\@tempdima{-3.5in}
% \end{macrocode}
% Divide this height by the |\baselineskip| to get the number of lines.
% Then (re)calculate the |\textheight| and finally add the |\topskip|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\divide\@tempdima\baselineskip
\@tempcnta=\@tempdima
\setlength\textheight{\@tempcnta\baselineskip}
\addtolength\textheight{\topskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The margins are calculated.
%
% \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin}
% \begin{macro}{\marginparwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\evensidemargin}
% The margins depend on the paper size, also for two sided
% printing the inner margin is made smaller than the outer.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twoside
\setlength\@tempdima {\paperwidth}
\addtolength\@tempdima {-\textwidth}
\setlength\oddsidemargin {.4\@tempdima}
\addtolength\oddsidemargin {-1in}
\setlength\marginparwidth {.6\@tempdima}
\addtolength\marginparwidth{-\marginparsep}
\addtolength\marginparwidth{-0.4in}
\else
\setlength\@tempdima {\paperwidth}
\addtolength\@tempdima {-\textwidth}
\setlength\oddsidemargin {.5\@tempdima}
\addtolength\oddsidemargin {-1in}
\setlength\marginparwidth {.5\@tempdima}
\addtolength\marginparwidth{-\marginparsep}
\addtolength\marginparwidth{-0.8in} % don't know why this isn't .4
\fi
\ifdim\marginparwidth>2in
\setlength\marginparwidth{2in}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Set these values to integer numbers of points, and calculate the
% |\evensidemargin|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@settopoint\oddsidemargin
\@settopoint\marginparwidth
\setlength\evensidemargin {\paperwidth}
\addtolength\evensidemargin{-2in}
\addtolength\evensidemargin{-\textwidth}
\addtolength\evensidemargin{-\oddsidemargin}
\@settopoint\evensidemargin
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\topmargin}
% The |\topmargin| is the distance below the top of the printable
% area (1in below the top of the paper) and the top of the box
% containing the running head.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\topmargin {\paperheight}
\addtolength\topmargin{-2in}
\addtolength\topmargin{-\headheight}
\addtolength\topmargin{-\headsep}
\addtolength\topmargin{-\textheight}
\addtolength\topmargin{-\footskip}
\addtolength\topmargin{-.5\topmargin}
\@settopoint\topmargin
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% That is the end of the classical algorithm. Now calculate the
% user-friendly dimensions. The calculations are simpler than in
% the general case as the |\paperwidth| and |\paperheight| is the
% same as the |\stockwidth| and |\stockheight|.
%
% We can get the spine
% and edge margins from the |\oddsidemargin|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\spinemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
\addtolength{\spinemargin}{1in}
\setlrmargins{\spinemargin}{*}{*}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Similarly we can get the upper and lower margins from the
% |\topmargin|, |\headheight| and |\headskip|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\uppermargin}{\topmargin}
\addtolength{\uppermargin}{1in}
\addtolength{\uppermargin}{\headheight}
\addtolength{\uppermargin}{\headsep}
\setulmargins{\uppermargin}{*}{*}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memznegtest}
% DA suggested this in a private email (2003/002/13) to make error
% checking and reporting a bit more (space) efficient. Use like \\
% |\@memznegtest{\marginparsep}| instead of \\
% \begin{verbatim}
% \ifdim\marginparsep>\z@\else
% \@memerror{\protect\marginparsep\space is zero or negative}{\@ehd}%
% \fi
% \end{verbatim}
% If its length variable argument is zero or less it reports an error.
%
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{@memznegtest}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memznegtest}[1]{%
\ifdim#1>\z@\else
\@memerror{\protect#1\space is zero or negative}{\@ehd}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memnegtest}
% Reports an error if its length variable argument is negative.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{@memnegtest}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memnegtest}[1]{%
\ifdim#1<\z@
\@memerror{\protect#1\space is negative}{\@ehd}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\checkthelayout}
% This macro checks that the current layout dimensions are sensible and
% checks the arithmetic.
%
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Added \cs{checkthelayout}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\checkthelayout}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% First check the dimensions are not negative.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@memnegtest{\trimedge}
\@memnegtest{\trimtop}
\@memznegtest{\stockwidth}
\@memznegtest{\paperwidth}
\@memznegtest{\textwidth}
\@memznegtest{\spinemargin}
\@memznegtest{\foremargin}
\@memznegtest{\marginparsep}
\@memznegtest{\marginparwidth}
\@memznegtest{\stockheight}
\@memznegtest{\paperheight}
\@memznegtest{\textheight}
\@memznegtest{\uppermargin}
\@memznegtest{\lowermargin}
\@memznegtest{\headheight}
\@memznegtest{\headsep}
\@memznegtest{\footskip}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Carry on regardless. We need to adjust the |\textheight| and the
% |\lowermargin| to get an integral number of lines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempdima = \textheight
\divide\@tempdima \baselineskip
\@tempcnta=\@tempdima
\setlength{\textheight}{\@tempcnta\baselineskip}
\addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}
\setulmargins{\uppermargin}{*}{*}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Check that all the sums add up correctly, or
% at least to within a small (|\@tempdimb|) error.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempdimb = -1pt
\@tempdima=\stockwidth
\advance\@tempdima -\trimedge
\advance\@tempdima -\paperwidth
\ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
\@tempdima = -\@tempdima
\@memerror{\protect\paperwidth\space and/or
\protect\trimedge\space
are too large for \protect\stockwidth\space
by \the\@tempdima}%
{\@ehd}
\fi
\@tempdima = \paperwidth
\advance\@tempdima -\foremargin
\advance\@tempdima -\textwidth
\advance\@tempdima -\spinemargin
\ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
\@tempdima = -\@tempdima
\@memerror{\protect\spinemargin\space and/or
\protect\textwidth\space and/or
\protect\foremargin\space
are too large for \protect\paperwidth\space
by \the\@tempdima}%
{\@ehd}
\fi
\@tempdima = \stockheight
\advance\@tempdima -\trimtop
\advance\@tempdima -\paperheight
\ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
\@tempdima = -\@tempdima
\@memerror{\protect\paperheight\space and/or
\protect\trimtop\space
are too large for \protect\stockheight\space
by \the\@tempdima}%
{\@ehd}
\fi
\@tempdima = \paperheight
\advance\@tempdima -\uppermargin
\advance\@tempdima -\textheight
\advance\@tempdima -\lowermargin
\ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
\@tempdima = -\@tempdima
\@memerror{\protect\uppermargin\space and/or
\protect\textheight\space and/or
\protect\lowermargin\space
are too large for \protect\paperheight\space
by \the\@tempdima}%
{\@ehd}
\fi
\@tempdima = \uppermargin
\advance\@tempdima -\headheight
\advance\@tempdima -\headsep
\ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
\@tempdima = -\@tempdima
\@memerror{\protect\headheight\space and/or
\protect\headsep\space
are too large for \protect\uppermargin\space
by \the\@tempdima}%
{\@ehd}
\fi
\@tempdima = \lowermargin
\advance\@tempdima -\footskip
\ifdim\@tempdima<\z@
\@tempdima = -\@tempdima
\@memerror{\protect\footskip
is too large for \protect\lowermargin\space
by \the\@tempdima}%
{\@ehd}
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fixthelayout}
% Calculate the normal
% \LaTeX{} page layout parameter values. We'll do the heights first
% as they are independent of the number of columns and the side printing.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Added \cs{fixthelayout}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\fixthelayout}{%
\topmargin = \trimtop
\advance\topmargin \uppermargin
\advance\topmargin -\headsep
\advance\topmargin -\headheight
\advance\topmargin -1in\relax
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Now the |\oddsidemargin|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\oddsidemargin = \stockwidth
\advance\oddsidemargin -\trimedge
\advance\oddsidemargin -\paperwidth
\advance\oddsidemargin \spinemargin
\advance\oddsidemargin -1in\relax
% \end{macrocode}
%
% And the |\evensidemargin|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\evensidemargin = \trimedge
\advance\evensidemargin \foremargin
\advance\evensidemargin -1in\relax
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% Set the values to the nearest whole point.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@settopoint\textwidth
\@settopoint\oddsidemargin
\@settopoint\evensidemargin
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\typeoutlayout}
% Why not type out the calculated versions of the designed values?
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Added \cs{typeoutlayout}}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/25}{Added column info to \cs{typeoutlayout}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\typeoutlayout}{%
\typeout{}
\typeout{******************************************************}
\typeout{Stock height and width:
\the\stockheight\space by \the\stockwidth}
\typeout{Top and edge trims:
\the\trimtop\space and \the\trimedge}
\typeout{Page height and width:
\the\paperheight\space by \the\paperwidth}
\typeout{Text height and width:
\the\textheight\space by \the\textwidth}
\typeout{Spine and edge margins:
\the\spinemargin\space and \the\foremargin}
\typeout{Upper and lower margins:
\the\uppermargin\space and \the\lowermargin}
\typeout{Headheight and headsep:
\the\headheight\space and \the\headsep}
\typeout{Footskip:
\the\footskip}
\typeout{Columnsep and columnseprule:
\the\columnsep\space and \the\columnseprule}
\typeout{Marginparsep and marginparwidth:
\the\marginparsep\space and \the\marginparwidth}
\typeout{******************************************************}
\typeout{}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\checkandfixthelayout}
% This macro checks and fixes the layout, and reports the result.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Replaced \cs{fixpagelayout} by \cs{checkandfixthelayout}}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Partitioned \cs{checkandfixthelayout}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\checkandfixthelayout}{%
\checkthelayout
\fixthelayout
\typeoutlayout}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fixpdflayout}
% \begin{macro}{\fixdvipslayout}
% Page layout with pdf\LaTeX{} seems a bit iffy.
% At the suggestion of Lars Madsen, help with
% setting viewer (e.g., ghostview)
% window sizes for dvi/ps. \cs{fixdvipslayout} does for \file{dvi} output
% as \cs{fixpdflayout} does for \file{pdf} output.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{fixpdflayout} (from patch v1.6)}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/12/01}{Added \cs{fixdvipslayout} }
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\fixpdflayout}{%
\pdfpageheight=\the\stockheight
\pdfpagewidth=\the\stockwidth
\ifdim\pdfvorigin=0pt\pdfvorigin=1in\fi
\ifdim\pdfhorigin=0pt\pdfhorigin=1in\fi}
\newcommand*{\fixdvipslayout}{%
\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\the\stockwidth,\the\stockheight}}}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\ifpdf
\ifnum\pdfoutput<\@ne
\fixdvipslayout
\else
\fixpdflayout
\fi
\else
\fixdvipslayout
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% With a landscape document when going \texttt{latex -> dvips} the
% resulting \file{.ps} file
% may apear upside down in \texttt{ghostview}. If this happens, try putting
% the following in the document preamble:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \addtodef{\fixdvipslayout}{}{%
% \special{!TeXDict begin /landplus90{true}store end }}
% \end{verbatim}
% See \texttt{http://www.radicaleye.com.dvips.html} (DVIPS Home Page) for
% an explanation.
%
% Some other potential specials for PostScript printing may be
% (at least for an HP 5SiMx LaserJet duplex printer):
% \begin{verbatim}
% \special{!TeXDict begin <>
% setpagedevice end} % duplex
% \special{!TeXDict begin <>
% setpagedevice end} % short side binding
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\typeoutstandardlayout}
% Types out the current values of the standard page layout parameters.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/25}{Added \cs{typeoutstandardlayout}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\typeoutstandardlayout}{%
\typeout{}
\typeout{******************************************************}
\typeout{Page height and width:
\the\paperheight\space by \the\paperwidth}
\typeout{Text height and width:
\the\textheight\space by \the\textwidth}
\typeout{Oddside and evenside margins:
\the\oddsidemargin\space and \the\evensidemargin}
\typeout{Topmargin and footskip:
\the\topmargin\space and \the\footskip}
\typeout{Headheight and headsep:
\the\headheight\space and \the\headsep}
\typeout{Columnsep and columnseprule:
\the\columnsep\space and \the\columnseprule}
\typeout{Marginparsep and marginparwidth:
\the\marginparsep\space and \the\marginparwidth}
\typeout{******************************************************}
\typeout{}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \subsection{Float placement parameters}
%
%
% All float parameters are given default values in the \LaTeX{}
% kernel. For this reason counters only need to be set with
% |\setcounter| and other parameters are set using |\renewcommand|.
%
% \paragraph{Limits for the placement of floating objects}
%
% The settings here make it easier to place floats than with the
% standard classes.
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@topnumber}
% The \Lcount{topnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
% floats that can appear on the top of a text page (classically 2)
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{topnumber}{3}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\topfraction}
% This indicates the maximum part of a text page that can be
% occupied by floats at the top (classically 0.7).
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\topfraction}{.85}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@bottomnumber}
% The \Lcount{bottomnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
% floats that can appear on the bottom of a text page (classically 1).
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bottomfraction}
% This indicates the maximum part of a text page that can be
% occupied by floats at the bottom (classically 0.3).
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\bottomfraction}{.5}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@totalnumber}
% This indicates the maximum number of floats that can appear on
% any text page (classically 3).
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{totalnumber}{4}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\textfraction}
% This indicates the minimum part of a text page that has to be
% occupied by text (classically 0.2).
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\textfraction}{.1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\floatpagefraction}
% This indicates the minimum part of a page that has to be
% occupied by floating objects before a `float page' is
% produced (classically 0.5).
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\floatpagefraction}{.7}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@dbltopnumber}
% The \Lcount{dbltopnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
% two column floats that can appear on the top of a two column text
% page (classically 2).
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{3}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dbltopfraction}
% This indicates the maximum part of a two column text page that
% can be occupied by two column floats at the top (classically 0.7).
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{.85}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dblfloatpagefraction}
% This indicates the minimum part of a page that has to be
% occupied by two column wide floating objects before a `float
% page' is produced (classically 0.5).
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\dblfloatpagefraction}{.7}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \section{Page Styles}
%
% The page style \pstyle{foo} is defined by defining the command
% |\ps@foo|. This command should make only local definitions.
% There should be no stray spaces in the definition, since they
% could lead to mysterious extra spaces in the output.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@evenhead}
% \begin{macro}{\@oddhead}
% \begin{macro}{\@evenfoot}
% \begin{macro}{\@oddfoot}
% The |\ps@...| command defines the macros |\@oddhead|,
% |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|, and |\@evenfoot| to define the running
% heads and feet---e.g., |\@oddhead| is the macro to produce the
% contents of the heading box for odd-numbered pages. It is called
% inside an |\hbox| of width |\textwidth|.
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Marking conventions}
%
% To make headings determined by the sectioning commands, the page
% style defines the commands |\chaptermark|, |\sectionmark|,
% \ldots,\\
% where |\chaptermark{|\meta{TEXT}|}| is called by
% |\chapter| to set a mark, and so on.
%
% The |\...mark| commands and the |\...head| macros are defined
% with the help of the following macros. (All the |\...mark|
% commands should be initialized to no-ops.)
%
% \LaTeX{} extends \TeX's |\mark| facility by producing two kinds
% of marks, a `left' and a `right' mark, using the following
% commands:
% \begin{flushleft}
% |\markboth{|\meta{LEFT}|}{|\meta{RIGHT}|}|: Adds both marks.
%
% |\markright{|\meta{RIGHT}|}|: Adds a `right' mark.
%
% |\leftmark|: Used in the |\@oddhead|, |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|
% or |\@evenfoot| macros, it gets the current `left'
% mark. |\leftmark| works like \TeX's |\botmark|
% command.
%
% |\rightmark|: Used in the |\@oddhead|, |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|
% or |\@evenfoot| macros, it gets the current
% `right' mark. |\rightmark| works like \TeX's
% |\firstmark| command.
% \end{flushleft}
%
% The marking commands work reasonably well for right marks
% `numbered within' left marks--e.g., the left mark is changed by a
% |\chapter| command and the right mark is changed by a |\section|
% command. However, it does produce somewhat anomalous results if
% two |\markboth|'s occur on the same page.
%
%
% Commands like |\tableofcontents| that should set the marks in some
% page styles use a |\@mkboth| command, which is |\let| by the
% pagestyle command (|\ps@...|) to |\markboth| for setting the
% heading or to |\@gobbletwo| to do nothing.
%
%
%
% \subsection{Defining the page styles}
%
% This class provides a set of commands for the user to define new
% pagestyles. Essentially defining a pagestyle consists of defining the
% macros |\@evenhead{}|, |\@oddhead{}|, |\@evenfoot{}|, and |\@oddfoot{}|.
% For this class, each header and footer is treated as three parts: a left,
% center, and right part. In this case, defining a pagestyle consists of
% specifying these 12 portions of the running headers and footers. The
% width of the headers/footers may also be specified, rules may be drawn
% below the headers and/or above the footers, and the complete header and/or
% footer may be offset with respect to the textblock when the width is not
% the same as the textwidth.
%
% In the following \meta{style} is the name of a pagestyle being defined
% (e.g., |ruled|).
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeevenhead}
% The command
% |\makeevenhead{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{left}|}{|\meta{center}|}{|\meta{right}|}|
% specifies that the left, center and right portions of the even header for
% pagestyle \meta{style} are defined as the other thre arguments, respectiveley.
% Internally it defines the commands |\styleeheadl|, |\styleeheadc| and
% |\styleeheadr| to be \meta{left}, \meta{center} and \meta{right} respectively.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makeevenhead}[4]{%
\@namedef{#1eheadl}{#2}
\@namedef{#1eheadc}{#3}
\@namedef{#1eheadr}{#4}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeoddhead}
% \begin{macro}{\makeevenfoot}
% \begin{macro}{\makeoddfoot}
% These three macros are similar to |\makeevenhead| except that they are
% for the oddhead, evenfoot and oddfoot.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makeoddhead}[4]{%
\@namedef{#1oheadl}{#2}
\@namedef{#1oheadc}{#3}
\@namedef{#1oheadr}{#4}
}
\newcommand{\makeevenfoot}[4]{%
\@namedef{#1efootl}{#2}
\@namedef{#1efootc}{#3}
\@namedef{#1efootr}{#4}
}
\newcommand{\makeoddfoot}[4]{%
\@namedef{#1ofootl}{#2}
\@namedef{#1ofootc}{#3}
\@namedef{#1ofootr}{#4}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makerunningwidth}
% The macro |\makerunningwidth{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{length}|}| sets the
% width of the headers and footers of pagestyle \meta{style} to be \meta{length}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makerunningwidth}[2]{%
\@namedef{#1runwidth}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\normalrulethickness}
% \begin{macro}{\footruleheight}
% \begin{macro}{\footruleskip}
% \begin{macro}{\makeheadrule}
% \begin{macro}{\makefootrule}
% |\normalrulethickness| is the thickness of a normal horizontal
% or vertical rule.
% |\footruleheight| is the height of a normal rule above a footer (actually zero).
% |\footruleskip| is a distance sufficient to ensure that a foot rule
% will appear between the bottom of the textblock and above any actual footer.
%
% (There was a \ctt{} thread \textit{ngerman, fancyhdr and \cs{footrulewidth} --- bug?}
% in December 2002 that bears on the definitions below).
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Make \cs{normalrulethickness} a length,
% not a macro (patch 1.1)}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Initialise \cs{footruleheight} to 0pt, not
% \cs{z@skip} (patch 1.1)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\normalrulethickness}
\setlength{\normalrulethickness}{0.4pt}
\newcommand{\footruleheight}{0pt}
\newcommand{\footruleskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% The macro |\makeheadrule{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{height}|}|
% specifies the width and height of the header rule for \meta{style}.
%
% Similarly
% |\makefootrule{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{height}|}{|\meta{skip}|}|
% specifies the width, height and skip for the footrule.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makeheadrule}[3]{%
\@namedef{#1headrule}{%
\hrule\@width #2\@height #3 \vskip-#3}
}
\newcommand{\makefootrule}[4]{%
\@namedef{#1footrule}{%
\vskip-#4\vskip-#3
\hrule\@width #2\@height #3 \vskip #4}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeheadposition}
% |\makeheadposition{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{eheadpos}|}{|\meta{oheadpos}|}{|\meta{efootpos}|}{|\meta{ofootpos}|}|
% specifies the horizontal positioning of the even and odd headers and footers,
% respectively,
% for the pagestyle \meta{style}. Each of the \meta{...pos} arguments may be
% either |flushleft|, |center| or |flushright|, with the obvious meanings.
% An empty argument (or an unrecognised one) is equivalent to |center|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makeheadposition}[5]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the even head position first.
% \begin{macrocode}
\nametest{flushleft}{#2}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1evenhpr}{\hss}
\else
\nametest{flushright}{#2}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenhpr}{\relax}
\else
\@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenhpr}{\hss}
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% And similarly for the odd head and even \& odd footers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\nametest{flushleft}{#3}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1oddhpr}{\hss}
\else
\nametest{flushright}{#3}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddhpr}{\relax}
\else
\@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddhpr}{\hss}
\fi
\fi
\nametest{flushleft}{#4}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1evenfpr}{\hss}
\else
\nametest{flushright}{#4}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenfpr}{\relax}
\else
\@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenfpr}{\hss}
\fi
\fi
\nametest{flushleft}{#5}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1oddfpr}{\hss}
\else
\nametest{flushright}{#5}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddfpr}{\relax}
\else
\@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddfpr}{\hss}
\fi
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makepsmarks}
% \begin{macro}{\makepshook}
% The macro |\makepsmarks{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{code}|}| specifies that
% \meta{code} is the definition of the hook for pagestyle \meta{style}.
% |\makepshook| is a deprecated version of |\makepsmarks|.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Added \cs{makepsmarks} and deprecated
% \cs{makepshook}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/12/14}{Deleted \cs{makepshook}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makepsmarks}[2]{\@namedef{#1pshook}{#2}}
%%%% \newcommand{\makepshook}[2]{%
%%%% \@memwarn{\protect\makepshook\space is deprecated.\MessageBreak
%%%% Use \protect\makepsmarks\space instead}
%%%% \@namedef{#1pshook}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mhe@dreset}
% To cater for potential baselineskip changes, such as \verb?\linespread{2}?,
% we have to ensure they don't percolate into the header/footer.
% (See CTT thread \textit{memoir + linespread}, 2004/02/11)
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Added \cs{m@mhe@dreset}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mhe@dreset}{\def\baselinestretch{1}\normalsize}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makepagestyle}
% At last we can put everything together for defining a new pagestyle,
% via the macro |\makepagestyle{|\meta{style}|}| which initially sets up
% a new pagestyle \meta{style} corresponding the the \LaTeX{} |empty|
% pagestyle. The prior macros can then be used to make modifications
% to the style.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Now 2 stage process for defining \cs{@evenhead}
% and friends}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Added \cs{m@mhe@dreset} at several points in
% \cs{makepagestyle} (from patch 2.1)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makepagestyle}[1]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% First define the macro |\ps@style|, which in turn defines the macros
% |\@evenhead|, |\@oddhead|, |\@evenfoot| and |\@oddfoot|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{ps@#1}{%
\@namedef{#1@evenhead}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% The code for the definition of |\@evenhead| and friends is based on code
% from Piet van Oostrum's \Lpack{fancyhdr} package~\cite{FANCYHDR}. The three
% parts of the header are put into parboxes, with fills between them, and
% the whole lot is put into a box the width of the header. Fillers are put
% before and after the main box which control the header position.
%
% First the left filler which is either |\relax| or |\hss|, and then
% start the main box.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@nameuse{#1evenhpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1runwidth}{\m@mhe@dreset%
\vbox{\hbox{%
% \end{macrocode}
% The left part of the header.
% \begin{macrocode}
\rlap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
\raggedright\@nameuse{#1eheadl}\strut}}\hfill
% \end{macrocode}
% The center part of the header.
% \begin{macrocode}
\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
\centering\@nameuse{#1eheadc}\strut}\hfill
% \end{macrocode}
% The right part of the header.
% \begin{macrocode}
\llap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
\raggedleft\@nameuse{#1eheadr}\strut}}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally, the header rule and finish with the right filler, which
% is either |\relax| or |\hss|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@nameuse{#1headrule}}}\@nameuse{#1evenhpr}}
% \end{macrocode}
% The code for the |\@oddhead|, |\@evenfoot| and |\@oddfoot| follows
% a similar pattern. Here is |\@oddhead|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#1@oddhead}{%
\@nameuse{#1oddhpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1runwidth}{\m@mhe@dreset%
\vbox{\hbox{%
\rlap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
\raggedright\@nameuse{#1oheadl}\strut}}\hfill
\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
\centering\@nameuse{#1oheadc}\strut}\hfill
\llap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
\raggedleft\@nameuse{#1oheadr}\strut}}}%
\@nameuse{#1headrule}}}\@nameuse{#1oddhpr}}
% \end{macrocode}
% And |\@evenfoot|. For the footers the rules come \emph{before} any foot
% entries.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#1@evenfoot}{%
\@nameuse{#1evenfpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1runwidth}{\m@mhe@dreset%
\vbox{\@nameuse{#1footrule}\hbox{%
\rlap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
\raggedright\@nameuse{#1efootl}\strut}}\hfill
\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
\centering\@nameuse{#1efootc}\strut}\hfill
\llap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
\raggedleft\@nameuse{#1efootr}\strut}}}%
}}\@nameuse{#1evenfpr}}
% \end{macrocode}
% Lastly the |\@oddfoot|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#1@oddfoot}{%
\@nameuse{#1oddfpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1runwidth}{\m@mhe@dreset%
\vbox{\@nameuse{#1footrule}\hbox{%
\rlap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
\raggedright\@nameuse{#1ofootl}\strut}}\hfill
\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
\centering\@nameuse{#1ofootc}\strut}\hfill
\llap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
\raggedleft\@nameuse{#1ofootr}\strut}}}%
}}\@nameuse{#1oddfpr}}
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we define |\@evenhead| etc., in terms of |#1@evenhead|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@evenhead{\@nameuse{#1@evenhead}}
\def\@oddhead{\@nameuse{#1@oddhead}}
\def\@evenfoot{\@nameuse{#1@evenfoot}}
\def\@oddfoot{\@nameuse{#1@oddfoot}}
% \end{macrocode}
% To finish off the definition of |\ps@style|, add in a hook which can be
% defined so that it adds additional code, if required.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@nameuse{#1pshook}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% The final part of setting up the new pagestyle is defining all the macros
% called by |\ps@style|, and giving them default values. Make the headers
% and footers empty.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeevenhead{#1}{}{}{}
\makeoddhead{#1}{}{}{}
\makeevenfoot{#1}{}{}{}
\makeoddfoot{#1}{}{}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% Make the headers/footers the same width as the |\textwidth|, center
% them, and ensure
% that the rules have zero height so that they will be invisible.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makerunningwidth{#1}{\textwidth}
\makeheadposition{#1}{}{}{}{}
\makeheadrule{#1}{\textwidth}{0pt}
\makefootrule{#1}{\textwidth}{\footruleheight}{\footruleskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally, there is no addtional code needed, so make the hook empty, and
% we are done.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepsmarks{#1}{}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\aliaspagestyle}
% The command |\aliaspagestyle{|\meta{aliasl}|}{|\meta{original}|}|
% defines the \meta{alias} pagestyle to be an alias for the
% \meta{original} pagestyle.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\aliaspagestyle}[2]{%
\@namedef{ps@#1}{\@nameuse{ps@#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\copypagestyle}
% The command |\copypagestyle{|\meta{new}|}{|\meta{original}|}|
% defines the \meta{new} pagestyle to be a copy of the
% \meta{original} pagestyle.
%
% It first makes the \meta{new} (empty) pagestyle then defines the internals
% in terms of the \meta{original} internals.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{copypagestyle}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\copypagestyle}[2]{%
\makepagestyle{#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the headers and footers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeevenhead{#1}{\@nameuse{#2eheadl}}%
{\@nameuse{#2eheadc}}{\@nameuse{#2eheadr}}%
\makeoddhead{#1}{\@nameuse{#2oheadl}}%
{\@nameuse{#2oheadc}}{\@nameuse{#2oheadr}}%
\makeevenfoot{#1}{\@nameuse{#2efootl}}%
{\@nameuse{#2efootc}}{\@nameuse{#2efootr}}%
\makeoddfoot{#1}{\@nameuse{#2ofootl}}%
{\@nameuse{#2ofootc}}{\@nameuse{#2ofootr}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the width.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makerunningwidth{#1}{\@nameuse{#2runwidth}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Specify the |\headposition|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\@nameuse{#2evenhpl}}%
\@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\@nameuse{#2oddhpl}}%
\@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\@nameuse{#2evenfpl}}%
\@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\@nameuse{#2oddfpl}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Specify the head and foot rules.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#1headrule}{\@nameuse{#2headrule}}%
\@namedef{#1footrule}{\@nameuse{#2footrule}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% And pick up the hook.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepsmarks{#1}{\@nameuse{#2pshook}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifonlyfloats}
% |\ifonlyfloats|\marg{yes}\marg{no} processes \meta{yes} if the macro is
% called on a page consisting only of floats, otherwise \meta{no} is
% processed. |\if@fcolmade| is specified in \file{ltoutput.dtx}.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/14}{Added \cs{ifonlyfloats}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\ifonlyfloats}[2]{\if@fcolmade #1\else #2\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mergepagefloatstyle}
% |\mergepagefloatstyle|\marg{style}\marg{textstyle}\marg{floatstyle}
% makes a new page style \meta{style} that is \meta{textstyle} on normal
% pages but uses \meta{floatstyle} on float-only pages. Both \meta{textstyle}
% and \meta{floatstyle} must have been previously defined.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Added \cs{mergepagefloatstyle}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\mergepagefloatstyle}[3]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Make sure that the two styles have been called, otherwise we get some
% undefined errors.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@nameuse{ps@#3} \@nameuse{ps@#2}
% \end{macrocode}
% Specify the pagestyle's headers and footers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{ps@#1}{
\def\@evenhead{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@evenhead}}%
{\@nameuse{#2@evenhead}}}
\def\@oddhead{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@oddhead}}%
{\@nameuse{#2@oddhead}}}
\def\@evenfoot{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@evenfoot}}%
{\@nameuse{#2@evenfoot}}}
\def\@oddfoot{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@oddfoot}}%
{\@nameuse{#2@oddfoot}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the hook to the \meta{textstyle} on the assumption that that is
% more complex that required for a float page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#1pshook}{\@nameuse{#2pshook}}
% \end{macrocode}
% That's it.
% \begin{macrocode}
}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The pagestyles \pstyle{empty} and \pstyle{plain} are defined
% in \file{latex.dtx}. However, I will redefine them here, just in
% case someone takes a fancy to modifying them.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@empty}
% The \pstyle{empty} pagestyle is simple, it's just what we get when
% we call |\makepagestyle|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@plain}
% The \pstyle{plain} pagestyle is also simple, it just puts the
% page number at the bottom middle of the page.
% We call |\makepagestyle{plain}| and then adjust as required.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{plain}
\makeevenfoot{plain}{}{\thepage}{}
\makeoddfoot{plain}{}{\thepage}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
% The \pstyle{headings} pagestyle behaves differently for
% twosided and onesided printing. This is a rewrite of the
% standard style.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{tocmark} etc., to \cs{ps@headings}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twoside
% \end{macrocode}
% The footer is empty and the header contains the page number and
% one of the marks.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{headings}
\makepsmarks{headings}{%
\let\@mkboth\markboth
\def\chaptermark##1{%
\markboth{\MakeUppercase{%
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
\if@mainmatter
\@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
\fi
\fi
##1}}{}}%
\def\tocmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\contentsname}}{}}%
\def\lofmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\listfigurename}}{}}%
\def\lotmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\listtablename}}{}}%
\def\bibmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\bibname}}{}}%
\def\indexmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\indexname}}{}}%
\def\sectionmark##1{%
\markright{\MakeUppercase{%
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth > \z@
\thesection. \ %
\fi
##1}}}%
}
\makeevenhead{headings}{\thepage}{}{\slshape\leftmark}
\makeoddhead{headings}{\slshape\rightmark}{}{\thepage}
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% For one sided printing even and odd pages are treated the same,
% so no need to bother with the evenhead, and
% just the |\rightmark| is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{headings}
\makepsmarks{headings}{%
\let\@mkboth\markboth
\def\chaptermark##1{%
\markright{\MakeUppercase{%
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
\if@mainmatter
\@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
\fi
\fi
##1}}}%
\def\tocmark{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\contentsname}}}%
\def\lofmark{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\listfigurename}}}%
\def\lotmark{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\listtablename}}}%
\def\bibmark{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\bibname}}}%
\def\indexmark{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\indexname}}}%
}
\makeoddhead{headings}{\slshape\rightmark}{}{\thepage}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@myheadings}
% The \pstyle{myheadings} page style is simpler because the user
% has to specify the contents using |\markboth| and |\markright|
% commands. This is the definition used in the standard classes.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{tocmark} etc., to \cs{ps@myheadings}}
% \begin{verbatim}}
% \newcommand{\ps@myheadings}{%
% \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
% \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil{\slshape\leftmark}}%
% \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
% \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
% \let\chaptermark\@gobble
% \let\sectionmark\@gobble
% }
% \end{verbatim}
% Translating that into our terms we get:
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Changed the code for creating the myheadings pagestyle}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Further change to myheadings pagestyle code}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{myheadings}
\makepsmarks{myheadings}{%
\let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
\let\chaptermark\@gobble
\let\sectionmark\@gobble
\def\tocmark{}%
\def\lofmark{}%
\def\lotmark{}%
\def\bibmark{}%
\def\indexmark{}%
}
\makeevenhead{myheadings}{\thepage}{}{\slshape\leftmark}
\makeoddhead{myheadings}{\slshape\rightmark}{}{\thepage}
% \end{macrocode}
% (Kai von Fintel (\texttt{fintel@mit.edu}) emailed me on 2003/02/24
% saying that the original |\let\tocmark\@gobble| in the myheadings
% pagestyle did nasty things
% to the ToC, etc. Now using |\def\tocmark{}|.)
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@chapter}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@part}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@cleared}
% The standard classes use the \pstyle{plain} pagestyle for the first page
% of a chapter. This class uses the \pstyle{chapter} instead, which is
% aliased to \pstyle{plain}. Similarly for parts.
% Further, |\cleardoublepage| uses whatever
% pagestyle is in effect for the empty verso page. I find that this
% looks odd if the header contains a chapter name. This class uses
% the \pstyle{cleared} pagestyle in this case. I have aliased this
% to \pstyle{empty}; the \pstyle{plain} would be another reasonable choice.
% \begin{macrocode}
\aliaspagestyle{chapter}{plain}
\aliaspagestyle{part}{plain}
\aliaspagestyle{cleared}{empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
% A slight adjustment to the kernel definition to set a pagestyle.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage\if@twoside \ifodd\c@page\else
\hbox{}\thispagestyle{cleared}%
\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@ruled}
% Partly to show how it is done, the class provides a \pstyle{ruled} pagestyle.
% In this style the headers and footers are the same width as the textblock,
% there is a rule under the header, page numbers are set in the footers
% at the outside of the page. Even page headers have the chapter number
% and title at the left, and odd page headers have the section title
% at the right.
%
% Start by making the (empty) \pstyle{ruled} pagestyle.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{ruled}
% \end{macrocode}
% There is no need to change the default width (which is the |\textwidth|),
% nor the default positions (centered),
% nor to make the footrule visible. We do, though, have to put the page
% numbers into the footers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeevenfoot{ruled}{\thepage}{}{}
\makeoddfoot{ruled}{}{}{\thepage}
% \end{macrocode}
% Make the header rule visible and equal to the |\textwidth|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeheadrule{ruled}{\textwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ruledmarks}
% We have to make sure that the |\chapter| and |\section| commands make
% the appropriate marks for use in the headers. We use the hook for this.
% Note that contrary to normal \LaTeX{} practice, the titles are not
% automatically upper-cased. The marks for the tocbibinds also need adjusting.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{@ruledmarks} to cater for tocbibind}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@ruledmarks}{%
\let\@mkboth\markboth
\def\chaptermark##1{%
\markboth{%
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
\if@mainmatter
\thechapter. \ %
\fi
\fi
##1}{}}
\def\sectionmark##1{\markright{##1}}
\def\tocmark{\markboth{\contentsname}{}}
\def\lofmark{\markboth{\listfigurename}{}}
\def\lotmark{\markboth{\listtablename}{}}
\def\bibmark{\markboth{\bibname}{}}
\def\indexmark{\markboth{\indexname}{}}
}
\makepsmarks{ruled}{\@ruledmarks}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% We can now define the even page header which is to have the chapter title
% at the left. As the chapter mark did no upper-casing we will print it
% using small caps, but just use the normal font for section title on
% the odd page header.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeevenhead{ruled}{\scshape\leftmark}{}{}
\makeoddhead{ruled}{}{}{\rightmark}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% This is all that we need to do for the \pstyle{ruled} pagestyle.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@Ruled}
% Also define a \pstyle{Ruled} pagestyle similar to \pstyle{ruled} except that the
% headers and footers are 10\% wider than the textblock, sticking out
% into the fore edge.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{Ruled}
\makerunningwidth{Ruled}{1.1\textwidth}
\makeheadposition{Ruled}{flushright}{flushleft}{flushright}{flushleft}
\makeevenfoot{Ruled}{\thepage}{}{}
\makeoddfoot{Ruled}{}{}{\thepage}
\makeheadrule{Ruled}{1.1\textwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
\makepsmarks{Ruled}{\@ruledmarks}
\makeevenhead{Ruled}{\scshape\leftmark}{}{}
\makeoddhead{Ruled}{}{}{\rightmark}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\headwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@companion}
% A \pstyle{companion} pagestyle like the one in the
% \textit{\LaTeX{} Companion} series.
% We need the |\headwidth| length for this.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{tocmark} etc., to \cs{ps@companion}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\headwidth}
\makepagestyle{companion}
\setlength{\headwidth}{\textwidth}
\addtolength{\headwidth}{\marginparsep}
\addtolength{\headwidth}{\marginparwidth}
\makerunningwidth{companion}{\headwidth}
\makeheadrule{companion}{\headwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
\makeheadposition{companion}{flushright}{flushleft}{}{}
\makepsmarks{companion}{%
\let\@mkboth\markboth
\def\chaptermark##1{\markboth{##1}{##1}} % left mark & right marks
\def\sectionmark##1{\markright{%
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth>\z@
\thesection. \ %
\fi
##1}}
\def\tocmark{\markboth{\contentsname}{\contentsname}}
\def\lofmark{\markboth{\listfigurename}{\listfigurename}}
\def\lotmark{\markboth{\listtablename}{\listtablename}}
\def\bibmark{\markboth{\bibname}{\bibname}}
\def\indexmark{\markboth{\indexname}{\indexname}}
}
\makeevenhead{companion}{\normalfont\bfseries\thepage}{}%
{\normalfont\bfseries\leftmark}
\makeoddhead{companion}{\normalfont\bfseries\rightmark}{}%
{\normalfont\bfseries\thepage}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Page numbering}
%
% The kernel includes the |\pagenumbering| command for setting the
% style (arabic, roman, etc.) of the page numbers, and at the same
% time it resets the page counter. I want a version that resets the style
% but not the number\footnote{Added to meet a request by Daniel Richard G.
% (\texttt{skunk@mit.edu}) September 2001.}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering}
% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering*}
% |\pagenumbering{|\meta{style}|}| is the normal version whereas
% the starred version does not reset the counter.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Added \cs{pagenumbering} and \cs{pagenumbering*} }
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\pagenumbering}{%
\@ifstar{\@smempnum}{\@mempnum}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@smempnum}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@smempnum}[1]{%
\gdef\thepage{\csname @#1\endcsname \c@page}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@mempnum}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@mempnum}[1]{%
\@smempnum{#1}\global\c@page \@ne}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@storedpagenumber}
% A counter to store the page number.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{storedpagenumber}
\setcounter{storedpagenumber}{1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\savepagenumber}
% \begin{macro}{\restoregenumber}
% |\savepagenumber| saves the current page number and |\restorepagenumber|
% sets the page number to the stored value.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/24}{Added \cs{savepagenumber} and \cs{restorepagenumber}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\savepagenumber}{\global\c@storedpagenumber \c@page}
\newcommand{\restorepagenumber}{\global\c@page \c@storedpagenumber}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \section{Titles and abstracts}
%
% \subsection{Titles}
%
% For books the title is usually designed specifically for the particular
% work, so originally the class did not provide a |\maketitle| command or
% any of the |\title| and other commands that normally go along with this.
% After some thought I decided to add in the code from the
% \Lpack{titling} package~\cite{TITLING}. However, in this case life
% is a bit simpler as there is no pre-existing class code.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added titling code}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pretitle}
% \begin{macro}{\@bspretitle}
% \begin{macro}{\posttitle}
% \begin{macro}{\@bsposttitle}
% \begin{macro}{\preauthor}
% \begin{macro}{\@bspreauthor}
% \begin{macro}{\postauthor}
% \begin{macro}{\@bspostauthor}
% \begin{macro}{\predate}
% \begin{macro}{\@bspredate}
% \begin{macro}{\postdate}
% \begin{macro}{\@bspostdate}
% To provide some flexibilty in the titling style of the document,
% user level commands are provided that can be changed to reconfigure
% the appearance resulting from |\maketitle|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pretitle}[1]{\def\@bspretitle{#1}}
\newcommand{\posttitle}[1]{\def\@bsposttitle{#1}}
\newcommand{\preauthor}[1]{\def\@bspreauthor{#1}}
\newcommand{\postauthor}[1]{\def\@bspostauthor{#1}}
\newcommand{\predate}[1]{\def\@bspredate{#1}}
\newcommand{\postdate}[1]{\def\@bspostdate{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% These are defined initially
% to mimic the normal \LaTeX{} style.
% \begin{macrocode}
\pretitle{\begin{center}\LARGE}
\posttitle{\par\end{center}\vskip 0.5em}
\preauthor{\begin{center}
\large \lineskip .5em%
\begin{tabular}[t]{c}}
\postauthor{\end{tabular}\par\end{center}}
\predate{\begin{center}\large}
\postdate{\par\end{center}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehooka}
% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehookb}
% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehookc}
% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehookd}
% The four hooks which will be called by |\maketitle|. These are initially
% vacuous.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\maketitlehooka}{}
\newcommand{\maketitlehookb}{}
\newcommand{\maketitlehookc}{}
\newcommand{\maketitlehookd}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarkseries}
% \begin{macro}{\@bsmarkseries}
% \begin{macro}{\symbolthanksmark}
% These are for specifying the kind of series for thanks markers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksmarkseries}[1]{%
\def\@bsmarkseries{\renewcommand{\thefootnote}%
{\@nameuse{#1}{footnote}}}}
\newcommand{\symbolthanksmark}{\thanksmarkseries{\fnsymbol}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\continuousmarks}
% \begin{macro}{\@bscontmark}
% These are for (non) zeroing of the footnote counter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@bscontmark}{\setcounter{footnote}{0}}
\newcommand{\continuousmarks}{\def\@bscontmark{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksheadextra}
% \begin{macro}{\@bsthanksheadpre}
% \begin{macro}{\@bsthanksheadpost}
% These are for inserting stuff before and after a mark in the titling.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksheadextra}[2]{%
\def\@bsthanksheadpre{#1}%
\def\@bsthanksheadpost{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksfootextra}
% These are for inserting stuff before and after a thanks mark in the
% footnoting.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Deprecated \cs{thanksfootextra}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Removed \cs{thanksfootpre} and \cs{thanksfootpost}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/12/14}{Removed \cs{thanksfootextra}}
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%% \newcommand{\thanksfootextra}[2]{%
%%%% \@memwarn{Use \protect\thanksmarkstyle\space instead of
%%%% \protect\thanksfootextra}%
%%%% \def\thanksfootpre{#1}%
%%%% \def\thanksfootpost{#2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksmark}
% This adds a thanks mark. The |\footnotemark| could have been used directly
% but it is fragile in a moving argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\thanksmark}[1]{\footnotemark[#1]}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksgap}
% This specifies some horizontal space.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{\hspace{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tamark}
% This stores the current definition of |\@thefnmark|. For some reason
% using |\@thefnmark| directly only gave the last value.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\tamark}{\@thefnmark}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarkwidth}
% A length determining the size of the box for typesetting
% a thanks marker.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\thanksmarkwidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarksep}
% A length determining the inset of thanks footnotes.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Replaced \cs{thanksmargin} by \cs{thanksmarksep}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\thanksmarksep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarkstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\thanksscript}
% |\thanksscript| is a wrapper round the actual mark stuff to be typeset.
% The user can define this via |\thanksmarkstyle|\marg{code}.
% The default is a superscript mark.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{thanksmarkstyle}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksmarkstyle}[1]{\def\thanksscript##1{#1}}
\thanksmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makethanksmarkhook}
% A vacuous macro used as a hook into |\makethanksmark|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makethanksmarkhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksfootmark}
% This typesets the thanks footnote mark.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Complete rewrite of \cs{thanksfootmark}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksfootmark}{%
\ifdim\thanksmarkwidth < \z@
% \end{macrocode}
% Negative width, mark is in the margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
\llap{\hb@xt@ -\thanksmarkwidth{%
\hss\normalfont\thanksscript{\tamark}}%
\hspace*{-\thanksmarkwidth}}%
\else
\ifdim\thanksmarkwidth = \z@
% \end{macrocode}
% Zero width, mark is at (inside) the margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\normalfont\thanksscript{\tamark}}%
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Positive width.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hb@xt@\thanksmarkwidth{\hss\normalfont\thanksscript{\tamark}}%
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makethanksmark}
% This sets the general indentations for the thanks footnote,
% and typesets the mark. The code is a simplified version of that
% for typesetting ToC entries.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Minor changes to \cs{makethanksmark}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makethanksmark}{%
\leavevmode%
\parindent 1em\noindent
\leftskip\thanksmarksep\relax
\advance\leftskip\thanksmarkwidth \null\nobreak\hskip-\leftskip\relax
\makethanksmarkhook\relax
\thanksfootmark}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\usethanksrule}
% \begin{macro}{\cancelhanksrule}
% Simple macros that let |\footnoterule| to another rule definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\usethanksrule}{\let\footnoterule\thanksrule}
\newcommand{\cancelthanksrule}{\let\footnoterule\@bsfootnoterule}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% Now set up the rest of the thanks defaults, styling having been
% done earlier.
% \begin{macrocode}
\thanksmarkseries{fnsymbol} % symbols
\thanksheadextra{}{}
\setlength{\thanksmarkwidth}{1.8em}
\setlength{\thanksmarksep}{-\thanksmarkwidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\thanksrule}
% \begin{macro}{\@bsfootnoterule}
% These are saved versions of the |\footnoterule| definition as it
% is at the end of the preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\let\thanksrule\footnoterule
\let\@bsfootnoterule\footnoterule
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\droptitle}
% A titling block has |\droptitle| amount of additional vertical space
% above it (normally zero).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\droptitle}
\setlength{\droptitle}{0pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
% The following is a
% modification of |\maketitle| as in the \Lpack{article}, \Lpack{report},
% and \Lpack{book} classes. It sets the pagestyle to \pstyle{title}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2004/01/21}{Removed the \cs{rlap} from \cs{@makefnmark}
% in \cs{maketitle} so multiple \cs{thanks}
% work per \cs{footnote}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Fix to remove extra blank page when
% \cs{maketitle} (and \cs{@maketitle}) is used within adjustwidth
% inside a titlingpage (mempatch v3.2)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\maketitle}{\par
\begingroup
\@bsmarkseries
\def\@makefnmark{\@textsuperscript{%
\normalfont\@bsthanksheadpre \tamark \@bsthanksheadpost}}%
\long\def\@makefntext##1{\makethanksmark ##1}
\if@twocolumn
\ifnum \col@number=\@ne
\@maketitle
\else
\twocolumn[\@maketitle]%
\fi
\else
\ifdim\pagetotal>\z@
\newpage
\fi
\global\@topnum\z@
\@maketitle
\fi
\thispagestyle{title}\@thanks
\endgroup
\@bscontmark % \setcounter{footnote}{0}%
}
\aliaspagestyle{title}{plain}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@titlefootkill}
% |\@mem@titlefootkill|\marg{note} Warn about footnotes in titles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@mem@titlefootkill}[1]{%
\@memwarn{Do not use \string\footnote\space in
\string\maketitle.\MessageBreak
Use \protect\thanks\space instead}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@maketitle}
% Our version of |\@maketitle|.
% Footnotes are killed in the title; see the thread `|\title|, |\author|
% and |\footnote| feature in memoir class', February 2003.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Killed footnote in titles (from patch v1.4)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@maketitle}{%
\let\footnote\@mem@titlefootkill
\ifdim\pagetotal>\z@
\newpage
\fi
\null
\vskip 2em%
\vspace*{\droptitle}
\maketitlehooka
{\@bspretitle \@title \@bsposttitle}
\maketitlehookb
{\@bspreauthor \@author \@bspostauthor}
\maketitlehookc
{\@bspredate \@date \@bspostdate}
\maketitlehookd
\par
\vskip 1.5em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{titlingpage}
% The |titlingpage| environment sets the pagestyle to be \pstyle{titlingpage},
% disables the footnote rule and ensures that the page is single
% column. At the end it switches back to twocolumn if neccessary,
% and then starts a new page as number 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{titlingpage}%
{\let\footnoterule\relax
\let\footnotesize\small
\if@twocolumn
\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
\else
\@restonecolfalse
\fi
\thispagestyle{titlingpage}%
\setcounter{page}{\@ne}%
}{%
\thispagestyle{titlingpage}%
\if@restonecol \twocolumn \fi
\if@twoside \cleardoublepage \else \clearpage \fi
\setcounter{page}{\@ne}}
\aliaspagestyle{titlingpage}{empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\emptythanks}
% This macro discards all prior |\thanks| texts.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\emptythanks}{\global\let\@thanks\@empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\andnext}
% The kernel |\and| macro puts space between author's names. The
% |\andnext| macro puts a newline between the names.
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Added \cs{andnext}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\andnext}{%
\end{tabular}\\ \begin{tabular}[t]{c}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@bsmtitlempty}
% |\@bsmtitlempty| is a helper macro to save some macro space.
% It empties some elements of |\maketitle|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@bsmtitlempty}{%
\global\let\maketitle\relax
\global\let\@maketitle\relax
\global\let\title\relax
\global\let\author\relax
\global\let\date\relax
\global\let\thanksmarkseries\relax
\global\let\thanksheadextra\relax
\global\let\thanksfootextra\relax
\global\let\thanksmark\relax
\global\let\thanksgap\relax
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\keepthetitle}
% This macro undefines all the titling commands except for
% |\thetitle|, |\theauthor| and |\thedate|.
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Xhanged \cs{keepthetitle} to cater for \cs{andnext}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\keepthetitle}{%
\@bsmtitlempty
\global\let\thanks\relax
\global\let\and\relax
\global\let\andnext\relax
\global\let\@thanks\@empty
\global\let\@title\@empty
\global\let\@author\@empty
\global\let\@date\@empty
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\killtitle}
% |\killtitle| undefines the remaining macros of |\maketitle|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\killtitle}{%
\keepthetitle
\global\let\thetitle\relax
\global\let\theauthor\relax
\global\let\thedate\relax
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\thetitle}
% \begin{macro}{\theauthor}
% \begin{macro}{\thedate}
% In order to make the |\title|, etc., values available for printing
% their definitions (in \file{ltsect.dtx}) need extending to save their
% arguments. We have to make sure that extraneous material,
% like |\thanks|, is excluded from the saved texts.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Gobble footnotes in \cs{title}, \cs{author}
% and \cs{date} (from patch v1.4)}
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Added \cs{andnext} handling to \cs{author}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\addtoiargdef{\title}{%
\begingroup\let\footnote\@gobble}{%
\begingroup
\renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{}
\renewcommand{\thanksmark}[1]{}
\renewcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{}
\protected@xdef\thetitle{#1}
\endgroup\endgroup}
\addtoiargdef{\author}{%
\begingroup\let\footnote\@gobble}{%
\begingroup
\renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{}
\renewcommand{\and}{\unskip, }
\renewcommand{\andnext}{\unskip, }
\renewcommand{\thanksmark}[1]{}
\renewcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{}
\protected@xdef\theauthor{#1}
\endgroup\endgroup}
\addtoiargdef{\date}{%
\begingroup\let\footnote\@gobble}{%
\begingroup
\renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{}
\renewcommand{\thanksmark}[1]{}
\renewcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{}
\protected@xdef\thedate{#1}
\endgroup\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Abstracts}
%
% Books usually do not have abstracts, but I decided to add in the code
% from the \Lpack{abstract}
% package~\cite{ABSTRACT}.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added code for abstracts}
%
%
% We just have the \Lpack{report} or \Lpack{article} style for the
% abstract with no \Lopt{titlepage} option. The original code,
% from \file{classes.dtx} for this is:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newenvironment{abstract}{%
% \if@twocolumn
% \section*{\abstractname}
% \else
% \small
% \begin{center}%
% {\bfseries \abstractname\vspace{-.5em}\vspace{\z@}}%%
% \end{center}%
% \quotation
% \fi}%
% {\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi}
% \end{verbatim}
%
%
% The following |\if...| commands are for implementing various options.
% \begin{macro}{\if@bsonecol}
% \begin{macro}{\ifadd@bstotoc}
% \begin{macro}{\ifnumber@bs}
% \begin{macro}{\if@bsrunin}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@bsonecol
\@bsonecoltrue
\newif\ifadd@bstotoc
\add@bstotocfalse
\newif\ifnumber@bs
\number@bsfalse
\newif\if@bsrunin
\@bsruninfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\abstractcol}
% \begin{macro}{\abstractintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\abstractnum}
% \begin{macro}{\abstractrunin}
% These are the use-level commands for setting the options. If
% the abstract is runin, then it must not be numbered otherwise
% adding it to the ToC might result in something peculiar.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\abstractcol}{\@bsonecolfalse}
\newcommand{\abstractintoc}{\add@bstotoctrue}
\newcommand{\abstractnum}{\number@bstrue\@bsruninfalse}
\newcommand{\abstractrunin}{\@bsrunintrue\number@bsfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% The next set of macros comprise the
% implementation of the |abstract| environment.
%
% \begin{macro}{\abstractnamefont}
% \begin{macro}{\abstracttextfont}
% These two macros are for specifying the fonts for typesetting the
% abstract's title and text. They are initialised for the default case
% (i.e., no class options).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\abstractnamefont}{\normalfont\small\bfseries}
\newcommand{\abstracttextfont}{\normalfont\small}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\absnamepos}
% \begin{macro}{\abstitleskip}
% |\absnamepos| specifies the environment in which the abstract's title
% name will be typeset, and the length |\abstitleskip| is an adjustement
% to the vertical space between the title and the abstract's text. These
% are initialised for the default case.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\absnamepos}{center}
\newlength{\abstitleskip} \setlength{\abstitleskip}{-0.5em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\absleftindent}
% \begin{macro}{\abs@leftindent}
% \begin{macro}{\absrightindent}
% \begin{macro}{\absparindent}
% \begin{macro}{\absparsep}
% The abstract's text is typeset as a single item list, called
% |@bstr@ctlist|. These lengths set the left and right margin indents, the
% paragraph indentation, and the inter-paragraph vertical space. Their
% initial values are all class option-dependent.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{abs@leftindent} per Lars Madsen (mempatch v3.0)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\absleftindent}
\newdimen\abs@leftindent
\abs@leftindent=\leftmargin
\newlength{\absrightindent}
\newlength{\absparindent}
\newlength{\absparsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\abslabeldelim}
% \begin{macro}{\@bslabeldelim}
% The contents of |\abslabeldelim| are typeset after a run-in heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\abslabeldelim}[1]{\def\@bslabeldelim{#1}}
\abslabeldelim{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@bsrunintitle}
% This macro typeset the run-in heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@bsrunintitle}{%
\hspace*{\abstitleskip}{\abstractnamefont\abstractname\@bslabeldelim}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setup@bstract}
% Now arrange to set all the class option-dependent values.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Used \cs{abs@leftindent} in \cs{setup@bstract} (mempatch v3.0)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setup@bstract}{%
\if@twocolumn
% \end{macrocode}
% Values for the \Lopt{twocolumn} class option.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@bsonecol
\abs@leftindent=\absleftindent
\else
\abs@leftindent=\z@
\renewcommand{\abstractnamefont}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}
\renewcommand{\abstracttextfont}{\normalfont}
\renewcommand{\absnamepos}{flushleft}
\setlength{\abstitleskip}{-2ex}
\fi
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Values for the default, if not already initialised.
% \begin{macrocode}
\abs@leftindent=\absleftindent
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally, values that apply for all cases.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\absrightindent}{\absleftindent}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\absparindent}{\parindent}
\setlength{\absparsep}{\parskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{environment}{@bstr@ctlist}
% The abstract's text is typeset within the |@bstr@ctlist| list environment.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Used \cs{abs@leftindent} in \cs{@bstr@ctlist} (mempatch v3.0)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{@bstr@ctlist}{%
\list{}{%
%%\topsep \z@
\partopsep \z@
\listparindent \absparindent
\itemindent \listparindent
\leftmargin \abs@leftindent
\rightmargin \absrightindent
\parsep \absparsep}%
\item\relax}
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\put@bsintoc}
% This macro adds the abstract's title to the ToC. It does nothing if
% the abstract is being numbered.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\put@bsintoc}{%
\ifadd@bstotoc
\ifnumber@bs\else
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\abstractname}
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\num@bs}
% This macro generates a numbered abstract heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\num@bs}{\chapter{\abstractname}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{abstract}
% At last we are in position to define the |abstract| environment. This
% follows very much along the lines of the standard class definitions, but with
% macros inserted at strategic points.
%
% The \Lopt{twocolumn} option and the default case. These use the same code
% as any style differences are embedded in the new macros.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{abstract}{%
\setup@bstract
\if@bsrunin\else
\ifnumber@bs \num@bs \else
\begin{\absnamepos}\abstractnamefont\abstractname\end\absnamepos%
\vspace{\abstitleskip}%
\fi
\fi
\put@bsintoc%
\begin{@bstr@ctlist}\if@bsrunin\@bsrunintitle\fi\abstracttextfont}%
{\par\end{@bstr@ctlist}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{onecolabstract}
% An environment for typesetting a single column abstract,
% particularly as the optional argument to the |\twocolumn| command.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{onecolabstract}{%
\begin{@twocolumnfalse}\begin{abstract}}{%
\end{abstract}\end{@twocolumnfalse}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanks}
% \begin{macro}{\@bs@thanks}
% We have to keep the contents of the |\thanks| commands as normally these
% are emptied by the |\maketitle| command. I do this by extending the definition
% of the |\thanks| (from \file{ltsect.dtx}) command,
% so that |\@bs@thanks| has a copy of the contents
% of |\@thanks|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\addtoiargdef{\thanks}{}{%
\protected@xdef\@bs@thanks{\@bs@thanks
\protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{#1}}%
}
\let\@bs@thanks\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\saythanks}
% This macro typesets any |\thanks| commands \emph{after} using
% |onecolabstract|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\saythanks}{\begingroup
\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}\@bs@thanks
\endgroup\global\let\@bs@thanks\@empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \section{Parts, chapters and other divisions}
%
% \subsection{Building blocks} The definitions in this part of a
% class file usually make use of two internal macros, |\@startsection| and
% |\secdef|. To understand
% what is going on here, we describe their syntax.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@startsection}
% The macro |\@startsection| has 6 required arguments, optionally
% followed by a $*$, an optional argument and a required argument:
%
% |\@startsection|\meta{name}\meta{level}\meta{indent}^^A
% \meta{beforeskip}\meta{afterskip}\meta{style}
% optional *\\
% \null\hphantom{\bslash @startsection}^^A
% |[|\meta{altheading}|]|\meta{heading}
%
% It is a generic command to start a section, the arguments have
% the following meaning:
%
% \begin{description}
% \item[\meta{name}] The name of the user level command, e.g.,
% `section'.
% \item[\meta{level}] A number, denoting the depth of the section
% --- e.g., chapter = 0, section = 1, etc. A section number
% will be printed if and only if \meta{level} $<=$ the value
% of the \Lcount{secnumdepth} counter.
% \item[\meta{indent}] The indentation of the heading from the left
% margin
% \item[\meta{beforeskip}] The absolute value of this argument
% gives the skip to leave above the heading. If it is
% negative, then the paragraph indent of the text following
% the heading is suppressed.
% \item[\meta{afterskip}] If positive, this gives the skip to leave
% below the heading, else it gives the skip to leave to the
% right of a run-in heading.
% \item[\meta{style}] Commands to set the style of the heading.
% \item[$*$] When this is missing the heading is numbered and the
% corresponding counter is incremented.
% \item[\meta{altheading}] Gives an alternative heading to use in
% the table of contents and in the running heads. This should
% be present when the $*$ form is used.
% \item[\meta{heading}] The heading of the new section.
% \end{description}
% A sectioning command is normally defined to |\@startsection| and
% its first six arguments.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\secdef}
% The macro |\secdef| can be used when a sectioning command is
% defined without using |\@startsection|. It has two arguments:
%
% |\secdef|\meta{unstarcmds}\meta{starcmds}
%
% \begin{description}
% \item[\meta{unstarcmds}] Used for the normal form of a
% sectioning command.
% \item[\meta{starcmds}] Used for the $*$-form of a
% sectioning command.
% \end{description}
%
% You can use |\secdef| as follows:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\chapter { ... \secdef \CMDA \CMDB }
% \def\CMDA [#1]#2{ ... } % Command to define
% % \chapter[...]{...}
% \def\CMDB #1{ ... } % Command to define
% % \chapter*{...}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@hangfrom}
% Internally the |\@startsection| macro uses |\@hangfrom{NUM}|, where
% |NUM| is the sectional number, to produce a hanging paragraph. That is,
% the second and later lines of a multiline title are indented from the
% left margin by the width of the number.
% The definition of |\@hangfrom|, from \file{ltsect.dtx}, is:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@hangfrom#1{\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{{#1}}%
% \hangindent \wd\@tempboxa\noindent\box\@tempboxa}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% To get a normal paragraphed title you can do: \\
% |\renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{#1}| \\
% or as a block paragraph: \\
% |\renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{\noindent #1}| \\
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@seccntformat}
% The |\@startsection| macro also uses |\@seccntformat{NUM}| to format
% the section number, including the space after it. Its definition,
% from \file{ltsect.dtx}, is
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname\quad}
% \end{verbatim}
% This is the command to change if you need different number formatting. For
% example the combination
% \begin{verbatim}
% \renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{\llap{\csname the#1\endcsname\quad}}
% \renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{\noindent #1}
% \end{verbatim}
% will hang the section numbers in the margin.
%
% \begin{table}
% \centering
% \caption{Document division levels}\label{tab:levels}
% \begin{tabular}{lr} \hline
% Division & Level \\ \hline
% part & -1 \\
% chapter & 0 \\
% section & 1 \\
% subsection & 2 \\
% subsubsection & 3 \\
% paragraph & 4 \\
% subparagraph & 5 \\
% \hline
% \end{tabular}
% \end{table}
%
% The values used for the document division levels are the same
% as defined by the standard \LaTeX{} classes and are given in
% Table~\ref{tab:levels}.
%
% \subsection{Mark commands}
%
% \begin{macro}{\partmark}
% \begin{macro}{\chaptermark}
% \begin{macro}{\sectionmark}
% \begin{macro}{\subsectionmark}
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsectionmark}
% \begin{macro}{\paragraphmark}
% \begin{macro}{\subparagraphmark}
% The default initialisations of the |\...mark| commands for use in
% the pagestyles. Most are already defined in the kernel but they are
% all noted here.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\partmark}[1]{}
\newcommand*{\chaptermark}[1]{}
% \newcommand*{\sectionmark}[1]{}
% \newcommand*{\subsectionmark}[1]{}
% \newcommand*{\subsubsectionmark}[1]{}
% \newcommand*{\paragraphmark}[1]{}
% \newcommand*{\subparagraphmark}[1]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibmark}
% Marks for the bibliography, which may be filled with |\bibname|.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{bibmark}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\bibmark}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\indexmark}
% Marks for the index, which may be filled with |\indexname|.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{indexmark}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\indexmark}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\glossarymark}
% Marks for the glossary, which may be filled with \cs{glossaryname}.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Added \cs{glossarymark}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glossarymark}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Define Counters}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@secnumdepth}
% The value of the counter \Lcount{secnumdepth} gives the depth of
% the highest-level sectioning command that is to produce section
% numbers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@part}
% \begin{macro}{\c@chapter}
% \begin{macro}{\c@section}
% \begin{macro}{\c@subsection}
% \begin{macro}{\c@subsubsection}
% \begin{macro}{\c@paragraph}
% \begin{macro}{\c@subparagraph}
% These counters are used for the sectioning numbers. The macro\\
% |\newcounter{|\meta{newctr}|}[|\meta{oldctr}|]|\\
% defines\meta{newctr} to be a counter, which is reset to zero when
% counter \meta{oldctr} is stepped. Counter \meta{oldctr} must
% already be defined.
%
% Part and chapter are the top level document divisions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{part}
\newcounter{chapter}
% \end{macrocode}
% The lower level divisions get reset by higher level divisions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{section}[chapter]
\newcounter{subsection}[section]
\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]
\newcounter{subparagraph}[paragraph]
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thepart}
% \begin{macro}{\thechapter}
% \begin{macro}{\thesection}
% \begin{macro}{\thesubsection}
% \begin{macro}{\thesubsubsection}
% \begin{macro}{\theparagraph}
% \begin{macro}{\thesubparagraph}
% For any counter \Lcount{CTR}, |\theCTR| is a macro that defines
% the printed version of counter \Lcount{CTR}. It is defined in
% terms of the following macros:
%
% |\arabic{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of
% \Lcount{COUNTER} as an arabic numeral.
%
% |\roman{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of
% \Lcount{COUNTER} as a lowercase roman numeral.
%
% |\Roman{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of
% \Lcount{COUNTER} as an uppercase roman numeral.
%
% |\alph{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of \Lcount{COUNTER}
% as a lowercase letter: $1 =$~a, $2 =$~ b, etc.
%
% |\Alph{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of \Lcount{COUNTER}
% as an uppercase letter: $1 =$~A, $2 =$~B, etc.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\thepart}{\@Roman\c@part}
\renewcommand{\thechapter}{\@arabic\c@chapter}
\renewcommand{\thesection}{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@section}
\renewcommand{\thesubsection}{%
\thesection.\@arabic\c@subsection}
\renewcommand{\thesubsubsection}{%
\thesubsection.\@arabic\c@subsubsection}
\renewcommand{\theparagraph}{%
\thesubsubsection.\@arabic\c@paragraph}
\renewcommand{\thesubparagraph}{%
\theparagraph.\@arabic\c@subparagraph}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@chapapp}
% |\@chapapp| is initially defined as |\chaptername|. The |\appendix|
% command redfines it as |\appendixname|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@chapapp}{\chaptername}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Front, main and back matter}
%
% These are the three main logical divisions in a book. As noted earlier,
% the boolean |\if@mainmatter| is TRUE iff the main matter is being
% processed. Chapters will be unnumbered when |\if@mainmatter| is FALSE.
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter}
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter*}
% The |\frontmatter| command starts roman numbering and turns off
% chapter numbering.
% It ensures that lower level divisions will not have chapter numbers,
% nor will figures or tables. It
% also ensures that the next page will be recto.
% The starred version makes no changes to the page numbering\footnote{The
% starred versions were added to meet a request by Daniel Richard G.
% (\texttt{skunk@mit.edu}) in September 2001.}.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{\cs{frontmatter} switches off numbering via
% the secnumdepth counter}
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Added \cs{frontmatter*} command}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\frontmatter}{%
\@ifstar{\@smemfront}{\@memfront}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@smemfront}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@smemfront}{%
\cleardoublepage
\@mainmatterfalse
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-10}
\counterwithout{figure}{chapter}
\counterwithout{table}{chapter}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@memfront}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@memfront}{%
\@smemfront\pagenumbering{roman}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mainmatter}
% \begin{macro}{\mainmatter*}
% The |\mainmatter| command starts arabic numbering and turns on chapter numbering.
% It sets numbering to the normal state. It
% also ensures that the next page will be recto. The starred version does
% not change the page numbering.
%
% Romano Giannetti suggested that |\mainmatter| (and |\backmatter|) should
% be almost no-ops with the article option.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{\cs{mainmatter} switches on section numbering
% via the secnumdepth counter}
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Added \cs{mainmatter*} command}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\mainmatter}{%
\@ifstar{\@smemmain}{\@memmain}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@smemmain}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Modified \cs{@smemmain} to reset the secnumdepth
% counter to maxsecnumdepth}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Included cognizance of article option in \cs{@smemmain}
% (from patch v1.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@smemmain}{
\@mainmattertrue
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{\value{maxsecnumdepth}}
\ifartopt
\clearpage
\else
\cleardoublepage
\counterwithin{figure}{chapter}
\counterwithin{table}{chapter}
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@memmain}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@memmain}{%
\@smemmain\pagenumbering{arabic}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\backmatter}
% This command turns off chapter numbering but leaves the page numbering alone.
% It twiddles the numbering caption numbering.
% The back matter may start on any new page.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{\cs{backmatter} uses the secnumdepth counter}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Included cognizance of article option in \cs{backmatter}
% (from patch v1.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\backmatter}{%
\ifartopt
\clearpage
\else
\if@openright
\cleardoublepage
\else
\clearpage
\fi
\fi
\@mainmatterfalse
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-10}
\ifartopt\else
\counterwithout{figure}{chapter}
\counterwithout{table}{chapter}
\setcounter{figure}{0}
\setcounter{table}{0}
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \subsection{Part}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\part}
% |\part{|\meta{title}|}| starts a new Part called \meta{title}.
% The actual typesetting of the title is done by |\@part| or |\@spart|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\part}{%
\@setuppart
\secdef\@part\@spart}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\beforepartskip}
% \begin{macro}{\midpartskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterpartskip}
% These three macros are the skips before, in the middle, and after the
% Part heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\beforepartskip}{\null\vfil}
\newcommand{\midpartskip}{\par\vskip 20pt}
\newcommand{\afterpartskip}{\vfil\newpage}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@setuppart}
% This macro does the work of setting up for the |\part| command.
% A single column page, normally recto, with a \pstyle{part} pagestyle is started.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@setuppart}{%
\if@openright
\cleardoublepage
\else
\clearpage
\fi
\thispagestyle{part}%
\if@twocolumn
\onecolumn
\@tempswatrue
\else
\@tempswafalse
\fi
\beforepartskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\partnamefont}
% \begin{macro}{\partnumfont}
% \begin{macro}{\parttitlefont}
% These three macros specify the fonts for the part name and number, and
% for the part title, respectively.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Rewrote the typesetting for Part titles}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\partnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\newcommand{\partnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\newcommand{\parttitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printpartname}
% \begin{macro}{\partnamenum}
% \begin{macro}{\printpartnum}
% \begin{macro}{\printparttitle}
% Macros to print the various parts of a Part heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\printpartname}{\partnamefont \partname}
\newcommand{\partnamenum}{\space}
\newcommand{\printpartnum}{\partnumfont \thepart}
\newcommand{\printparttitle}[1]{\parttitlefont #1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mempartinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\mempartstarinfo}
% \verb?\mempartinfo{\thepart}{short}{long}? \\
% \verb?\mempartstarinfo{long}? \\
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\mempartinfo}[3]{}
\newcommand*{\mempartstarinfo}[1]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@part}
% |\@part{|\meta{short}|]{|\meta{long}|}| typesets the title of a |\part|
% part. There is a number if |\secnumdepth| is greater than -2.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Used \cs{partnumberline} in \cs{@part}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@part}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Replaced \cs{markboth} by \cs{partmark}
% in \cs{@part} courtesy of Frederic Connes (mempatch v3.11)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@part[#1]#2{%
\M@gettitle{#1}%
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
\refstepcounter{part}%
\addcontentsline{toc}{part}%
{\protect\partnumberline{\thepart}#1}%
\mempartinfo{\thepart}{#1}{#2}%
\else
\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
\mempartinfo{}{#1}{#2}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Empty the marks, center the title on the page, and set the normal font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\partmark{#1}%
{\centering
\interlinepenalty \@M
\normalfont
% \end{macrocode}
% Print the number, if there is one, then the title below. Macro |\@endpart|
% tidies everything up at the end.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
\printpartname \partnamenum \printpartnum
\midpartskip
\fi
\printparttitle{#2}\par}%
\@endpart}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
% |\@spart{|\meta{long}|}| formats the title of a |\part*| part. It is
% simpler than |\@part| because there is no number to print.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@spart}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@spart#1{%
\M@gettitle{#1}%
\mempartstarinfo{#1}%
{\centering
\interlinepenalty \@M
\normalfont
\printparttitle{#1}\par}%
\@endpart}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@endpart}
% This finishes off both |\@part| and |\@spart|. The current page is flushed.
% In the standard \Lpack{book} class if
% two-sided mode is on a blank page is then produced. I think that this looks
% odd when the \Lopt{openany} option is in force, so here it only produces
% an extra blank page if both \Lopt{twoside} and \Lopt{openright} are
% in effect. If necessary, two
% column mode is switched back on.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@endpart{\afterpartskip
\if@twoside
\if@openright
\null
\thispagestyle{empty}%
\newpage
\fi
\fi
\if@tempswa
\twocolumn
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Chapter}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
% The command to start a new chapter. Chapters always start on a new page
% with a \pstyle{chapter} pagestyle. Floats are not allowed at the top of the page.
% The typesetting is done by either \cs{@chapter} or \cs{@schapter}.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Changed \cs{chapter} for article option}
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/24}{Changed chapter page clearing to \cs{clearforchapter}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{New optarg in \cs{chapter} for short heading}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Made article chapter start on a newline (mempatch v3.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\chapter{%
\ifartopt\par\else
\clearforchapter
\thispagestyle{chapter}
\global\@topnum\z@
\fi
\@afterindentfalse
\@ifstar{\@m@mschapter}{\@m@mchapter}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@m@mchapter}
% \begin{macro}{\ch@pt@c}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@empty}
% Intermediate and support macros for the extra optional argument
% to \cs{chapter}. Have to do this long windedly otherwise dear old
% \Lpack{hyperref} barfs.
%
% The code for two optional arguments is based on a posting
% to \ctt{} by Robin Fairbairns (1997/04/12 \textit{Re: Several optional
% arguments for macro?}).
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/04}{Major changes to \cs{chapter} macros (from Morten Hogholm 2005/08/30)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@m@mchapter}[1][]{%
\def\ch@pt@c{#1}% capture first optional arg
\@ifnextchar[{\@chapter}{\@chapter[]}%
}
\def\m@m@empty{\@empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memchapinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\memchapstarinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\memappchapinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\memappchapstarinfo}
% \verb?\memchapinfo{num}{toc}{head}{full}? \\
% \verb?\memchapstarinfo{short}{full}?
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/06}{Added \cs{memchapterinfo}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memchapinfo}[4]{}
\newcommand*{\memchapstarinfo}[2]{}
\newcommand*{\memappchapinfo}[4]{}
\newcommand*{\memappchapstarinfo}[2]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
% \begin{macro}{\f@rtoc}
% \begin{macro}{\f@rhdr}
% \cs{@chapter}\oarg{tocmark}\marg{title}
% typesets the title of a \cs{chapter}.
% There is a number if \cs{secnumdepth} is greater than -1 and \cs{@mainmatter}
% is TRUE.
%
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Complete rewrite of \cs{@chapter}}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changed \cs{numberline} to \cs{chapternumberline}
% in \cs{@chapter}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@chapter[#1]#2{%
\ifx\ch@pt@c\@empty % no optional args
\def\f@rtoc{#2}%
\def\f@rhdr{#2}%
\else % at least one opt arg
\let\f@rtoc\ch@pt@c
\ifx\@empty#1\@empty
\let\f@rhdr\ch@pt@c
\else
\def\f@rhdr{#1}%
\fi
\fi
\m@m@Andfalse
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
\if@mainmatter
\m@m@Andtrue
\fi
\fi
\ifm@m@And
\refstepcounter{chapter}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Store the (short) title via |\chaptermark|, and add some whitespace to
% the LoF and LoT. Then fiddle when we are using two columns, calling
% |\@makechapterhead| to do the typesetting.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Changed \cs{@chapter} for article option}
% \begin{macrocode}
\chaptermark{\f@rhdr}
\ifartopt
\@makechapterhead{#2}%
\@afterheading
\else
\insertchapterspace
\if@twocolumn
\@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
\else
\@makechapterhead{#2}%
\fi
\@afterheading
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Vittorio De Martino (\texttt{demartino.vittoria@grtn.it}) on
% 31 March 2003 reported that for articled chapters, which do not do
% any |\clearpage|, |\addcontents| had to come after the title.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Changed \cs{@chapter} to match patches v1.n}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifm@m@And
\ifanappendix
\addcontentsline{toc}{appendix}{%
\protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}%
\memappchapinfo{\thechapter}{\f@rtoc}{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
\else
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{%
\protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}%
\memchapinfo{\thechapter}{\f@rtoc}{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
\fi
\else
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}%
\ifanappendix
\memappchapinfo{}{\f@rtoc}{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
\else
\memchapinfo{}{\f@rtoc}{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Add hook for title referencing.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@chapter}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{\f@rhdr}\else\M@gettitle{\f@rtoc}\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makechapterhead}
% This \emph{really} typesets a \cs{chapter}. Leave some whitespace and prepare to
% set |\raggedright|.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printchapternonum} to
% \cs{@makechapterhead}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@makechapterhead#1{%
\chapterheadstart% \vspace*{50\p@}%
{\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
% \end{macrocode}
% If there is a number, typeset it, otherwise call |\printchapternonum|..
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifm@m@And
\printchaptername \chapternamenum \printchapternum
\afterchapternum % \par\nobreak \vskip 20\p@
\else
\printchapternonum
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Typeset the title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\interlinepenalty\@M
\printchaptertitle{#1} % \Huge \bfseries #1
\afterchaptertitle % \par\nobreak \vskip 40\p@
}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\insertchapterspace}
% By default, a \cs{chapter} inserts some vertical space into the LoF and LoT.
% The macro \cs{insertchapterspace} performs the insertion.
% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/31}{Added \cs{insertchapterspace}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\insertchapterspace}{%
\addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10pt}}%
\addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10pt}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@chs@def@ult}
% This sets up all the definitions used in \cs{@makechapterhead}
% and \cs{@makeschapterhead}.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printchapternonum} to \cs{@chs@def@ult}}
% \begin{macro}{\chapterheadstart}
% \begin{macro}{\printchaptername}
% \begin{macro}{\chapternamenum}
% \begin{macro}{\printchapternum}
% \begin{macro}{\afterchapternum}
% \begin{macro}{\printchapternum}
% \begin{macro}{\printchapternonum}
% \begin{macro}{\printchaptertitle}
% \begin{macro}{\afterchaptertitle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@chs@def@ult}{%
\def\chapterheadstart{\vspace*{\beforechapskip}}
\def\printchaptername{\chapnamefont \@chapapp}
\def\chapternamenum{\space}
\def\printchapternum{\chapnumfont \thechapter}
\def\afterchapternum{\par\nobreak\vskip \midchapskip}
\def\printchapternonum{}
\def\printchaptertitle##1{\chaptitlefont ##1}
\def\afterchaptertitle{\par\nobreak\vskip \afterchapskip}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapnamefont}
% \begin{macro}{\chapnumfont}
% \begin{macro}{\chaptitlefont}
% Fonts for setting the chapter number, name (e.g., Chapter) and title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\newcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\newcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\beforechapskip}
% \begin{macro}{\midchapskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterchapskip}
% Lengths separating the various parts of a chapter heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\beforechapskip}\setlength{\beforechapskip}{50pt}
\newlength{\midchapskip}\setlength{\midchapskip}{20pt}
\newlength{\afterchapskip}\setlength{\afterchapskip}{40pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@m@mschapter}
% This deals with the new optional argument for starred chapters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@m@mschapter}[2][\@empty]{%
\@schapter{#2}%
\ifx \@empty#1
\def\f@rhdr{#2}%
\else % opt arg
\def\f@rhdr{#1}%
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-10}%
\chaptermark{#1}%
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{\value{maxsecnumdepth}}%
\fi
\ifanappendix
\memappchapstarinfo{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
\else
\memchapstarinfo{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
% \cs{@schapter}\marg{long} typesets the title of a
% \cs{chapter*}. It is easier than the \cs{@chapter} as there is no number
% to worry about.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Changed \cs{@schapter} for article option}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Major rewrite of \cs{@schapter}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@schapter}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@schapter}[1]{%
\ifartopt
\@makeschapterhead{#1}%
\@afterheading
\else
\if@twocolumn
\@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]%
\else
\@makeschapterhead{#1}%
\fi
\@afterheading
\fi
\M@gettitle{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makeschapterhead}
% This \emph{really} typesets a \cs{chapter*}, and is similar to \cs{@makechapterhead}.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printchapternonum} to
% \cs{@makeschapterhead}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@makeschapterhead#1{%
\chapterheadstart
{\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
\printchapternonum
\interlinepenalty\@M
\printchaptertitle{#1}
\afterchaptertitle
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Chapter styling}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\makechapterstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\chapterstyle}
% \cs{chapterstyle}\marg{style} is like \cs{pagestyle}, except it's for
% chapters.
%
% \cs{makechapterstyle}\marg{style}\marg{text} creates
% or overrides the \meta{style} chapter style defining it as \meta{text}
% So, \verb?\makechapterstyle{fred}{code}? specifies that the chapter style
% \pstyle{fred}
% is defined as the macro \verb?\chs@fred{code}?,
% and \verb?\chapterstyle{fred}? calls the macro \cs{chs@fred}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makechapterstyle}[2]{\@namedef{chs@#1}{\@chs@def@ult #2}}
\newcommand{\chapterstyle}[1]{\@nameuse{chs@#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Set the \pstyle{default} chapter style.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added code when making the default chapterstyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{default}{%
\renewcommand{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{50pt}
\setlength{\midchapskip}{20pt}
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{40pt}
}
\chapterstyle{default}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@section}
% The \pstyle{section} chapter style. It prints the heading as though it
% were a section.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Made \cs{chapnumfont} change in section chapterstyle explicit}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{section}{%
\renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
\renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
\renewcommand{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \thechapter\space}
\renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@article}
% The \pstyle{article} chapter style. It prints the heading as though it
% were a section in an \Lpack{article} class document.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added article chapterstyle}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Made \cs{chapnumfont} change in article chapterstyle explicit}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Replaced \cs{space} by \cs{quad} in article chapterstyle
% (from patch v1.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{article}{%
\renewcommand{\chapterheadstart}{\vspace{\beforechapskip}}
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{3.5ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{2.3ex \@plus .2ex}
\renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
\renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}
\renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}
\renewcommand{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \thechapter\quad}
\renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@hangnum}
% The \pstyle{hangnum} style puts the chapter number in the margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{hangnum}{%
\renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\chaptitlefont}
\settowidth{\chapindent}{\chapnumfont 999}
\renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
\renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand{\printchapternum}{%
\noindent\llap{\makebox[\chapindent][l]{\chapnumfont \thechapter}}}
\renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapindent}
% \begin{macro}{\chs@companion}
% The \pstyle{companion} style is like that in the \textit{\LaTeX{} Companion}
% series. It requires the |\chapindent| length. The user needs
% to be careful to have a wide enough spine margin on verso pages
% if the title may appear on a verso page.
% \changes{v0.31}{2001/07/24}{Changed adjustwidth* to adjustwidth in companion chapterstyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\chapindent}
\makechapterstyle{companion}{%
\renewcommand{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\LARGE\scshape}
\renewcommand{\printchaptername}{\raggedleft\chapnamefont \@chapapp}
\renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\Huge}
\setlength{\chapindent}{\marginparsep}
\addtolength{\chapindent}{\marginparwidth}
\renewcommand{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
\begin{adjustwidth}{}{-\chapindent}
\raggedleft \chaptitlefont ##1\par\nobreak
\end{adjustwidth}}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@demo}
% An exotic chapter style for demonstration purposes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{demo}{
\renewcommand{\printchaptername}{\centering}
\renewcommand{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \numtoName{\c@chapter}}
\renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\sffamily}
\renewcommand{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
\hrule\vskip\onelineskip \raggedleft \chaptitlefont ##1}
\renewcommand{\afterchaptertitle}%
{\vskip\onelineskip \hrule\vskip \afterchapskip}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsection{Lower level headings}
%
% These commands all make use of \cs{@startsection}. However,
% for the purposes of the class the kernel version needs modification
% to support:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item make short pages (where a section heading is moved to the top
% of the next page) ragged bottom;
% \item provide headings with two optional arguments.
% \end{itemize}
%
%
% We will tweak \cs{@startsection} so that a short page (where a section
% heading is moved from the bottom of the page to the top of the next)
% can be set \cs{raggedbottom}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifraggedbottomsection}
% |\raggedbottomsectiontrue| for ragged short pages.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{ifraggedbottomsection}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifraggedbottomsection
\raggedbottomsectionfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bottomsectionskip}
% Decreasing this length increases short page bottom flushness.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{bottomsectionskip}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\bottomsectionskip}
\setlength{\bottomsectionskip}{10mm}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% We will add a second optional argument for \cs{section}, etc.
% See the \ctt{} thread \textit{`Long headers'} 15 Jan 2003.
%
% The kernel \cs{@dblarg} is used in situations where the default
% value for an optional argument is the same as the required argument.
% Schematically, \\
% |\@dblarg -> Main, Main| \\
% The macros \cs{@trplargomm} and \cs{@trplargoom} are extensions to this
% idea for two optional arguments.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@trplargomm}
% \begin{macro}{\@xtrplargomm}
% \begin{macro}{\@xxtrplarg}
% |\@trplargomm -> Opt, Main, Main|
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@trplargomm}[1]{%
\@ifnextchar[{\@xtrplargomm{#1}}%
{\@xxtrplarg{#1}}}
\long\def\@xtrplargomm#1[#2]{\@dblarg{#1[#2]}}
\newcommand{\@xxtrplarg}[2]{#1[{#2}][{#2}]{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@trplargoom}
% \begin{macro}{\@xtrplargoom}
% |\@trplargoom -> Opt, Opt, Main|
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@trplargoom}[1]{%
\@ifnextchar[{\@xtrplargoom{#1}}%
{\@xxtrplarg{#1}}}
\long\def\@xtrplargoom#1[#2]{%
\@ifnextchar[{#1[{#2}]}%
{#1[{#2}][{#2}]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memsecinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\memsecstarinfo}
% \verb?\memsecinfo{secname}{\thenum}{toc}{head}{title}? \\
% \verb?\memsecstarinfo{secname}{title}? \\
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memsecinfo}[5]{}
\newcommand*{\memsecstarinfo}[2]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@startsection}
% \begin{macro}{\m@msecn@me}
% Change kernel \cs{@startsection} to: \\
% \begin{itemize}
% \item Make short pages raggedbottom. This is based on the thread
% \textit{Can \cs{flushbottom} and \cs{section} be made to live together?}
% on \ctt{} in September 2002.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Modified \cs{@startsection} for raggedbottoming}
% \item add an extra optional argument.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added extra optional arg to \cs{@startsection}
% (from patch v1.4)}
% \end{itemize}
% The original is in \file{ltsect.dtx}. \\
% \cs{@startsection}\marg{name}\marg{level}\marg{indent} \\
% \hspace*{1.5in} \marg{beforeskip}\marg{afterskip}\marg{style}
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\@startsection}[6]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do raggedbottom stuff.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifraggedbottomsection\if@nobreak\else
\vskip\z@\@plus\bottomsectionskip
\penalty\z@
\vskip\z@\@plus -\bottomsectionskip
\fi\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Save the section name.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\m@msecn@me{#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% The original code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
\par
\@tempskipa #4\relax
\@afterindenttrue
\ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@
\@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse
\fi
\if@nobreak
\everypar{}%
\else
\addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% For the extra optional argument, change the original \verb?\@dblarg{\@sect{...?
% below to \verb?\@trplargoom{\M@sect{...?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifstar
{\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}%
{\@trplargoom{\M@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\M@sect}
% At least the \Lpack{hyperref} and \Lpack{nameref} packages, and
% possibly other packages, modify the kernel \cs{@sect} assuming 8 args.
% That's why I've called my version, which has 9 args, something
% else (i.e., \cs{M@sect}). This version also has the support
% for title referencing. \\
% \cs{M@sect}\marg{name}\marg{level}\marg{indent}\marg{beforeskip}\marg{afterskip}\marg{style}\\ \hspace*{0.5in} \oarg{toc}\oarg{head}\marg{title}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{M@sect}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\M@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7][#8]#9{%
\ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{#8}\else\M@gettitle{#7}\fi
\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
\let\@svsec\@empty
\memsecinfo{#1}{}{#7}{#8}{#9}%
\else
\refstepcounter{#1}%
\protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
\memsecinfo{#1}{\@nameuse{the#1}}{#7}{#8}{#9}%
\fi
\@tempskipa #5\relax
\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
\begingroup
#6{%
\@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
\interlinepenalty \@M #9\@@par}%
\endgroup
\csname #1mark\endcsname{#8}%
\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
\fi
#7}%
\else
\def\@svsechd{%
#6{\hskip #3\relax
\@svsec #9}%
\csname #1mark\endcsname{#8}%
\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
\fi
#7}}%
\fi
\@xsect{#5}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
% Add hook for name reference to \cs{section*} etc. \\
% \cs{@ssect}\marg{indent}\marg{beforeskip}\marg{afterskip}\marg{style}\marg{title}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@mem@old@ssect\@ssect
\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{%
\M@gettitle{#5}%
\memsecstarinfo{#1}{\m@msecn@me}{#5}%
\@mem@old@ssect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\section}
% A normal heading with white space above and below and no indentation
% of the first paragraph.
% By default the heading is set in a \verb?\Large\bfseries? font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\section}{%
\sechook%
\@startsection{section}{1}% level 1
{\secindent}% heading indent
{\beforesecskip}% skip before the heading
{\aftersecskip}% skip after the heading
{\normalfont\secheadstyle}} % font
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sechook}
% \begin{macro}{\setsechook}
% |\sechook| is called at the start of a |\section| and
% |\setsechook{|\meta{code}|}| redefines it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sechook}{}
\newcommand{\setsechook}[1]{\renewcommand{\sechook}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\secindent}
% \begin{macro}{\beforesecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\aftersecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\secheadstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\setsecindent}
% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setaftersecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setsecheadstyle}
% |\secindent| is the indentation of the section heading from the left margin,
% |\beforesecskip| and |\aftersecskip| specify the white space before
% and after the heading, and |\secheadstyle| specifies the heading style.
% These are set to the default values for the \Lpack{book} class,
% except that the heading will be |\raggedright|, thus preventing
% hyphenation. The
% |\set...| commands are for the user to change the values.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\secindent}
\newcommand{\setsecindent}[1]{\setlength{\secindent}{#1}}
\setsecindent{\z@}
\newskip\beforesecskip
\newcommand{\setbeforesecskip}[1]{\setlength{\beforesecskip}{#1}}
\setbeforesecskip{-3.5ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}
\newskip\aftersecskip
\newcommand{\setaftersecskip}[1]{\setlength{\aftersecskip}{#1}}
\setaftersecskip{2.3ex \@plus .2ex}
\newcommand{\secheadstyle}{}
\newcommand{\setsecheadstyle}[1]{\renewcommand{\secheadstyle}{#1}}
\setsecheadstyle{\Large\bfseries\raggedright}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
% A normal heading with white space above and below and no indentation
% of the first paragraph.
% By default the heading is set in a |\large\bfseries| font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subsection}{%
\subsechook%
\@startsection{subsection}{2}% level 2
{\subsecindent}% heading indent
{\beforesubsecskip}% skip before the heading
{\aftersubsecskip}% skip after the heading
{\normalfont\subsecheadstyle}} % font
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsechook}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsechook}
% |\subsechook| is called at the start of a |\subsection| and
% |\setsubsechook{|\meta{code}|}| redefines it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subsechook}{}
\newcommand{\setsubsechook}[1]{\renewcommand{\subsechook}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsecindent}
% \begin{macro}{\beforesubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\aftersubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subsecheadstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsecindent}
% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setaftersubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsecheadstyle}
% The macros for controlling |\subsection| headings.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\subsecindent}
\newcommand{\setsubsecindent}[1]{\setlength{\subsecindent}{#1}}
\setsubsecindent{\z@}
\newskip\beforesubsecskip
\newcommand{\setbeforesubsecskip}[1]{\setlength{\beforesubsecskip}{#1}}
\setbeforesubsecskip{-3.25ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}
\newskip\aftersubsecskip
\newcommand{\setaftersubsecskip}[1]{\setlength{\aftersubsecskip}{#1}}
\setaftersubsecskip{1.5ex \@plus .2ex}
\newcommand{\subsecheadstyle}{}
\newcommand{\setsubsecheadstyle}[1]{\renewcommand{\subsecheadstyle}{#1}}
\setsubsecheadstyle{\large\bfseries\raggedright}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
% A normal heading with white space above and below and no indentation
% of the first paragraph.
% By default the heading is set in a |\normalsize\bfseries| font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subsubsection}{%
\subsubsechook%
\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}% level 3
{\subsubsecindent}% heading indent
{\beforesubsubsecskip}% skip before the heading
{\aftersubsubsecskip}% skip after the heading
{\normalfont\subsubsecheadstyle}} % font
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsechook}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsubsechook}
% |\subsubsechook| is called at the start of a |\subsubsection| and
% |\setsubsubsechook{|\meta{code}|}| redefines it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subsubsechook}{}
\newcommand{\setsubsubsechook}[1]{\renewcommand{\subsubsechook}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsecindent}
% \begin{macro}{\beforesubsubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\aftersubsubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsecheadstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsubsecindent}
% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesubsubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setaftersubsubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsubsecheadstyle}
% The macros for controlling |\subsubsection| headings.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\subsubsecindent}
\newcommand{\setsubsubsecindent}[1]{%
\setlength{\subsubsecindent}{#1}}
\setsubsubsecindent{\z@}
\newskip\beforesubsubsecskip
\newcommand{\setbeforesubsubsecskip}[1]{%
\setlength{\beforesubsubsecskip}{#1}}
\setbeforesubsubsecskip{-3.25ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}
\newskip\aftersubsubsecskip
\newcommand{\setaftersubsubsecskip}[1]{%
\setlength{\aftersubsubsecskip}{#1}}
\setaftersubsubsecskip{1.5ex \@plus .2ex}
\newcommand{\subsubsecheadstyle}{}
\newcommand{\setsubsubsecheadstyle}[1]{%
\renewcommand{\subsubsecheadstyle}{#1}}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries\raggedright}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
% A runin heading with white space above and to the right of the heading.
% By default the heading is set in a |\normalsize\bfseries| font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\paragraph}{%
\parahook%
\@startsection{paragraph}{4}% level 4
{\paraindent}% heading indent
{\beforeparaskip}% skip before the heading
{\afterparaskip}% skip after the heading
{\normalfont\paraheadstyle}} % font
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\parahook}
% \begin{macro}{\setparahook}
% |\parahook| is called at the start of a |\paragraph| and
% |\setparahook{|\meta{code}|}| redefines it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\parahook}{}
\newcommand{\setparahook}[1]{\renewcommand{\parahook}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\paraindent}
% \begin{macro}{\beforeparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\paraheadstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\setparaindent}
% \begin{macro}{\setbeforeparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setafterparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setparaheadstyle}
% The macros for controlling |\paragraph| headings.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\paraindent}
\newcommand{\setparaindent}[1]{\setlength{\paraindent}{#1}}
\setparaindent{\z@}
\newskip\beforeparaskip
\newcommand{\setbeforeparaskip}[1]{\setlength{\beforeparaskip}{#1}}
\setbeforeparaskip{3.25ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
\newskip\afterparaskip
\newcommand{\setafterparaskip}[1]{\setlength{\afterparaskip}{#1}}
\setafterparaskip{-1em}
\newcommand{\paraheadstyle}{}
\newcommand{\setparaheadstyle}[1]{\renewcommand{\paraheadstyle}{#1}}
\setparaheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
% A runin heading with white space above and to the right of the heading.
% By default the heading is set in a |\normalsize\bfseries| font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subparagraph}{%
\subparahook%
\@startsection{subparagraph}{5}% level 5
{\subparaindent}% heading indent
{\beforesubparaskip}% skip before the heading
{\aftersubparaskip}% skip after the heading
{\normalfont\subparaheadstyle}} % font
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subparahook}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubparahook}
% |\subparahook| is called at the start of a |\subparagraph| and
% |\setsubparahook{|\meta{code}|}| redefines it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subparahook}{}
\newcommand{\setsubparahook}[1]{\renewcommand{\subparahook}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subparaindent}
% \begin{macro}{\beforesubparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\aftersubparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subparaheadstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubparaindent}
% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesubparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setaftersubparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubparaheadstyle}
% The macros for controlling |\subparagraph| headings.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\subparaindent}
\newcommand{\setsubparaindent}[1]{%
\setlength{\subparaindent}{#1}}
\setsubparaindent{\parindent}
\newskip\beforesubparaskip
\newcommand{\setbeforesubparaskip}[1]{%
\setlength{\beforesubparaskip}{#1}}
\setbeforesubparaskip{3.25ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
\newskip\aftersubparaskip
\newcommand{\setaftersubparaskip}[1]{%
\setlength{\aftersubparaskip}{#1}}
\setaftersubparaskip{-1em}
\newcommand{\subparaheadstyle}{}
\newcommand{\setsubparaheadstyle}[1]{%
\renewcommand{\subparaheadstyle}{#1}}
\setsubparaheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sethangfrom}
% The macro |\sethangfrom{|\meta{code}|}| is a user-level command
% for changing the definition of |\@hangfrom|. Use |#1| in \meta{code}
% for the argument to |\@hangfrom| (or |##1| if used inside another macro).
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{sethangfrom}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sethangfrom}[1]{\renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setsecnumformat}
% The macro |\setsecnumformat{|\meta{code}|}| is a user-level command
% for changing the definition of |\@seccntformat|. Use |#1| in \meta{code}
% for the argument to |\@seccntformat| (or |##1| if used inside another macro).
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{setsecnumformat}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setsecnumformat}[1]{\renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hangsecnum}
% \begin{macro}{\defaultsecnum}
% These are declarations for putting sectional numbers in the margin,
% or the default sectional number formatting.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{hangsecnum} and \cs{defaultsecnum}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\hangsecnum}{%
\def\@seccntformat##1{\llap{\csname the##1\endcsname\quad}}}
\newcommand{\defaultsecnum}{%
\def\@seccntformat##1{\csname the##1\endcsname\quad}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Anonymous headings}
%
% \begin{macro}{\plainbreak}
% |\plainbreak{|\meta{num}|}| generates \meta{num} blanks lines and
% suppresses the indentation of a following paragraph. The starred
% version, |\plainbreak*|, does not suppress paragraph indentation.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added starred version of \cs{plainbreak}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\plainbreak}{\@ifstar{\@spbreak}{\@pbreak}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@pbreak}
% \begin{macro}{\@spbreak}
% These are the internal forms for the two versions of |\plainbreak|.
% The code for |\@pbreak| is almost a straight copy of code posted to
% \ctt{} by Donald Arseneau on 2001/03/26.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@pbreak}[1]{\par
\penalty -100
\vskip #1\onelineskip \@plus 2\onelineskip
\penalty -20
\vskip \z@ \@plus -2\onelineskip
\@afterindentfalse
\@afterheading}
\newcommand*{\@spbreak}[1]{\par
\penalty -100
\vskip #1\onelineskip \@plus 2\onelineskip
\penalty -20
\vskip \z@ \@plus -2\onelineskip
\@afterindenttrue
\@afterheading}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\fancybreak}
% |\fancybreak{|\meta{text}|}| typesets \meta{text} centered. For example,
% |\fancybreak{{*}\\{* * *}\\{*}}|. It suppresses indentation of the
% following paragraph. The starred version leaves indentation as is.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added starred version of \cs{fancybreak}}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Tweaked \cs{fancybreak} to remove underfull hbox}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\fancybreak}{\@ifstar{\@sfbreak}{\@fbreak}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@fbreak}
% \begin{macro}{\@sfbreak}
% These are the internal forms for the two versions of |\fancybreak|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@fbreak}[1]{\par
\penalty -100
\noindent\parbox{\linewidth}{\centering #1}\null
\penalty -20
%% \vskip -\onelineskip
\@afterindentfalse
\@afterheading}
\newcommand{\@sfbreak}[1]{\par
\penalty -100
\noindent\parbox{\linewidth}{\centering #1}\null
\penalty -20
%% \vskip -\onelineskip
\@afterindenttrue
\@afterheading}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\plainfancybreak}
% The |\plainfancybreak{|\meta{space}|}{|\meta{num}|}{|\meta{text}|}| acts
% like |\plainbreak{|\meta{num}|}| in the middle of a page and like
% |\fancybreak{|\meta{text}|}| at the bottom of a page. The \meta{space}
% argument is the vertical space required for the \meta{num} blank lines
% and some additional lines of text. From experiments, it seems that
% \meta{space} should be at least (3+\meta{num}) lines (|\onelineskip|).
% There is also a starred version, |\plainfancybreak*|, to match the other
% starred break commands.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{plainfancybreak} and supporting macros}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\plainfancybreak}{\@ifstar{\@spfbreak}{\@pfbreak}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@pfbreak}
% \begin{macro}{\@spfbreak}
% These are the internal macros for the unstarred and starred versions
% of |\plainfancybreak|. They essentially do the same thing, except they call,
% respectively, the unstarred and starred internal versions of |\plainbreak|
% and |\fancybreak|. The code for checking the amount of space left on the
% page is from an early, and abandoned, version of the code for |\needspace|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@pfbreak}[3]{\par
\@tempdimc\pagegoal \advance\@tempdimc-\pagetotal
\ifdim #1>\@tempdimc \@fbreak{#3}\else \@pbreak{#2}\fi}
\newcommand{\@spfbreak}[3]{\par
\@tempdimc\pagegoal \advance\@tempdimc-\pagetotal
\ifdim #1>\@tempdimc \@sfbreak{#3}\else \@spbreak{#2}\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% From the thread \textit{Customizing section hooks in memoir.cls} on \ctt{}
% in October 2002 it appeared that |\plainfancybreak| may be fragile.
% Donald Arseneau said that |\plainfancybreak| guessed at the amount
% of space available and gave code based on a modified output routine
% to make it more robust. The following code is based on that thread.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added lots of code for new \cs{fpbreak}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pen@ltyabovefpbreak}
% \begin{macro}{\pen@ltybelowfpbreak}
% Penalities for communication with the output routine.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\pen@ltyabovepfbreak}{2}
\newcommand*{\pen@ltybelowpfbreak}{-4}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pfbreakskip}
% The vertical space taken by the plain and fancy breaks.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\pfbreakskip}
\setlength{\pfbreakskip}{2\baselineskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pfbreakdisplay}
% This is the fancybreak display, which must fit into |\pfbreakskip|
% vertical space.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pfbreakdisplay}{*\quad*\quad*}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pfbre@kdispl@y}
% Typesets |\pfbreakdisplay| vertically and horizontally centered.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\pfbre@kdispl@y{\vbox to 1\pfbreakskip{\vss
\hb@xt@ \columnwidth{\hss \pfbreakdisplay \hss}%
\vss}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nopfbreakOutput}
% Save the current output routine.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\nopfbreakOutput{\the\output}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pfbreakOutput}
% Special output to handle the |\pfbreak|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\pfbreakOutput{%
\ifnum\outputpenalty=\pen@ltyabovepfbreak
\nopfbreakOutput
\pfbre@kdispl@y
\nobreak
\vskip-\pfbreakskip
\else\ifnum\outputpenalty=\pen@ltybelowpfbreak
\unvbox 255\relax
\nobreak
\vskip-\pfbreakskip
\pfbre@kdispl@y
\break
\else
\nopfbreakOutput
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\output}
% Use the new |\pfbreak| output routine.
% \begin{macrocode}
\output={\pfbreakOutput}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pfbreak}
% Typesets a plain break in the middle of the page, otherwise
% a fancybreak at either the bottom or top of the page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pfbreak}{\@ifstar{\@spfbreakgap}{\@pfbreakgap}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@pfbreakgap}
% Unstarred version of |\pfbreak|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@pfbreakgap}{%
\par {%
\skip@\lastskip
\nobreak
\vskip -\ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \maxdepth
\else\ifdim\prevdepth>-1000pt\prevdepth
\else\ifinner 0pt
\else \pagedepth
\fi \fi \fi
\vskip -\skip@
\ifdim\skip@<\pfbreakskip
\advance\skip@ -1\skip@ \advance\skip@ 1\pfbreakskip
\fi
\penalty\pen@ltyabovepfbreak
\vskip\skip@
\penalty\pen@ltybelowpfbreak
}
\@afterindentfalse
\@afterheading
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@spfbreakgap}
% Starred version of |\pfbreak|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@spfbreakgap}{%
\par {%
\skip@\lastskip
\nobreak
\vskip -\ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \maxdepth
\else\ifdim\prevdepth>-1000pt\prevdepth
\else\ifinner 0pt
\else \pagedepth
\fi \fi \fi
\vskip -\skip@
\ifdim\skip@<\pfbreakskip
\advance\skip@ -1\skip@ \advance\skip@ 1\pfbreakskip
\fi
\penalty\pen@ltyabovepfbreak
\vskip\skip@
\penalty\pen@ltybelowpfbreak
}
\@afterindenttrue
\@afterheading
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% While on the subject of breaks\ldots
%
% \begin{macro}{\noprelistbreak}
% Putting this immediately before a list (e.g., |itemize|) should
% prevent a page break at that point.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{noprelistbreak}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\noprelistbreak}{\@nobreaktrue\nopagebreak}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Appendices}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifanappendix}
% \begin{macro}{\anappendixtrue}
% \begin{macro}{\anappendixfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
% In the standard \Lpack{book} class the |\appendix| command does the
% following:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item Resets the chapter and section counters to zero
% \item Sets |\@chapapp| to |\appendixname|.
% \item Redefines |\thechapter| to produce alphabetic appendix numbers.
% \end{itemize}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{ifanappendix} (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifanappendix
\anappendixfalse
\newcommand{\appendix}{\par
\setcounter{chapter}{0}%
\setcounter{section}{0}%
\gdef\@chapapp{\appendixname}%
\gdef\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}%
\anappendixtrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% This class provides additional appendixing capabilities.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\appendixpage}
% \begin{macro}{\appendixpage*}
% The command to typeset a page announcing the start of the appendices.
% It is based on the |\part| definition. The normal version
% makes an entry in the ToC but the starred version does not.
% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/31}{Changed implementation of \cs{appendixpage}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\appendixpage}{%
\@ifstar{\@sapppage}{\@apppage}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memapppageinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\memapppagestarinfo}
% \verb?\memapppageinfo{\appendixpagename}? \\
% \verb?\memapppagestarinfo{\appendixpagename}? \\
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memapppageinfo}[1]{}
\newcommand*{\memapppagestarinfo}[1]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@apppage}
% |\@apppage| typesets an appendix page and makes an entry in the ToC.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@apppage{%
\@setuppart
\addappheadtotoc
\partmark{\appendixpagename}%
\memapppageinfo{\appendixpagename}%
{\centering
\interlinepenalty \@M
\normalfont
\printparttitle{\appendixpagename}\par}%
\@endpart}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@sapppage}
% |\@sapppage| typesets an appendix page and does not make an entry in the ToC.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@sapppage{%
\@setuppart
\partmark{\appendixpagename}%
\memapppagestarinfo{\appendixpagename}%
{\centering
\interlinepenalty \@M
\normalfont
\printparttitle{\appendixpagename}\par}%
\@endpart}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\addappheadtotoc}
% This command adds an `appendices' line to the ToC. The style is the same
% as used in \Lpack{tocbibind} for the `List of figures' line. That is,
% as a Chapter heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\addappheadtotoc{\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\appendixtocname}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ppsavesec}
% \begin{macro}{\@pprestoresec}
% \begin{macro}{\@ppsaveapp}
% \begin{macro}{\restoreapp}
% For the |appendices| environment we need to save and restore the
% main document division number and the appendix number. The |\restoreapp|
% command is the one for the user.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{@ppsavesec}
\newcounter{@ppsaveapp}
\setcounter{@ppsaveapp}{0}
\newcommand{\@ppsavesec}{%
\setcounter{@ppsavesec}{\value{chapter}}}
\newcommand{\@pprestoresec}{%
\setcounter{chapter}{\value{@ppsavesec}}}
\newcommand{\@ppsaveapp}{%
\setcounter{@ppsaveapp}{\value{chapter}}}
\newcommand{\restoreapp}{%
\setcounter{chapter}{\value{@ppsaveapp}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@resets@pp}
% Resets the appropriate sectioning counters and names. This does almost
% exactly
% what the default |\appendix| command does, except that it saves and
% restores sectional numbering. It saves the sectional number at the start
% and restores the appendix number at the end.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@resets@pp}{%
\par
\@ppsavesec
\setcounter{section}{0}%
\setcounter{chapter}{0}%
\renewcommand\@chapapp{\appendixname}%
\renewcommand\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}%
\restoreapp
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{appendices}
% This is the heart of the package. Start it off by doing the resetting
% done by the |\appendix| command but also save the main counters. At the
% end of the environment save the appendix number and restore the main counters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{appendices}%
{\@resets@pp\anappendixtrue}%
{\@ppsaveapp\@pprestoresec\anappendixfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setthesection}
% The user commands for specifying the numbering style for subappendices.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setthesection}{\thechapter.\Alph{section}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@resets@ppsub}
% Similar to |\@resets@pp| except that it is for use within the
% |subappendices| envirionment; as such, it is a bit simpler.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@resets@ppsub}{
\par
\setcounter{section}{0}
\renewcommand{\thesection}{\setthesection}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnamesubappendix}
% Switch for adding an `appendix' name before subappendix numbers.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/13}{Added \cs{ifnamesubappendix}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifnamesubappendix
\namesubappendixfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{subappendices}
% The environment for subappendices. Start it off by doing the resetting
% of the |\section| command.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/13}{Modified subappendices environment}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{subappendices}{%
\@resets@ppsub
% \end{macrocode}
% Change the definition of |\addappheadtotoc| to give a |section| entry.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Fixed bookmark for \cs{appendixpage} (mempatch v2.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\addappheadtotoc{\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixtocname}}
% \end{macrocode}
% To implement the naming we do cunning things with the
% |\@seccntformat| command.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnamesubappendix
\def\sectionname{\appendixname}
\def\@seccntformat##1{\@ifundefined{##1name}%
{}{\csname ##1name\endcsname\ }%
\csname the##1\endcsname\quad}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% That's it.
% \begin{macrocode}
}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@formatsecmark@pp}
% Formats the page header for a redefined |\sectionmark|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@formatsecmark@pp}[1]{%
\MakeUppercase{\appendixname\space
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
\thesection\quad
\fi
#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Appendixpage-like pages}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{newleadpage} and friends (mempatch v3.0)}
%
%
% This capability was suggested to me by Lars Madsen on 2004/11/28.
%
% \begin{macro}{\leadpagetoclevel}
% \begin{macro}{\newleadpage}
% \begin{macro}{\renewleadpage}
% \verb?\newleadpage[]{}{}? creates new macros
% called \verb?\cmdname? and \verb?\cmdname*? that when called typeset a
% page like an Appendixpage, with a title \verb?<title>? using
% page style \verb?<page-style>? (default empty). The
% plain version adds an entry to the ToC but the starred \verb?\cmdname*?
% does not. \cs{renewleadpage} changes the definitions.
%
% The ToC entry style is set by \cs{leadpagetoclevel} (default chapter). To have a part-type entry: \\
% \verb?\renewcommand*{\leadpagetoclevel}{part}?. \\
% The \cs{partmark} command is used if you need to mark the title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\leadpagetoclevel}{chapter}
\newcommand*{\newleadpage}[3][empty]{%
\@namedef{#2}{\@ifstar{\dlfm@msapppage{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
{\dlfm@mapppage{#1}{#2}{#3}}}}
\newcommand*{\renewleadpage}[3][empty]{%
\@namedef{#2}{\@ifstar{\dlfm@msapppage{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
{\dlfm@mapppage{#1}{#2}{#3}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memleadpageinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\memleadpagestarinfo}
% \verb?\memleadpageinfo{pstyle}{name}{title}? \\
% \verb?\memleadpagestarinfo{pstyle}{name}{title}? \\
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memleadpageinfo}[3]{}
\newcommand{\memleadpagestarinfo}[3]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dlfm@msapppage}
% \begin{macro}{\dlfm@mapppage}
% Implement the starred and regular versions of \verb?\(re)newleadpage?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\dlfm@msapppage}[3]{%
\@setuppart
\partmark{#3}%
\memleadpagestarinfo{#1}{#2}{#3}%
{\centering
\interlinepenalty \@M
\normalfont
\printparttitle{#3}\par
\thispagestyle{#1}}%
\dlfm@m@endpart{#1}}
\newcommand*{\dlfm@mapppage}[3]{%
\@setuppart
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{\leadpagetoclevel}{#3}%
\partmark{#3}%
\memleadpageinfo{#1}{#2}{#3}%
{\centering
\interlinepenalty \@M
\normalfont
\printparttitle{#3}\par
\thispagestyle{#1}}%
\dlfm@m@endpart{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dlfm@m@endpart}
% Finishes off a part-like page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\dlfm@m@endpart}[1]{%
\if@twoside
\if@openright
\null
\thispagestyle{#1}%
\newpage
\fi
\fi
\if@tempswa
\twocolumn
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \subsection{Paragraphs}
%
% \subsubsection{Ragged}
%
% The kernel code for raggedright (in \file{ltmiscen.dtx}):
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\raggedright{%
% \let\\\@centercr\@rightskip\@flushglue \rightskip\@rightskip
% \leftskip\z@skip
% \parindent\z@}
% %% \@flushglue = 0pt plus 1fil %% from ltalloc.dtx
% \end{verbatim}
% produces very ragged text with no paragraph indent.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ragrparindent}
% \begin{macro}{\raggedyright}
% |\raggedyright|\oarg{plus} provides controllable ragged right paragraphs.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/12/10}{Added \cs{raggedyright}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\ragrparindent
\setlength{\ragrparindent}{\parindent}
\newcommand{\raggedyright}[1][2em]{%
\let\\\@centercr\@rightskip \z@ \@plus #1\relax \rightskip\@rightskip
\leftskip\z@skip
\parindent\ragrparindent}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Hanging}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hangfrom}
% This is a user-level
% version of the kernel \cs{@hangfrom} macro (only the name is
% changed) as defined in \file{ltsec.dtx}.
%
% \cs{hangfrom}\marg{text} puts \meta{text} in a box and makes a hanging
% paragraph of the following material (a bit like a description item).
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{hangfrom} (from patch v1.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\hangfrom}[1]{%
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{{#1}}%
\hangindent \wd\@tempboxa\noindent\box\@tempboxa}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hangpara}
% \cs{hangpara}\marg{indent}\marg{afternum} at the start of a
% paragraph will make it hung. If \meta{indent} is positive the left
% will be indented, otherwise the right. If \meta{afternum}, say N,
% is positive the N+1 th lines onwards will be indented. For N negative,
% the first N lines will be indented.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\hangpara}[2]{\hangindent#1\hangafter#2\noindent}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{hangparas}
% \verb?\begin{hangparas}?\marg{indent}\marg{afternum} hangs
% a series of paragraphs.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{hangparas}[2]{\setlength{\parindent}{\z@}
\everypar={\hangpara{#1}{#2}}}{\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
%
%
% \section{Lists}
%
% \subsection{General List Parameters}
%
% The following commands are used to set the default values for the list
% environment's parameters. See the \LaTeX{} manual for an explanation
% of the meanings of the parameters. Defaults for the list
% environment are set as follows. First, |\rightmargin|,
% |\listparindent| and |\itemindent| are set to 0pt. Then, for a Kth
% level list, the command |\@listK| is called, where `K' denotes `i',
% '`i', ... , `vi'. (I.e., |\@listiii| is called for a third-level
% list.) By convention, |\@listK| should set |\leftmargin| to
% |\leftmarginK|.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\leftmargin}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmargini}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginii}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiii}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiv}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginv}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginvi}
% For efficiency, level-one list's values are defined at top level, and
% |\@listi| is defined to set only |\leftmargin|.
%
% In two column mode the margins should be smaller than in one column typesetting.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
\setlength{\leftmargini}{2em}
\else
\setlength{\leftmargini}{2.5em}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% The value of |\leftmargin| has to be set at this outer level.
% \begin{macrocode}
\leftmargin \leftmargini
% \end{macrocode}
% Lower level list margins are calculated so that they are indented
% more than the label in an outer list.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\leftmarginii}{2.2em}
\setlength{\leftmarginiii}{1.87em}
\setlength{\leftmarginiv}{1.7em}
\if@twocolumn
\setlength{\leftmarginv}{.5em}
\setlength{\leftmarginvi}{.5em}
\else
\setlength{\leftmarginv}{1em}
\setlength{\leftmarginvi}{1em}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\itemindent}
% Here we set the |\itemindent| which is the extra indentation before
% a label.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\itemindent}{\z@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\labelsep}
% \begin{macro}{\labelwidth}
% |\labelsep| is the distance between the label and the text of an
% item; |\labelwidth| is the width of the label.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\labelsep}{0.5em}
\setlength{\labelwidth}{\leftmargini}
\addtolength{\labelwidth}{-\labelsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@beginparpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\@endparpenalty}
% These penalties are inserted before and after a list or paragraph
% environment. They are set to a bonus value to encourage page
% breaking at these points.
% \begin{macro}{\@itempenalty}
% This penalty is inserted between list items.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty
\@endparpenalty -\@lowpenalty
\@itempenalty -\@lowpenalty
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\parsepi}
% \begin{macro}{\topsepi}
% \begin{macro}{\itemsepi}
% \begin{macro}{\parsepii}
% \begin{macro}{\topsepii}
% \begin{macro}{\topsepiii}
% Lists may be nested and the exact layout depends on the level
% of nesting. These lengths are used to control the nesting-level
% aspects.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\parsepi}
\newlength{\topsepi}
\newlength{\itemsepi}
\newlength{\parsepii}
\newlength{\topsepii}
\newlength{\topsepiii}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\defaultlists}
% The standard \LaTeX{} classes have list parameters that give some separation
% between lists and |\item|s in a list. This macro sets these values,
% which also depend on the font size.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Introduced \cs{defaultlist} and \cs{tightlist}}
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Changed \cs{defaultlist} and \cs{tightlist} to
% \cs{defaultlists} and \cs{tightlists} respectively,
% and their supports}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\defaultlists}{% %% initialise for 10pt
\setlength\partopsep{2\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
\parsepi= 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepi= 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
\itemsepi= 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
\parsepii= 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepii= 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepiii= 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\ifcase\@ptsize % 0 = 10pt
\or % 1 = 11pt
\setlength\partopsep{3\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
\parsepi= 4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepi= 9\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@
\itemsepi= 4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
\parsepii= 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepii= 4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepiii= 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\or % 2 = 12pt
\setlength\partopsep{3\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\parsepi= 5\p@ \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepi= 10\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus6\p@
\itemsepi= 5\p@ \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
\parsepii= 2.5\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepii= 5\p@ \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepiii= 2.5\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\or % 3 = 13pt %% not available
\or % 4 = 14pt
\setlength\partopsep{4\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\parsepi= 6\p@ \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepi= 12\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus6\p@
\itemsepi= 6\p@ \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
\parsepii= 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepii= 6\p@ \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepiii= 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\or % 5 = 15pt %% not available
\or % 6 = 16pt %% not available
\or % 7 = 17pt
\setlength\partopsep{5\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\parsepi= 7\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepi= 14\p@ \@plus6\p@ \@minus8\p@
\itemsepi= 7\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
\parsepii= 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepii= 7\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepiii= 3.5\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\or % 8 = 18pt %% not available
\or % 9 = 9pt
\setlength\partopsep{2\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
\parsepi= 3.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepi= 7\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@
\itemsepi= 3.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
\parsepii= 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepii= 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepiii= 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\tightlists}
% This macro sets the parameters for lists that have less open vertical
% space in them. I think that these look neater than the defaults.
% Effectively, no additional vertical space is added. If there is a
% blank line before a list, then an extra 1/2 blank line is added before
% \emph{and} after the list (making one blank line in total).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\tightlists}{%
\setlength\partopsep{0.5\onelineskip \@plus 0\p@ \@minus 0\p@}
\parsepi= \parskip
\itemsepi = \p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\topsepi = 0.5\parskip
\parsepii = \parskip
\topsepii = 0.5\parskip
\topsepiii = 0.5\parskip
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@listI}
% \begin{macro}{\@listi}
% |\@listI| defines top level and |\@listi| values of
% |\leftmargin|, |\parsep|, |\topsep|, and |\itemsep|
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\parsep\parsepi
\topsep\topsepi
\itemsep\itemsepi}
\let\@listI\@listi
% \end{macrocode}
% We should initialise these parameters to the standard defaults
% \begin{macrocode}
\defaultlists
\@listi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@listii}
% \begin{macro}{\@listiii}
% \begin{macro}{\@listiv}
% \begin{macro}{\@listv}
% \begin{macro}{\@listvi}
% Here are the same macros for the lower level lists.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
\labelwidth\leftmarginii
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
\topsep\topsepii
\parsep\parsepii
\itemsep\parsep}
\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
\labelwidth\leftmarginiii
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
\topsep\topsepiii
\parsep\z@
\partopsep \p@ \@plus\z@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep\topsep}
\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv
\labelwidth\leftmarginiv
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv
\labelwidth\leftmarginv
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi
\labelwidth\leftmarginvi
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\firmlist}
% \begin{macro}{\tightlist}
% These two macros can be used at the start of a list environment to
% reduce the vertical gaps. |\tightlist| removes all interior spaces
% while |\firmlist| only removes some.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added \cs{firmlist} and reimplemented the
% original \cs{tightlist}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\firmlist}{%
\setlength{\itemsep}{0.5\itemsep}\setlength{\parskip}{0.5\parskip}}
\newcommand{\tightlist}{%
\setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% The space before and after a |trivlist| environment is controlled
% by the |\topsep| and |\partopsep| skips. There are several environments,
% such as |center|, that are defined as a |trivlist|.
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@msavetopsep}
% \begin{macro}{\m@msavepartopsep}
% \begin{macro}{\savetrivseps}
% \begin{macro}{\restoretrivseps}
% Two skips to store the |\topsep| and |\partopsep| values and a means
% of setting them and restoring them.
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Added methods for adjusting the space around
% a trivlist}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newskip\m@msavetopsep
\newskip\m@msavepartopsep
\newcommand*{\savetrivseps}{%
\m@msavetopsep\topsep
\m@msavepartopsep\partopsep}
\newcommand*{\restoretrivseps}{%
\topsep\m@msavetopsep
\partopsep\m@msavepartopsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% Save the initial |\topsep| and |\partopsep| values.
% \begin{macrocode}
\savetrivseps
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\zerotrivseps}
% A macro to zero |\topsep| and |\partopsep|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\zerotrivseps}{%
\topsep\z@
\partopsep\z@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Enumerate}
%
%
% The enumerate environment uses four counters: \Lcount{enumi},
% \Lcount{enumii}, \Lcount{enumiii} and \Lcount{enumiv}, where
% \Lcount{enumN} controls the numbering of the Nth level
% enumeration.
%
% \begin{macro}{\theenumi}
% \begin{macro}{\theenumii}
% \begin{macro}{\theenumiii}
% \begin{macro}{\theenumiv}
% The counters are already defined in \file{latex.dtx}, but their
% representation is changed here.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\theenumi}{\@arabic\c@enumi}
\renewcommand{\theenumii}{\@alph\c@enumii}
\renewcommand{\theenumiii}{\@roman\c@enumiii}
\renewcommand{\theenumiv}{\@Alph\c@enumiv}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumi}
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumii}
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiii}
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiv}
% The label for each item is generated by the commands\\
% |\labelenumi| \ldots\ |\labelenumiv|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\labelenumi}{\theenumi.}
\newcommand{\labelenumii}{\theenumii)}
\newcommand{\labelenumiii}{\theenumiii.}
\newcommand{\labelenumiv}{\theenumiv.}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\p@enumii}
% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiii}
% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiv}
% The expansion of |\p@enumN||\theenumN| defines the output of a
% |\ref| command when referencing an item of the Nth level of an
% enumerated list.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\p@enumii}{\theenumi}
\renewcommand{\p@enumiii}{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
\renewcommand{\p@enumiv}{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% The following is taken directly from David Carlisle's
% \Lpack{enumerate} package.
%
% START OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE AND COMMENTARY
%
% This package gives the enumerate environment an optional argument
% which determines the style in which the counter is printed.
%
% An occurence of one of the tokens |A a I i| or |1| produces the value
% of the counter printed with (respectively) |\Alph \alph \Roman \roman|
% or |\arabic|.
%
% These letters may be surrounded by any strings involving any other
% \TeX\ expressions, however the tokens |A a I i 1| must be inside a
% |{ }| group if they are not to be taken as special.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enlab}
% Internal token register used to build up the label command from the
% optional argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\@enLab
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enQmark}
% This just expands to a `?'. |\ref| will produce this, if no counter
% is printed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enQmark{?}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The next four macros build up the command that will print the item
% label. They each gobble one token or group from the optional argument,
% and add corresponding tokens to the register |\@enLab|. They each end
% with a call to |\@enloop|, which starts the processing of the next
% token.
% \begin{macro}{\@enLabel}
% Add the counter to the label. |#2| will be one of the `special'
% tokens |A a I i 1|, and is thrown away. |#1| will be a command
% like |\Roman|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enLabel#1#2{%
\edef\@enThe{\noexpand#1{\@enumctr}}%
\@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab\csname the\@enumctr\endcsname}%
\@enloop}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enSpace}
% \begin{macro}{\@enSp@ce}
% Add a space to the label. The tricky bit is to gobble the space token,
% as you can not do this with a macro argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enSpace{\afterassignment\@enSp@ce\let\@memtempa= }
\def\@enSp@ce{\@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab\space}\@enloop}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enGroup}
% Add a |{ }| group to the label.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enGroup#1{\@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab{#1}}\@enloop}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enOther}
% Add anything else to the label
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enOther#1{\@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab#1}\@enloop}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enloop}
% \begin{macro}{\@enloop@}
% The body of the main loop.
% Eating tokens this way instead of using |\@tfor| lets you see
% spaces and {\bf all} braces. |\@tfor| would treat {\tt a} and
% |{a}| as special, but not |{{a}}|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enloop{\futurelet\@entemp\@enloop@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enloop@{%
\ifx A\@entemp \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\Alph }\else
\ifx a\@entemp \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\alph }\else
\ifx i\@entemp \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\roman }\else
\ifx I\@entemp \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\Roman }\else
\ifx 1\@entemp \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\arabic}\else
\ifx \@sptoken\@entemp \let\@memtempa\@enSpace \else
\ifx \bgroup\@entemp \let\@memtempa\@enGroup \else
\ifx \@enum@\@entemp \let\@memtempa\@gobble \else
\let\@memtempa\@enOther
% \end{macrocode}
% Hook for possible extensions
% \begin{macrocode}
\@enhook
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Process the current token, then look at the next.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@memtempa}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enhook}
% Hook for possible extensions.
% Some packages may want to extend the number of special characters
% that are associated with counter representations. This feature
% was requested to enable Russian alphabetic counting, but here
% I give an example of a footnote symbol counter, triggered by |*|.
%
% To enable a new counter type based on a letter, you just need
% to add a new |\ifx| clause by analogy with the code above.
% So for example to make |*| trigger footnote symbol counting.
% a package should do the following.
%
% Initialise the hook, in case the package is loaded before
% \textsf{enumerate}.
%\begin{verbatim}
% \providecommand\@enhook{}
%\end{verbatim}
%
% Add to the hook a new |\ifx| clause that associates |*| with the
% |\fnsymbol| counter command.
%\begin{verbatim}
% \g@addto@macro\@enhook{%
% \ifx *\@entemp
% \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\fnsymbol}%
% \fi}
%\end{verbatim}
% This code sequence should work whether it is loaded before or after
% this enumerate package. Any number of new counter types may be added
% in this way.
%
% At this point we just need initialise the hook, taking care not
% to over write any definitions another package may already have added.
% (PRW: as this is now in a class, it can be defined instead of
% |\provide|d).
% \begin{macrocode}
%% \providecommand\@enhook{}
\newcommand\@enhook{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\enumerate}
% The new {\tt enumerate} environment. This is the first half of the
% original enumerate environment. If there is an optional argument, call
% |\@@enum@| to define the label commands, otherwise call
% |\@enum@| which is the second half of the original definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\enumerate{%
\ifnum \@enumdepth >3 \@toodeep\else
\advance\@enumdepth \@ne
\edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}\fi
\@ifnextchar[{\@@enum@}{\@enum@}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@enum@}
% Handle the optional argument..
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@enum@[#1]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Initialise the loop which will break apart the optional argument.
% The command to print the label is built up in |\@enlab|.
% |\@enThe| will be used to define |\theenum|\,$n$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@enLab{}\let\@enThe\@enQmark
% \end{macrocode}
% The |\@enum@| below is never expanded, it is used to detect the end
% of the token list.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@enloop#1\@enum@
% \end{macrocode}
% Issue a warning if we did not find one of the `special' tokens.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\@enThe\@enQmark\@warning{The counter will not be printed.%
^^J\space\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces The label is: \the\@enLab}\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Define |\labelenum|$\,n$ and |\theenum|$\,n$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\edef\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname{\the\@enLab}%
\expandafter\let\csname the\@enumctr\endcsname\@enThe
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the counter to 7 so that we get the width of `vii' if roman
% numbering is in force then set |\leftmargin|$\,n$. to the width of the
% label plus |\labelsep|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\csname c@\@enumctr\endcsname7
\expandafter\settowidth
\csname leftmargin\romannumeral\@enumdepth\endcsname
{\the\@enLab\hspace{\labelsep}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally call |\@enum@| which is the second half of the original
% definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@enum@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enum@}
% All the list parameters have now been defined, so call |\list|. This
% is taken straight from the original definition of |\enumerate|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enum@{\list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}%
{\usecounter{\@enumctr}\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% END OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE AND COMMENTARY
%
%
%
% \subsection{Itemize}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemi}
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemii}
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiii}
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiii}
% Itemization is controlled by the commands: |\labelitemi|,
% |\labelitemii|, etc., which define
% the labels of the various itemization levels: the symbols used are:
% bullet (\textbullet), bold en-dash (\textbf{\textendash}),
% centered asterisk (\textasteriskcentered), and centered dot
% (\textperiodcentered).
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\labelitemi}{\textbullet}
\newcommand{\labelitemii}{\normalfont\bfseries \textendash}
\newcommand{\labelitemiii}{\textasteriskcentered}
\newcommand{\labelitemiv}{\textperiodcentered}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% It seems like a reasonable idea to give the |itemize| environment
% an optional argument to match |enumerate|. Fortunately this seems
% to be much simpler and I might even be able to work it out for myself.
%
% \begin{environment}{itemize}
% This is a hack at the kernel code for |itemize|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\itemize}[1][\@empty]{%
\ifnum \@itemdepth >\thr@@\@toodeep\else
\advance\@itemdepth\@ne
\ifx \@empty #1\else % optional argument
\@namedef{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}{#1}%
\fi
\edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
\expandafter
\list
\csname\@itemitem\endcsname
{\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}%
\fi}
\let\enditemize =\endlist
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \subsection{Description}
%
% The class defines two description environment, the standard one and a `block'
% one.
%
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Now two `description' environments.}
%
% \begin{environment}{description}
% The description environment is defined here -- while the default itemize
% and enumerate environments are defined in \file{latex.dtx}.
%
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{The \texttt{description} environment now matches
% the standard layout.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{description}%
{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
\let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}%
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\descriptionlabel}
% To change the formatting of the label, you must redefine
% |\descriptionlabel|.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\hspace\labelsep
\normalfont\bfseries #1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{blockdescription}
% The `block' description environment.
%
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Renamed original \texttt{description} environment
% to \texttt{blockdescription}.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{blockdescription}%
{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent 0.5em \labelsep 0.5em
\let\makelabel\blockdescriptionlabel}}%
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\blockdescriptionlabel}
% In order to change the formatting of the label, you must redefine
% the macro \cs{blockdescriptionlabel}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\blockdescriptionlabel}[1]{%%% \hspace\labelsep
\normalfont\bfseries #1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Quotation}
%
% \begin{environment}{quotation}
% The quotation environment is defined by making clever use of
% the list environment's parameters. The lines in the environment
% are set smaller than |\textwidth|. The first line of a paragraph
% inside this environment is indented.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{quotation}%
{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em%
\itemindent \listparindent
\rightmargin \leftmargin
\parsep \z@ \@plus\p@}%
\item[]}%
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \subsection{Quote}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{quote}
% The quote environment is like the quotation environment except
% that paragraphs are not indented.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{quote}%
{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}%
\item[]}%
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \subsection{Theorem}
%
% This document class does not define it's own theorem environments,
% the defaults, supplied by \file{latex.dtx} are available.
%
% \subsection{Listing of symbols and abbreviations}
%
% Another element is the listing of symbols
% and abbreviations.
%
% \begin{environment}{symbols}
% \begin{macro}{\symbollabel}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\symbollabel}[1]{{#1 \hfill}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{symbols}{\list{}%
{\itemindent 0em \leftmargin 8em
\labelsep 1em \labelwidth 5em
\let\makelabel\symbollabel}}%
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\symboldef}
% Within a |symbols| environment the command
% |\symboldef{|\meta{symbol}|}{|\meta{meaning}|}|
% is used to specify and explain each symbol or abbreviation.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\symboldef}[2]{\item[#1] #2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \section{Verse}
%
% The class provides a more flexible |verse| environment than the
% standard classes. This is based on the \Lpack{verse}
% package~\cite{VERSE}.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/30}{Complete rewrite of verse typesetting}
%
% \subsection{Environments}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{vslineno}
% We need counters for stanza and poem lines.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added poemline and modulo@vs counters}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{vslineno}
\newcounter{poemline}
\newcounter{modulo@vs}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemlines}
% |\poemlines{|\meta{nth}|}| specifies that every \meta{nth} line of
% a poem is to be numbered.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{poemlines}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{\cs{poemlines} now just calls \cs{linenumberfrequency}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemlines}[1]{\linenumberfrequency{#1}%
\@memwarn{Use \string\linenumberfrequency\space
instead of \string\poemlines}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{getmodulo@vs}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Using \cs{getthelinenumber} instead of \cs{getmodulo@vs}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifaltindent}
% This should be set TRUE for indenting alternate lines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifaltindent
\altindentfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifpattern}
% This should be set TRUE for indenting lines according to a pattern.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifpattern
\patternfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifstarpattern}
% This should be set TRUE for indenting lines according in a |patverse*|
% environment.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/8}{Added \cs{ifstarpattern}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifstarpattern
\starpatternfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\vleftskip}
% \begin{macro}{\vrightskip}
% Skips to the left and right of a line of verse.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{vleftskip} and \cs{vrightskip}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Changed defaults for \cs{vleftskip} and \cs{vrightskip}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\vleftskip}
\setlength{\vleftskip}{3em}
\newlength{\vrightskip}
\setlength{\vrightskip}{1em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\stanzaskip}
% Skip between stanzas.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added \cs{stanzaskip}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\stanzaskip}
\setlength{\stanzaskip}{\onelineskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\flagverse}
% |\flagverse{|\meta{flag}|}| inserts \meta{flag} at the left (of a line).
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{flagverse}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\flagverse}[1]{%
\hskip-\vleftskip\llap{#1}\hskip\vleftskip\ignorespaces}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\versewidth}
% The length |\versewidth| is a convenience length for the user.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\versewidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\vgap}
% \begin{macro}{\vin}
% \begin{macro}{\vindent}
% The length |\vgap| is used as the basis for spacing. |\vin| makes
% a horizontal space of |\vgap| and |\vindent| is the indentation
% of wrapped lines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\vgap} \setlength{\vgap}{1.5em}
\newcommand{\vin}{\hspace*{\vgap}}
\newlength{\vindent} \setlength{\vindent}{2\vgap}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\vinphantom}
% Macro to leave blank space coresponding to a string.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{vinphantom} (patch 1.1)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\vinphantom}[1]{\leavevmode\phantom{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\vleftofline}
% Macro to insert something immediately to the left of the start
% of the line.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/14}{Added \cs{vleftofline}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\vleftofline}[1]{\leavevmode\llap{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\vleftmargin}
% Length to adjust the default left margin within a verse environment.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/18}{Added \cs{vleftmargin}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\vleftmargin
\vleftmargin=\leftmargini
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verselinebreak}
% Break a verse line by inserting |\newline|.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Modified \cs{verselinebreak}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\verselinebreak}[1][\z@]{\newline\hspace*{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\incr@vsline}
% Increment the line counters.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added poemline counter to \cs{incr@vsline}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\incr@vsline}{%
\refstepcounter{poemline}%
\stepcounter{vslineno}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsifbang}
% Like the kernel |\@ifstar| except it looks for an exclamation mark!
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{@vsifbang}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vsifbang}[1]{\@ifnextchar !{\@firstoftwo{#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsifgt}
% Like the kernel |\@ifstar| except it looks for a |>| character.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{@vsifgt}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vsifgt}[1]{\@ifnextchar >{\@firstoftwo{#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vscentercr}
% This puts the poem line number in the margin, increments
% the line numbers, and then deals with the options. It is based
% on the kernel |\@centercr|.
% This has to handle various forms of the |\\| command: |\\|,
% |\\*|, |\\!|, and |\\>|, together with an optional length argument.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Major rewrite of \cs{@vscentercr} and friends}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Changed \cs{@vscentercr} to use general
% linenumbering}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vscentercr}{%
\ifhmode \unskip\else \@nolnerr\fi
\hfill\rlap{\kern\vrightskip\kern\rightmargin%
\vlvnumfont\getthelinenumber{poemline}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% For |>| call |\verselinebreak| to process it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@vsifgt{\verselinebreak}{%
\incr@vsline
% \end{macrocode}
% If the call is |\\*...| call |\@vsxcentercr| to handle the |*...|.
% If the call is |\\!|, do nothing.
% If the call is |\\![...]|, call |\@vsicentercr| to handle the |[...]|.
% Otherwise, call |\@vsxcentercr|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\par\@ifstar{\nobreak\@vsxcentercr}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@vsifbang{\@ifnextchar[ {\@vsicentercr}{}}{\@vsxcentercr}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsxcentercr}
% Processes |\\*|, and either calls |\@vsicentercr| to handle a |[length]|,
% or |\start@vsline|.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{@vsxcentercr}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vsxcentercr}{\addvspace{-\parskip}%
\@ifnextchar[ {\@vsicentercr}{\start@vsline}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsicentercr}
% Processes |(\\...)[length]| and then calls |\start@vsline|.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{@vsicentercr}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@vsicentercr[#1]{\vskip #1\ignorespaces \start@vsline}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\start@vsline}
% This is called at the start of every verse line except the first.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{ifstarpattern} to \cs{start@vsline}}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/21}{Used counter for vslineno, not \cs{thevslineno}
% in \cs{start@vsline}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\start@vsline}{%
\ifaltindent\ifodd\c@vslineno\else\vin\fi\fi%
\ifpattern\get@vsindent\fi%
\ifstarpattern\getstar@vsindent\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\theHpoemline}
% For the \Lpack{hyperref} package need a way of distinguishing
% lines of a poem. See the thread \textit{PDFTEX/Hyperef hates memoir verse
% environment?} on \ctt{} October 2002.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added verse counter and \cs{theHpoemline}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{verse}
\setcounter{verse}{0}
\newcommand{\theHpoemline}{\theverse.\thepoemline}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{verse}
% The extended |verse| environment. It sets the verse line counter,
% then defines the particular list environment adjusting the margins
% to center according to the length parameter. If the length parameter
% is at least the |\linewidth| then the `centering' defaults to
% the original |verse| layout.
% \changes{v1.1}{2001/08/03}{Initialise the line counter to 1, not 0, in
% all cases}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Changes to verse environment for line numbering}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changes to verse environment for hyperref}
% \changes{v1.4}{2002/02/27}{Let verses wider than the \cs{linewidth}
% take the full width (patch(1.1)}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Fix vertical spacing in the verse environment (mempatch v3.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{verse}[1][\linewidth]{%
\refstepcounter{verse}%
\setcounter{poemline}{0}\refstepcounter{poemline}%
\setcounter{vslineno}{1}%
\let\\=\@vscentercr
\list{}{\itemsep \z@
\itemindent -\vindent
\listparindent\itemindent
\leftmargin \vleftmargin
\parsep \stanzaskip
\ifdim #1<\linewidth% %% short line
\rightmargin \z@
\leftmargin \linewidth
\advance\leftmargin -#1\relax
\advance\leftmargin -0.5\leftmargin
\advance\leftmargin \vindent
\else
\ifdim #1>\linewidth% %% long line
\rightmargin \z@
\leftmargin \vindent
\else% %% default
\rightmargin \leftmargin
\advance\leftmargin \vindent
\fi
\fi}
\item[]}{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{altverse}
% This sets |\altindenttrue| (afterwards false) and initialises the line counter.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{starpatternfalse} to altverse}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{altverse}%
{\starpatternfalse\patternfalse\altindenttrue
\setcounter{vslineno}{1}}%
{\altindentfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
% \subsection{Patterns}
%
% The pattern code is based on the idea of converting a string of
% digits to an array of digits, and then being able to access the
% digit at a particular position in the array.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@nameedef}
% A shorthand for using |\protected@edef|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@nameedef}[1]{
\expandafter\protected@edef\csname #1\endcsname}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifbounderror}
% A flag set TRUE if an attempt is made to access an array element outside
% the array limits.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifbounderror
\bounderrorfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifinteger}
% A flag to indicate if a `number' is an integer (TRUE) or not (FALSE).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifinteger
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@chrsinstr}
% A counter for the number of characters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{chrsinstr} % CHARactersINSTRing
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\newarray}
% |\newarray{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{low}|}{|\meta{high}|}| defines
% an array called \meta{arrayname} (no backslash e.g. |MyArray|),
% with low and high limts \meta{low} and \meta{high}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newarray}[3]{%
\@nameedef{#1-low}{#2}%
\@nameedef{#1-high}{#3}%
\ifnum #3<#2
\@memerror{Limits for array #1 are in reverse order}{\@ehc}%
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\stringtoarray}
% |\stringtoarray{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{string}|}| puts each character
% from \meta{string} sequentially into the \meta{arrayname} array, starting
% with \meta{low} = 1. It checks for an empty \meta{string} and handles that
% specially.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\stringtoarray}[2]{%
\def\@vsarrayname{#1}%
\protected@edef\the@vsstring{#2}%
\newarray{\@vsarrayname}{1}{1}%
\@ifmtarg{#2}{%
\c@chrsinstr \z@
\@namedef{\@vsarrayname-1}{}
}{%
\c@chrsinstr \@ne
\expandafter\@vsstringtoarray \the@vsstring\@vsend
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsstringtoarray}
% Recursively adds characters to the array |\@vsarrayname|, incrementing
% the array's high limit.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@vsstringtoarray #1#2\@vsend{%
\@namedef{\@vsarrayname-\the\c@chrsinstr}{#1}
\@nameedef{\@vsarrayname-high}{\the\c@chrsinstr}
\@ifmtarg{#2}{%
\def\@vsinext{}%
}{%
\advance\c@chrsinstr \@ne
\def\@vsinext{%
\@vsstringtoarray #2\@vsend%
}%
}
\@vsinext
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\setarrayelement}
% |\setarrayelement{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{index}|}{|\meta{value}|}| sets
% the \meta{arrayname} array's element at \meta{index} to \meta{value}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setarrayelement}[3]{%
\checkarrayindex{#1}{#2}%
\@nameedef{#1-#2}{#3}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\getarrayelement}
% |\getarrayelement{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{index}|}{|\meta{value}|}|
% defines the parameterless macro \meta{value} (e.g., |\result|) to be
% the value at \meta{index} in the \meta{arrayname} array.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\getarrayelement}[3]{%
\checkarrayindex{#1}{#2}%
\protected@edef#3{\@nameuse{#1-#2}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\checkarrayindex}
% |\checkarrayindex{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{index}|}| checks that
% the \meta{index} of the \meta{arrayname} array is valid. |\ifbounderror|
% is set FALSE if everything is OK, otherwise it is set TRUE.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\checkarrayindex}[2]{%
\bounderrorfalse
\expandafter\ifx\csname #1-low\endcsname\relax%
\ifpattern\else
\@memerror{No array called #1}{\@ehc}%
\fi
\bounderrortrue
\fi
\ifnum #2<\@nameuse{#1-low}\relax%
\ifpattern\else
\@memerror{Index #2 outside limits for array #1}{\@ehc}%
\fi
\bounderrortrue
\fi
\ifnum #2>\@nameuse{#1-high}\relax%
\ifpattern\else
\@memerror{Index #2 outside limits for array #1}{\@ehc}%
\fi
\bounderrortrue
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\arraytostring}
% |\arraytostring{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{string}|}| converts the
% characters in the \meta{arrayname} array into the parameterless macro
% \meta{string} (e.g., |\MyString|).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\arraytostring}[2]{%
\def#2{}%
\c@chrsinstr = \@nameuse{#1-low}%
\@vsarraytostring{#1}{#2}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsarraytostring}
% |\@vsarraytostring{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{string}|}| recursively
% adds the (character) elements from \meta{arrayname} to \meta{string}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vsarraytostring}[2]{%
\ifnum\c@chrsinstr>\@nameuse{#1-high}\else
\protected@edef#2{#2\@nameuse{#1-\thechrsinstr}}%
\advance\c@chrsinstr\@ne%
\@vsarraytostring{#1}{#2}%
\fi%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\checkifinteger}
% |\checkifinteger{|\meta{num}|}| checks if \meta{num} is an integer.
% If it is, then |\ifinteger| is set TRUE, otherwise it is set FALSE.
% (Code based on Donald Arseneau's \Lpack{cite} package).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\checkifinteger}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@vsa{#1}%
\ifcat _\ifnum9<1\gobm{#1} _\else A\fi
\integertrue%
\else
\integerfalse%
\fi%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\gobm}
% |\gobm{|\meta{num}|}| is defined as \meta{num}. It could be defined as: \\
% |\newcommand{\gobm}[1]{\ifx-#1\expandafter\gobm\else#1\fi}| \\
% which would remove a leading minus sign (hyphen) from its argument
% (|gobm| = gobble minus sign).
% (Code from a posting to \ctt{} by Donald Arseneau on 1997/07/21).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\gobm}[1]{#1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\indentpattern}
% |\indentpattern{|\meta{digits}|}| stores \meta{digits} for use as
% a verse indentation pattern.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\indentpattern}[1]{%
\stringtoarray{Array@vs}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\get@vsindent}
% |\get@vsindent| gets the indent pattern digit for the |\thevslineno|,
% then uses this to specify the line indentation as |digit*\vgap|.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/21}{Changed \cs{get@vsindent} to use counter
% value number instead of \cs{thevslineno}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\get@vsindent}{%
\getarrayelement{Array@vs}{\number\value{vslineno}}{\@vspat}%
\ifbounderror
\arraytostring{Array@vs}{\@vsp@t}%
\@memwarn{%
Index `\thevslineno' for pattern `\@vsp@t' is out of bounds}%
\def\@vspat{0}%
\else
\checkifinteger{\@vspat}%
\ifinteger\else
\arraytostring{Array@vs}{\@vsp@t}%
\@memwarn{%
`\@vspat' at index `\thevslineno' in pattern `\@vsp@t'
is not a digit}%
\def\@vspat{0}%
\fi
\fi
\ifcase\@vspat\else\hspace*{\@vspat\vgap}\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\getstar@vsindent}
% |\getstar@vsindent| gets the indent pattern digit for the |patverse*|
% environment,
% then uses this to specify the line indentation as |digit*\vgap|.
% It lets the pattern repeat by resetting the |vslineno| counter.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{getstar@vsindent}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\getstar@vsindent}{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname Array@vs-high\endcsname\relax
\@memerror{A pattern has not been specified}{\@ehc}
\else
\ifnum\c@vslineno>\@nameuse{Array@vs-high}%
\setcounter{vslineno}{1}%
\fi
\get@vsindent
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{patverse}
% The environment for setting verse line indents according to a pattern.
% It starts by setting |\ifpattern| TRUE, any other flags to FALSE,
% and initialises the line number. It ends by setting |\ifpattern| FALSE.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{starpatternfalse} to patverse}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{patverse}%
{\starpatternfalse\patterntrue\altindentfalse
\setcounter{vslineno}{1}}%
{\patternfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{patverse*}
% The environment for setting verse line indents according to a repeating
% pattern.
% It starts by setting |\ifstarpattern| TRUE, any other flags to FALSE,
% and initialises the line number. It ends by setting |\ifstarpattern| FALSE.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added patverse* environment}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{patverse*}%
{\starpatterntrue\patternfalse\altindentfalse
\setcounter{vslineno}{1}}%
{\starpatternfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
% \subsection{Titles}
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitle}
% Typeset a poem title (like |\section| or other). The actual work
% is done by |\@vsptitle| (plain) or |\@vssptitle| (starred).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemtitle}{\par%
\secdef\@vsptitle\@vssptitle}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemtoc}
% The kind of entry |\poemtitle| is to make in the ToC.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemtoc}{section}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mempoeminfo}
% \begin{macro}{\mempoemstarinfo}
% \verb?\mempoeminfo{title}? \\
% \verb?\mempoemstarinfo{title}? \\
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\mempoeminfo}[1]{}
\newcommand*{\mempoemstarinfo}[1]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsptitle}
% Typeset a \cs{poemtitle}.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{phantomsection} to \cs{@vsptitle}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@vsptitle}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@vsptitle[#1]#2{%
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{\poemtoc}{#1}%
\M@gettitle{#1}%
\mempoeminfo{#1}%
\poemtitlemark{#1}%
\@vstypeptitle{#2}%
\@afterheading}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vssptitle}
% Typeset a \cs{poemtitle*}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@vssptitle}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@vssptitle#1{%
\M@gettitle{#1}%
\mempoemstarinfo{#1}%
\@vstypeptitle{#1}%
\@afterheading}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vstypeptitle}
% This \emph{really} typesets the title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vstypeptitle}[1]{%
\vspace{\beforepoemtitleskip}%
{\poemtitlefont #1\par}%
\vspace{\afterpoemtitleskip}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlefont}
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlemark}
% Sets the appearance to the title of a poem, and something for a header.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemtitlefont}{\normalfont\large\bfseries\centering}
\newcommand{\poemtitlemark}[1]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\beforepoemtitleskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterpoemtitleskip}
% Lengths before and after a poem title, using approcimately \cs{section}
% values.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\beforepoemtitleskip}
\setlength{\beforepoemtitleskip}{3.5ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
\newlength{\afterpoemtitleskip}
\setlength{\afterpoemtitleskip}{2.3ex \@plus.2ex}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@numptitle}
% \begin{macro}{\@numptitletrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@numptitlefalse}
% \begin{macro}{\NumberPoemTitle}
% \begin{macro}{\PlainPoemTitle}
% Following the \cs{NumberPoemTitle} declaration \cs{PoemTitle}s are numbered.
% The \cs{PlainPoemTitle} declaration produces unnumbered titles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@numptitle
\newcommand*{\NumberPoemTitle}{\@numptitletrue}
\newcommand*{\PlainPoemTitle}{\@numptitlefalse}
\NumberPoemTitle
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@poem}
% \begin{macro}{\thepoem}
% \begin{macro}{\theHpoem}
% Counter for poem titles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{poem}\setcounter{poem}{0}
\renewcommand*{\thepoem}{\@arabic\c@poem}
\newcommand*{\theHpoem}{\arabic{poem}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlestarmark}
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlepstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlestarpstyle}
% \cs{poemtitlemark}\marg{poemf@rhdr} is used for marks for a PoemTitle and
% \cs{poemtitlestarmark}\marg{poemf@hdr} is for marks for \cs{PoemTitle*}.
% The \cs{poemtitlepstyle} and \cs{poemtitlestarpstyle} macros are provided
% as hooks so that, for example, pagestyles can be set for the regular
% and starred versions of \cs{PoemTitle}. By default these macros do nothing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\poemtitlestarmark}[1]{}
\newcommand*{\poemtitlepstyle}{}
\newcommand*{\poemtitlestarpstyle}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\PoemTitle}
% The command to produce a article style chapter-like (numbered) poem title.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/09}{Added \cs{PoemTitle}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\PoemTitle{%
\par
\@afterindentfalse
\@ifstar{\@m@msPoemTitle}{\@m@mPoemTitle}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@m@mPoemTitle}
% \begin{macro}{\poemt@c}
% Intermediate and support macros for the extra optional argument
% to \cs{PoemTitle}. Have to do this long windedly otherwise dear old
% \Lpack{hyperref} barfs.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@m@mPoemTitle}[1][]{%
\def\poemt@c{#1}% capture first optional arg
\@ifnextchar[{\@PoemTitle}{\@PoemTitle[]}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memPoemTitleinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\memPoemTitlestarinfo}
% \verb?\memPoemTitleinfo{num}{toc}{head}{full}? \\
% \verb?\memPoemTitlestarinfo{short}{full}?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memPoemTitleinfo}[4]{}
\newcommand*{\memPoemTitlestarinfo}[2]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@PoemTitle}
% \begin{macro}{\poemf@rtoc}
% \begin{macro}{\poemf@rhdr}
% \cs{@PoemTitle}\oarg{tocmark}\marg{title}
% typesets the title of a \cs{PoemTitle}.
% There is a number for \cs{@numptitletrue} and \cs{@mainmattertrue}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@PoemTitle[#1]#2{%
\phantomsection
\ifx\poemt@c\@empty % no optional args
\def\poemf@rtoc{#2}%
\def\poemf@rhdr{#2}%
\else % at least one opt arg
\let\poemf@rtoc\poemt@c
\ifx\@empty#1\@empty
\let\poemf@rhdr\poemt@c
\else
\def\poemf@rhdr{#1}%
\fi
\fi
\m@m@Andfalse
\if@numptitle
\if@mainmatter
\m@m@Andtrue
\fi
\fi
\ifm@m@And
\refstepcounter{poem}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Store the (short) title via \cs{poemtitlemark} and call
% \cs{\@makePoemTitlehead} to do the typesetting.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@makePoemTitlehead{#2}%
\@afterheading
\poemtitlemark{\poemf@rhdr}%
\poemtitlepstyle
% \end{macrocode}
% Add the title to the ToC.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifm@m@And
\addcontentsline{toc}{\poemtoc}{%
\protect\numberline{\thepoem}\poemf@rtoc}%
\memPoemTitleinfo{\thepoem}{\poemf@rtoc}{\poemf@rhdr}{#2}%
\else
\addcontentsline{toc}{\poemtoc}{\poemf@rtoc}%
\memPoemTitleinfo{}{\poemf@rtoc}{\poemf@rhdr}{#2}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Add hook for title referencing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{\poemf@rhdr}\else\M@gettitle{\poemf@rtoc}\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makePoemTitlehead}
% This \emph{really} typesets a \cs{PoemTitle}. Leave some whitespace.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@makePoemTitlehead#1{{%
\PoemTitleheadstart
\parindent \z@ \normalfont
% \end{macrocode}
% If there is a number, typeset it, otherwise call \cs{printPoemTitlenonum}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifm@m@And
\printPoemTitlenum
\afterPoemTitlenum
\else
\printPoemTitlenonum
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Typeset the title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\interlinepenalty\@M
\printPoemTitletitle{#1}%
\afterPoemTitle
}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@PTchs@def@ult}
% This sets up all the definitions used in \cs{@makePoemTitlehead}
% and \cs{@makesPoemTitlehead}.
% \begin{macro}{\PoemTitleheadstart}
% \begin{macro}{\printPoemTitlenum}
% \begin{macro}{\afterPoemTitlenum}
% \begin{macro}{\printPoemTitlenonum}
% \begin{macro}{\printPoemTitletitle}
% \begin{macro}{\afterPoemTitle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@PTchs@def@ult}{%
\def\PoemTitleheadstart{\vspace{\beforePoemTitleskip}}
\def\printPoemTitlenum{\PoemTitlenumfont \thepoem}
\def\afterPoemTitlenum{\par\nobreak\vskip \midPoemTitleskip}
\def\printPoemTitlenonum{}
\def\printPoemTitletitle##1{\PoemTitlefont ##1}
\def\afterPoemTitle{\par\nobreak\vskip \afterPoemTitleskip}
}
\@PTchs@def@ult
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\PoemTitlenumfont}
% \begin{macro}{\PoemTitlefont}
% Fonts for setting the Poem Title number and title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\PoemTitlenumfont}{\normalfont\large\centering}
\newcommand*{\PoemTitlefont}{\normalfont\large\centering}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\beforePoemTitleskip}
% \begin{macro}{\midPoemTitleskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterPoemTitleskip}
% Lengths separating the various parts of a Poem Title heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\beforePoemTitleskip}
\setlength{\beforePoemTitleskip}{1\onelineskip}
\newlength{\midPoemTitleskip}
\setlength{\midPoemTitleskip}{0pt}
\newlength{\afterPoemTitleskip}
\setlength{\afterPoemTitleskip}{1\onelineskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@m@msPoemTitle}
% This deals with the optional argument for starred PoemTitles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@m@msPoemTitle}[2][\@empty]{%
\@sPoemTitle{#2}%
\ifx \@empty#1
\def\poemf@rhdr{#2}%
\else % opt arg
\def\poemf@rhdr{#1}%
\fi
\poemtitlestarmark{\poemf@rhdr}%
\poemtitlestarpstyle
\memPoemTitlestarinfo{\poemf@rhdr}{#2}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@sPoemTitle}
% \cs{@sPoemTitle}\marg{long} typesets the title of a
% \cs{PoemTitle*}. It is easier than the \cs{@PoemTitle} as there is no number
% or ToC entry to worry about.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@sPoemTitle}[1]{%
\@makesPoemTitlehead{#1}%
\@afterheading
\M@gettitle{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makesPoemTitlehead}
% This \emph{really} typesets a \cs{PoemTitle*}, and is similar to
% \cs{@makePoemTitlehead}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@makesPoemTitlehead#1{{%
\PoemTitleheadstart
\parindent \z@ \normalfont
\printPoemTitlenonum
\interlinepenalty\@M
\printPoemTitletitle{#1}
\afterPoemTitle}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \section{Setting parameters for existing environments}
%
% \subsection{Array and tabular}
%
% \begin{macro}{\arraycolsep}
% The columns in an array environment are separated by
% 2|\arraycolsep|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\arraycolsep{5\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabcolsep}
% The columns in an tabular environment are separated by
% 2|\tabcolsep|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\tabcolsep{6\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\arrayrulewidth}
% The width of rules in the array and tabular environments is given
% by\\ |\arrayrulewidth|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\arrayrulewidth{.4\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\doublerulesep}
% The space between adjacent rules in the array and tabular
% environments is given by |\doublerulesep|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\doublerulesep{2\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Tabbing}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabbingsep}
% This controls the space that the |\'| command puts in. (See
% \LaTeX{} manual for an explanation.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\tabbingsep{\labelsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Minipage}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
% The macro |\@minipagerestore| is called upon entry to a minipage
% environment to set up things that are to be handled differently
% inside a minipage environment. In the current styles, it does
% nothing.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootins}
% Minipages have their own footnotes; |\skip||\@mpfootins| plays
% same r\^ole for footnotes in a minipage as |\skip||\footins| does
% for ordinary footnotes.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Framed boxes}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fboxsep}
% The space left by |\fbox| and |\framebox| between the box and the
% text in it.
% \begin{macro}{\fboxrule}
% The width of the rules in the box made by |\fbox| and |\framebox|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\fboxsep{3\p@}
\setlength\fboxrule{.4\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Equation and eqnarray}
%
% \begin{macro}{\theequation}
% The equation counter will be reset at beginning of a new chapter
% and the equation number will be prefixed by the chapter number.
%
% This code must follow the |\chapter| definition, or more exactly
% the definition of the chapter counter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@addtoreset{equation}{chapter}
\renewcommand{\theequation}{%
\ifnum \c@chapter>\z@ \thechapter.\fi \@arabic\c@equation}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\jot}
% |\jot| is the extra space added between lines of an eqnarray
% environment. The default value is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \setlength\jot{3pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@eqnnum}
% The macro |\@eqnnum| defines how equation numbers are to appear in
% equations. Again the default is used.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
% \def\@eqnnum{(\theequation)}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \section{Array and tabular}
%
% \subsection{Array}%
%
% The description and code are essentially copied from the \Lpack{array}
% package~\cite{ARRAY}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% Array package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%% With acknowledgements to %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%% Frank Mittelbach & David Carlisle %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsubsection{The construction of the preamble}
%
% \begin{PW}
% PW: The original \Lpack{array} package has redundant code (caused by a quick
% mashing of an early \Lpack{array} and the \Lpack{newarray} packages). I
% have tried to remove the redundancies and overlaps.
% \end{PW}
%
% It is obvious that those environments will consist mainly of an
% \cs{halign}, because \TeX\ typesets tables using this primitive.
% That is why we will now take a look at the algorithm which determines
% a preamble for a \cs{halign} starting with a given user preamble
% using the options mentioned above.
%
% The most interesting macros of this implementation are without doubt
% those which are responsible for the construction of the preamble for
% the \cs{halign}. The underlying algorithm was developed by
% \textsc{Lamport} (resp.\ \textsc{Knuth}, see texhax V87\#??), and it
% has been extended and improved.
%
% The user preamble will be read \textsf{token} by \textsf{token}. A
% \textsf{token} is a single character like \texttt{c} or a block
% enclosed in \verb?{...}?. For example the preamble of
% \verb?\begin{tabular}?\linebreak[0]\verb?{lc||c@{\hspace{1cm}}}? consists of
% the \textsf{token} \texttt{l}, \texttt{c}, \verb?|?, \verb?|?,
% \texttt{@} and \verb?\hspace{1cm}?.
%
% The currently used \textsf{token} and the one, used before, are needed
% to decide on how the construction of the preamble has to be
% continued.
% In the example mentioned above the \texttt{l} causes the preamble
% to begin with \verb?\hskip\tabcolsep?. Furthermore
% \verb?# \hfil? would be appended to define a flush left column.
% The next \textsf{token} is a \texttt{c}. Because it was preceded by an
% \texttt{l} it generates a new column. This is done with
% \verb?\hskip \tabcolsep & \hskip \tabcolsep?. The column which is to
% be centered will be appended with \verb?\hfil # \hfil?.
% The \textsf{token} \verb?|? would then add a space of
% \verb?\hskip \tabcolsep?
% and a vertical line because the last
% \textsf{tokens} was a \texttt{c}.
% The following \textsf{token} \verb?|? would only add a space
% \verb?\hskip \doublerulesep? because it was preceded by the
% \textsf{token} \verb?|?. We will not discuss our example further but
% rather take a look at the general case of constructing preambles.
%
% The example shows that the desired preamble for the
% \cs{halign} can be constructed as soon as the action of all
% combinations
% of the preamble \textsf{tokens} are specified. There are 18 such
% \textsf{tokens}
% so we have $19 \cdot 18 = 342$ combinations if we count the
% beginning of
% the preamble as a special \textsf{token}. Fortunately, there are many
% combinations which generate the same spaces, so we can define
% \textsf{token} classes. We will identify a
% \textsf{token} within a class with a number, so we can insert the
% formatting (for example of a column).
% Table~\ref{tab:Klassen} lists all \textsf{token} classes and
% their corresponding numbers.
% \begin{table}[ht]
% \begin{center} \ttfamily
% ^^A \begin{tabular}[t]{>{\ttfamily}ccc}
% \begin{tabular}[t]{ccc}
% \textsf{token} & \cs{@chclass} & \cs{@chnum} \\[2mm]
% c & 0 & 0 \\
% l & 0 & 1 \\
% r & 0 & 2 \\
% p-arg & 0 & 3 \\
% t-arg & 0 & 4 \\
% b-arg & 0 & 5 \\
% \verb?|? & 1 & 0 \\
% !-arg & 1 & 1 \\
% <-arg & 2 & --- \\
% >-arg & 3 & ---
% \end{tabular}
% \kern3mm \vrule \kern3mm%
% ^^A \begin{tabular}[t]{>{\ttfamily}ccc}
% \begin{tabular}[t]{ccc}
% \textsf{token} & \cs{@chclass} & \cs{@chnum} \\[2mm]
% Start & 4 & --- \\
% @-arg & 5 & --- \\
% ! & 6 & --- \\
% @ & 7 & --- \\
% < & 8 & --- \\
% > & 9 & --- \\
% p & 10 & 3 \\
% t & 10 & 4 \\
% b & 10 & 5
% \end{tabular}
% \end{center}
% \caption{Classes of preamble \textsf{tokens}}
% \label{tab:Klassen}
% \end{table}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@chclass}
% \begin{macro}{\@chnum}
% \begin{macro}{\@lastchclass}
% The class and the number of the current \textsf{token} are saved in
% the
% \textsf{count} registers \cs{@chclass}
% and \cs{@chnum}, while the class of the previous
% \textsf{token} is stored in the
% \textsf{count} register \cs{lastchclass}.
% All of the mentioned registers are already allocated in
% \texttt{latex.tex},
% which is the reason why the following three lines of code are
% commented out.
% Later throughout the text I will not mention it again explicitely
% whenever I use a \verb?%? sign. These parts are already defined in
% \texttt{latex.tex}.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \newcount \@chclass
% \newcount \@chnum
% \newcount \@lastchclass
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@addtopreamble}
% We will save the already constructed preamble for
% the \cs{halign}
% in the global macro \cs{@preamble}. This will then be
% enlarged with
% the command \cs{@addtopreamble}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@addtopreamble#1{\xdef\@preamble{\@preamble #1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@testpach}
% With the help of \cs{@lastchclass} we can now define a macro
% which determines the class and the number of a given preamble
% \textsf{token}
% and assigns them to the registers
% \cs{@chclass} and \cs{@chnum}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@testpach{\@chclass
% \end{macrocode}
% First we deal with the cases in which the \textsf{token}
% (\verb?#1?) is the argument of \texttt{!}, \texttt{@}, \texttt{<} or
% \texttt{>}. We can see this from the value of \cs{@lastchclass}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum \@lastchclass=6 \@ne \@chnum \@ne \else
\ifnum \@lastchclass=7 5 \else
\ifnum \@lastchclass=8 \tw@ \else
\ifnum \@lastchclass=9 \thr@@
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise we will assume that the \textsf{token} belongs to the
% class $0$
% and assign the corresponding number to \cs{@chnum} if our
% assumption is correct.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else \z@
% \end{macrocode}
% If the last \textsf{token} was a \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or a
% \texttt{b}, \cs{@chnum} already has the right value. This is the
% reason for the somewhat curious choice of the \textsf{token}
% numbers in class $10$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum \@lastchclass = 10 \else
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise we will check if \cs{@nextchar} is either a \texttt{c},
% \texttt{l} or an \texttt{r}. Some applications change the
% catcodes of certain characters like ``\texttt{@}'' in
% \texttt{amstex.sty}. As a result the tests below would fail since
% they assume non-active character tokens. Therefore we evaluate
% \cs{@nextchar} once thereby turning the first token of its
% replacement text into a char. At this point here this should have
% been the only char present in \cs{@nextchar} which put into via a
% \cs{def}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\@nextchar{\expandafter\string\@nextchar}%
\@chnum
\if \@nextchar c\z@ \else
\if \@nextchar l\@ne \else
\if \@nextchar r\tw@ \else
% \end{macrocode}
% If it is a different \textsf{token}, we know that the class was
% not $0$. We assign the value $0$ to \cs{@chnum} because this value
% is needed for the \verb?|?--\textsf{token}. Now we must check
% the remaining classes. Note that the value of \cs{@chnum} is
% insignificant here for most classes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\z@ \@chclass
\if\@nextchar |\@ne \else
\if \@nextchar !6 \else
\if \@nextchar @7 \else
\if \@nextchar <8 \else
\if \@nextchar >9 \else
% \end{macrocode}
% The remaining permitted \textsf{tokens} are \texttt{p},
% \texttt{m} and \texttt{b} (class $10$).
% \begin{macrocode}
10
\@chnum
\if \@nextchar m\thr@@\else
\if \@nextchar p4 \else
\if \@nextchar b5 \else
% \end{macrocode}
% Now the only remaining possibility is a forbidden \textsf{token},
% so we choose class $0$ and number $0$ and give an error message.
% Then we finish the macro by closing all \cs{if}'s.
% \begin{macrocode}
\z@ \@chclass \z@ \@preamerr \z@ \fi \fi \fi \fi
\fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The preamble will be enlarged with the help of \cs{xdef}, but the
% arguments of \texttt{>}, \texttt{<},~\texttt{!}\ and \texttt{@} are
% not supposed to be expanded during the construction (we want an
% implementation that doesn't need a \cs{protect}). So we have to find a
% way to inhibit the expansion of those arguments.
%
% We will solve this problem with \textsf{token} registers. We need
% one register for every \texttt{!}\ and \texttt{@}, while we need two
% for every \texttt{c}, \texttt{l}, \texttt{r}, \texttt{m}, \texttt{p}
% or \texttt{b}. This limits the number of columns of a table because
% there are only 256 \textsf{token} registers. But then, who needs
% tables with more than 100 columns?
%
% So how do we proceed? Let us assume that we had \verb?!{foo}? in the
% user preamble and say we saved \texttt{foo} in
% \textsf{token} register $5$. Then we call
% \verb?\@addtopreamble{\the@toks5}? where
% \cs{the@toks} is defined in a way that it does not expand
% (for example it could be equivalent to \cs{relax}). Every
% following call
% of \cs{@addtopreamble} leaves \cs{the@toks5} unchanged in
% \cs{@preamble}. If the construction of the preamble is completed
% we change the definition of \cs{the@toks} to
% \verb?\the\toks? and expand \cs{@preamble} for the last time.
% During this process all parts of the form
% \cs{the@toks}\meta{Number}
% will be substituted by the contents of the respective \textsf{token}
% registers.
%
% As we can see from this informal discussion the construction of the
% preamble has to take place within a group, so that the
% \textsf{token} registers we use will be freed later on. For that
% reason we keep all assignments to \cs{@preamble} global; therefore the
% replacement text of this macro will remain the same after we leave
% the group.
%
% \begin{macro}{\count@}
% We further need a \textsf{count} register to remember which
% \textsf{token} register is to be used next. This will be
% initialized with $-1$ if we want to begin with the \textsf{token}
% register $0$. We use the \PlainTeX\ scratch register \cs{count@}
% because everything takes place locally. All we have to do is
% insert \cs{the@toks} \cs{the} \cs{count@} into the preamble.
% \cs{the@toks} will remain unchanged and \verb?\the\count@? expands into
% the saved number.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\prepnext@tok}
% The macro \cs{prepnext@tok} is in charge of preparing the next
% \textsf{token} register. For that purpose we increase
% \cs{count@} by $1$:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\prepnext@tok{\advance \count@ \@ne
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we locally delete any contents the
% \textsf{token} register might have.
% \begin{macrocode}
\toks\count@{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\save@decl}
% During the construction of the preamble the current
% \textsf{token} is always saved in the macro \cs{@nextchar} (see the
% definition of \cs{@mkpream}). The macro
% \cs{save@decl} saves it into the next free \textsf{token} register,
% i.e.\ in \verb?\toks\count@?.
% We do not assume that the token register is free, we add the new
% declarations to the front of the register. This is to allow user
% preambles of the form, \verb?>{foo}>{bar}..?. Users are not encouraged to
% enter such expressions directly, but they may result from the
% rewriting of \cs{newcolumntype}'s.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\save@decl{\toks \count@ = \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
{\expandafter\@nextchar\the\toks\count@}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% How does the situation look like, if we want to add another column
% to the preamble, i.e.\ if we have found a \texttt{c}, \texttt{l},
% \texttt{r}, \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or \texttt{b} in the user
% preamble? In this case we have the problem of the \textsf{token}
% register from \verb?>{..}? and \verb?<{..}? having to be inserted at this
% moment because formating instructions like \cs{hfil} have to be set
% around them. On the other hand it is not known yet, if any \verb?<{..}?
% instruction will appear in the user preamble at all.
%
% We solve this problem by adding two \textsf{token} registers at a
% time. This explains, why we have freed the \textsf{token} registers
% in \cs{prepnext@tok}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\insert@column}
% \begin{macro}{\@sharp}
% We now define the macro \cs{insert@column} which will do
% this work for us.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\insert@column{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Here, we assume that the \textsf{count} register
% \cs{@tempcnta} has saved the value $\verb?\count@? - 1$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\the@toks \the \@tempcnta
% \end{macrocode}
% Next follows the \verb?#? sign which specifies the place
% where the text of the column shall be inserted. To avoid
% errors during the expansions in
% \cs{@addtopreamble} we hide this sign in the command
% \cs{@sharp} which is temporarily occupied with
% \cs{relax} during the build-up of the preamble.
% To remove unwanted spaces before and after the column text, we set
% an \cs{ignorespaces} in front and a \cs{unskip} afterwards.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ignorespaces \@sharp \unskip
% \end{macrocode}
% Then the second \textsf{token} register follows whose number should
% be saved in \cs{count@}.
% We make sure that there will be no further expansion after reading
% the number, by finishing with \cs{relax}. The case above is not
% critical since it is ended by \cs{ignorespaces}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\the@toks \the \count@ \relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mold@addamp}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@addamp}
% \begin{macro}{\@addamp}
%
% In the preamble a \verb?&? has to be inserted between any two columns;
% before the first column there should not be a \verb?&?. As the user
% preamble may start with a \verb?|? we have to remember somehow
% if we have already inserted a \verb?#? (i.e.\ a column). This is done
% with the boolean variable \cs{if@firstamp} that we test in
% \cs{@addamp}, the macro that inserts the \verb?&?.
%
% \begin{PW}
% PW: Later on, for horizontal lines in `continuous' tabulars,
% I need to know how many columns there are in a tabular. I need a modified
% kernel's \cs{@addamp} to do this and use the kernel's \cs{@curtab}
% (a counter used in tabbing) to store the number of columns.
%
% \cs{m@mold@addamp} stores the kernel's definition of \cs{@addamp}, and
% \cs{m@m@addamp} is the revised definition.
% \end{PW}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
% \newif \@iffirstamp
\let\m@mold@addamp\@addamp
\newcommand*{\m@m@addamp}{%
\if@firstamp
\@firstampfalse
\global\@curtab\@ne
\else
\@addtopreamble{&}
\global\advance\@curtab\@ne
\fi}
\let\@addamp\m@m@addamp
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@acol}
% \begin{macro}{\@acolampacol}
% \begin{macro}{\col@sep}
% We will now define some abbreviations for the extensions,
% appearing most often in the preamble build-up.
% Here \cs{col@sep} is a \textsf{dimen} register which is set
% equivalent to \cs{arraycolsep} in an \textsf{array}--environment,
% otherwise it is set equivalent to \cs{tabcolsep}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\col@sep
\def\@acol{\@addtopreamble{\hskip\col@sep}}
% \def\@acolampacol{\@acol\@addamp\@acol}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mkpream}
% \begin{macro}{\the@toks}
% Now we can define the macro which builds up the preamble for the
% \cs{halign}.
% First we initialize \cs{@preamble}, \cs{@lastchclass}
% and the boolean variable \cs{if@firstamp}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@mkpream#1{\gdef\@preamble{}\@lastchclass 4 \@firstamptrue
% \end{macrocode}
% During the build-up of the preamble we cannot directly use the
% \verb?#? sign; this would lead to an error message in the next
% \cs{@addtopreamble} call.
% Instead, we use the command \cs{@sharp} at places where later
% a \verb?#? will be.
% This command is at first given the meaning \cs{relax};
% therefore it will not be expanded when the preamble
% is extended.
% In the macro \cs{@array}, shortly before the \cs{halign}
% is carried out, \cs{@sharp} is given its final meaning.
%
% In a similar way,
% we deal with the commands \cs{@startpbox} and
% \cs{@endpbox}, although the reason is different here: these
% macros expand in many \textsf{tokens} which would delay the
% build-up of the preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@sharp\relax \let\@startpbox\relax \let\@endpbox\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we remove possible $*$-forms and user-defined column
% specifiers in the user preamble by repeatedly executing the list
% \cs{NC@list} until the re-writes have no more effect. The
% expanded preamble will then be in the token register
% \cs{@temptokena}. Actually we need to know at this point that
% this is not \cs{toks0}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@temptokena{#1}\@tempswatrue
\@whilesw\if@tempswa\fi{\@tempswafalse\the\NC@list}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Afterwards we initialize all registers and macros, that we need
% for the build-up of the preamble.
% Since we want to start with the \textsf{token} register $0$,
% \cs{count@} has to contain the value $-1$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\count@\m@ne
\let\the@toks\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we call up \cs{prepnext@tok} in order to prepare the
% \textsf{token} register $0$ for use.
% \begin{macrocode}
\prepnext@tok
% \end{macrocode}
% Having expanded all tokens defined using \cs{newcolumntype} (including
% \verb?*?), we evaluate the remaining tokens, which are saved in
% \cs{@temptokena}. We use the \LaTeX--macro \cs{@tfor} to inspect each
% token in turn.
% The strange appearing construction with \cs{expandafter} is
% based on the fact that we have to put the replacement text of
% \cs{@tempa} and not the macro \cs{@tempa} to this
% \LaTeX--macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter \@tfor \expandafter \@nextchar
\expandafter :\expandafter =\the\@temptokena \do
% \end{macrocode}
% The body of this loop (the group after the \cs{do})
% is executed for one \textsf{token} at a time, whereas
% the current \textsf{token} is saved in \cs{@nextchar}.
% At first we evaluate the current \textsf{token} with the already
% defined macro \cs{@testpach}, i.e.\ we assign to
% \cs{@chclass} the character class and to \cs{@chnum}
% the character number of this \textsf{token}.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\@testpach
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we branch out depending on the value of \cs{@chclass} into
% different macros that extend the preamble respectively.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase \@chclass \@classz \or \@classi \or \@classii
\or \save@decl \or \or \@classv \or \@classvi
\or \@classvii \or \@classviii
% \end{macrocode}
% Class 9 is equivalent to class 10.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or \@classx
\or \@classx \fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Two cases deserve our special attention: Since the current
% \textsf{token} cannot have the character class $4$ (start) we
% have skipped this possibility. If the character class is $3$,
% only the content of \cs{@nextchar} has to be saved into the current
% \textsf{token} register; therefore we call up \cs{save@decl}
% directly and save a macro name. After the preamble has been
% extended we assign the value of \cs{@chclass} to the counter
% \cs{@lastchclass} to assure that this information will be available
% during the next run of the loop.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@lastchclass\@chclass}%
% \end{macrocode}
% After the loop has been finished space must still be added to
% the created preamble, depending on the last \textsf{token}.
% Depending on the value of \cs{@lastchclass} we perform
% the necessary operations.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase\@lastchclass
% \end{macrocode}
% If the last class equals $0$ we add a
% \verb?\hskip \col@sep?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@acol \or
% \end{macrocode}
% If it equals $1$ we do not add any additional space so that the
% horizontal lines do not exceed the vertical ones.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
% \end{macrocode}
% Class $2$ is treated like class $0$ because a \verb?<{...}? can
% only directly follow after class $0$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@acol \or
% \end{macrocode}
% Most of the other possibilities can only appear if the user
% preamble was defective. Class $3$ is not allowed since after a
% \verb?>{..}? there must always follow a \texttt{c}, \texttt{l},
% \texttt{r}, \texttt{p},\texttt{m} or \texttt{b}. We report an
% error and ignore the declaration given by \verb?{..}?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@preamerr \thr@@ \or
% \end{macrocode}
% If \cs{@lastchclass} is $4$ the user preamble has been empty.
% To continue, we insert a \verb?#? in the preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@preamerr \tw@ \@addtopreamble\@sharp \or
% \end{macrocode}
% Class $5$ is allowed again. In this case
% (the user preamble ends with \verb?@{..}?) we need not
% do anything.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
% \end{macrocode}
% Any other case means that the arguments to \verb?@?, \texttt{!},
% \texttt{<}, \texttt{>}, \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or \texttt{b} have
% been forgotten. So we report an error and ignore the last
% \textsf{token}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else \@preamerr \@ne \fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Now that the build-up of the preamble is almost finished we can
% insert the \textsf{token} registers and therefore redefine
% \cs{the@toks}. The actual insertion, though, is performed
% later.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\the@toks{\the\toks}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% The preamble is extended by the macros \cs{@classz} to
% \cs{@classx} which are called by \cs{@mkpream}
% depending on \cs{@lastchclass}
% (i.e. the character class of the last \textsf{token}).
% \begin{macro}{\@classx}
% First we define \cs{@classx} because of its important r\^ole.
% When it is called we find that the current
% \textsf{token} is \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or \texttt{b}.
% That means that a new column has to start.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classx{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Depending on the value of \cs{@lastchclass} different actions
% must take place:
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase \@lastchclass
% \end{macrocode}
% If the last character class was $0$ we separate the columns by
% \verb?\hskip\col@sep? followed by \verb?&? and another
% \verb?\hskip\col@sep?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@acolampacol \or
% \end{macrocode}
% If the last class was class $1$ --- that means that a vertical
% line was
% drawn, --- before this line a \verb?\hskip\col@sep? was inserted.
% Therefore there has to be only a \verb?&? followed by
% \verb?\hskip\col@sep?. But this \verb?&? may be inserted only
% if this is not the first column. This process is controlled
% by \cs{if@firstamp} in the macro \cs{addamp}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@addamp \@acol \or
% \end{macrocode}
% Class $2$ is treated like class $0$ because \verb?<{...}? can only
% follow after class $0$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@acolampacol \or
% \end{macrocode}
% Class $3$ requires no actions because all things necessary have
% been done by the preamble \textsf{token} \texttt{>}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
% \end{macrocode}
% Class $4$ means that we are at the beginning of the preamble.
% Therefore we start the preamble with \verb?\hskip\col@sep? and
% then call \cs{@firstampfalse}. This makes sure that a later
% \cs{@addamp} inserts the character
% \verb?&? into the preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@acol \@firstampfalse \or
% \end{macrocode}
% For class $5$ \textsf{tokens} only the character \verb?&? is inserted
% as a column separator. Therefore we call \cs{@addamp}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@addamp
% \end{macrocode}
% Other cases are impossible. For an example
% \verb?\@lastchclass = 6? ---a s it might appear in a
% preamble of the form \verb?...!p...? --- \texttt{p} would have
% been taken as an argument of \texttt{!} by \cs{@testpach}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classz}
% If the character class of the last \textsf{token} is $0$ we have
% \texttt{c}, \texttt{l}, \texttt{r} or an argument of \texttt{m},
% \texttt{b} or\ \texttt{p}. In the first three cases the preamble
% must be extended the same way as if we had class $10$. The
% remaining two cases do not require any action because the space
% needed was generated by the last \textsf{token} (i.e.\
% \texttt{m}, \texttt{b} or \texttt{p}). Since \cs{@lastchclass} has
% the value $10$ at this point nothing happens when \cs{@classx} is
% called. So the macro \cs{@chlassz} may start like this:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classz{\@classx
% \end{macrocode}
% According to the definition of \cs{insert@column} we must store
% the number of the \textsf{token} register in which a preceding
% \verb?>{..}? might have stored its argument into
% \cs{@tempcnta}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempcnta \count@
% \end{macrocode}
% To have \verb?\count@ = \@tmpcnta + 1? we prepare
% the next \textsf{token} register.
% \begin{macrocode}
\prepnext@tok
% \end{macrocode}
% Now the preamble must be extended with the column whose format
% can be determinated by \cs{@chnum}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@addtopreamble{\ifcase \@chnum
% \end{macrocode}
% If \cs{@chnum} has the value $0$ a centered column has to be
% generated.
% So we begin with stretchable space.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hfil
% \end{macrocode}
% The command \cs{d@llarbegin} follows expanding into \cs{begingroup}
% (in the \textsf{tabular}--environment) or into \verb?$?. Doing this
% (provided an appropriate setting of \cs{d@llarbegin}) we achieve
% that the contents of the columns of an \textsf{array}--environment
% are set in math mode while those of a \textsf{tabular}--environment
% are set in LR mode.
% \begin{macrocode}
\d@llarbegin
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we insert the contents of the two \textsf{token} registers
% and the symbol
% for the column entry (i.e.\ \verb?#? or
% more precise \cs{@sharp}) using \cs{insert@column}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\insert@column
% \end{macrocode}
% We end this case with \cs{d@llarend} and \cs{hfil} where \cs{d@llarend}
% again is either \verb?$? or \cs{endgroup}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\d@llarend \hfil \or
% \end{macrocode}
% The templates for \texttt{l} and \texttt{r} (i.e.\ \cs{@chnum} $1$
% or $2$) are generated the same way. Since one \cs{hfil} is
% missing the text is moved to the relevant side.
% The \verb?\kern\z@? is needed in case of an empty column
% entry. Otherwise
% the \cs{unskip} in \cs{insert@column} removes the
% \cs{hfil}. Changed to \verb?\hskip1sp? so that it interacts better with
% \cs{@bsphack}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hskip1sp\d@llarbegin \insert@column \d@llarend \hfil \or
\hfil\hskip1sp\d@llarbegin \insert@column \d@llarend \or
% \end{macrocode}
% The templates for \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} and \texttt{b} mainly
% consist of a \textsf{box}. In case of \texttt{m} it is generated
% by \cs{vcenter}. This command is allowed only in math
% mode. Therefore we start with a~\verb?$?.
% \begin{macrocode}
$\vcenter
% \end{macrocode}
% The part of the templates which is the same in all three cases
% (\texttt{p}, \texttt{m} and \texttt{b})
% is built by the macros \cs{@startpbox} and
% \cs{@endpbox}. \cs{@startpbox} has an argument:
% the width of the column which is stored in the current
% \textsf{token} (i.e.\ \cs{@nextchar}).
% Between these two macros we find the well known
% \cs{insert@column}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox $\or
% \end{macrocode}
% The templates for \texttt{p} and \texttt{b} are generated in the
% same way though we do not need the \verb?$? characters because we use
% \cs{vtop} or \cs{vbox}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\vtop \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox \or
\vbox \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox
% \end{macrocode}
% Other values for \cs{@chnum} are impossible. Therefore we
% end the arguments to \cs{@addtopreamble} and \cs{ifcase}.
% Before we come to the end of \cs{@classz} we have to
% prepare the next \textsf{token} register.
% \begin{macrocode}
\fi}\prepnext@tok}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classix}
% Class $9$ (\texttt{>}--\textsf{token}) prevented repeated
% \verb?>? declarations for the same column. This restriction has been eased,
% making class $9$ equivalent to class $10$.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Let \cs{@classix} to \cs{relax} (mempatch v3.10)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@classix\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classviii}
% If the current \textsf{token} is a \texttt{<} the last character
% class must be $0$, or $2$ (as repeated \verb?<? expressions are allowed).
% In this case it is not necessary to extend the
% preamble. Otherwise we output an error message, set \cs{@chclass}
% to $6$ and call \cs{@classvi}. By doing this we achieve that
% \texttt{<} is treated like \texttt{!}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classviii{\ifnum \@lastchclass >\z@\ifnum\@lastchclass=\tw@\else
\@preamerr 4\@chclass 6 \@classvi \fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@arrayrule}
% There is only one incompatibility with the original definition:
% the definition of \cs{@arrayrule}. In the original a line without
% width (e.g., the space between \verb?cc? and \verb?c|c?
% is equal) is created by multiple insertions of
% \verb?\hskip .5\arrayrulewidth?.
% We only insert a vertical line into the
% preamble. This is done to prevent problems with \TeX's main
% memory when generating tables with many vertical lines in them
% (especially in the case of \textsf{floats}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@arrayrule{\@addtopreamble \vline}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classvii}
% As a consequence it follows that in case of class $7$
% (\verb?@? \textsf{token}) the preamble need not to be extended.
% In the original definition \verb?\@lastchclass = 1?
% is treated by inserting \verb?\hskip .5\arrayrulewidth?.
% We only check if the last \textsf{token} was of class $3$ which is
% forbidden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classvii{\ifnum \@lastchclass = \thr@@
% \end{macrocode}
% If this is true we output an error message and
% ignore the declarations stored
% by the last \verb?>{...}?, because these are overwritten
% by the argument of \texttt{@}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@preamerr \thr@@ \fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classvi}
% If the current \textsf{token} is a regular \texttt{!}\ and the
% last class was $0$ or $2$ we extend the preamble with
% \verb?\hskip\col@sep?. If the last \textsf{token} was of class $1$
% (for instance \verb?|?) we extend with \verb?\hskip \doublerulesep?
% because the construction \verb?!{...}? has to be treated like
% \verb?|?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classvi{\ifcase \@lastchclass
\@acol \or
\@addtopreamble{\hskip \doublerulesep}\or
\@acol \or
% \end{macrocode}
% Now \verb?\@preamerr...? should follow because a
% user preamble of the form \verb?..>{..}!.? is not allowed.
% To save memory we call \cs{@classvii} instead which also
% does what we want.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@classvii
% \end{macrocode}
% If \cs{@lastchclass} is $4$ or $5$ nothing has to be done.
% Class $6$ to $10$ are not possible.
% So we finish the macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classii}
% \begin{macro}{\@classiii}
% In the case of character classes $2$ and $3$ (i.e.\ the argument
% of \texttt{<} or \texttt{>}) we only have to store the current
% \textsf{token} (\cs{@nextchar}) into the corresponding
% \textsf{token} register since the preparation and
% insertion of these registers
% are done by the macro \cs{@classz}.
% This is equivalent to calling \cs{save@decl} in the case of
% class $3$. To save command identifiers we do this call up
% in the macro \cs{@mkpream}.
%
% Class $2$ exhibits a more complicated situation: the
% \textsf{token} registers have already been inserted by
% \cs{@classz}. So the value of \cs{count@} is too high
% by one. Therefore we decrease \cs{count@} by $1$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classii{\advance \count@ \m@ne
% \end{macrocode}
% Next we store the current \textsf{token} into the correct
% \textsf{token} register by calling \cs{save@decl} and then
% increase the value of \cs{count@} again. At this point we
% can save memory once more (at the cost of time) if we use the
% macro \cs{prepnext@tok}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\save@decl\prepnext@tok}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classv}
% Class $5$ is \texttt{@}-expressions (and is also called by class 1)
% We do not expand the
% \verb?@?-expression, but instead explicitly replace an
% \cs{extracolsep} command by an assignment to \cs{tabskip} by a
% method similar to the \cs{newcolumntype} system described later.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classv{\save@decl
\expandafter\NC@ecs\@nextchar\extracolsep{}\extracolsep\@@@
\@addtopreamble{\d@llarbegin\the@toks\the\count@\relax\d@llarend}%
\prepnext@tok}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\NC@ecs}
% Rewrite the first occurrence of \verb?\extracolsep{1in}? to
% \verb?\tabskip1in\relax?. As a side effect discard any tokens after a
% second \cs{extracolsep}, there is no point in the user entering two of
% these commands anyway, so this is not really a restriction.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\NC@ecs#1\extracolsep#2#3\extracolsep#4\@@@{\def\@tempa{#2}%
\ifx\@tempa\@empty\else\toks\count@={#1\tabskip#2\relax#3}\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classi}
% In the case of class $0$ we were able to generate the necessary
% space between columns by using the macro \cs{@classx}.
% Analogously the macro \cs{@classvi} can be used for class $1$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classi{\@classvi
% \end{macrocode}
% Depending on \cs{@chnum} a vertical line
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase \@chnum \@arrayrule \or
% \end{macrocode}
% or (in case of \verb?!{...}?) the current \textsf{token} --- stored
% in \cs{@nextchar} --- has to be inserted into the preamble.
% This corresponds to calling \cs{@classv}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@classv \fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@startpbox}
% In \cs{@classz} the macro \cs{@startpbox} is used.
% The width of the \textsf{parbox} is passed as an argument.
% \cs{vcenter}, \cs{vtop} or \cs{vbox} are already in the
% preamble. So we start with the braces for the wanted box.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@startpbox#1{\bgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% The argument is the width of the box. This information has to be
% assigned to \cs{hsize}.
% Then we assain default values to several parameters used in a
% \textsf{parbox}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\hsize{#1}\@arrayparboxrestore
% \end{macrocode}
% Our main problem is to obtain the same distance between succeeding
% lines of the \textsf{parbox}.
% We have to remember that the distance between two \textsf{parboxes}
% should be defined by \cs{@arstrut}. That means that it can be
% greater than the distance in a \textsf{parbox}.
% Therefore it is not enough to set a \cs{@arstrut} at the
% beginning and at the end of the \textsf{parbox}. This would
% dimension the distance
% between first and second line and the distance between the two
% last lines of the \textsf{parbox} wrongly.
% To prevent this we set an invisible rule of height
% \cs{@arstrutbox}
% at the beginning of the \textsf{parbox}. This has no effect on the
% depth of the first line. At the end of the \textsf{parbox} we set
% analogously another invisible rule which only affects the depth
% of the last line. It is necessary to wait inserting this strut
% until the paragraph actually starts to allow for things like
% \cs{parindent} changes via \verb?>{...}?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\everypar{%
\vrule \@height \ht\@arstrutbox \@width \z@
\everypar{}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@endpbox}
% If there are any declarations defined by \verb?>{...}?
% and \verb?<{...}?
% they now follow in the macro \cs{@classz} --- the contents
% of the column in between.
% So the macro \cs{@endpbox} must insert the \textsf{specialstrut}
% mentioned earlier and then close the group opened by
% \cs{@startpbox}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@endpbox{\@finalstrut\@arstrutbox \egroup\hfil}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Building and calling \texttt{\textbackslash halign}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@array}
% After we have discussed the macros needed for the evaluation
% of the user preamble we can define the macro \cs{@array}
% which uses these macros to create a \cs{halign}.
% It has two arguments. The first one is a position argument
% which can be \texttt{t}, \texttt{b} or \texttt{c}; the
% second one describes the wanted preamble,
% e.g.\ it has the form \verb?|c|c|c|?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@array[#1]#2{%
% \end{macrocode}
% First we define a \textsf{strut} whose size basically corresponds
% to a normal \textsf{strut} multiplied by the factor
% \cs{arraystretch}.
% This \textsf{strut} is then inserted into every row and enforces
% a minimal distance between two rows.
% Nevertheless, when using horizontal lines, large letters
% (like accented capital letters) still collide with such lines.
% Therefore at first we add to the height of a normal \textsf{strut}
% the value of the parameter \cs{extrarowheight}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempdima \ht \strutbox
\advance \@tempdima by\extrarowheight
\setbox \@arstrutbox \hbox{\vrule
\@height \arraystretch \@tempdima
\@depth \arraystretch \dp \strutbox
\@width \z@}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we open a group, in which the user preamble is evaluated by
% the macro \cs{@mkpream}. As we know this must happen locally.
% This macro creates a preamble for a \cs{halign} and saves
% its result globally in the control sequence \cs{@preamble}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\@mkpream{#2}%
% \end{macrocode}
% We again redefine \cs{@preamble} so that a call up of \cs{@preamble}
% now starts the \cs{halign}. Thus also the arguments of \texttt{>},
% \texttt{<}, \texttt{@} and \texttt{!}, saved in the
% \textsf{token} registers are inserted into the preamble. The
% \cs{tabskip} at the beginning and end of the preamble is set to
% \textsf{0pt} (in the beginning by the use of \cs{ialign}). Also the
% command \cs{@arstrut} is build in, which inserts the
% \cs{@arstrutbox}, defined above. Of course, the opening brace after
% \cs{ialign} has to be implicit as it will be closed in \cs{endarray}
% or another macro.
%
% The \cs{noexpand} in front of \cs{ialign} does no harm in standard \LaTeX{}
% and was added since some experimental support for using text glyphs in math
% redefines \cs{halign} with the result that is becomes expandable with
% disastrous results in cases like this.
% In the kernel definition for this macro the problem does
% not surface because there \cs{protect} is set (which is not necessary in this
% implementation as there is no arbitrary user input that can get expanded) and
% the experimental code made the redefinition robust. Whether this is the right
% approach is open to question; consider the \cs{noexpand} a curtesy to allow an
% unsupported redefinition of a \TeX{} primitive for the moment (as people rely
% on that experimental code).
% \begin{macrocode}
\xdef\@preamble{\noexpand \ialign \@halignto
\bgroup \@arstrut \@preamble
\tabskip \z@ \cr}%
% \end{macrocode}
% What we have not explained yet is the macro \cs{@halignto}
% that was just used. Depending on its replacement text the
% \cs{halign} becomes a \cs{halign} \texttt{to} \meta{dimen}.
% Now we close the group again. Thus
% \cs{@startpbox} and \cs{@endpbox} as well as all
% \textsf{token} registers get their former meaning back.
% \begin{macrocode}
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% To support other packages we include a hook
% into this part of the code which is a no-op in the main package.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@arrayleft
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we decide depending on the position argument in which
% \textsf{box} the \cs{halign} is to be put. (\cs{vcenter} may be used
% because we are in math mode.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\if #1t\vtop \else \if#1b\vbox \else \vcenter \fi \fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Now another implicit opening brace appears; then definitions
% which shall stay local follow. While constructing the
% \cs{@preamble} in \cs{@mkpream} the \verb?#? sign must be
% hidden in the macro \cs{@sharp} which is \cs{let} to
% \cs{relax} at that moment (see definition of \cs{@mkpream}).
% All these now get their actual meaning.
% \begin{macrocode}
\bgroup
\let \@sharp ##\let \protect \relax
% \end{macrocode}
% With the above defined \textsf{struts} we fix down the distance
% between rows by setting \cs{lineskip} and \cs{baselineskip}
% to \textsf{0pt}. Since there have to be set \verb?$?'s
% around every column in the \textsf{array}--environment
% the parameter \cs{mathsurround} should
% also be set to \textsf{0pt}. This prevents additional space between
% the rows. The
% \PlainTeX--macro \cs{m@th} does this.
% \begin{macrocode}
\lineskip \z@
\baselineskip \z@
\m@th
% \end{macrocode}
% Beside, we have to assign a special meaning (which we still have
% to specify) to the line separator \verb?\\?. We also have to
% redefine the command \cs{par} in such a way that empty lines in
% \cs{halign} cannot do any damage. We succeed in doing so
% by choosing something that will disappear when expanding.
% After that we only have to call up \cs{@preamble} to
% start the wanted \cs{halign}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\\\@arraycr \let\tabularnewline\\\let\par\@empty \@preamble}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\extrarowheight}
% The \textsf{dimen} parameter used above also needs to be
% allocated. As a default value we use \textsf{0pt}, to ensure
% compatibility with standard \LaTeX.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen \extrarowheight
\extrarowheight=0pt
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@arstrut}
% Now the insertion of \cs{@arstrutbox} through \cs{@arstut}
% is easy since we know exactly in which mode \TeX\ is while working
% on the \cs{halign} preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@arstrut{\unhcopy\@arstrutbox}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{The line separator \texttt{\textbackslash\textbackslash}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@arraycr}
% In the macro \cs{@array} the line separator \verb?\\? is
% \cs{let} to the command \cs{@arraycr}.
% Its definition starts with a special brace which I have directly
% copied from the original definition. It is
% necessary, because the \cs{futurlet} in \cs{@ifnextchar}
% might
% expand a following \verb?&? \textsf{token} in a construction like
% \verb?\\ &?. This would otherwise end the alignment template at a
% wrong time. On the other hand we have to be careful to avoid
% producing a real group, i.e., \verb?{}?, because the command will also
% be used for the array environment, i.e., in math mode. In that
% case an extra \verb?{}? would produce an ord atom which could mess up
% the spacing. For this reason we use a combination that does not
% really produce a group at all but modifies the master counter so
% that a \verb?&? will not be considered belonging to the current
% \cs{halign} while we are looking for a \verb?*? or \verb?[?.
% For further information see
% \cite[Appendix D]{bk:knuth}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@arraycr{\relax\iffalse{\fi\ifnum 0=`}\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we test whether the user is using the star form and ignore
% a possible star (I also disagree with this procedure, because a
% star does not make any sense here).
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifstar \@xarraycr \@xarraycr}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xarraycr}
% In the command \cs{@xarraycr} we test if an optional argument
% exists.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xarraycr{\@ifnextchar [%
% \end{macrocode}
% If it does, we branch out into the macro \cs{@argarraycr} if
% not we close the special brace (mentioned above) and end the row
% of the \cs{halign} with a \cs{cr}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@argarraycr {\ifnum 0=`{}\fi\cr}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@argarraycr}
% If additional space is requested by the user this case is treated
% in the macro \cs{@argarraycr}. First we close the special brace
% and then we test if the additional space is positive.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@argarraycr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{}\fi\ifdim #1>\z@
% \end{macrocode}
% If this is the case we create an invisible vertical rule with
% depth \verb?\dp\@arstutbox?${}+{}$\meta{wanted\ space}.
% Thus we achieve that all vertical lines specified
% in the user preamble by a \verb?|? are now
% generally drawn.
% Then the row ends with a \cs{cr}.
%
% If the space is negative we end the row at once with a \cs{cr}
% and move back up with a \cs{vskip}.
%
% While testing these macros I found out that the
% \cs{endtemplate}
% created by \cs{cr} and \verb?&? is something like an
% \cs{outer} primitive and therefore it should not appear in
% incomplete \cs{if} statements. Thus the following solution was
% chosen which hides the \cs{cr} in other macros when \TeX\
% is skipping conditional text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\@xargarraycr\else
\expandafter\@yargarraycr\fi{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xargarraycr}
% \begin{macro}{\@yargarraycr}
% The following macros were already explained above.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xargarraycr#1{\unskip
\@tempdima #1\advance\@tempdima \dp\@arstrutbox
\vrule \@depth\@tempdima \@width\z@ \cr}
\def\@yargarraycr#1{\cr\noalign{\vskip #1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Spanning several columns}
%
% \begin{macro}{\multicolumn}
% If several columns should be held together with a special format
% the command \cs{multicolumn} must be used. It has three
% arguments: the number of columns to be covered; the format for
% the result column and the actual column entry.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\multicolumn#1#2#3{%
% \end{macrocode}
% First we combine the given number of columns into a single one;
% then we start a new block so that the following definition is kept
% local.
% \begin{macrocode}
\multispan{#1}\begingroup
% \end{macrocode}
% Since a \cs{multicolumn} should only describe the format of a
% result column, we redefine \cs{@addamp} in such a way that one gets
% an error message if one uses more than one \texttt{c},
% \texttt{l}, \texttt{r}, \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or \texttt{b} in
% the second argument. One should consider that this definition is
% local to the build-up of the preamble; an \textsf{array}-- or
% \textsf{tabular}--environment in the third argument of the
% \cs{multicolumn} is therefore worked through correctly as well.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@addamp{\if@firstamp \@firstampfalse \else
\@preamerr 5\fi}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we evaluate the second argument with the help of
% \cs{@mkpream}.
% Now we still have to insert the contents of the \textsf{token}
% register into the \cs{@preamble}, i.e.\ we have to say
% \verb?\xdef\@preamble{\@preamble}?. This is achieved shorter by
% writing:
% \begin{macrocode}
\@mkpream{#2}\@addtopreamble\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% After the \cs{@preamble} is created we forget all local
% definitions and occupations of the \textsf{token} registers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% In the special situation of \cs{multicolumn} \cs{@preamble}
% is not needed as preamble for a \cs{halign} but it is directly
% inserted into our table. Thus instead of \cs{sharp}
% there has to be the column entry (\verb?#3?) wanted by the user.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@sharp{#3}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we can pass the \cs{@preamble} to \TeX\ . For safety
% we start with an \cs{@arstrut}. This should usually be in the
% template for the first column however we do not know if this
% template was overwritten by our \cs{multicolumn}.
% We also add a \cs{null} at the right end to prevent any following
% \cs{unskip} (for example from \verb?\\[..]?) to remove the \cs{tabcolsep}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@arstrut \@preamble
\null
\ignorespaces}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{The environment definitions}
%
% After these preparations we are able to define the environments. They
% only differ in the initialisations of \cs{d@llar...}, \cs{col@sep}
% and \cs{@halignto}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@halignto}
% \begin{macro}{\d@llarbegin}
% \begin{macro}{\d@llarend}
% In order to relieve the \textsf{save stack} we assign the
% replacement texts for \cs{@halignto} globally. \cs{d@llar} has to be
% local since otherwise nested \textsf{tabular} and \textsf{array}
% environments (via \cs{multicolumn}) are impossible.
% When the new font selection scheme is in force we have to
% we surround all \cs{halign} entries
% with braces. See remarks in TUGboat 10\#2. Actually we are going
% to use \cs{begingroup} and \cs{endgroup}. However, this is only
% necessary when we are in text mode. In math the surrounding
% dollar signs will already serve as the necessary extra grouping
% level. Therefore we switch the settings of \cs{d@llarbegin} and
% \cs{d@llarend} between groups and dollar signs.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\d@llarbegin\begingroup
\let\d@llarend\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\array}
% Our new definition of \cs{array} then reads:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\array{\col@sep\arraycolsep
\def\d@llarbegin{$}\let\d@llarend\d@llarbegin\gdef\@halignto{}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Since there might be an optional argument we call another
% macro which is also used by the other environments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tabarray}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@tabarray}
% This macro tests for an optional bracket and then calls up
% \cs{@@array} or \verb?\@@array[c]? (as default).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@tabarray{\@ifnextchar[{\@@array}{\@@array[c]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@@array}
% This macro could then test an optional delimiter before the
% left brace of the main preamble argument. At this point
% it simply is let to be \cs{@array}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@@array\@array
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabular}
% \begin{macro}{\tabular*}
% The environments \textsf{tabular} and \textsf{tabular$*$} differ
% only in the initialisation of the command \cs{@halignto}. Therefore
% we define
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\tabular{\gdef\@halignto{}\@tabular}
% \end{macrocode}
% and analoguesly for the star form. We evalute the argument first
% using \cs{setlength} so that users of the \texttt{calc} package can
% write code like\\ \verb?\begin{tabular*}{(\columnwidth-1cm)/2}...?
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\def\csname tabular*\endcsname#1{%
\setlength\dimen@{#1}%
\xdef\@halignto{to\the\dimen@}\@tabular}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@tabular}
% The rest of the job is carried out by the \cs{@tabular} macro:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@tabular{%
% \end{macrocode}
% First of all we have to make sure that we start out in
% \textsf{hmode}. Otherwise we might find our table dangling by
% itself on a line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\leavevmode
% \end{macrocode}
% It should be taken into consideration that the macro \cs{@array}
% must be called in math mode. Therefore we open a \textsf{box},
% insert a \verb?$? and then assign the correct values to \cs{col@sep} and
% \cs{d@llar...}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hbox \bgroup $\col@sep\tabcolsep \let\d@llarbegin\begingroup
\let\d@llarend\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% Now everything \textsf{tabular} specific is done and we are able to
% call the \cs{@tabarray} macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tabarray}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\endarray}
% \begin{macro}{\@arrayleft}
% \begin{macro}{\@arrayright}
% When the processing of \textsf{array} is finished we have to
% close the \cs{halign}
% and afterwards the surrounding \textsf{box} selected by
% \cs{@array}. To save \textsf{token} space we then redefine
% \cs{@preamble}
% because its replacement text isn't longer needed.
% We have to declare the hook, \cs{@arrayleft}, we put into \cs{@array} above.
% A similar hook `\cs{@arrayright}' is inserted into the
% \cs{endarray} to gain control. Both defaults to empty.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endarray{\crcr \egroup \egroup \@arrayright \gdef\@preamble{}}
\let\@arrayleft\@empty
\let\@arrayright\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endtabular}
% \begin{macro}{\endtabular*}
% To end a \textsf{tabular} or \textsf{tabular$*$} environment we
% call up \cs{endarray}, close the math mode and then the surrounding
% \cs{hbox}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endtabular{\endarray $\egroup}
\expandafter\let\csname endtabular*\endcsname=\endtabular
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% We should \cs{let} all macros
% to \cs{relax} that were used in the kernel but are no longer
% necessary.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@ampacol=\relax \let\@expast=\relax
\let\@arrayclassiv=\relax \let\@arrayclassz=\relax
\let\@tabclassiv=\relax \let\@tabclassz=\relax
\let\@arrayacol=\relax \let\@tabacol=\relax
\let\@tabularcr=\relax \let\@@endpbox=\relax
\let\@argtabularcr=\relax \let\@xtabularcr=\relax
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@preamerr}
% We also have to redefine the error routine \cs{@preamerr} since
% new kind of errors are possible.
% The code for this macro is not perfect yet;
% it still needs too much memory.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@preamerr#1{\def\@tempd{{..} at wrong position: }%
\ClassError{memoir}{%
\ifcase #1 Illegal pream-token (\@nextchar): `c' used\or %0
Missing arg: token ignored\or %1
Empty preamble: `l' used\or %2
>\@tempd token ignored\or %3
<\@tempd changed to !{..}\or %4
Only one column-spec. allowed.\fi}\@ehc} %5
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Defining your own column specifiers}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\newcolumntype}
% In \texttt{newarray.sty} the macro for specifying new columns was
% named \cs{newcolumn}. When the functionality was added to
% \texttt{array.sty} the command was renamed \cs{newcolumntype}.
% The \cs{newcolumntype} macro gives users the chance
% to define letters, to be used in the same way as the primitive
% column specifiers, `c' `p' etc.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\newcolumntype#1{%
% \end{macrocode}
% \cs{NC@char} is so that active characters, like \verb?@? in
% AMS\LaTeX\ may be used. Note that we need to use the possibly active token,
% \verb?#1?, in several places, as that is the token that actually
% appears in the preamble argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\NC@char{\string#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% First we check whether there is already a definition for this column.
% Unlike \cs{newcommand} we give a warning rather than an error if it is
% defined. If it is a new column, add \cs{NC@do} \meta{column} to
% the list \cs{NC@list}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{NC@find@\NC@char}%
{\@tfor\next:=<>clrmbp@!|\do{\if\noexpand\next\NC@char
\@memwarn{Redefining primitive column \NC@char}\fi}%
\NC@list\expandafter{\the\NC@list\NC@do#1}}%
{\@memwarn{Column \NC@char\space is already defined}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we define a macro with an argument delimited by the new column
% specifier, this is used to find occurences of this specifier in the
% user preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{NC@find@\NC@char}##1#1{\NC@{##1}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% If an optional argument was not given, give a default argument of 0.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifnextchar[{\newcol@{\NC@char}}{\newcol@{\NC@char}[0]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\newcol@}
% We can now define the macro which does the rewriting,
% \cs{@reargdef} takes the same arguments as \cs{newcommand}, but
% does not check that the command is new. For a column, say `D' with
% one argument, define a command \cs{NC@rewrite@D} with one
% argument, which recursively calls \cs{NC@find} on the user preamble
% after replacing the first token or group with the replacement text
% specified in the \cs{newcolumntype} command. \cs{NC@find} will find the
% next occurrence of `D' as it will be \cs{let} equal to
% \cs{NC@find@D} by \cs{NC@do}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\newcol@#1[#2]#3{\expandafter\@reargdef
\csname NC@rewrite@#1\endcsname[#2]{\NC@find#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\NC@}
% Having found an occurence of the new column, save the preamble
% before the column in \cs{@temptokena}, then check to see if we
% are at the end of the preamble. (A dummy occurrence of the column
% specifier will be placed at the end of the preamble by \cs{NC@do}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\NC@#1{%
\@temptokena\expandafter{\the\@temptokena#1}\futurelet\next\NC@ifend}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\NC@ifend}
% We can tell that we are at the end as \cs{NC@do} will place a \cs{relax}
% after the dummy column.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\NC@ifend{%
% \end{macrocode}
% If we are at the end, do nothing. (The whole preamble will now be in
% \cs{@temptokena}.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\next\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise set the flag \cs{if@tempswa}, and rewrite the column.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else\@tempswatrue\expandafter\NC@rewrite\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\NC@do}
% If the user has specified `C' and `L' as new columns, the list of
% rewrites (in the token register \cs{NC@list}) will look like
% \verb?\NC@do *? \verb?\NC@do C? \verb?\NC@do L?.
% So we need to define \cs{NC@do} as a one argument macro which
% initialises the rewriting of the specified column. Let us assume that
% `C' is the argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\NC@do#1{%
% \end{macrocode}
% First we let \cs{NC@rewrite} and \cs{NC@find} be
% \cs{NC@rewrite@C} and \cs{NC@find@C} respectively.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\let\expandafter\NC@rewrite
\csname NC@rewrite@\string#1\endcsname
\expandafter\let\expandafter\NC@find
\csname NC@find@\string#1\endcsname
% \end{macrocode}
% Clear the token register \cs{@temptokena} after putting the present
% contents of the register in front of the token \cs{NC@find}. At the
% end we place the tokens `\verb?C\relax?' which \cs{NC@ifend} will use
% to detect the end of the user preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\expandafter}%
\expandafter\NC@find\the\@temptokena#1\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\showcols}
% This macro is useful for debugging \cs{newcolumntype} specifications,
% it is the equivalent of the primitive \cs{show} command for macro
% definitions. All we need to do is locally redefine \cs{NC@do} to take
% its argument (say `C') and then \cs{show} the (slightly modified)
% definition of \cs{NC@rewrite@C}. Actually as the the list always
% starts off with \verb?\NC@do *? and we do not want to print the
% definition of the $*$-form, define \cs{NC@do} to throw away the first
% item in the list, and then redefine itsef to print the rest of the
% definitions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\showcols{{\def\NC@do##1{\let\NC@do\NC@show}\the\NC@list}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\NC@show}
% If the column `C' is defined as above, then
% \verb?\show\NC@rewrite@C? would output\\
% \verb?\long macro: ->\NC@find >{$}c<{$}?.
% We want to strip the \verb?\long macro: ->? and the \cs{NC@find}. So first we
% use \cs{meaning} and then apply the macro \cs{NC@strip} to the tokens so
% produced and then \cs{typeout} the required string.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\NC@show#1{%
\typeout{Column #1\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\NC@strip
\expandafter\meaning\csname NC@rewrite@#1\endcsname\@@}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\NC@strip}
% Delimit the arguments to \cs{NC@strip} with `\texttt{:}', `\texttt{->}',
% a space, and \cs{@@} to pull out the required parts of the output from
% \cs{meaning}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\NC@strip#1:#2->#3 #4\@@{#2 -> #4}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\NC@list}
% Allocate the token register used for the rewrite list.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\NC@list
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{The $*$--form}
% We view the $*$-form as a slight generalisation of the system
% described in the previous subsection. The idea is to define a $*$
% column by a command of the form:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newcolumntype{*}[2]{%
% \count@=#1\ifnum\count@>0
% \advance\count@ by -1 #2*{\count@}{#2}\fi}
% \end{verbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\NC@rewrite@*}\label{NC@rewrite@*}
% This does not work however as \cs{newcolumntype} takes great care not
% to expand anything in the preamble, and so the \cs{if} is never
% expanded. \cs{newcolumntype} sets up various other parts of the
% rewrite correctly though so we can define:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcolumntype{*}[2]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we must correct the definition of \cs{NC@rewrite@*}. The
% following is probably more efficient than a direct translation of
% the idea sketched above, we do not need to put a $*$ in the preamble
% and call the rewrite recursively, we can just put \verb?#1? copies of
% \verb?#2? into \cs{@temptokena}. (Nested $*$ forms will be expanded
% when the whole rewrite list is expanded again, see \cs{@mkpream})
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Fixed original bug in \cs{NC@rewrite@*} (mempatch v3.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\@namedef{NC@rewrite@*}#1#2{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Store the number.
% \begin{macrocode}
\count@#1\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Put \verb?#1? copies of \verb?#2? in the token register.
% \begin{macrocode}
\loop
\ifnum\count@>\z@
\advance\count@\m@ne
\@temptokena\expandafter{\the\@temptokena#2}%
\repeat
% \end{macrocode}
% \cs{NC@do} will ensure that \cs{NC@find} is \cs{let} equal
% to \cs{NC@find@*}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\NC@find}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Getting the spacing around rules right}
%
% The Companion~\cite[p.137]{GOOSSENS94} suggests two additional
% commands to control the allignments in case of tabulars with
% horizontal lines. They are now added to this package.
%
% \begin{macro}{\extratabsurround}
% The extra space around a table when \cs{firsthline} or \cs{lasthline}
% are used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\extratabsurround}
\setlength{\extratabsurround}{2pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\backup@length}
% This register will be used internally by \cs{firsthline} and
% \cs{lasthline}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\backup@length}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\firsthline}
% This code can probably be improved but for the moment it should
% serve.
%
% We start by producing a single tabular row without any visible
% content that will produce the external reference point in case
% \verb?[t]? is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\firsthline}{%
\multicolumn1c{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Within this row we calculate \cs{backup@length} to be the height
% plus depth of a standard line. In addition we have to add the
% width of the \cs{hline}, something that was forgotten in the
% original definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\global\backup@length\ht\@arstrutbox
\global\advance\backup@length\dp\@arstrutbox
\global\advance\backup@length\arrayrulewidth
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally we do want to make the height of this first line be a bit
% larger than usual, for this we place the standard array strut
% into it but raised by \cs{extratabsurround}
% \begin{macrocode}
\raise\extratabsurround\copy\@arstrutbox
% \end{macrocode}
% Having done all this we end the line and back up by the value of
% \cs{backup@length} and then finally place our \cs{hline}. This should
% place the line exactly at the right place but keep the reference
% point of the whole tabular at the baseline of the first row.
% \begin{macrocode}
}\\[-\backup@length]\hline
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lasthline}
% For \cs{lasthline} the situation is even worse and I got it
% completely wrong initially.
%
% The problem in this case is that if the optional argument \verb?[b]?
% is used we do want the reference point of the tabular be at the
% baseline of the last row but at the same time do want the the
% depth of this last line increased by \cs{extratabsurround} without
% changing the placement \cs{hline}.
%
% We start by placing the rule followed by an invisible row.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\lasthline}{\hline\multicolumn1c{%
% \end{macrocode}
% We now calculate \cs{backup@length} to be the height and depth of
% two lines plus the width of the rule.
% \begin{macrocode}
\global\backup@length2\ht\@arstrutbox
\global\advance\backup@length2\dp\@arstrutbox
\global\advance\backup@length\arrayrulewidth
% \end{macrocode}
% This will bring us back to the baseline of the second last row:
% \begin{macrocode}
}\\[-\backup@length]%
% \end{macrocode}
% Thus if we now add another invisible row the reference point of
% that row will be at the baseline of the last row (and will be the
% reference for the whole tabular). Since this row is invisible we
% can enlarge its depth by the desired amount.
% \begin{macrocode}
\multicolumn1c{%
\lower\extratabsurround\copy\@arstrutbox
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% Beside a larger functionality \file{array.sty} has one
% important difference to the standard \texttt{tabular} and
% \texttt{array} environments: horizontal and vertical rules make a
% table larger or wider, e.g., \cs{doublerulesep} really denotes
% the space between two rules and isn't measured from the middle of
% the rules.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xhline}
% For vertical rules this is implemented by the definitions above,
% for horizontal rules we have to take out the backspace.
% \begin{macrocode}
\CheckCommand*\@xhline{\ifx\reserved@a\hline
\vskip\doublerulesep
\vskip-\arrayrulewidth
\fi
\ifnum0=`{\fi}}
\renewcommand*\@xhline{\ifx\reserved@a\hline
\vskip\doublerulesep
\fi
\ifnum0=`{\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%%% end Array package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{D column specifiers} \label{sec:dcolumns}
%
% The description and code are essentially copied from the
% \Lpack{dcolumn} package~\cite{DCOLUMN}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% Dcolumn package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%% With acknowledgements to David Carlisle %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% The \Lpack{dcolumn} package~\cite{DCOLUMN} defines \texttt{D}
% to be a column specifier
% with three arguments.\\
% \verb?D?\marg{sep.tex}\marg{sep.dvi}\marg{decimal places}
% for columns which are to be aligned on a `decimal point'.
%
%
% The basic ideas behind these macros have been explained earlier.
% However they use three
% tricks which may be useful in other contexts.
% \begin{itemize}
% \item The separator is surrounded in extra \verb?{ }?, so that it is set
% with \cs{mathord} spacing, otherwise, for instance a `,' would have
% extra space after it.
% \item The separator is not given its special definition by making it
% active, as this would not work for an entry such as \verb?& .5 &?, as the
% first token of an alignment entry is read \emph{before} the preamble
% part, incase it is an \cs{omit}, in which case the preamble is to be
% omitted. Instead we switch the mathcode to (hex) 8000, which makes the
% token act as if it were active.
% \item Although \verb?\mathcode`.="8000? makes \texttt{.} act as if it
% were active, it is still not allowed in constructions such as
% \verb?\def.{}?, even in math-mode, so we have to construct an active
% version of the separator, this is done by making it the uppercase of
% \verb?~?, and then using the construct\\
% \verb?\uppercase{\def~}?\marg{definition}.\\
% Note that the \meta{definition} is not uppercased, so the definition
% can refer to the standard, non-active use of the separator.
% \end{itemize}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DC@}
% Set up uppercase tables as required, and then grab the first part of
% the numerical argument into \cs{count@}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\DC@#1#2#3{%
\uccode`\~=`#1\relax
\m@th
\afterassignment\DC@x\count@#3\relax{#1}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DC@x}
% If \cs{count@} is negative, centre on the decimal point. If it is
% positive either \verb?#1? will be empty in which case bad out decimal
% part to the number of digits specified by \cs{count@} or
% it is none empty in which case \cs{count@} contains the
% number of digits to the left of the point, and \verb?#1? contains a junk
% token (probably \verb?.?) followed by the number of digits to the right
% of the point. In either of these latter cases, \cs{DC@right} is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\DC@x#1\relax#2#3{%
\ifnum\z@>\count@
\expandafter\DC@centre
\else
\expandafter\DC@right
\fi
{#2}{#3}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DC@centre}
% If centering on the decimal point, just need to box up the two halves.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\DC@centre#1#2#3{%
\let\DC@end\DC@endcentre
\uppercase{\def~}{$\egroup\setbox\tw@=\hbox\bgroup${#2}}%
\setbox\tw@=\hbox{${\phantom{{#2}}}$}%
\setbox\z@=\hbox\bgroup$\mathcode`#1="8000 }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DC@endcentre}
% and then pad out the smaller of the two boxes so there is the same
% amount of stuff either side of the point.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\DC@endcentre{$\egroup
\ifdim \wd\z@>\wd\tw@
\setbox\tw@=\hbox to\wd\z@{\unhbox\tw@\hfill}%
\else
\setbox\z@=\hbox to\wd\tw@{\hfill\unhbox\z@}\fi
\box\z@\box\tw@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DC@right}
% This deals with both the cases where a specified number of decimal
% places is given.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\DC@right#1#2#3{%
\ifx\relax#3\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% If \verb?#3? is empty, add \cs{hfill} to right align the column, and
% Just set \cs{DC@rl} to begin a group, so nothing fancy is done with
% the whole number part.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hfill
\let\DC@rl\bgroup
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise set \cs{DC@rl} so that the whole number part is put in a
% box \cs{count@} times as wide as a digit.
% In order to share code with the other branch, then move \verb?#3? (the
% number of decimal places) into \cs{count@} throwing away the `.' from
% the user syntax.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\DC@rl{to\the\count@\dimen@ii\bgroup\hss\hfill}%
\count@\@gobble#3\relax
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\DC@end\DC@endright
% \end{macrocode}
% Box 2 contains the decimal part, set to \cs{dimen@} which is
% calculated below to be \cs{count@} times the width of a digit, plus
% the width of the `decimal point'.
% \begin{macrocode}
\uppercase{\def~}{$\egroup\setbox\tw@\hbox to\dimen@\bgroup${#2}}%
\setbox\z@\hbox{$1$}\dimen@ii\wd\z@
\dimen@\count@\dimen@ii
\setbox\z@\hbox{${#2}$}\advance\dimen@\wd\z@
\setbox\tw@\hbox to\dimen@{}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Box 0 contains the whole number part, either just at its natural
% size for right aligned columns, or set to (the old value of)
% \cs{count@} times the width of a digit. \cs{DC@rl} defined above
% determines the two cases.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setbox\z@\hbox\DC@rl$\mathcode`#1="8000 }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DC@endright}
% Just finish off the second box, and then put out both boxes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\DC@endright{$\hfil\egroup\box\z@\box\tw@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{D}
% The user interface, define the {\tt D} column to take three arguments.
% For special purposes, you may need to directly access \cs{DC@} rather
% than the \verb?D? column, eg to get a bold version you could use
%\begin{verbatim}
% \newcolumntype{E}[3]{>{\boldmath\DC@{#1}{#2}{#3}}c<{\DC@end}}
%\end{verbatim}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcolumntype{D}[3]{>{\DC@{#1}{#2}{#3}}c<{\DC@end}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% end Dcolumn package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Support for delimeters}
%
% The description and code are essentially from the
% \Lpack{delarray} package~\cite{DELARRAY}, v1.01 1994/03/14.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% Delarray package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%% With acknowledgements to David Carlisle %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% The array syntax is extended by
% supporting the notation of delimiters. To this end we extend the
% array parsing mechanism to include a hook which can be used by this
% (or another) package to do some additional parsing.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@array}
% This macro tests for an optional delimiter before the left brace
% of the main preamble argument. If there is no delimiter,
% \cs{@arrayleft} and \cs{@arrayright} are made a no-ops, and
% \cs{@array} is called with the positional argument. Otherwise
% call \cs{@del@array}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@array[#1]{\@ifnextchar\bgroup
{\let\@arrayleft\relax\let\@arrayright\relax\@array[#1]}%
{\@del@array[#1]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@del@array}
% We now know that we have an {\tt array} (or {\tt tabular}) with
% delimiters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@del@array[#1]#2#3#4{%
% \end{macrocode}
% The following line is completely redundant but it does catch errors
% involving delimiters before the processing of the alignment begins.
% A common error is likely to be omiting the `.' in a
% \cs{cases}-type construction. This causes the first token of the
% alignment to be gobbled, possibly causing lots of spurious errors
% before the cause of the error, the missing delimiter, is discovered as
% \cs{@arrayright} puts the alignment and the delimiters together.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setbox\z@\hbox{$\left#2\right#4$}%
% \end{macrocode}
% In the case of a `c' argument we do not need to rebox the alignment,
% so we can define \cs{@arrayleft} and \cs{@arrayright} just to
% insert the delimiters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if#1c\def\@arrayleft{\left#2}\def\@arrayright{\right#4}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise we (should) have a {\tt[t]} or {\tt[b]} argument, so first we
% store the alignment, without delimiters in box0.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else\def\@arrayleft{\setbox\z@}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Then after the alignment is finished:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@arrayright{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Calculate the amount the box needs to be lowered (this will be
% negative in the case of \verb?[b]?). A little bit of arithmetic cf.\
% \theTeXbook, Appendix G, rule 8. We calculate the amount this
% way, rather than just taking the difference between the depth of box0
% and the depth of the box defined below, as the depth of that box may
% be affected by the delimiters if \cs{delimitershortfall} or
% \cs{delimiterfactor} have non-standard values.
% \begin{macrocode}
\dimen@=\dp\z@
\advance\dimen@-\ht\z@
\divide \dimen@ by \tw@
\advance\dimen@ by\fontdimen22 \textfont\tw@
% \end{macrocode}
% Now lower the alignment and the delimiters into place.
% \begin{macrocode}
\lower\dimen@\hbox{$\left#2\vcenter{\unvbox\z@}\right#4$}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% End the \verb?\if#1c?
% \begin{macrocode}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Now that we have defined \cs{@arrayleft} and \cs{@arrayright}, call
% \cs{@array}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@array[#1]{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% end Delarray package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{The tabularx environment}
%
% The code and description are essentially from David Carlisle's
% \Lpack{tabularx} package~\cite{TABULARX}, v2.07 1999/01/07.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% Tabularx package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%% With acknowledgements to David Carlisle %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% The \Lpack{tabularx} package~\cite{TABULARX} implements a version of the \texttt{tabular}
% environment in which the widths of certain columns are calculated so
% that the table is is a specified width. The columns that may stretch are
% marked by an \texttt{X} in the preamble argument.
%
%
% First some registers etc.\ that we need.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\TX@col@width
\newdimen\TX@old@table
\newdimen\TX@old@col
\newdimen\TX@target
\newdimen\TX@delta
\newcount\TX@cols
\newif\ifTX@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Now a trick to get the body of an environment into a token register,
% without doing any expansion. This does not do any real checking of
% nested environments, so if you should need to nest one {\ttfamily
% tabularx} inside another, the inner one must be surrounded by \verb?{ }?.
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabularx}
% Just save
% the width specification separately, then clear the token register
% \cs{toks@}.
% Finally call \cs{TX@get@body} to begin saving the body of the table.
% The \verb?{\ifnum0=`}\fi? allows \verb?tabularx? to appear
% inside a \cs{halign}.^^A
% \setbox0=\hbox{\footnotesize\verb?\iffalse{\fi\ifnum0=`}\fi?}^^A
% \setbox2=\hbox{\footnotesize\verb?\ifnum0=`{}\fi?}^^A
% \footnote{This adds an extra level of grouping,
% which is not really needed. Instead, I could use \box0\ here, and
% \box2\ below, however the code here would then have to be moved after
% the first line, because of the footnote to page 386 of \theTeXbook,
% and I do not think I should be writing code that is so obscure as to
% be documented in a footnote in an appendix called ``Dirty Tricks''!}
%
% This mechanism of grabbing an environment body does have the
% disadvantage (shared with the AMS alignment environments) that you
% can not make extension environments by code such as
%\begin{verbatim}
%\newenvironment{foo}{\begin{tabularx}{XX}}{\end{tabularx}}
%\end{verbatim}
% as the code is looking for a literal string \verb?\end{tabularx}? to stop
% scanning. One may avoid this problem by using
% \cs{tabularx} and \cs{endtabularx} directly in the definition:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\newenvironment{foo}{\tabularx{XX}}{\endtabularx}
%\end{verbatim}
% The scanner now looks for the end of the current environment (\verb?foo? in
% this example.) There are some restrictions on this usage, the
% principal one being that \cs{endtabularx} is the \emph{first} token of
% the `end code' of the environment.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\tabularx#1{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Allow \cs{tabularx} \cs{endtabularx} (but not \verb?\begin{tabularx}?
% \verb?\end{tabularx}?) to be used in \cs{newenvironment} definitions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\TX@{\@currenvir}%
{\ifnum0=`}\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \cs{setlength} lets you
% use the \Lpack{calc} package so you could use a width of, say \\
% \verb?(\textwidth-12pt)/2?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\TX@target{#1}%
\TX@typeout{Target width: #1 = \the\TX@target.}%
\toks@{}\TX@get@body}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endtabularx}
% This does not do very much\ldots
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\endtabularx\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@get@body}
% Place all tokens as far as the first \cs{end} into a token register.
% Then call \cs{TX@find@end} to see if we are at \verb?\end{tabularx}?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\TX@get@body#1\end
{\toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@#1}\TX@find@end}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@find@end}
% If we are at \verb?\end{tabularx}?, call \cs{TX@endtabularx}, otherwise
% add \verb?\end{...}? to the register, and call \cs{TX@get@body} again.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@find@end#1{%
\def\@tempa{#1}%
\ifx\@tempa\TX@\expandafter\TX@endtabularx
\else\toks@\expandafter
{\the\toks@\end{#1}}\expandafter\TX@get@body\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@}
% The string \texttt{tabularx} as a macro for testing with \cs{ifx}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@{tabularx}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now that all the parts of the table specification are stored in
% registers, we can begin the work of setting the table.
%
% The algorithm for finding the correct column widths is as follows.
% Firstly set the table with each \texttt{X} column the width of the
% final table. Assuming that there is at least one \texttt{X} column,
% this will produce a table that is too wide. Divide the excess width by
% the number of \texttt{X} columns, and reduce the column width by
% this amount. Reset the table. If the table is not now the correct
% width, a \cs{multicolumn} entry must be `hiding' one of the {\ttfamily
% X} columns, and so there is one less \texttt{X} column affecting
% the width of the table. So we reduce by 1 the number of X columns and
% repeat the process.
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@endtabularx}
% Although I have tried to make \texttt{tabularx} look like an
% environment, it is in fact a command, all the work is done by this
% macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@endtabularx{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Define the \texttt{X} column, with an internal version of the
% \cs{newcolumntype} command. The \cs{expandafter} commands enable
% \cs{NC@newcol} to get the \emph{expansion} of\\
% \verb?\tabularxcolumn{\TX@col@width}? as its
% argument. This will be the definition of an \texttt{X} column.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\TX@newcol\expandafter{\tabularxcolumn{\TX@col@width}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Initialise the column width, and the number of \texttt{X} columns.
% The number of \texttt{X} columns is set to one, which means that
% the initial count will be one too high, but this value is decremented
% before it is used in the main loop.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\verb\TX@verb
% \end{macrocode}
% Save the values of all \LaTeX\ counters; the list
% \cs{cl@@ckpt} contains the names of all the \LaTeX\ counters that have
% been defined so far. We expand \cs{setcounter} at this point, as it
% results in fewer tokens being stored in \cs{TX@ckpt}, but the actual
% resetting of the counters occurs when \cs{TX@ckpt} is expanded after
% each trial run.
% Actually, use something equivalent to the expansion of the
% original definition of \cs{setcounter}, so that \verb?tabularx? works in
% conjunction with \file{calc.sty}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@elt##1{\global\value{##1}\the\value{##1}\relax}%
\edef\TX@ckpt{\cl@@ckpt}%
\let\@elt\relax
\TX@old@table\maxdimen
\TX@col@width\TX@target
\global\TX@cols\@ne
% \end{macrocode}
% Typeout some headings (unless this is disabled).
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@typeout@
{\@spaces Table Width\@spaces Column Width\@spaces X Columns}%
% \end{macrocode}%
% First attempt. Modify the \texttt{X} definition to count {\ttfamily
% X} columns.
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@trial{\def\NC@rewrite@X{%
\global\advance\TX@cols\@ne\NC@find p{\TX@col@width}}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Repeatedly decrease column width until table is the correct width,
% or stops shrinking, or the columns become two narrow.
% If there are no multicolumn entries, this will only take one attempt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\loop
\TX@arith
\ifTX@
\TX@trial{}%
\repeat
% \end{macrocode}
% One last time, with warnings back on (see appendix D)
% use \texttt{tabular*} to put it in a box of the right size, in case
% the algorithm failed to find the correct size.
%
% Locally make \cs{footnotetext} save its argument in a token
% register.
% \cs{toks@} contains the preamble specification,
% and possible optional argument, as well as the table body.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\let\@footnotetext\TX@ftntext\let\@xfootnotenext\TX@xftntext
\csname tabular*\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter\TX@target
\the\toks@
\csname endtabular*\endcsname}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Now the alignment is finished, and the \verb?}? has restored the original
% meaning of \cs{@footnotetext} expand the register \cs{TX@ftn} which will
% execute a series of\\
% \verb?\footnotetext[<num>]{<note>}? \\
% commands. We need to be careful about clearing the register as we may
% be inside a nested \texttt{tabularx}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\global\TX@ftn\expandafter{\expandafter}\the\TX@ftn
% \end{macrocode}
% Now finish off the \texttt{tabularx} environment. Note that we need
% \verb?\end{tabularx}? here as the \verb?\end{tabularx}? in the user's
% file is never expanded. Now use \cs{TX@} rather than \verb?tabularx?.
%
% We also need to finish off the group started by \verb?{\ifnum0=`}\fi? in
% the macro \cs{tabularx}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
\expandafter\end\expandafter{\TX@}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@arith}
% Calculate the column width for the next try, setting the flag
% \cs{ifTX@} to false if the loop should be aborted.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@arith{%
\TX@false
\ifdim\TX@old@table=\wd\@tempboxa
% \end{macrocode}
% If we have reduced the column width, but the table width has not
% changed, we stop the loop, and output the table (which will cause an
% over-full alignment) with the previous value of \cs{TX@col@width}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@col@width\TX@old@col
\TX@typeout@{Reached minimum width, backing up.}%
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise calculate the amount by which the current table is too wide.
% \begin{macrocode}
\dimen@\wd\@tempboxa
\advance\dimen@ -\TX@target
\ifdim\dimen@<\TX@delta
% \end{macrocode}
% If this amount is less than \cs{TX@delta}, stop. (\cs{TX@delta}
% should be non-zero otherwise we may miss the target due to rounding
% error.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@typeout@{Reached target.}%
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Reduce the number of effective \texttt{X} columns by one. (Checking
% that we do not get 0, as this would produce an error later.) Then
% divide excess width by the number of effective columns, and calculate
% the new column width. Temporarily store this value (times $-1$) in
% \cs{dimen@}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\TX@cols>\@ne
\advance\TX@cols\m@ne
\fi
\divide\dimen@\TX@cols
\advance\dimen@ -\TX@col@width
\ifdim \dimen@ >\z@
% \end{macrocode}
% If the new width would be too narrow, abort the loop. At the moment
% too narrow, means less than 0\,pt!
%
% If the loop was aborted here and the X columns were left
% with the width of the previous run it may make the table far
% too wide as initial guesses are always too big. Force to
% \cs{TX@error@width} which defaults to be 1em.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@memwarn{X Columns too narrow (table too wide)\MessageBreak}%
\TX@col@width\TX@error@width\relax
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise save the old settings, and set the new column width. Set the
% flag to true so that the table will be set, and the loop will be
% executed again.
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@old@col\TX@col@width
\TX@old@table\wd\@tempboxa
\TX@col@width-\dimen@
\TX@true
\fi
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@error@width}
% If the calculated width is negative, use this instead.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@error@width{1em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@delta}
% Accept a table that is within \cs{hfuzz} of the correct width.
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@delta\hfuzz
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Initialise the \texttt{X} column. The definition can be empty here,
% as it is set for each \texttt{tabularx} environment.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcolumntype{X}{}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabularxcolumn}
% The default definition of \texttt{X} is \verb?p{#1}?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\tabularxcolumn#1{p{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@newcol}
% A little macro just used to cut down the number of \cs{expandafter}
% commands needed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@newcol{\newcol@{X}[0]}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@trial}
% Make a test run.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@trial#1{%
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Any extra commands. This is used on the first run to count the number
% of \texttt{X} columns.
% \begin{macrocode}
#1\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Make \cs{footnotetext} gobble its arguments. Also locally
% clear \cs{TX@vwarn} so that the warning is generated by the {\ttfamily
% final} run, and does not appear in the middle of the table if
% \cs{tracingtabularx}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@footnotetext\TX@trial@ftn
\let\TX@vwarn\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% Do not nest \texttt{tabularx} environments during trial runs. This
% would waste time, and the global setting of \cs{TX@cols} would break the
% algorithm.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\let\expandafter\tabularx\csname tabular*\endcsname
\expandafter\let\expandafter\endtabularx\csname endtabular*\endcsname
% \end{macrocode}
% Dissable \cs{write}s during a trial run. This trick is
% from \theTeXbook.\footnote{Actually the trick does
% not work correctly, so it has been changed.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\write{\begingroup
\def\let{\afterassignment\endgroup\toks@}%
\afterassignment\let\count@}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Turn off warnings (see appendix D). Also prevent them being turned
% back on by setting the parameter names to be registers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hbadness\@M
\hfuzz\maxdimen
\let\hbadness\@tempcnta
\let\hfuzz\@tempdima
% \end{macrocode}
% Make the table, and finish the hbox.
% \cs{toks@} contains the preamble specification,
% and possible optional argument, as well as the table body.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\tabular\the\toks@
\endtabular}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Reset all \LaTeX\ counters, by executing \cs{TX@ckpt}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@ckpt
% \end{macrocode}
% Print some statistics.
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@typeout@{\@spaces
\expandafter\TX@align
\the\wd\@tempboxa\space\space\space\space\space\@@
\expandafter\TX@align
\the\TX@col@width\space\space\space\space\space\@@
\@spaces\the\TX@cols}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@align}
% Macro to improve the printing of the tracing info.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@align#1.#2#3#4#5#6#7#8#9\@@{%
\ifnum#1<10 \space\fi
\ifnum#1<100 \space\fi
\ifnum#1<\@m\space\fi
\ifnum#1<\@M\space\fi
#1.#2#3#4#5#6#7#8\space\space}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\arraybackslash}
% \verb?\\? hack.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\arraybackslash{\let\\\@arraycr}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tracingtabularx}
% Print statistics on column and table widths.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\tracingtabularx{%
\def\TX@typeout{\ClassWarningNoLine{memoir}}%
\def\TX@typeout@##1{\typeout{(tabularx) ##1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@typeout}
% The default is to be to be quiet
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\TX@typeout\@gobble
\let\TX@typeout@\@gobble
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@ftn}
% A token register for saving footnote texts.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\TX@ftn
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@ftntext}
% \begin{macro}{\TX@xftntext}
% Inside the alignment just save up the footnote text in a token
% register.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\TX@ftntext#1{%
\edef\@tempa{\the\TX@ftn\noexpand\footnotetext
[\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname]}%
\global\TX@ftn\expandafter{\@tempa{#1}}}%
\long\def\TX@xftntext[#1]#2{%
\global\TX@ftn\expandafter{\the\TX@ftn\footnotetext[#1]{#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@trial@ftn}
% On trial runs, gobble footnote texts.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\TX@trial@ftn#1{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% This last section was added at Version 1.02. Previous versions
% documentented the fact that \cs{verb} did not work inside {\ttfamily
% tabularx}, but that did not stop people using it! This usually put
% \LaTeX\ into an irrecoverable error position, with error messages that
% did not mention the cause of the error. The `poor man's \cs{verb}' (and
% \cs{verb*}) defined here is based on page 382 of \theTeXbook. As
% explained there, doing verbatim this way means that spaces are not
% treated correctly, and so \cs{verb*} may well be useless, however I
% consider this section of code to be error-recovery, rather than a real
% implementation of verbatim.
%
% The mechanism is quite general, and any macro which wants to allow a
% form of \cs{verb} to be used within its argument may
% \verb?\let\verb=\TX@verb?. (Making sure to restore the real definition
% later!)
%
% \cs{verb} and \cs{verb*} are subject to the following restictions:
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item Spaces in the argument are not read verbatim, but may be skipped
% according to \TeX's usual rules.
% \item Spaces will be added to the output after control words, even if
% they were not present in the input.
% \item Unless the argument is a single space, any trailing space,
% whether in the original argument, or added as in (2),
% will be omitted.
% \item The argument must not end with \verb?\?, so \verb?\verb|\|? is not
% allowed, however, because of (3), \verb?\verb|\ |? produces
% \verb?\?.
% \item The argument must be balanced with respect to \verb?{? and \verb?}?. So
% \verb?\verb|{|? is not allowed.
% \item A comment character like \verb?%? will not appear verbatim. It will
% act as usual, commenting out the rest of the input line!
% \item The combinations \verb=?`= and \verb?!`? will appear as
% {\ttfamily?`} and {\ttfamily!`} if the \texttt{cmtt} font is
% being used.
% \end{enumerate}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@verb}
% The internal definition of \cs{verb}. Spaces will be replaced by \verb?~?, so
% for the star-form, \cs{let} \verb?~? be \verb?\verb*| |?, which we obtain as
% \verb?\uppercase{*}?. Use \verb?{\ifnum0=`}\fi? rather than \cs{bgroup} to allow
% \verb?&? to appear in the argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\uccode`\*=`\ %
\uppercase{\gdef\TX@verb{%
\leavevmode\null\TX@vwarn
{\ifnum0=`}\fi\ttfamily\let\\\ignorespaces
\@ifstar{\let~*\TX@vb}{\TX@vb}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@vb}
% Get the `almost verbatim' text using \cs{meaning}. The `\verb?!?' is added to
% the front of the user supplied text, to ensure that the whole argument
% does not consist of a single \verb?{ }? group. \TeX\ would strip the outer
% braces from such a group. The `\verb?!?' will be removed later.
%
% Originally I followed Knuth, and had \verb?\def\@tempa{##1}?, however this
% did not allow \verb?#? to appear in the argument. So I changed
% this to to use a token register, and \cs{edef}. This allows \verb?#? appear,
% but makes each one appear twice!, so later we loop through, replacing
% \verb?##? by \verb?#?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@vb#1{\def\@tempa##1#1{\toks@{##1}\edef\@tempa{\the\toks@}%
\expandafter\TX@v\meaning\@tempa\\ \\\ifnum0=`{\fi}}\@tempa!}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@v}
% Strip the initial segment of the \cs{meaning}, including the `\verb?!?'
% added earlier.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@v#1!{\afterassignment\TX@vfirst\let\@tempa= }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% As explained above we are going to replace \verb?##? pairs by \verb?#?. To do
% this we need non-special \verb?#? tokens. Make \verb?*? into a parameter
% token so that we can define macros with arguments. The normal meanings
% will be restored by the \cs{endgroup} later.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\catcode`\*=\catcode`\#
\catcode`\#=12
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@vfirst}
% As a special case, prevent the first character from being dropped.
% This makes \verb?\verb*| |? produce \verb*? ?. Then call \cs{TX@v@}.
% This is slightly tricky as I have to ensure that an
% actual \verb?#? rather than a command \cs{let} to \verb?#? is passed on if the
% first character is \verb?#?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\TX@vfirst{%
\if\@tempa#%
\def\@tempb{\TX@v@#}%
\else
\let\@tempb\TX@v@
\if\@tempa\space~\else\@tempa\fi
\fi
\@tempb}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@v@}
% Loop through the \cs{meaning}, replacing all spaces by \verb?~?. If the last
% character is a space it is dropped, so that \verb?\verb*|\LaTeX|? produces
% \verb?\LaTeX? not \verb*?\LaTeX ?. The rewritten tokens are then further
% processed to replace \verb?##? pairs.
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\TX@v@*1 *2{%
\TX@v@hash*1##\relax\if*2\\\else~\expandafter\TX@v@\fi*2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@v@hash}
% The inner loop, replacing \verb?##? by \verb?#?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\TX@v@hash*1##*2{*1\ifx*2\relax\else#\expandafter\TX@v@hash\fi*2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% As promised, we now restore the normal meanings of \verb?#? and \verb?*?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@vwarn}
% Warn the user the first time this \cs{verb} is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@vwarn{%
\@warning{\noexpand\verb may be unreliable inside tabularx}%
\global\let\TX@vwarn\@empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% end Tabularx package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% At this point we had better stop anyone trying to load the several
% tabular-related packages (as effectively they are already loaded).
% \begin{macrocode}
%%\@memfakeusepackage{array}
%%\@memfakeusepackage{dcolumn}
%%\@memfakeusepackage{delarray}
%%\@memfakeusepackage{tabularx}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
%
% \subsection{Fear's rules}
%
% Simon Fear disapproves of the default \LaTeX{} table rules and
% wrote the \Lpack{booktabs} package~\cite{BOOKTABS} to provide
% better horizontal rules. Like many typographers, he abhors vertical rules.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\bktabrule}
% The rules in this section are based on \verb?\hrule \@height#1? but this
% does not
% work for continuous tabulars. Provide a version of this that
% can be \cs{let} when necessary.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\bktabrule}[1]{%
\hrule \@height#1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The following is taken almost verbatim from the \Lpack{booktabs} package,
% version~1.618, March 2003.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% Booktabs package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%% slightly modified by PRW %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%% by permission of Simon Fear %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
% Danie Els is now (2005) the official maintainer of the \Lpack{booktabs} package. He provided me with
% some updates to synchronize \Lpack{memoir}, \Lpack{booktabs} and support for \Lpack{colortbl} with \Lpack{booktabs}. I made the appropriate changes/extensions
% on 2005/09/03 as part of version 1.618 of \Lpack{memoir}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\CT@arc@}
% This supports the \Lpack{bookhands}/\Lpack{colortbl} package combination.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\providecommand*{\CT@arc@}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\heavyrulewidth}
% \begin{macro}{\lightrulewidth}
% \begin{macro}{\cmidrulewidth}
% \begin{macro}{\belowrulesep}
% \begin{macro}{\belowbottomsep}
% \begin{macro}{\aboverulesep}
% \begin{macro}{\abovetopsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cmidrulesep}
% \begin{macro}{\cmidrulekern}
% \begin{macro}{\defaultaddspace}
% First we set up some new dimensions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\heavyrulewidth
\newdimen\lightrulewidth
\newdimen\cmidrulewidth
\newdimen\belowrulesep
\newdimen\belowbottomsep
\newdimen\aboverulesep
\newdimen\abovetopsep
\newdimen\cmidrulesep
\newdimen\cmidrulekern
\newdimen\defaultaddspace
\heavyrulewidth=.08em
\lightrulewidth=.05em
\cmidrulewidth=.03em
\belowrulesep=.65ex
\belowbottomsep=\z@
\aboverulesep=.4ex
\abovetopsep=\z@
\cmidrulesep=\doublerulesep
\cmidrulekern=.5em
\defaultaddspace=.5em
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@cmidla}
% \begin{macro}{\@cmidlb}
% \begin{macro}{\@aboverulesep}
% \begin{macro}{\@belowrulesep}
% \begin{macro}{\@thisruleclass}
% \begin{macro}{\@lastruleclass}
% \begin{macro}{\@thisrulewidth}
% And some internal counters and other things of no interest to the end user:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\@cmidla
\newcount\@cmidlb
\newdimen\@aboverulesep
\newdimen\@belowrulesep
\newcount\@thisruleclass
\newcount\@lastruleclass
\@lastruleclass=0
\newdimen\@thisrulewidth
% \end{macrocode}
% which will be described as needed below.
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\futurenonspacelet}
% \begin{macro}{\@BTfnslone}
% \begin{macro}{\@BTfnsltwo}
% \begin{macro}{\@BTfnslthree}
% Next we define a very useful macro (more-or-less straight from the
% \theTeXbook's Dirty Tricks chapter; documented there). Use
% \cs{futurenonspacelet} instead of \cs{futurelet} when looking for the next
% (non-space) token after a macro that has an argument. (After a macro
% without an argument, space is ignored anyway, so \cs{futurenonspacelet}
% wouldn't be needed.) This hack allows users to type white
% space between successive rule commands.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\futurenonspacelet#1{\def\@BTcs{#1}%
\afterassignment\@BTfnslone\let\nexttoken= }
\def\@BTfnslone{\expandafter\futurelet\@BTcs\@BTfnsltwo}
\def\@BTfnsltwo{\expandafter\ifx\@BTcs\@sptoken\let\next=\@BTfnslthree
\else\let\next=\nexttoken\fi \next}
\def\@BTfnslthree{\afterassignment\@BTfnslone\let\next= }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Full width rules}
%
% When we are not in a \texttt{longtable} environment, we can simply
% implement the full width rules as a \cs{hrule} in a \verb?\noalign{}?
% group. But within a \texttt{longtable}, the rule has to be drawn like a
% \verb?\cmidrule{1-\LT@cols}? (the rationale for this is explained in the
% \texttt{longtable} documentation).
% In order to allow for both, all the rule macros have to
% open a \cs{noalign} group immediately, while they work out whether
% they have been called within a \texttt{longtable}; if you don't do this,
% \TeX's underlying \cs{halign} process gets hiccups.
% I use \LaTeX's
% dirty trick (\verb?\ifnum=0`}?) to fool the parser that the bracket
% count is OK. The bracket really gets closed after all the skipping
% at the end of the \cs{@BTendrule} macro.
% The class 1 rules, and \cs{specialrule}, really only differ in the
% defaults for space above and
% below, and the width, passed to a common routine, \cs{@BTrule},
% described below. The spaces, \cs{@aboverulesep} and \cs{@belowrulesep},
% are set within the \cs{noalign} group, so are inherited by
% \cs{@BTrule}. Similarly, \cs{@BTrule} knows as much as it needs to
% about the routine that called it by examining the inherited
% \cs{@thisruleclass}. The optional width argument is parsed by
% \cs{@BTrule} after being set to default if absent.
%
% \begin{macro}{\toprule}
% \begin{macro}{\midrule}
% \begin{macro}{\bottomrule}
% \begin{macro}{\specialrule}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\toprule{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
\@aboverulesep=\abovetopsep
\global\@belowrulesep=\belowrulesep
\global\@thisruleclass=\@ne
\@ifnextchar[{\@BTrule}{\@BTrule[\heavyrulewidth]}}
\def\midrule{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
\@aboverulesep=\aboverulesep
\global\@belowrulesep=\belowrulesep
\global\@thisruleclass=\@ne
\@ifnextchar[{\@BTrule}{\@BTrule[\lightrulewidth]}}
\def\bottomrule{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
\@aboverulesep=\aboverulesep
\global\@belowrulesep=\belowbottomsep
\global\@thisruleclass=\@ne
\@ifnextchar[{\@BTrule}{\@BTrule[\heavyrulewidth]}}
\def\specialrule#1#2#3{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
\@aboverulesep=#2\global\@belowrulesep=#3\global\@thisruleclass=\tw@
\@BTrule[#1]}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\addlinespace}
% An \cs{addlinespace} is essentially a zero-width rule with
% zero space above and argument (or default) space below. But because
% the rule is not actually drawn, but is just a \cs{vskip}, there is no
% need to check if we're in a longtable, so we don't need to call
% \cs{@BTrule} as for `real' rules. But we do share the \cs{@BTendrule}
% lookahead and flagsetting code (described below), and the \cs{vskip} is done there.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\addlinespace{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
\@ifnextchar[{\@addspace}{\@addspace[\defaultaddspace]}}
\def\@addspace[#1]{\global\@belowrulesep=#1\global\@thisruleclass=\tw@
\futurelet\@tempa\@BTendrule}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@BTrule}
% All the rules (except \cs{addlinespace}) share this code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@BTrule[#1]{%
\global\@thisrulewidth=#1\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Save the width argument (if the user didn't give one, then the
% calling routine will have called \cs{@BTrule} with the default) in a global
% variable for later use when drawing the rule.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\@thisruleclass=\tw@\vskip\@aboverulesep\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Specialrules always insert specified space above. (Note: addlinespaces
% don't come here).
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\@lastruleclass=\z@\vskip\@aboverulesep\else
\ifnum\@lastruleclass=\@ne\vskip\doublerulesep\fi\fi\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% After text (last rule class 0), precede the rule by \cs{aboverulesep};
% but if immediately after a
% previous rule, insert a \cs{doublerulesep}.
%
% Now we work out, by a very nasty hack, if we're within a
% \texttt{longtable}. It's easy if \cs{longtable} isn't even defined: then we
% can't be. But it is not enough just to check if \texttt{longtable} is
% loaded --- we might be within an ordinary table rather than a
% longtable. So we look to see if \cs{hline} has been re-defined
% from its \LaTeX\ definition to be the same as
% \cs{LT@hline}. (Longtable currently does this redefinition when it opens a
% \texttt{longtable} environment, but not globally, so it is
% cleared it when the environment closes.) Another
% package could potentially do this! And \texttt{longtable} might change the
% way it implements this! So, it is not entirely safe, but I have
% found no better way so far.
% We set up \cs{@BTswitch} to call \cs{@BTnormal} or \cs{@BLTrule}, as
% appropriate, then call it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\longtable\undefined\let\@BTswitch\@BTnormal\else
\ifx\hline\LT@hline\let\@BTswitch\@BLTrule
\else\let\@BTswitch\@BTnormal\fi\fi
\@BTswitch}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@BTnormal}
% This is when we're \emph{not} within a longtable. We are already in a
% \cs{noalign} group, all we need do is draw an \cs{hrule} and gobble any
% trailing spaces, then call the closing routine with \cs{@tempa} set
% equal to the next token in the document.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \def\@BTnormal{\hrule
% \@height \@thisrulewidth\futurenonspacelet\@tempa\@BTendrule}
\def\@BTnormal{%
%% \bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}
{\CT@arc@\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}}%
\futurenonspacelet\@tempa\@BTendrule}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@BLTrule}
% This is for full width rule within a \texttt{longtable}. First we check if
% a kerning argument has been used; if so let \cs{@@BLTrule} read it,
% else call \cs{@@BLTrule} with an empty string:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@BLTrule{\@ifnextchar({\@@BLTrule}{\@@BLTrule()}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@@BLTrule}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@BLTrule(#1){\@setrulekerning{#1}%
\global\@cmidlb\LT@cols
% \end{macrocode}
% The \cs{@setrulekerning} routine parses the kerning argument tokens
% and sets global kerning widths accordingly (or to defaults, if user
% hasn't set them explicitly). The global assignment to \cs{@cmidlb}
% sets up the column count for the \cs{@cmidruleb} macro, which is
% shared with \verb?cmidrules?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Close the currently open \cs{noalign} group. Within a \texttt{longtable},
% rules are all to be drawn as leaders within a text box that is
% \cs{LT@cols} columns wide.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@cmidruleb
% \end{macrocode}
% Draw the rule. We share the \cs{@cmidruleb} code with ordinary \cs{cmidrule}s.
% \begin{macrocode}
\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% We have to open a new noalign immediately else \TeX{} will start a new
% text box where we don't want one. Then, after gobbling any
% unwanted white space, we call the closing routine.
% \begin{macrocode}
\futurenonspacelet\@tempa\@BTendrule}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@BTendrule}
% We look one step ahead (token is in \cs{@tempa}) to see if another
% rule follows (shame on user!). If so, we set \cs{@lastruleclass} equal
% to \cs{@thisruleclass} (thus setting it up for the following rule). If
% there isn't a following rule, we clear \cs{@lastruleclass} (ie set it
% to zero), which isn't technically true since we have just drawn a
% rule, but sets it up correctly for the next rule encountered, which
% must be following some intervening text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@BTendrule{%
\ifx\@tempa\toprule\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
\else\ifx\@tempa\midrule\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
\else\ifx\@tempa\bottomrule\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
\else\ifx\@tempa\cmidrule\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
\else\ifx\@tempa\specialrule\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
\else\ifx\@tempa\addlinespace\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
\else\global\@lastruleclass=\z@\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
\ifnum\@lastruleclass=\@ne\relax\else\vskip\@belowrulesep\fi
\ifnum0=`{\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Special subrules}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@setrulekerning}
% The following code parses the trimming arguments (if there are any)
% for \cs{cmidrule} or a \cs{BLTrule}. The rule
% will be trimmed left and right by \cs{cmrkern@l} and \cs{cmrkern@l},
% which are zero by default, set to \cs{cmidrulekern} by the plain
% \verb?(lr)? arguments, or user set as in \verb?(r{.5em})?. We parse token by
% token through the arguments. The
% tokens \verb?r? and \verb?l? cause \cs{cmrkern@r} or \cs{cmrkern@l} to be set to
% \cs{cmidrulekern}. There is no lookahead to see if a width is the
% next token; this strategy is efficient for the plain commands,
% while inefficient for the qualified commands, but more importantly
% it is much easier to program. Tokens \verb?r? and \verb?l? also set
% \cs{cmrswitch} so that if the next token turns out to be
% \marg{wd} then the kerning will be done on the side
% currently specified. I have been too lazy to program an error
% message should one encounter tokens other than \verb?r?, \verb?l? or
% \marg{wd}.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Fixed bug in booktabs trim command by improving character comparison code in \cs{@setrulekerning} (mempatch v3.8)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@setrulekerning#1{%
\global\let\cmrkern@l\z@
\global\let\cmrkern@r\z@
\@tfor\@tempa :=#1\do
{\def\@tempb{r}%
\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
\global\let\cmrkern@r\cmidrulekern
\def\cmrsideswitch{\cmrkern@r}%
\else
\def\@tempb{l}%
\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
\global\let\cmrkern@l\cmidrulekern
\def\cmrsideswitch{\cmrkern@l}%
\else
\global\expandafter\let\cmrsideswitch\@tempa
\fi
\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cmidrule}
% \begin{macro}{\@cmidrule}
% \begin{macro}{\@@cmidrule}
% The \cs{cmidrule} re-uses \cs{@lastruleclass} in an entirely different
% way from the full width rules. (Maybe I should have used a
% different flag; it seemed efficient at the time \ldots). This
% is (left) set to one if you are in the middle of a row of
% \cs{cmidrules}, or starting a new one (with \cs{morecmidrules}).
% Otherwise, when \cs{@lastruleclass} is zero, we precede the
% rule with \cs{aboverulesep}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\cmidrule{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
\@ifnextchar[{\@cmidrule}{\@cmidrule[\cmidrulewidth]}}
\def\@cmidrule[#1]{\@ifnextchar({\@@cmidrule[#1]}{\@@cmidrule[#1]()}}
\def\@@cmidrule[#1](#2)#3{\@@@cmidrule[#3]{#1}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@@cmidrule}
% The above is fiddling around to set defaults for missing optional
% arguments. We also pass to \cs{@@@cmidrule} in a different order,
% namely =[a-b]=\verb?{width required}= \verb?{kerning commands}= (this being
% the order in which the arguments are actually processed):
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@@cmidrule[#1-#2]#3#4{\global\@cmidla#1\relax
\global\advance\@cmidla\m@ne
\ifnum\@cmidla>0\global\let\@gtempa\@cmidrulea\else
\global\let\@gtempa\@cmidruleb\fi
\global\@cmidlb#2\relax
\global\advance\@cmidlb-\@cmidla
% \end{macrocode}
% This has set up a switch (\cs{@gtempa}) to call the relevant routine,
% \cs{@cmidrulea} or \cs{@cmidruleb}, depending on whether we start
% from column one or not.
% \begin{macrocode}
\global\@thisrulewidth=#3
% \end{macrocode}
% That is, set per default or given argument. Then parse any trimming
% arguments to set, globally, \cs{cmrkern@r} and \cs{cmrkern@l} accordingly:
% \begin{macrocode}
\@setrulekerning{#4}
% \end{macrocode}
% Now insert space above if needed, close the \cs{noalign},
% then switch to appropriate rule drawing routine as determined
% above (\cs{let} to \cs{@gtempa}):
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\@lastruleclass=\z@\vskip \aboverulesep\fi
\ifnum0=`{\fi}\@gtempa
% \end{macrocode}
% Having now drawn the rule,
% open another \cs{noalign}, and call the closing routine:
% \begin{macrocode}
\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi\futurenonspacelet\@tempa\@xcmidrule}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xcmidrule}
% In this closing routine, see if another \cs{cmidrule} follows;
% if so, backspace
% vertical so it will line up with the one you just drew,
% and setting \cs{@lastruleclass} to 1 will suppress
% adding space above the next. If a \cs{morecimdrules} follows,
% we add (positive) \cs{cmidrulesep} (and again set \cs{@lastruleclass}
% to one). Otherwise this is the last rule of the current group
% and we can just add \cs{belowrulesep}. Finally, we close the \cs{noalign}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xcmidrule{\ifx\@tempa\cmidrule\vskip-\@thisrulewidth
\global\@lastruleclass=\@ne\else
\ifx\@tempa\morecmidrules\vskip \cmidrulesep
\global\@lastruleclass=\@ne\else
\vskip \belowrulesep\global\@lastruleclass=\z@\fi\fi
\ifnum0=`{\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@cmidrulea}
% \begin{macro}{\@cmidruleb}
% This code (called below) actually draws the rules. They are drawn
% as boxes in text, rather than in a \cs{noalign} group, which permits
% the left and right kerning.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@cmidrulea{%
\multispan\@cmidla&\multispan\@cmidlb
%% \unskip\hskip \cmrkern@l\leaders\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}\hfill
\unskip\hskip \cmrkern@l{%
\CT@arc@\leaders\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}\hfill}%
\hskip \cmrkern@r\cr}
\def\@cmidruleb{%
\multispan\@cmidlb
%% \unskip\hskip \cmrkern@l\leaders\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}\hfill
\unskip\hskip \cmrkern@l{%
\CT@arc@\leaders\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}\hfill}%
\hskip \cmrkern@r\cr}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\morecmidrules}
% This is really a dummy command; all the work is done above
% within the \cs{cmidrule} routine. We look one step ahead there
% to see if a \cs{morecmidrules} follows the current \cs{cmidrule},
% and if so set the flag. Otherwise, \cs{morecmidrules} itself
% does nothing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\morecmidrules{\noalign{\relax}}
%%%%%%%%%% end of Booktabs package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Ensure that the real \Lpack{booktabs} package can't get called.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Killed use of real booktabs package (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
%%\@memfakeusepackage{booktabs}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Continuous tabulars}
%
%
% The standard \texttt{tabular} environment is wrapped inside a box
% (see \verb?\@tabular?),
% which means that it cannot break across pages. Equivalent environments
% are provided which are not boxed and so can continue across page
% boundaries.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ctableftskip}
% \begin{macro}{\ctabrightskip}
% These skips are inserted at the left and right of continuous tabulars
% so that their horizontal location can be specified.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newskip\ctableftskip \ctableftskip=\fill
\newskip\ctabrightskip \ctabrightskip=\fill
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ctabular*}
% \begin{macro}{\@ctabularstar}
% This starts off the \texttt{ctabular*} continuous tabular environment.
% The default location is centered. NOTE: This is not for release.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\def\csname ctabular*\endcsname{%
\@ifnextchar[ {\@ctabularstar}{\@ctabularstar[c]}}
\def\@ctabularstar[#1]#2{\global\@curtab\@ne
\ctableftskip\fill
\ctabrightskip\fill
\if l#1% left
\ctableftskip\z@
\else
\if r#1% right
\ctabrightskip\z@
\fi
\fi
\setlength\dimen@{#2}%
\xdef\@halignto{to\the\dimen@}\NC@tabular}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ctabular}
% \verb?\ctabular? is similar to \verb?\ctabular*? except that the
% width is known to be \verb?\hsize?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ctabular}[1][c]{\global\@curtab\@ne
\ctableftskip\fill
\ctabrightskip\fill
\if l#1% left
\ctableftskip\z@
\else
\if r#1% right
\ctabrightskip\z@
\fi
\fi
\gdef\@halignto{to\hsize}\NC@tabular}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\NC@tabular}
% \verb?\NC@tabular?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\NC@tabular}{%
\par
\addvspace{\topsep}
\col@sep\tabcolsep
\let\d@llarbegin\begingroup
\let\d@llarend\endgroup
\@NCtabarray}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@NCialign}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@NCialign}{\everycr{}\tabskip\ctableftskip\halign}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@NCtabarray}
% Effectively a modified version of \verb?\@array?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@NCtabarray}[1]{%
\@tempdima \ht\strutbox
\advance\@tempdima\extrarowheight
\setbox \@arstrutbox \hbox{\vrule
\@height \arraystretch \@tempdima
\@depth \arraystretch \dp\strutbox
\@width\z@}%
\begingroup
%% \@mkpream{@{\hspace{\@totalleftmargin}}#1@{}}%
\@mkpream{#1}%
\xdef\@preamble{\@NCialign \@halignto
\bgroup & \tabskip\z@
\@arstrut
\@preamble
\tabskip\ctabrightskip
\cr}%
\endgroup
\let\@sharp ##\let\protect\relax
\lineskip\z@
\baselineskip\z@
\let\\\@arraycr
\let\tabularnewline\\%
\let\par\@empty
\ctabsetlines
\@preamble
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endctabular}
% \begin{macro}{\endctabular*}
% End the environments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endctabular{%
\crcr \egroup
\gdef\@preamble{}%
\addvspace{\topsep}
\noindent}
\expandafter\let\csname endctabular*\endcsname=\endctabular
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Horizontal lines}
%
% The standard \verb?\hline? can produce odd results when used with
% continuous tabulars, but \verb?\hhline? or \verb?\cline? are OK.
% I want a version of \verb?\hline?
% that works with continuous tabulars and has an adjustable width
% (i.e., thickness). This will be based on a modified \verb?\cline?
%
% For reference, here are the essentials of the kernel's definitions.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\hline{%
% \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi\hrule \@height \arrayrulewidth \futurelet
% \reserved@a\@xhline}
% \def\@xhline{%
% \ifx\reserved@a\hline
% \vskip\doublerulesep
% \vskip-\arrayrulewidth
% \fi
% \ifnum0=`{\fi}}
% \def\cline#1{\@cline#1\@nil}
% \def\@cline#1-#2\@nil{%
% \omit
% \@multicnt#1%
% \advance\@multispan\m@ne
% \ifnum\@multicnt=\@ne\@firstofone{&\omit}\fi
% \@multicnt#2%
% \advance\@multicnt-#1%
% \advance\@multispan\@ne
% \leaders\hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth\hfill
% \cr
% \noalign{\vskip-\arrayrulewidth}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memcline}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@cline}
% This is a version of the kernel \verb?\cline? code that provides
% a variable width.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memcline}[2]{\m@m@cline[#1]#2\@nil}
\def\m@m@cline[#1]#2-#3\@nil{%
\omit
\@multicnt#2%
\advance\@multispan\m@ne
\ifnum\@multicnt=\@ne\@firstofone{&\omit}\fi
\@multicnt#3%
\advance\@multicnt-#2%
\advance\@multispan\@ne
\leaders\hrule\@height #1\hfill % <- variable \@height value
\cr
\noalign{\vskip- #1}} % <- variable \@height value
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memhline}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mhline}
% A version of \verb?\hline?, based on \verb?\memcline?, taking a
% rule width as argument. It draws a \verb?\memcline? from the
% first to the last (\verb?\@curtab?) column.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memhline}[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\memcline{#1}{1-\@curtab}}
\newcommand*{\m@mhline}{\cline{1-\@curtab}}
% \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%
% Fear's rules also do not play well within continuous tabulars.
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@BTnormal}
% Special version of \cs{@BTnormal}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\m@m@BTnormal{%
\ifnum0=`{\fi} % closes the \noalign
\multispan{\@curtab} \leaders\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}\hfill\cr
\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
\futurenonspacelet\@tempa\@BTendrule}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ctabsetlines}
% Continuous tabulars cannot use the standard horizontal lines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\ctabsetlines{%
\let\hline\m@mhline
\let\@BTnormal\m@m@BTnormal
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
%
% \subsection{Automated tabulations}
%
%
% It can be convenient, especially while drafting a document, to have
% a list of items put into a tabular without having to mark the ends
% of the rows.
%
% The following is based on plain \TeX{} code given on pages 307--308 of
% \textit{TeX for the Impatient}~\cite{bk:Impatient}, which provides
% code for typesetting in columns.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\abovecolumnspenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\@linestogo}
% \begin{macro}{\@cellstogo}
% \begin{macro}{\@cellsincolumn}
% \begin{macro}{\crtok}
% Counters and such.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\abovecolumnspenalty
\abovecolumnspenalty=10000
\newcount\@linestogo % lines remaining to be procesed
\newcount\@cellstogo % cells remaining in column or row
\newcount\@cellsincolumn % number of lines per column
\newtoks\crtok
\crtok = {\cr}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mincolumnwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\c@lleftskip}
% \begin{macro}{\c@lrightskip}
% More things
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\@mincolumnwidth
\let\c@lleftskip\hfil % left skip within a column
\let\c@lrightskip\hfil % right skip within a column
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\preautotab}
% \begin{macro}{\postautotab}
% Hooks into the auto tabulations.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\preautotab\relax
\let\postautotab\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\autocols}
% \verb?\autocols?\oarg{width}\marg{pos}\marg{num}\marg{style}\marg{comma separated list}
% arranges the elements in the \meta{comma separated list} into \meta{num}
% columns, the elements filling each column before moving to the next.
% That is, the elements are ordered top to bottom and left to right.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\autocols}[5][0pt]{\par\begingroup
\ctabsetlines
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the table position
% \begin{macrocode}
\if l#2
\raggedright
\else
\if r#2
\raggedleft
\else
\centering
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the column position style
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\c@lleftskip\hfil
\let\c@lrightskip\hfil
\if l#4
\let\c@lleftskip\relax
\else
\if r#4
\let\c@lrightskip\relax
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Count the number of entries and the minimum width (max entry width)
% for the columns.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@mincolumnwidth\z@
\TX@cols=#3
\@curtab=#3
\@linestogo\z@
\@for\@tempa:=#5\do{
\advance\@linestogo\@ne
\settowidth{\@tempdima}{\@tempa}
\ifdim\@tempdima>\@mincolumnwidth
\@mincolumnwidth=\@tempdima
\fi
}
\advance\@mincolumnwidth\tabcolsep
\linespercol
% \end{macrocode}
% Specify what is to be done after every entry
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@endcolumnactions{%
\global\advance\@linestogo\m@ne
\ifnum\@cellstogo<\tw@
\global\advance\TX@cols\m@ne
\ifnum\TX@cols>\z@\linespercol\fi
\the\crtok
\else
&\global\advance\@cellstogo\m@ne
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% Calculate the width of the columns
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim #1 > \z@
\TX@col@width=#1
\divide\TX@col@width \TX@cols
\else
\TX@col@width=\@mincolumnwidth
\fi
\penalty\abovecolumnspenalty
\noindent % usually not a paragraph
% \end{macrocode}
% Create most of the preamble by looping to add \verb?\@cellsincolumn?-1 slots,
% then the last one which is different.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@preamble{}
\begingroup
\let\@sharp\relax
\ifnum\@cellsincolumn>\@ne
\loop
\g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
\hb@xt@ \TX@col@width{%
\c@lleftskip\strut\@sharp\c@lrightskip} &}%
\advance\@cellsincolumn\m@ne
\ifnum\@cellsincolumn>\@ne
\repeat
\fi
\g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
\hb@xt@ \TX@col@width{\c@lleftskip\strut\@sharp\c@lrightskip}}%
\endgroup
\let\@sharp ##
% \end{macrocode}
% Start the \verb?\valign?
% \begin{macrocode}
\tabskip\ctableftskip
%% \tabskip\z@
\valign \bgroup
\tabskip\z@
\@preamble
\tabskip\ctabrightskip\cr
% \end{macrocode}
% Add all the entries then finish off.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@for\@tempa:=#5\do{
\@tempa\unskip\space\@endcolumnactions}%
\the\crtok \egroup \par \endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\linespercol}
% \verb?\linespercol? calculates the maximum number of lines that go into
% a column, where there are \verb?\TX@cols? columns and \verb?\@linestogo?
% lines, so that the columns are balanced as well as possible. The result
% is \verb?\@cellstogo?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\linespercol}{%
\@cellsincolumn=\@linestogo
\divide\@cellsincolumn \TX@cols
\@cellstogo=\@cellsincolumn
\multiply\@cellstogo \TX@cols
\@tempcnta=\@linestogo
\advance\@tempcnta -\@cellstogo
\ifnum \@tempcnta>\z@
\advance\@cellsincolumn \@ne
\fi
\global\@cellstogo=\@cellsincolumn
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\autorows}
% \verb?\autorows?\oarg{width}\marg{pos}\marg{num}\marg{style}\marg{comma separated list}
% arranges the elements in the \meta{comma separated list} into \meta{num}
% columns, the elements filling each row before moving to the next.
% That is, the elements are ordered left to right and top to bottom.
% By default, each column is the same width, enough for the widest entry.
% If \meta{width} is a negative length (e.g., -1pt) the columns are set
% to their natural
% widths. If \meta{width} is positive (e.g., \cs{textwidth}), column widths
% are equal widths so that the overal width is \meta{width}.
% The sideways location of thre tabular is \meta{pos} (l, c, or r), and
% the column style id \meta{style} (l, c, or r).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\autorows}[5][0pt]{\par\begingroup
\ctabsetlines
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the table position
% \begin{macrocode}
\ctableftskip\fill
\ctabrightskip\fill
\if l#2
\ctableftskip\z@
\else
\if r#2
\ctabrightskip\z@
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the column position style
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\c@lleftskip\hfil
\let\c@lrightskip\hfil
\if l#4
\let\c@lleftskip\relax
\else
\if r#4
\let\c@lrightskip\relax
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Count the number of entries and the minimum width (max entry width)
% for the columns.
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@cols=#3\relax
\@curtab=#3\relax
\@cellstogo = \TX@cols
\@mincolumnwidth\z@
\@linestogo\z@
\@for\@tempa:=#5\do{%
\advance\@linestogo\@ne
\settowidth{\@tempdima}{\@tempa}
\ifdim\@tempdima>\@mincolumnwidth
\@mincolumnwidth=\@tempdima
\fi}%
\advance\@mincolumnwidth\tabcolsep
% \end{macrocode}
% Specify what is to be done after every entry
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@endcolumnactions{%
\global\advance\@linestogo\m@ne
\global\advance\@cellstogo\m@ne
\ifnum\@cellstogo<\@ne
\global\@cellstogo=\TX@cols
\the\crtok
\else
&
\fi}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Calculate the width of the columns
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim #1>\z@
\TX@col@width=#1
\else
\TX@col@width=\hsize
\fi
\divide\TX@col@width \TX@cols
\ifdim #1=\z@
\TX@col@width=\@mincolumnwidth
\fi
\penalty\abovecolumnspenalty
\noindent % usually not a paragraph
\vskip -\z@ % don't know why we need this, but looks bad without it
% \end{macrocode}
% Create most of the preamble by looping to add \verb?\@cellsincolumn?-1 slots,
% then the last one which is different.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@preamble{}
\begingroup
\let\@sharp\relax
\ifnum\TX@cols>\@ne
\loop
\ifdim #1<\z@
\g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
\strut\c@lleftskip\@sharp\c@lrightskip &}%
\else
\g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
\hb@xt@ \TX@col@width{%
\strut\c@lleftskip\@sharp\c@lrightskip} &}%
\fi
\advance\TX@cols\m@ne
\ifnum\TX@cols>\@ne
\repeat
\fi
\ifdim #1<\z@
\g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
\strut\c@lleftskip\@sharp\c@lrightskip}%
\else
\g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
\hb@xt@ \TX@col@width{\strut\c@lleftskip\@sharp\c@lrightskip}}%
\fi
\endgroup
\let\@sharp ##
% \end{macrocode}
% Start the \verb?\halign?
% \begin{macrocode}
\tabskip\ctableftskip
\halign to \hsize \bgroup
\tabskip\z@
\@preamble
%% \tabskip\ctabrightskip\cr \preautotab
\tabskip\ctabrightskip\cr
% \end{macrocode}
% Add all the entries then finish off.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@for\@tempa:=#5\do{%
\@tempa\unskip\space\@endcolumnactions}%
%% \the\crtok \postautotab \the\crtok \egroup \endgroup \par
\the\crtok \egroup \endgroup \par
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \section{Floating objects}
%
% The file \file{latex.dtx} only defines a number of tools with
% which floating objects can be defined. This is done in the
% document class. It needs to define the following macros for each
% floating object of type \texttt{TYPE} (e.g., \texttt{TYPE} =
% figure).
%
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{\bslash fps@TYPE}]
% The default placement specifier for floats of type
% \texttt{TYPE}.
%
% \item[\texttt{\bslash ftype@TYPE}]
% The type number for floats of type \texttt{TYPE}. Each
% \texttt{TYPE} has associated a unique positive \texttt
% {TYPE} number, which is a power of two. E.g., figures might
% have type number 1, tables type number 2, programs type
% number 4, etc.
%
% \item[\texttt{\bslash ext@TYPE}]
% The file extension indicating the file on which the contents
% list for float type \texttt{TYPE} is stored. For example,
% |\ext@figure| = `lof'.
%
% \item[\texttt{\bslash fnum@TYPE}]
% A macro to generate the figure number for a caption. For
% example, |\fnum@TYPE| == `Figure |\thefigure|'.
%
% \item[\texttt{\bslash @makecaption}{\meta{num}}{\meta{text}}]
% A macro to make a caption, with \meta{num} the value produced
% by |\fnum@...| and \meta{text} the text of the caption. It
% can assume it's in a |\parbox| of the appropriate width.
% This will be used for \emph{all} floating objects.
%
% \end{description}
%
% The actual environment that implements a floating object such as
% a figure is defined using the macros |\@float| and |\end@float|,
% which are defined in \file{latex.dtx}.
%
% An environment that implements a single column floating object is
% started with |\@float{|\texttt{TYPE}|}[|\meta{placement}|]| of type
% \texttt{TYPE} with \meta{placement} as the placement specifier.
% The default value of \meta{PLACEMENT} is defined by |\fps@TYPE|.
%
% The environment is ended by |\end@float|. E.g., |\figure| ==
% |\@float|{figure}, |\endfigure| == |\end@float|.
%
%
% \subsection{Floats}
%
% To define a float environment, say |fenv|, the following macros must be defined:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item |\fps@fenv| The default placement specifier (normally |tbp|).
% \item |\ftype@fenv| The type number which is an integer and a power of 2.
% \item |\ext@fenv| The file extension for the contents list.
% \item |\c@fenv| A counter for the environment (for caption numbering).
% \item |\fnum@fenv| A macro to generate the caption `number'.
% \item |\l@fenv| A macro to produce an entry in a list of\ldots.
% \item |\flegtocfenv| A macro to write a |\namedlegend| title to a listof file.
% \item |\flegfenv| A macro to typeset the name of a |\namedlegend|.
% \item |\toclevel@fenv| Holding a bookmark level (required if the
% \Lpack{hyperref} package will be used).
% \end{itemize}
%
% \begin{macro}{newflo@tctr}
% A counter for the type number of a new float. Normally
% figures are of type 1, tables type 2, and the next float type is then 4, and so
% on.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{newflo@tctr}
\setcounter{newflo@tctr}{1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newfloat}
% |\newfloat[|\meta{within}|]{|\meta{fenv}|}{|\meta{ext}|}{|\meta{capname}|}|
% creates the commands for a new float environment, \meta{fenv} (aka |X|),
% using \meta{ext} (aka |Z|) as the
% file extension and \meta{capname} for the caption name.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newfloat}[4][\@empty]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\ftype@X}
% Define the float type, set it to the float counter, and double
% the counter afterwards.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{ftype@#2}{\value{newflo@tctr}}
\addtocounter{newflo@tctr}{\value{newflo@tctr}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@X}
% Create the counter for the caption, which must not have been previously
% defined.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{c@#2}{% counter is not defined
\ifx \@empty#1\relax
\newcounter{#2}
\else
\newcounter{#2}[#1]
\expandafter\edef\csname the#2\endcsname{%
\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1\endcsname.\noexpand\arabic{#2}}
\fi}{}
\setcounter{#2}{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ext@X}
% \begin{macro}{Zdepth}
% Define |\ext@X| for the file extension and set the new |Zdepth|
% depth counter to 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{ext@#2}{#3} % file extension
\@ifundefined{c@#3depth}{\newcounter{#3depth}}{}
\setcounter{#3depth}{1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\fps@X}
% \begin{macro}{\fnum@X}
% \begin{macro}{\flegX}
% \begin{macro}{\flegtocX}
% |\fps@X| is the default float placement specification, |\fnum@X|
% typesets the caption name and number, and |\flegX| and |\flegtocX| are for
% named legends.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{fps@#2}{tbp} % position
\@namedef{fnum@#2}{#4~\@nameuse{the#2}} % caption naming
\@namedef{fleg#2}{#4} % legend naming
\@namedef{flegtoc#2}##1{} % legend name in ToC
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{X}
% \begin{environment}{X*}
% Finally define the new float environment, in both normal and starred
% forms.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{#2}{\@float{#2}}{\end@float}
\newenvironment{#2*}{\@dblfloat{#2}}{\end@dblfloat}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
%
% This ends the definition of |\newfloat|.
% \begin{macrocode}
} % end \newfloat
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
% To define subcaptions for use in a new float environment, say |fenv|, the
% following macros must be defined~\cite{SUBFIGURE}:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item A new counter |subfenv| for subcaption numbering.
% \item A new counter |extdepth|, where |ext| is the file extension
% for the contents list of |fenv|, for setting the contents depth.
% \item |\thesubfenv| for the formatting of the subcaption number.
% \item |\@thesubfenv| for typesetting the number.
% \item |\@@thesubfenv| for alternative label reference.
% \item |\p@subfenv| for prepending to the subcaption number when it is referenced.
% \item |\ext@subfenv| the file extension for the contents list.
% \item |\l@subfenv| for formatting the contents list entry.
% \item |\@makesubfloatcaption| for typesetting the subcaption.
% \item |\toclevel@subfenv| for hyperref bookmarks
% \end{itemize}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newsubfloat}
% |\newsubfloat{|\meta{fenv}|}| creates the commands for a new
% subfloat for \meta{fenv} (aka X).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newsubfloat}[1]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Call |\newlistentry[X]{subX}{extX}{1}| to get most of the work done.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistentry[#1]{sub#1}{\@nameuse{ext@#1}}{1}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ext@subX}
% \begin{macro}{\thesubX}
% \begin{macro}{\@thesubX}
% \begin{macro}{\@@thesubX}
% \begin{macro}{\p@subX}
% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@subX}
% And now for the rest of the commands for subcaptions.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{@namedef} of \cs{@@thesubenv}
% to \cs{newsubfloat}}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{@namedef} of \cs{toclevel@subenv}
% to \cs{newsubfloat}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{ext@sub#1}{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}
\@namedef{thesub#1}{(\alph{sub#1})}
\@namedef{@thesub#1}{\@nameuse{thesub#1}%
\if@tightsubcap\hskip\subfloatlabelskip\else\space\fi}
\@namedef{@@thesub#1}{\@nameuse{thesub#1}}
\@namedef{p@sub#1}{\csname the#1\endcsname}
\@namedef{toclevel@sub#1}{1}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% By permission of Steven Douglas Cochran the class provides similar
% functionality as the \Lpack{subfigure} package~\cite{SUBFIGURE}.
% This requires some changes to be made to |\@float| and |\end@float|.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifdonemaincaption}
% This is set TRUE after the |\(cont)caption| has been called in a float.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{if@contmaincaption} to
% \cs{ifdonemaincaption}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifdonemaincaption
\donemaincaptionfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@float}
% \begin{macro}{\@dbfloat}
% The kernel |\@float| and |\@dblfloat| macros are redefined to set
% |\ifdonemaincaption| to FALSE, and also to zero the subfloat
% counter, if it is defined.
% Ignasi Furi\`{o} reported\footnote{Private email from
% \texttt{ignasi.furio@uib.es}, 2003/10/17} that floats embedded in text
% created an extra space. This was caused by a missing \verb?%?.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Deleted spaces from \cs{@float} and
% \cs{@dblfloat} (from patch v1.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@memoldfloat\@float
\renewcommand{\@float}[1]{\donemaincaptionfalse
\@ifundefined{c@sub#1}{}{\csname c@sub#1\endcsname = 0\relax}%
\@memoldfloat{#1}}
\let\@memolddblfloat\@dblfloat
\renewcommand{\@dblfloat}[1]{\donemaincaptionfalse
\@ifundefined{c@sub#1}{}{\csname c@sub#1\endcsname = 0\relax}%
\@memolddblfloat{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\end@float}
% \begin{macro}{\end@dblfloat}
% The kernel |\end@float| and |\end@dblfloat| macros are redefined to
% dump out any subcaptions that have not yet been processed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@memoldefloat\end@float
\def\end@float{%
\@memlistsubcaptions{\@captype}\@memoldefloat}
\let\@memoldedblfloat\end@dblfloat
\def\end@dblfloat{%
\@memlistsubcaptions{\@captype}\@memoldedblfloat}
% \end{macrocode}
% Unfortunately the \Lpack{fixltx2e} package, version 1.1h (current as of 2005/09/03) makes assumptions
% about \cs{end@float} which do not hold for memoir. The code has to be reverted back to that in version 1.0b of \Lpack{fixltx2e}.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Dealt with incompatibilities between fixltx2e and memoir's \cs{end@dblfloat} (mempatch v3.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{fixltx2e}{%
\def\end@dblfloat{%
\if@twocolumn
\@endfloatbox
\ifnum\@floatpenalty<\z@
\@largefloatcheck
\global\dp\@currbox1sp %
\@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
\fi
\ifnum\@floatpenalty=-\@Mii \@Esphack\fi
\else
\end@float
\fi}}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Captions}
%
% The caption styling
% is accomplished by redefining the |\@makecaption|
% command. First, though, define and initialise the user-level commands.
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@contcw}
% \begin{macro}{\if@conthang}
% \begin{macro}{\if@contindent}
% For use when checking caption width and captioning styles styles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@contcw
\newif\if@conthang
\newif\if@contindent
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captiondelim}
% \begin{macro}{\@contdelim}
% For the caption delimeter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\captiondelim}[1]{\def\@contdelim{#1}}
\captiondelim{: }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captionnamefont}
% \begin{macro}{\@contnfont}
% The font for the caption name.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\captionnamefont}[1]{\def\@contnfont{#1}}
\captionnamefont{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captiontitlefont}
% \begin{macro}{\@conttfont}
% The font for the caption title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\captiontitlefont}[1]{\def\@conttfont{#1}}
\captiontitlefont{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\flushleftright}
% \begin{macro}{\centerlastline}
% These are in addition to the |\centering|, |\raggedleft| and |\raggedright|
% declarations for paragraphing. |\flushleftright| sets the skips to \TeX's
% normal (block) paragraphing values,
% while |\centerlastline| sets the skips to give a centered last line in
% a block paragraph.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\flushleftright}{%
\leftskip\z@ \rightskip\z@
\parfillskip=\z@ plus 1fil}
\newcommand{\centerlastline}{%
\leftskip=\z@ plus 1fil
\rightskip=\z@ plus -1fil
\parfillskip=\z@ plus 2fil}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captionstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\@contcstyle}
% The paragraphing style for the caption.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\captionstyle}[1]{\def\@contcstyle{#1}}
\captionstyle{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captionstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\@memcshort}
% \begin{macro}{\@memcnom}
% \begin{macro}{\@contcshortstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\@contcstyle}
% The paragraphing style for the caption.
%
% I had email from J{\o}rgen Larsen (\url{jl@dirac.ruc.dk}), 2003/04/09,
% asking for separate controls for the short and long captions. \\
% |\captionstyle|\oarg{short}\marg{normal}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Extended \cs{captionstyle} (from patch v1.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\captionstyle}{%
\@ifnextchar[ {\@memcshort}{\@memcnorm}}
\def\@memcshort[#1]#2{%
\def\@contcshortstyle{#1}
\def\@contcstyle{#2}}
\def\@memcnorm#1{%
\def\@contcshortstyle{#1}
\def\@contcstyle{#1}}
\captionstyle{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@contcwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\captionwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\changecaptionwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\normalcaptionwidth}
% The macros for dealing with the caption width.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\@contcwidth}
\newcommand{\captionwidth}[1]{\setlength{\@contcwidth}{#1}}
\captionwidth{\linewidth}
\newcommand{\changecaptionwidth}{\@contcwtrue}
\newcommand{\normalcaptionwidth}{\@contcwfalse}
\normalcaptionwidth
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@contindw}
% \begin{macro}{\hangcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\indentcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\normalcaption}
% The macros for hanging and indented captions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\@contindw}
\newcommand{\hangcaption}{\@conthangtrue\@contindentfalse}
\newcommand{\indentcaption}[1]{\setlength{\@contindw}{#1}%
\@conthangfalse\@contindenttrue}
\newcommand{\normalcaption}{\@conthangfalse\@contindentfalse}
\normalcaption
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\precaption}
% \begin{macro}{\@contpre}
% \begin{macro}{\postcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\@contpost}
% \begin{macro}{\midbicaption}
% \begin{macro}{\@contmidbi}
% The macros for the pre- and post-caption text/commands, and
% for the mid-caption command for bilingual captions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\precaption}[1]{\def\@contpre{#1}}
\precaption{}
\newcommand{\postcaption}[1]{\def\@contpost{#1}}
\postcaption{}
\newcommand{\midbicaption}[1]{\def\@contmidbi{#1}}
\midbicaption{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\abovecaptionskip}
% \begin{macro}{\belowcaptionskip}
% Vertical space above and below a caption. Make them sum to an
% integral number of lines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\abovecaptionskip}
\setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0.5\onelineskip}
\newlength{\belowcaptionskip}
\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0.5\onelineskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\caption}
% For subfloat support, the (kernel) |\caption| macro needs to note that it
% has been called.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@memoldcaption\caption
\def\caption{\donemaincaptiontrue\@memoldcaption}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memcaptioninfo}
% \verb?\memcaptioninfo{type}{\thetypenum}{short}{long}?
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/10}{Added \cs{memcaptioninfo}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memcaptioninfo}[4]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@caption}
% For title referencing support, the (kernel) |\@caption| macro needs
% to store the title.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added braces around second argument of \cs{@memold@caption} (per Dan Luecking, mempatch v3.0)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@memold@caption\@caption
\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{%
\M@gettitle{#2}%
\memcaptioninfo{#1}{\csname the#1\endcsname}{#2}{#3}%
\@memold@caption{#1}[{#2}]{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
% This is a reimplementation of the kernel |\@makecaption| command.
% As well as including the caption typesetting commands it enables
% captions that include forced newlines (e.g., by |\\|).
%
% The first part is due to
% Donald Arseneau\footnote{Email: \texttt{asnd@triumf.ca}} from postings
% to the \ctt{} newsgroup and Email discussions. The |\topskip| strut is
% used whenever the caption is the first part of the float. This means,
% among other things, that if a caption comes at the
% top of a page, then the first line of the caption will be aligned with
% the normal first line of a page. The |\abovecaptionskip| is only used
% when there is something above the caption in the current float.
% \changes{v0.31}{2001/07/24}{Changed \cs{@tempa} to \cs{@memtempa} in \cs{@makecaption}}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/02/12}{Added extra centering code in \cs{@makecaption}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added separate short/long styles in \cs{@makecaption}
% (from patch v1.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\let\@memtempa\relax
\ifdim\prevdepth>-99\p@ \vskip\abovecaptionskip
\else \def\@memtempa{\vbox to\topskip{}}\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@contfnote}
% \begin{macro}{\@contfmark}
% The caption title will be typeset twice, firstly to measure its width
% and secondly to actually typeset it. To avoid problems caused by
% a footnote in the caption getting processed twice, we temporarily
% disable the expected relevant commands.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@contfnote\footnote \renewcommand{\footnote}[2][]{}
\let\@contfmark\footnotemark \renewcommand{\footnotemark}[1][]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% Now measure the width of the total caption, not forgetting to take account
% of the font specifications, and then restore the footnoting.
% \begin{macrocode}
\sbox\@tempboxa{\@contnfont #1\@contdelim \@conttfont #2}
\let\footnote\@contfnote
\let\footnotemark\@contfmark
% \end{macrocode}
% If the caption is less than one
% line, then the whole caption needs to be centered on the page (otherwise
% the short caption may be typeset flushleft).
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim\wd\@tempboxa<\linewidth \centering \fi
\if@contcw
% \end{macrocode}
% For typesetting at anything other than the normal width, put the caption
% into a |\parbox| of the specified width. This must be centered.
% \begin{macrocode}
\centering
\parbox{\@contcwidth}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Henrik Holm\footnote{Email from \texttt{henrik@tele.ntnu.no} on
% 2002/02/10.} proposed adding the next line to center short, narrow captions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim\wd\@tempboxa<\@contcwidth \centering \fi
\fi
\if@conthang
% \end{macrocode}
% For a hanging caption we have to measure the width of the caption name,
% then typeset the whole caption in a hanging paragraph.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed code for hangcaption in \cs{@makecaption}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\sbox\@tempboxa{\@contnfont #1\@contdelim}
\@contpre%
{\@contcstyle\hangindent=\wd\@tempboxa
\noindent\box\@tempboxa\@memtempa \@conttfont #2\par}
\else
\if@contindent
% \end{macrocode}
% An indented caption is similar, except the amount of indentation is
% kept in |\@contindw|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@contpre%
{\@contnfont #1\@contdelim}\@memtempa
{\@contcstyle\hangindent=\@contindw
\hangafter=\@ne\@conttfont #2\par}% <- v1.4
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% For the normal style, just typeset the caption.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@contpre%
{\@contnfont #1\@contdelim}\@memtempa
{\ifdim\wd\@tempboxa<\linewidth
\@contcshortstyle\else \@contcstyle\fi% <- v1.4
\@conttfont #2\par}
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Finish off the typesetting by processing the post-text, and if not using
% the normal width then close off the |\parbox|, and lastly put in some
% vertical space.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@contpost
\if@contcw
\par
} % end of the \parbox
\fi
\vskip\belowcaptionskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Continuation captions and legends}
%
% \begin{macro}{\contcaption}
% |\contcaption{|\meta{text}|}| is a user-level command.
% It is a simplified
% version of the normal |\caption| command as it doesn't have to deal
% with numbering or list of \dots entries.
%
% However,
% Brent Lievers\footnote{ (\texttt{lieversb@post.queensu.ca})
% in \ctt{} thread \textit{Figures}, 2003/11/14.} requested that \cs{label}
% should pick up the correct caption number after a \cs{contcaption}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Extended \cs{contcaption} (from patch v1.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\contcaption}{%
\addtocounter{\@captype}{\m@ne}\refstepcounter{\@captype}%
\@contcaption\@captype}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@contcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\@contcaption}
% |\@contcaption| is the workhorse for the |\contcaption| command. In turn,
% it uses the |\@makecaption| command (defined in the usual classes)
% to do most of its work. It
% uses the number of the previous |\caption| command in the same
% type of float and its implementation includes much of the code
% used in the \LaTeX{} |\@caption| command.
%
% First specify |\@@contcaption{|\meta{type}|}{|\meta{title}|}|
% to save some repetitive code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@@contcaption#1#2{%
\par
\begingroup
\@parboxrestore
\if@minipage
\@setminipage
\fi
\normalsize
\@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}\par
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now for |\@contcaption{|\meta{type}|}{|\meta{title}|}|.
% It has to flush out any subcaptions at the
% appropriate time, as well as typesetting the caption.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@contcaption#1#2{%
\if@contbotsub
\@memlistsubcaptions{#1}%
\@@contcaption{#1}{#2}%
\else
\@@contcaption{#1}{#2}%
\@memlistsubcaptions{#1}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\memlegendinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\legend}
% The macro \cs{legend}\marg{text}is intended
% to be used in a float environment for an `anonymous' caption, but can be
% used anywhere.
%
% The implementation is similar to the \cs{caption} command but we have
% to eliminate printing of a delimeter.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{legend}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/10}{Added \cs{memlegendinfo}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memlegendinfo}[1]{}
\newcommand{\legend}[1]{%
\M@gettitle{#1}%
\memlegendinfo{#1}%
\par
\begingroup
\@parboxrestore
\if@minipage
\@setminipage
\fi
\normalsize
\captiondelim{\mbox{}}
\@makecaption{}{\ignorespaces #1}\par
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\namedlegend}
% \begin{macro}{\memnamedlegendinfo}
% \cs{namedlegend}\oarg{short-title}\marg{long-title} is like the
% \cs{caption} command except that it does not number the caption.
%
% \cs{memnamedlegendinfo}\marg{type}\marg{short-title}\marg{long-title}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/10}{Added \cs{memnamedlegendinfo}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\namedlegend}{\@dblarg{\@legend\@captype}}
\newcommand*{\memnamedlegendinfo}[3]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@legend}
% \cs{@legend}\marg{type}\oarg{short-title}\marg{long-title}
% is the workhorse for the \cs{namedlegend} command. In turn, it calls
% \cs{@makelegend}. It requires two commands to have been defined, namely
% \cs{flegtoctype} and \cs{flegtype}. The command \cs{flegtoctype}\marg{text}
% is responsible for writing a title text to the appropriate listof file.
% \cs{flegtype} is responsible for typeseting the name of the legend.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@legend}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@legend#1[#2]#3{%
\M@gettitle{#2}%
\memnamedlegendinfo{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\par
\csname flegtoc#1\endcsname{#2}%
\begingroup
\@parboxrestore
\if@minipage
\@setminipage
\fi
\normalsize
\@makecaption{\csname fleg#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Non-float captions}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newfixedcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\renewfixedcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\providefixedcaption}
% These commands are defined in terms of their \verb?\...command? counterparts.\\
% Call as \verb?\...fixedcaption?\oarg{capcommand}\marg{command}\marg{env}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newfixedcaption}[3][\caption]{%
\newcommand{#2}{\def\@captype{#3}#1}}
\newcommand{\renewfixedcaption}[3][\caption]{%
\renewcommand{#2}{\def\@captype{#3}#1}}
\newcommand{\providefixedcaption}[3][\caption]{%
\providecommand{#2}{\def\@captype{#3}#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Bilingual captions}
%
% The bilingual caption commands all use internal grouping so
% that any changes are kept local. This has the unfortunate side-effect
% that any |\label| command must be within the grouping otherwise the
% wrong number is picked up. To make the coding, if not necessarily the
% use, of the commands simpler, I have not used the traditional style
% of square brackets for optional caption text arguments. Instead, empty
% `required' arguments are used as the implementation means.
%
% \begin{macro}{\membitwonumcaptioninfo}
% \begin{macro}{\membionenumcaptioninfo}
% \begin{macro}{\membicaptioninfo}
% \verb?\membitwonumcaptioninfo{type}{\thetypenum}?\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\\
% \hspace*{2in} \marg{name2}\marg{short2}\marg{long2} \\
% \verb?\membionenumcaptioninfo{type}{\thetypenum}?\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\\
% \hspace*{2in} \marg{name2}\marg{short2}\marg{long2} \\
% \verb?\membicaptioninfo{type}{\thetypenum}?\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\\
% \hspace{2in} \marg{name2}\marg{long2} \\
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/10}{Added \cs{membitwonumcaptioninfo},
% \cs{membitwonumcaptioninfo} and \cs{membicaptioninfo}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\membitwonumcaptioninfo}[7]{}
\newcommand*{\membionenumcaptioninfo}[7]{}
\newcommand*{\membicaptioninfo}[6]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bitwonumcaption}
% The 6 arguments are: optional label, short and long in language 1,
% name in
% language 2, and short and long in language 2. Both texts are put
% into the List of as numbered entries.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bitwonumcaption}[6][\@empty]{%
\begingroup
\let\memcaptioninfo\@gobblefour
% \end{macrocode}
% Check if the first language argument is vacuous, then call
% the normal |\caption| for language 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifmtarg{#2}{\def\m@mscapi{#3}\caption{#3}}%
{\def\m@mscapi{#2}\caption[#2]{#3}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the optional labeling.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx \@empty #1\else
\label{#1}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Remove any extra spacing between the captions, and set the
% NAME for the second caption. Use a command to transfer
% the NAME to the renewal code to avoid circularity if
% for example, we are trying to redefine |\tablename| as
% |\tablename|. Decrement the caption counter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}%
\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}%
\edef\@memtempc{#4}%
\expandafter\renewcommand\csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}%
\addtocounter{\@captype}{-1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Now repeat for the second language caption.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@contmidbi
\@ifmtarg{#5}{\def\m@mscapii{#6}\caption{#6}}%
{\def\m@mscapii{#5}\caption[#5]{#6}}%
\membitwonumcaptioninfo{\@captype}{\@nameuse{the\@captype}}%
{\m@mscapi}{#3}{#4}{\m@mscapii}{#6}%
\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bionenumcaption}
% The 6 arguments are: optional labelling,
% short and long in language 1, name in
% language 2, and short and long in language 2. Both texts are put
% into the List of, but only the first is numbered.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bionenumcaption}[6][\@empty]{%
\begingroup
\let\memcaptioninfo\@gobblefour
% \end{macrocode}
% Check if the first language argument is vacuous, then call
% the normal |\caption| for language 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifmtarg{#2}{\def\m@mscapi{#3}\caption{#3}}%
{\def\m@mscapi{#2}\caption[#2]{#3}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the optional labeling.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx \@empty #1\else
\label{#1}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the between captions code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}%
\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}%
\edef\@memtempc{#4}%
\expandafter\renewcommand\csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}
% \end{macrocode}
% Use a continuation caption for the second language, not forgetting
% to add the appropriate unnumbered text to the List.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@contmidbi
\contcaption{#6}%
\@ifmtarg{#5}{%
\def\m@mscapii{#6}%
\addcontentsline{\csname ext@\@captype\endcsname}{\@captype}%
{\protect\numberline{}{\ignorespaces #6}}}{%
\def\m@mscapii{#5}%
\addcontentsline{\csname ext@\@captype\endcsname}{\@captype}%
{\protect\numberline{}{\ignorespaces #5}}}%
\membionenumcaptioninfo{\@captype}{\@nameuse{the\@captype}}%
{\m@mscapi}{#3}{#4}{\m@mscapii}{#6}%
\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bicaption}
% The 5 arguments are: optional labelling,
% short and long in language 1, name in
% language 2, and long in language 2.
% Only the first text is put into the List.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bicaption}[5][\@empty]{%
\begingroup
\let\memcaptioninfo\@gobblefour
% \end{macrocode}
% Check if the first language argument is vacuous, then call
% the normal |\caption| for language 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifmtarg{#2}{\def\m@mscapi{#3}\caption{#3}}%
{\def\m@mscapi{#2}\caption[#2]{#3}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the optional labeling.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx \@empty #1\else
\label{#1}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the between captions code and
% finally just use |\contcaption| for the
% second language.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}%
\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}%
\edef\@memtempc{#4}
\expandafter\renewcommand\csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}%
\@contmidbi
\contcaption{#5}%
\membicaptioninfo{\@captype}{\@nameuse{the\@captype}}%
{\m@mscapi}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bicontcaption}
% The 3 arguments are long in language 1, name in
% language 2, and long in language 2.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bicontcaption}[3]{%
\begingroup
% \end{macrocode}
% Call |\contcaption| for language 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\contcaption{#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the between captions code and use |\contcaption| for the second
% language.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}%
\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}%
\edef\@memtempc{#2}%
\expandafter\renewcommand\csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}%
\@contmidbi
\contcaption{#3}%
\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Support for the \Lopt{subfigure} package functionality}
%
% Much of the code in this section is based on the \Lpack{subfigure}
% package code, by kind permission of its author, Steven Douglas Cochran.
% To try and avoid clashes with the real \Lpack{subfigure} code I have
% used different macro names, especially when I have copied the code.
%
% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\@contsubcstyle}
% The paragraphing style for subcaptions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subcaptionstyle}[1]{\def\@contsubcstyle{#1}}
\subcaptionstyle{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@shortsubcap}
% \begin{macro}{\if@hangsubcap}
% \begin{macro}{\shortsubcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\hangsubcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\normalsubcaption}
% For dealing with short and hanging subcaptions.
% Analagous to the \Lpack{subfigure} |nooneline| and |hang| options.
% The default is normal subcaptions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@shortsubcap
\newif\if@hangsubcap
\newcommand*{\shortsubcaption}{\@shortsubcaptrue}
\newcommand*{\hangsubcaption}{\@hangsubcaptrue}
\newcommand*{\normalsubcaption}{\@shortsubcapfalse\@hangsubcapfalse}
\normalsubcaption
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subfloattopskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subfloatcapskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subfloatcaptopadj}
% \begin{macro}{\subfloatbottomskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subfloatlabelskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subfloatcapmargin}
% These |\subfloat...| lengths are analagous to the \Lpack{subfigure}
% |\subfig...| lengths.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newskip\subfloattopskip
\newskip\subfloatcapskip
\newskip\subfloatcaptopadj
\newskip\subfloatbottomskip
\newskip\subfloatlabelskip
\newdimen\subfloatcapmargin
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@tightsubcap}
% \begin{macro}{\loosesubcaptions}
% \begin{macro}{\tightsubcaptions}
% Unlike the \Lpack{subfigure} package the class provides no options for
% subcaptions. These macros provide the \Lpack{subfigure} loose/tight
% option functions. Set the default to tight.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@tightsubcap
\newcommand{\loosesubcaptions}{%
\subfloattopskip = 10\p@
\subfloatcapskip = 10\p@
\subfloatcaptopadj = \z@
\subfloatbottomskip = 10\p@
\subfloatlabelskip = 0.33em
\subfloatcapmargin = 10\p@
\@tightsubcapfalse
}
\newcommand{\tightsubcaptions}{%
\subfloattopskip = 5\p@
\subfloatcapskip = \z@
\subfloatcaptopadj = 3\p@
\subfloatbottomskip = 5\p@
\subfloatlabelskip = 0.33em \@plus 0.07em \@minus 0.03em
\subfloatcapmargin = \z@
\@tightsubcaptrue
}
\tightsubcaptions
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionsize}
% \begin{macro}{\@subcapsize}
% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionlabelfont}
% \begin{macro}{\@subcaplabelfont}
% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionfont}
% \begin{macro}{\@subcapfont}
% These macros set the size and fonts for the subcaptions. Set the defaults
% to |\footnotesize|, and the normal roman font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\subcaptionsize}[1]{\def\@subcapsize{#1}}
\newcommand*{\subcaptionlabelfont}[1]{\def\@subcaplabelfont{#1}}
\newcommand*{\subcaptionfont}[1]{\def\@subcapfont{#1}}
\subcaptionsize{\footnotesize}
\subcaptionlabelfont{\normalfont}
\subcaptionfont{\normalfont}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@contkeep}
% \begin{macro}{\@contset}
% \begin{macro}{\subconcluded}
% |\@contkeep| stores
% the current subfloat number in counter |@contsubnum| and
% |\@contset| sets the subfloat number to the value of |@contsubnum|.
% |\subconcluded| sets the subfloat number to zero.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{@contsubnum}
\newcommand{\@contkeep}{%
\setcounter{@contsubnum}{\value{sub\@captype}}}
\newcommand{\@contset}{%
\setcounter{sub\@captype}{\value{@contsubnum}}}
\newcommand{\subconcluded}{%
\setcounter{sub\@captype}{0}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@contbotsub}
% A flag indicating whether the subcaption is to be at the bottom or
% top of the subfloat; TRUE for the subcaption at the bottom.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@contbotsub
\@contbotsubtrue
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subcaption}
% |\subcaption[|\meta{list-entry}|]{|\meta{caption}|}| is a generic
% subcaption. There is no \Lpack{subfigure} equivalent.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subcaption}{%
\bgroup
\let\label=\memsub@label
\ifdonemaincaption\else
\advance\csname c@\@captype\endcsname\@ne
\fi
\refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep
\@ifnextchar [%
{\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}}%
{\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}[\@empty]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubcap}
% This handles the optional argument to |\subcaption|. It sets |\@tempdima|
% to |\hsize| as later on |\@makesubfloatcaption| uses this.
% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/04/28}{Added \cs{@tempdima} to \cs{@memsubcap}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@memsubcap#1[#2]#3{%
\@tempdima=\hsize
\vskip\subfloatcapskip
\ifx \@empty #2
\@memsubcaption{#1}{#3}{#3}%
\else
\@memsubcaption{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\fi
\vskip\subfloatcapskip
\egroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubcaption}
% |\@memsubcaption{|\meta{type}|}{|\meta{list-entry}|}{|\meta{caption}|}|
% typesets a subcaption. This is a copy of the \Lpack{subfigure}
% |\@subcaption| macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@memsubcaption}[3]{%
\ifx \relax#2\relax \else
\bgroup
\let\label\@gobble
\let\protect\string
\def\@memsubcaplabel{\@nameuse{@@the#1}}%
\xdef\@memsubfigcaptionlist{%
\@memsubfigcaptionlist,%
{\protect\numberline{\@memsubcaplabel}\noexpand{\ignorespaces #2}}}%
\egroup
\fi
\@makesubfloatcaption{\@nameuse{@the#1}}{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\contsubcaption}
% |\contsubcaption[|\meta{caption}|]| is the continued version of
% |\subcaption|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\contsubcaption}{%
\bgroup
\let\label=\memsub@label
\@contset
\refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep
\@ifnextchar [%
{\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}}%
{\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}[\@empty]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{subfloat}
% The \Lpack{subfigure} documentation suggests a way of defining a |subfloat|
% environment. This is a trivial implementation because the |\subcaption|
% and |\contsubcaption| commands are provided by the class, and can be used
% within a |subfloat|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{subfloat}{}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subbottom}
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubbody}
% |\subbottom[|\meta{list-entry}|][|\meta{subcaption}|]{|\meta{text}|}|
% typesets a subcaption below the \meta{text}. Most of the work is
% performed by the |\@memsubbody| macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subbottom}{%
\@contbotsubtrue
\@memsubbody}
\newcommand{\@memsubbody}{%
\bgroup
\let\label=\memsub@label
\ifdonemaincaption\else
\advance\csname c@\@captype\endcsname\@ne
\fi
\refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep%
\leavevmode
\@ifnextchar [%
{\@memsubfig}%
{\@memsubfig[\@empty]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\contsubbottom}
% \begin{macro}{\@memcontsubbody}
% These are the continued versions of |\subbottom| and |\@memsubbody|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\contsubbottom}{%
\@contbotsubtrue
\@memcontsubbody}
\newcommand{\@memcontsubbody}{%
\bgroup
\let\label=\memsub@label
\@contset
\refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep%
\leavevmode
\@ifnextchar [%
{\@memsubfig}%
{\@memsubfig[\@empty]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subtop}
% \begin{macro}{\contsubtop}
% These are similar to |\subbottom| and |\contsubbottom| except that they
% put the subcaption on top of the \meta{text}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subtop}{%
\@contbotsubfalse
\@memsubbody}
\newcommand{\contsubtop}{%
\@contbotsubfalse
\@memcontsubbody}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/04/28}{Deleted \cs{@contsubfloat} as it was not used}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubfig}
% This is a revised version of the \Lpack{subfigure} |\@subfigure| command
% --- just the called macro names are changed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@memsubfig[#1]{%
\@ifnextchar [%
{\@memsubfloat{sub\@captype}[#1]}%
{\@memsubfloat{sub\@captype}[\@empty #1][#1]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubfloat}
% This is a modified version of the \Lpack{subfigure} |\@subfloat|
% command Essentially the |\csname if#1topcap\endcsname| constructs are
% replaced by |\if@contbotsub|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@memsubfloat#1[#2][#3]#4{%
\@tempcnta=\@ne
\if@tightsubcap
\if@minipage
\@tempcnta=\z@
\else
\ifdim\lastskip=\z@
\@tempcnta=\@ne
\else
\@tempcnta=\tw@
\fi
\fi
\fi
\if@contbotsub
\def\subfig@top{\subfloattopskip}%
\def\subfig@bottom{\subfloatbottomskip}%
\else
\def\subfig@top{\subfloatbottomskip}%
\def\subfig@bottom{\subfloattopskip}%
\fi
\setbox\@tempboxa \hbox{#4}%
\@tempdima=\wd\@tempboxa
\vtop\bgroup
\vbox\bgroup
\ifcase\@tempcnta
\@minipagefalse
\or
\vspace{\subfig@top}
\or
\ifdim \lastskip=\z@ \else
\@tempskipb\subfig@top\@xaddvskip
\fi
\fi
\if@contbotsub
\box\@tempboxa\egroup
\ifx \@empty#3\relax \else
\vskip\subfloatcapskip
\@memsubcaption{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\fi
\else
\ifx \@empty#3\relax \else
\@memsubcaption{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\vskip\subfloatcapskip
\vskip\subfloatcaptopadj
\fi\egroup
\box\@tempboxa
\fi
\vspace{\subfig@bottom}
\egroup
\egroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% The following series of macros, from \Lpack{subfigure}, control the
% typesetting of the subcaptions.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubfigcaptionlist}
% A copy of |\@subfigcaptionlist|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memsubfigcaptionlist}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\memlistsubcaptions}
% A copy of |\listsubcaptions|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memlistsubcaptions}{%
\@ifstar
{\gdef\@memsubfigcaptionlist{}}%
{\@memlistsubcaptions{\@captype}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memlistsubcaptions}
% A copy of |\@listsubcaptions|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memlistsubcaptions}[1]{%
\@ifundefined{@captype}{}{%
\@ifundefined{ext@sub#1}{}{%
\@for \@tempa:=\@memsubfigcaptionlist \do {%
\ifx \@empty\@tempa\relax \else
\addcontentsline{\@nameuse{ext@sub#1}}{sub#1}{\@tempa}%
\fi}}}%
\gdef\@memsubfigcaptionlist{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makesubfloatcaption}
% This is a copy of |\@makesubfigurecaption|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@makesubfloatcaption}[2]{%
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{%
\@subcapsize
{\@subcaplabelfont #1}{\@subcapfont\ignorespaces #2}}%
\@tempdimb=-\subfloatcapmargin
\multiply\@tempdimb\tw@
\advance\@tempdimb\@tempdima
\hb@xt@\@tempdima{%
\hss
\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\@tempdimb
\memsubfig@caption{#1}{#2}%
\else
\if@shortsubcap
\memsubfig@caption{#1}{#2}%
\else
\box\@tempboxa
\fi
\fi
\hss}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memsubfig@caption}
% This is a copy of |\subfig@caption|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memsubfig@caption}[2]{%
\if@hangsubcap
\sbox{\@tempboxa}{\@subcapsize\@subcaplabelfont #1}%
\addtolength{\@tempdimb}{-\wd\@tempboxa}%
\usebox{\@tempboxa}%
\memsubfig@captionpar{\@tempdimb}{%
{\@subcapfont\ignorespaces #2}}%
\else
\memsubfig@captionpar{\@tempdimb}{{\@subcaplabelfont #1}%
{\@subcapfont\ignorespaces #2}}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memsubfig@captionpar}
% This replaces |\subfig@captionpar|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memsubfig@captionpar}[2]{%
\parbox[t]{#1}{\@subcapsize\@contsubcstyle #2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memsub@label}
% These are copies of |\sub@label| and |\subref|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memsub@label}{%
\@ifnextchar (%
{\sf@memsub@label}%
{\sf@memsub@label(Sub\@captype\space
\@nameuse{p@sub\@captype}%
\@nameuse{thesub\@captype})}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sf@memsub@label}
% This is a copy of |\sf@sub@label|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\sf@memsub@label(#1)#2{%
\protected@edef\mem@currentlabelname{#1}%
\sf@@memsub@label{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sf@@memsub@label}
% This is an expanded copy of |\sf@@sub@label| processed after any packages may
% have been loaded.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\@ifpackageloaded{nameref}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% The \Lpack{nameref} package is loaded.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sf@@memsub@label}[1]{%
\@bsphack
\protected@write\@auxout{}{%
\string\newlabel{#1}%
{{\@nameuse{p@sub\@captype}\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
{\thepage}%
{\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
{\@currentHref}{}}}%
\protected@write\@auxout{}{%
\string\newlabel{sub@#1}%
{{\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
{\thepage}%
{\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
{\@currentHref}{}}}%
\@esphack}
}{\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% The \Lpack{hyperref} package is loaded, but not \Lpack{nameref}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sf@@memsub@label}[1]{%
\@bsphack
\protected@write\@auxout{}{%
\string\newlabel{#1}%
{{\@nameuse{p@sub\@captype}\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
{\thepage}%
{\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
{\@currentHref}{}}}%
\protected@write\@auxout{}{%
\string\newlabel{sub@#1}%
{{\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
{\thepage}%
{\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
{\@currentHref}{}}}%
\@esphack}
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Neither the \Lpack{hyperref} nor the \Lpack{nameref}
% package is loaded.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@memoldlabel\label
\newcommand*{\sf@@memsub@label}[1]{%
\@bsphack
\@memoldlabel{#1}%
\protected@write\@auxout{}{%
\string\newlabel{sub@#1}%
{{\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
{\thepage}}}%
\@esphack}
}{}%
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionref}
% This is a copy of the |\subref| macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\subcaptionref}{%
\@ifstar{\ssc@ref}{\sc@ref}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ssc@ref}
% \begin{macro}{\sc@ref}
% The implementation of the starred and unstarred forms of |\subcaptionref|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ssc@ref}[1]{\ref{sub@#1}}
\newcommand*{\sc@ref}[1]{{\@subcaplabelfont\ref{sub@#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \section{Epigraphs}
%
% This code comes from the \Lpack{epigraph} package~\cite{EPIGRAPH}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\beforeepigraphskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterepigraphskip}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphrule}
% The several length commands, which can be changed by the user with
% |\setlength|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\beforeepigraphskip}
\setlength{\beforeepigraphskip}{.5\baselineskip}
\newlength{\afterepigraphskip}
\setlength{\afterepigraphskip}{.5\baselineskip}
\newlength{\epigraphwidth}
\setlength{\epigraphwidth}{.4\textwidth}
\newlength{\epigraphrule}
\setlength{\epigraphrule}{.4\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphsize}
% The size of the font to be used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraphsize}{\small}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphflush}
% \begin{macro}{\textflush}
% \begin{macro}{\sourceflush}
% The three commands to position epigraphs in the textblock and to position
% the components of the epigraph.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraphflush}{flushright}
\newcommand{\textflush}{flushleft}
\newcommand{\sourceflush}{flushright}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphfontsize}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphposition}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphtextposition}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphsourceposition}
% These are declarative forms of the above. It's a bit late now, but
% the previous macros should have been internal.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added some declarations for epigraphs.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraphfontsize}[1]{\def\epigraphsize{#1}}
\newcommand{\epigraphposition}[1]{\long\def\epigraphflush{#1}}
\newcommand{\epigraphtextposition}[1]{\def\textflush{#1}}
\newcommand{\epigraphsourceposition}[1]{\def\sourceflush{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@epirule}
% The internal command to draw a rule between text and source.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@epirule}{\rule[.5ex]{\epigraphwidth}{\epigraphrule}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@epitext}
% The internal command to typeset the \meta{text}. Put it into a minipage of the
% right size and typeset per |\textflush|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@epitext}[1]{%
\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}\begin{\textflush} #1\\
% \end{macrocode}
% Draw a rule if it will be visible, otherwise add some extra vertical space.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim\epigraphrule>\z@ \@epirule \else \vspace*{1ex} \fi
\end{\textflush}\end{minipage}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@episource}
% The internal command for typesetting the \meta{source}, which is put
% into a minipage and typeset according to |\sourceflush|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@episource}[1]{%
\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}
\begin{\sourceflush} #1\end{\sourceflush}
\end{minipage}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraph}
% Having got the preliminaries out of the way, here's the user command
% for a single epigraph. This is set in a minipage to prevent breaking
% across a page. Position it according to |\epigraphflush|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraph}[2]{\vspace{\beforeepigraphskip}
{\epigraphsize\begin{\epigraphflush}\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}
\@epitext{#1}\\ \@episource{#2}
\end{minipage}\end{\epigraphflush}
\vspace{\afterepigraphskip}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\qitem}
% \begin{macro}{\qitemlabel}
% |\qitem| is the epigraph list version of |\item|.
% Set everything inside a minipage.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\qitem}[2]{{%
\raggedright\item \begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}
\@epitext{#1}\\ \@episource{#2}
\end{minipage}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% |\qitemlabel| is needed for a list as well. It is not going to
% typeset anything.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\qitemlabel}[1]{\hfill}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{epigraphs}
% Now for the epigraph list. This is defined in terms of a |list|
% environment.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{epigraphs}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the vertical space, set the font size, position according to
% |\epigraphflush|, and put everything into a minipage.
% \begin{macrocode}
\vspace{\beforeepigraphskip}\begin{\epigraphflush}
\epigraphsize
\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}
\list{}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Make the list just fit the minipage (i.e., no indents).
% \begin{macrocode}
{\itemindent\z@ \labelwidth\z@ \labelsep\z@
\leftmargin\z@ \rightmargin\z@
\let\makelabel\qitemlabel}}%
{\endlist\end{minipage}\end{\epigraphflush}
\vspace{\afterepigraphskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \subsection{Epigraphs before a chapter title}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@epichapapp}
% \begin{macro}{\dropchapter}
% \begin{macro}{\undodrop}
% Commands to drop and restore positions of chapter titles. Dropping is
% accomplished by inserting vertical space before the |\@chapapp| command.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\dropchapter}[1]{%
\let\@epichapapp\@chapapp
\renewcommand{\@chapapp}{\vspace*{#1}\@epichapapp}}
\newcommand{\undodrop}{\let\@chapapp\@epichapapp}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Placing an epigraph before a chapter title uses the scheme outlined
% by Piet van Oostrum~\cite{FANCYHDR}. This is to put a zero sized
% picture into the page header.
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@epirhs}
% \begin{macro}{\if@epicenter}
% Two booleans for testing whether an epigraph is to be at the RH margin,
% centered, or at the LH margin. The default is RH margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@epirhs \@epirhstrue
\newif\if@epicenter \@epicentertrue
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@epipos}
% This routine sets the |\if@epi...| booleans according to the value of
% |\epigraphflush|. If |\epigraphflush| is neither |center| nor |flushleft|
% then it defaults to |flushright|. We have to use this to be upward
% compatible with |\epigraphflush| being set by the user with |\renewcommand|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@epipos}{
\long\def\@ept{flushleft}
\ifx\epigraphflush\@ept
\@epirhsfalse \@epicenterfalse
\else
\long\def\@ept{center}
\ifx\epigraphflush\@ept
\@epirhsfalse \@epicentertrue
\else
\@epirhstrue \@epicenterfalse
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphhead}
% |\epigraphhead[|\meta{distance}|]{|\meta{text}|}| puts \meta{text} at
% \meta{distance} (a number, not a length) below the header at the
% page position specified by |\epigraphflush|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraphhead}[2][95]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% We have to use |\def| instead of the normal \LaTeX{} definition commands
% as we will keep on
% (re)defining things. For reasons that are not fully clear to me \LaTeX{}
% doesn't seem to like me using a |\savebox| for storing the epigraph text,
% so I'll use a command instead.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@epitemp{\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}#2\end{minipage}}
% \end{macrocode}
% Define an |epigraph| page style.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\ps@epigraph{\let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
% \end{macrocode}
% There are three possible definitions for |\@oddhead| depending on the
% value of |\epigraphflush|. We call |\@epipos| to decide which one to do.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@epipos
\if@epirhs
\def\@oddhead{\hfil\begin{picture}(0,0)
\put(0,-#1){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\@epitemp}}
\end{picture}}
\else
\if@epicenter
\def\@oddhead{\hfil\begin{picture}(0,0)
\put(0,-#1){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\@epitemp}}
\end{picture}\hfil}
\else
\def\@oddhead{\begin{picture}(0,0)
\put(0,-#1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\@epitemp}}
\end{picture}\hfil}
\fi
\fi
\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
\def\@oddfoot{\reset@font\hfil\thepage\hfil}
\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}
% \end{macrocode}
% Make |epigraph| be the page style for this page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\thispagestyle{epigraph}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The above produces a |plain| pagestyle with the epigraph. Life is
% more complex if someone wants a fancy style with the epigraph. They
% will have to do some work, though.
%
% \begin{macro}{\the@epigraph}
% \begin{macro}{\@epidrop}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphforheader}
% |\the@pigraph| is a macro to store the contents of an epigraph, and |\@pidrop|
% stores the \meta{distance} number.
% |\epigraphforheader|\oarg{distance}\marg{text} defines the internal macros
% appropriately.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{the@epigraph}, \cs{@epidrop}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{epigraphforheader}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\the@epigraph}{}
\newcommand{\@epidrop}{95}
\newcommand{\epigraphforheader}[2][95]{%
\def\@epidrop{#1}\long\def\the@epigraph{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphpicture}
% |\epigraphpicture| puts |\the@epigraph| into a zero-sized picture at location
% |(0,-\@epidrop)|. This can then be used as part of a fancy chapter header.
% The coding is similar to |\epigraphhead|.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{epigraphpicture}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraphpicture}{%
\def\@epitemp{%
\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}\the@epigraph\end{minipage}}%
\@epipos
\if@epirhs
\begin{picture}(0,0)%
\put(0,-\@epidrop){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\@epitemp}}%
\end{picture}%
\else
\if@epicenter
\begin{picture}(0,0)%
\put(0,-\@epidrop){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\@epitemp}}%
\end{picture}%
\else
\begin{picture}(0,0)%
\put(0,-\@epidrop){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\@epitemp}}%
\end{picture}%
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \section{The deprecated font commands}
%
% The class does not support the old font changing commands unless the
% \Lopt{oldfontcommands} option is used.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memoldfonterr}
% \begin{macro}{\@memoldfontwarn}
% Macros for old font class error and warning. E.g., \\
% |\@memoldfonterr{\tt}{\ttfamily}{\texttt}|
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{@memoldfonterr} and \cs{@memoldfontwarn}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Fiddled with the braces in \cs{@memoldfontwarn} (mempatch v3.0)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memoldfonterr}[3]{%
\@memerror{Font command \protect#1\space is not supported}{%
Use \protect#2, or \protect#3{...}, or the oldfontcommands option}}
\newcommand*{\@memoldfontwarn}[3]{%
\@memwarn{The \protect#1\space font command is deprecated.
\MessageBreak Use \protect#2{...} or {\protect#3... } instead}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Just give a single warning when an old font command is used following the
% \Lopt{oldfontcommands} option.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Just issue a single warning for an old font
% (from patch v1.9)}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@rmwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\rm}
% The old command for roman font.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{rm}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{More efficient coding of all the old font commands}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@rmwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\rm}{\textrm}{\rmfamily}}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\@mem@rmwarn\gdef\@mem@rmwarn{}%
\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
\else
\def\rm{\@memoldfonterr{\rm}{\textrm}{\rmfamily}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@sfwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\sf}
% The old sans font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{sf}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@sfwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\sf}{\textsf}{\sffamily}}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\@mem@sfwarn\gdef\@mem@sfwarn{}%
\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
\else
\def\sf{\@memoldfonterr{\sf}{\textsf}{\sffamily}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@ttwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\tt}
% The old typewriter font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{tt}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@ttwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\tt}{\texttt}{\ttfamily}}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\@mem@ttwarn\gdef\@mem@ttwarn{}%
\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
\else
\def\tt{\@memoldfonterr{\tt}{\texttt}{\ttfamily}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@bfwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\bf}
% The old bold font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{bf}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@bfwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\bf}{\textbf}{\bfseries}}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\@mem@bfwarn\gdef\@mem@bfwarn{}%
\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
\else
\def\bf{\@memoldfonterr{\bf}{\textbf}{\bfseries}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@itwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\it}
% The old italic font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{it}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@itwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\it}{\textit}{\itshape}}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\@mem@itwarn\gdef\@mem@itwarn{}%
\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
\else
\def\it{\@memoldfonterr{\it}{\textit}{\itshape}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@slwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\sl}
% The old slanted font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{sl}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@slwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\sl}{\textsl}{\slshape}}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\@mem@slwarn\gdef\@mem@slwarn{}%
\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
\else
\def\sl{\@memoldfonterr{\sl}{\textsl}{\slshape}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@scwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\sc}
% The old small caps font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{sc}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@scwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\sc}{\textsc}{\scshape}}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\@mem@scwarn\gdef\@mem@scwarn{}%
\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
\else
\def\sc{\@memoldfonterr{\sc}{\textsc}{\scshape}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@calwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\cal}
% The old calligraphic font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added definition of \cs{cal}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@calwarn{%
\@memwarn{The \protect\cal\space font command is deprecated.
\MessageBreak Try to use \protect\mathcal\space instead}}
\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@mem@calwarn\gdef\@mem@calwarn{}%
\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
\else
\def\cal{%
\@memerror{Font command \protect\cal\space is not supported}{%
Use \protect\mathcal, or the oldfontcommands option}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@mitwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\mit}
% The old math italic font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added definition of \cs{mit}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@mitwarn{%
\@memwarn{The \protect\mit\space font command is deprecated.
\MessageBreak Try to use \protect\mathnormal\space instead}}
\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@mem@mitwarn\gdef\@mem@mitwarn{}%
\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
\else
\def\mit{%
\@memerror{Font command \protect\mit\space is not supported}{%
Use \protect\mathnormal, or the oldfontcommands option}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\em}
% \begin{macro}{\eminnershape}
% \begin{macro}{\emph}
% The old emphasis font command (the original \cs{em} is defined in the
% kernel file \file{ltfssini.dtx}, coded here as \cs{@m@m@m}).
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Redid coding for \cs{emph} and \cs{em}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Dont' deprecate \cs{em} and deleted \cs{@mem@emwarn} (mempatch v3.0)}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Completely redid \cs{em} and \cs{emph}, matching latest fixltx2e package (mempatch v3.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\em}{%
\@nomath\em
\ifdim\fontdimen\@ne\font > \z@
\eminnershape
\else
\itshape
\fi}
\providecommand{\eminnershape}{\upshape}
\DeclareTextFontCommand{\emph}{\em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \section{Cross Referencing} \label{sec:xref}
%
% \subsection{Label referencing}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fref}
% \begin{macro}{\tref}
% \begin{macro}{\pref}
% These are named references to labeled figures, tables and pages.
% I find these
% useful to ensure consistency throughout the document --- I don't have
% to remember whether it is `see Figure ...' or `figure' or `Fig.' or \ldots.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\fref}[1]{\figurerefname~\ref{#1}}
\newcommand{\tref}[1]{\tablerefname~\ref{#1}}
\newcommand{\pref}[1]{\pagerefname~\pageref{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Pref}
% \begin{macro}{\Cref}
% \begin{macro}{\Sref}
% These are named references to labeled Part, Chapter and Sectional
% divisions.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{Pref}, \cs{Cref} and \cs{Sref}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\Pref}[1]{\partrefname\ref{#1}}
\newcommand{\Cref}[1]{\chapterrefname\ref{#1}}
\newcommand{\Sref}[1]{\sectionrefname\ref{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Title referencing}
%
% This is based on DA's \Lpack{titleref} package~\cite{TITLEREF}.
% The following
% remarks are taken from that package.
%
%
% Titles for numbered sectioning units and for floats with captions are
% the same as the respective TOC, LOF, or LOT entry (even when no TOC is
% printed). When a short title is provided (|\section[short]{long}|)
% it will be used for the |\titleref|. This is especially useful for
% figure captions. Unnumbered sections take their title reference from
% the printed title. Beware! This turns the title into a moving argument
% when it normally is not, and will cause weird errors if there are
% `fragile' commands present.
%
% Enumerated lists do not have titles and simply inherit the title of
% their section.
%
% The format of the title reference is controlled by the command
% |\theTitleReference|, which can be redefined with |\renewcommand|.
% It takes two parameters: the number and the title. The number is
% just the regular |\ref| and it is WRONG in unnumbered sections.
% Beware! The default definition is the unadorned title. You could
% do, for example, \\
% |\renewcommand{\theTitleReference}[2]{#1\ \emph{#2}}|.
%
% The title of the current section is also available without |\label|:
% Use the command |\currenttitle| to generate a |\titleref| to the current
% section. If you have redefined |\theTitleReference| to print the number
% with the title, be aware that the two may not correspond: In a numbered
% list the number will show the current item but the title will show the
% current section, but in an unnumbered section the number will show
% some previous section number.
%
% The big problem with the |[usetoc]| method is that |\titleref| will
% not refer to a |\label| which was given in the title or caption itself;
% the label must be placed after the sectioning command or the caption.
% If you make a title-reference to a label given in a title, you will get
% a warning message.
%
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added title referencing (from patch v1.4)}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifheadnameref}
% |\ifheadnameref|: FALSE use ToC entry, TRUE use header entry
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifheadnameref
\headnamereffalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\theTitleReference}
% |\theTitleReference|\marg{num}\marg{title} is the style for typesetting
% a referenced (number and) title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\theTitleReference}[2]{#2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\label}
% This redefinition of |\label| is intended to work with other redirections
% of |\label|, if they record extra information in a similar way.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@mem@old@label\label
\def\label#1{\@bsphack\begingroup
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{\protect\M@TitleReference
{\@currentlabel}{\M@currentTitle}}%
\@mem@old@label{#1}%
\endgroup \@esphack}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@@gettitle}
% |@mem@@gettitle|\marg{title} grabs a title text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@mem@@gettitle#1{\begingroup \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
\let\label\@mem@nestwarn
\let\index\@gobble \let\glossary\@gobble
\let\markboth\@gobbletwo \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
\let\markright\@gobble
\edef\@tempa{\noexpand\def\noexpand\M@currentTitle{#1}}%
\expandafter\endgroup\@tempa}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@nestwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\M@TitleReference}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@mem@nestwarn\@gobble
\let\M@TitleReference\@firstoftwo
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\titleref}
% \begin{macro}{\currenttitle}
% |\titleref|\marg{key} prints the title corresponding to |\label{key}|.
% |\currenttitle| prints the latest title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\titleref}[1]{\begingroup \let\numberline\@gobble
\let\M@TitleReference\@mem@theTR % interrupt recursion of \ref
\ref{#1}\endgroup}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\currenttitle}{\begingroup \let\numberline\@gobble
\theTitleReference\@currentlabel\M@currentTitle\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{verbatim}
% % \DeclareRobustCommand\@mem@nestwarn[1]{\@memwarn%
% % {Label \string"#1\string" was put in a title,\MessageBreak
% % so the \noexpand\titleref is incorrect}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \begin{macro}{\M@currentTitle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\M@currentTitle\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@theTR}
% proper definition:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@mem@theTR{\let\M@TitleReference\@firstoftwo \theTitleReference}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\namerefon}
% \begin{macro}{\namerefoff}
% Named references has turned some arguments (e.g., |\legend{text}|) into
% moving ones (Sven.Hartrumpf@FernUni-Hagen.de reported a problem but
% not a cause, March 2003). Not everyone needs named references.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\namerefon}{\let\M@gettitle\@mem@@gettitle}
\newcommand*{\namerefoff}{\let\M@gettitle\@gobble}
\namerefon
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@caption}
% add hooks to |\@caption|
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\M@old@caption\@caption
\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\M@gettitle{#2}\M@old@caption{#1}[{#2}]{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\legend}
% \begin{macro}{\@legend}
% add hooks to |\legend|
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\M@oldlegend\legend
\long\def\legend#1{\M@gettitle{#1}\M@oldlegend{#1}}
\let\M@old@legend\@legend
\long\def\@legend#1[#2]#3{\M@gettitle{#2}\M@old@legend{#1}[{#2}]{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsptitle}
% \begin{macro}{\@vssptitle}
% add hooks to |\poemtitle|
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\M@old@vsptitle\@vsptitle
\long\def\@vsptitle[#1]#2{\M@gettitle{#1}\M@old@vsptitle[{#1}]{#2}}
\let\M@old@vssptitle\@vssptitle
\long\def\@vssptitle#1{\M@gettitle{#1}\M@old@vssptitle{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
% \begin{macro}{\@part}
% add hooks to |\part(*)|
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%\let\M@old@spart\@spart
%%%\def\@spart#1{\M@gettitle{#1}\M@old@spart{#1}}
%%%\let\M@old@part\@part
%%%\def\@part[#1]{\M@gettitle{#1}\M@old@part[{#1}]}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Table of Contents, etc.}
%
% A |\section| command writes a
% |\contentsline{section}{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| command
% on the \file{.toc} file, where \meta{title} contains the
% contents of the entry and \meta{page} is the page number. If
% sections are being numbered, then \meta{title} will be of the
% form |\numberline{|\meta{num}|}{|\meta{heading}|}| where
% \meta{num} is the number produced by |\thesection|. Other
% sectioning commands work similarly.
%
% A |\caption| command in a `figure' environment writes
%
% |\contentsline{figure}{\numberline{|\meta{num}|}{|%
% \meta{caption}|}}{|\meta{page}|}|
%
% on the \file{.lof} file, where \meta{num} is the number produced
% by |\thefigure| and \meta{caption} is the figure caption. It
% works similarly for a `table' environment.
%
% The command |\contentsline{|\meta{name}|}| expands to
% |\l@|\meta{name}. So, to specify the table of contents, we must
% define |\l@chapter|, |\l@section|, |\l@subsection|, ... ; to
% specify the list of figures, we must define |\l@figure|; and so
% on. Most of these can be defined with the |\@dottedtocline|
% command, which works as follows.
%
% |\@dottedtocline{|\meta{level}|}{|\meta{indent}|}{|^^A
% \meta{numwidth}|}{|^^A
% \meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}|
%
% \begin{description}
% \item[\meta{level}] An entry is produced only if\meta{ level}
% $<=$ value of the \Lcount{tocdepth} counter. Note,
% |\chapter| is level 0, |\section| is level 1, etc.
% \item[\meta{indent}] The indentation from the outer left margin
% of the start of the contents line.
% \item[\meta{numwidth}] The width of a box in which the section
% number is to go, if \meta{title} includes a |\numberline|
% command.
% \end{description}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@pnumwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\@tocrmarg}
% \begin{macro}{\@dotsep}
% This command uses the following three parameters, which are set
% with a |\newcommand| (so em's can be used to make them depend upon
% the font).
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{\bslash @pnumwidth}] The width of a box in which the
% page number is put.
% \item[\texttt{\bslash @tocrmarg}] The right margin for multiple
% line entries. One wants |\@tocrmarg| $\ge$ |\@pnumwidth|
% \item[\texttt{\bslash @dotsep}] Separation between dots, in mu
% units. Should be defined as a number like 2 or 1.7
% \end{description}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@pnumwidth}{1.55em}
\newcommand{\@tocrmarg} {2.55em}
\newcommand{\@dotsep}{4.5}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tocentryskip}
% \begin{macro}{\tocbaseline}
% \begin{macro}{\tocskip}
% We define two lengths and a utility command.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\tocentryskip} \setlength{\tocentryskip}{1em}
\newlength{\tocbaseline} \setlength{\tocbaseline}{20pt}
\newcommand{\tocskip}[1]{%
\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace{#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{New List of \ldots}
%
% It is apparent that users want to do at least two things that are not
% readily provided by the standard classes: (a) change the appearance
% of the Table of Contents, etc., headings, and (b) create new List of\ldots.
% This class provides a means of creating new Lists whose headings are
% parameterized, thereby killing two birds with one stone.
%
% In this class the tables of
% contents, figures etc. are always set in single-column style.
% The titles are added to the ToC, unless the starred versions of the
% commands are used.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ensureonecol}
% \begin{macro}{\restorefromonecol}
% The ToC, LoF, etc are always set in a single column. These two
% macros cooperate to swith from two-columns to one column, and back again.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ensureonecol}{%
\if@twocolumn
\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
\else
\@restonecolfalse
\fi}
\newcommand*{\restorefromonecol}{\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/24}{Deleted \cs{ensuretwocol} and \cs{restorefromtwocol}
% as they were unused}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftparskip}
% The |\parskip| local to the ToC, etc, is set to the length |\cftparskip|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\cftparskip}
\setlength{\cftparskip}{0pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newlistof}
% |\newlistof{|\meta{listofcmmd}|}{|\meta{ext}|}{|\meta{listofname}|}|
% creates the command |\listofcmmd| to typeset a new List of, where the
% external file has the extension |.ext| and the heading title is
% \meta{listofname}. The code for this is a heavily modified part
% of the \Lpack{tocloft} package.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newlistof}[3]{%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% In the following, |X| stands for the value of \meta{listofcmmd} and
% |Z| stands for the value of \meta{ext}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ext@Z}
% \begin{macro}{\Zdepth}
% The file extension and listing depth, which is set to level~1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{ext@#2}{#2}
\@ifundefined{c@#2depth}{\newcounter{#2depth}}{}
\setcounter{#2depth}{1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Zmark}
% The heading marks for the listing.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{@mkboth} to \cs{markboth} in \cs{Zmark}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#2mark}{\markboth{#3}{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\X}
% Typeset the listing title and entries,
% with both a normal and starred version.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#1}{\@ifstar{\@nameuse{@star#2}}{\@nameuse{@plain#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@starZ}
% The starred listof version
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{@star#2}{%
\ensureonecol
\par
\begingroup
%%% \parindent\z@ \parskip\cftparskip
\@nameuse{@#2maketitle}
\@starttoc{#2}%
\endgroup
\restorefromonecol}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@plainZ}
% The unstarred listof version
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{@plain#2}{%
\ensureonecol
\par
\begingroup
%%% \parindent\z@ \parskip\cftparskip
\@nameuse{@#2maketitle}
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#3}
\@starttoc{#2}%
\endgroup
\restorefromonecol}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@Zmaketitle}
% This macro typesets the title.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printZnonum} to \cs{@Zmaketitle}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{@#2maketitle}{%
\@nameuse{#2headstart}
{\parindent\z@ \parskip\cftparskip
\interlinepenalty\@M
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added printZnonum to \cs{newlistof}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@nameuse{print#2nonum}%
\@nameuse{print#2title}{#3}%
\@nameuse{#2mark}%
\thispagestyle{chapter}%
\@nameuse{after#2title}
}
\@afterheading}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Zheadstart}
% \begin{macro}{\afterZtitle}
% The macros |\Zheadstart| and |\afterZtitle|
% control what goes before and after the title. They
% default to the corresponding macros for chapters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#2headstart}{\chapterheadstart}
\@namedef{after#2title}{\afterchaptertitle}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printZnonum}
% This typesets something before the title and defaults
% to |\printchapternonum|.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printZnonum} macro}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{print#2nonum}{\printchapternonum}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printZtitle}
% The title is typeset by the macro |\printZtitle{|\meta{title}|}|
% which defaults to |\printchaptertitle|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{print#2title}##1{\printchaptertitle{##1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% This is the end of the definition of |\newlistof|.
% \begin{macrocode}
} % end \newlistof
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@starttoc}
% A list of macro calls |\@starttoc| to read the appropriate file. I have
% changed the kernel definition to allow a file to be read multiple times
% by delaying killing the file until the end of the document.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changed \cs{@starttoc}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\@starttoc}[1]{%
\begingroup\makeatletter
\@input{\jobname.#1}%
\if@filesw
\AtEndDocument{%
\expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
\immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
}%
\fi
\@nobreakfalse
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Table of Contents}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents*}
% These macros request that \LaTeX{} produces a table of
% contents. The ToC heading is added to the ToC unless the starred
% version is used.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistof{tableofcontents}{toc}{\contentsname}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% The List of Figures and List of Tables are defined later.
%
%
%
% \subsection{List entries}
%
% Each command in the body of the text that makes an entry in the ToC,
% or LoF or LoT needs an addtional macro to format the entry, as described
% above. Users often want to change the formatting of the entries but
% it is not immediately obvious how to do that.
%
% I have borrowed and modified more of the code from the \Lpack{tocloft}
% package to enable easy creation and modification the formatting of the
% entries.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\setpnumwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\setrmarg}
% User commands for setting |\@pnumwidth| and |\@tocrmarg|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setpnumwidth}[1]{\renewcommand{\@pnumwidth}{#1}}
\newcommand{\setrmarg}[1]{\renewcommand{\@tocrmarg}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftdot}
% \begin{macro}{\cftdotfill}
% In the default ToC, a dotted line can be used to provide a leader between
% a title and the page number. The definition of this leader is buried
% in the |\@dottedtocline| command. The |\cftdotfill{|\meta{sep}|}|
% command provides a parameterised version of the leader code, where
% \meta{sep} is the separation between the dots in mu units.
% The symbol used for the `dots' in the leader is given by the value
% of |\cftdot|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand{\cftdot}{.}
\providecommand{\cftdotfill}[1]{%
\leaders\hbox{$\m@th\mkern #1 mu\hbox{\cftdot}\mkern #1 mu$}\hfill}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftdotsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cftnodots}
% |\cftdotsep| holds the default dot separation.
% If the kerns in |\cftdotfill| are large enough, then no dots will
% be printed. |\cftnodots| should be `large enough'.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Changed \cs{cftnodots} from 10,000 to 2,000 for
% 17pt option and pdflatex}
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand{\cftdotsep}{4.5}
\newcommand{\cftnodots}{2000}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now for the trickier bits regarding the typesetting of the ToC
% entries.
%
% A \file{.toc} (also \file{.lof} and \file{.lot}) file consists
% of a list of
% |\contentsline{|\meta{kind}|}{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}|
% commands, where \meta{kind} is the kind of heading (e.g., |part| or
% |section| or |figure|), \meta{title} is the title text (including the number),
% and \meta{page} is the page number. The entries are inserted into the
% file by calling the
% |\addcontentsline{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{kind}|}{|\meta{title}|}|
% command, where \meta{file} is the file extension (e.g., |toc|, |lot|)
% and the other arguments are the same as for the |\contentsline|
% command. (Arbitrary stuff may also be put into the file via the
% |\addtocontents{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{text}|}| command).
% The typesetting of the |\contentsline| entries is performed by
% commands of the form |\l@kind|. The sectioning and captioning commands
% call |\addcontentsline| to insert their titles into the \file{.toc}
% etc., files.
%
% For the purposes at hand it is generally impossible to treat
% the typesetting
% of a title and its number separately, as both are bundled into the
% \meta{title} argument within |\contentsline|. They could be handled
% separately if the |\contentsline| command was suitably modified. If
% this was done, then the |\addtocontentsline| command would also need
% to be changed which would then require the sectioning and captioning
% commands to be modified as well. This is certainly possible, but would
% cause problems if any other package also modified the sectioning or
% captioning commands, and there are several packages which do this.
%
% I provide modified versions of the |\l@kind| commands.
% Essentially, my new definitions
% consist of inlined versions of the code for |\@dottedtocline|.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftparfillskip}
% The |\l@kind| commands modify (locally) the value of |\parfillskip|.
% |\cftparfillskip| is a copy of the default \theTeXbook{}
% |\parfillskip| definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cftparfillskip}{\parfillskip=0pt plus1fil}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\numberline}
% The purpose of the |\numberline{|\meta{secnum}|}| command is to typeset
% \meta{secnum} left justified in a box of width |\@tempdima|. I redefine
% it to add three additional parameters, namely |\@cftbsnum|,
% |\@cftasnum| and |\@cftasnumb|
% (see \file{ltsect.dtx} for the original
% definition).
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\numberline}[1]{%
\hb@xt@\@tempdima{\@cftbsnum #1\@cftasnum\hfil}\@cftasnumb}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@cftbsnum}
% \begin{macro}{\@cftasnum}
% \begin{macro}{\@cftasnumb}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@cftbsnum}{}
\newcommand{\@cftasnum}{}
\newcommand{\@cftasnumb}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\newlistentry}
% |\newlistentry[|\meta{within}|]{|\meta{counter}|}{|\meta{ext}|}{|\meta{level-1}|}|
% creates a set of commands for typesetting a new kind of entry in a List of.
% \meta{counter} is the name of the counter for the entry and must be
% the same as the name
% of the entry (e.g., |subsection|). The optional \meta{within} is the
% name of a counter within which |counter| is defined. The file extension
% for the List of is \meta{ext} and \meta{level-1} is one less than the
% level of the entry in the List of.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newlistentry}[4][\@empty]{%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% In the following, |X| is used as the value of \meta{counter} and
% |Z| as the value of \meta{ext}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@X}
% \begin{macro}{\theX}
% Check if \meta{within} and \meta{counter} have been defined. It is
% an error if \meta{within} has not been defined. \meta{counter}
% will be created if it has not been previously defined.
% Set the default counter values.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{c@#2}{% check & set the counter
\ifx \@empty#1\relax
\newcounter{#2}
\else
\newcounter{#2}[#1]%
\expandafter\edef\csname the#2\endcsname{%
\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1\endcsname.\noexpand\arabic{#2}}
\fi}{}
\setcounter{#2}{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% That finishes off the error checking. No matter what the result, the
% rest of the new commands are defined.
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@X}
% |\l@X{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the entry.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{l@#2}##1##2{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Only typeset if the |\Zdepth| is greater than \meta{level-1}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum \@nameuse{c@#3depth} > #4\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Add some vertical space.
% \begin{macrocode}
\vskip \@nameuse{cftbefore#2skip}
% \end{macrocode}
% Start a group to keep paragraphing changes local. Set the |\leftskip|
% to the entry's indentation.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\leftskip \@nameuse{cft#2indent}\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the |\rightskip| to |\@tocrmarg| to leave room for the page number.
% \begin{macrocode}
\rightskip \@tocrmarg
% \end{macrocode}
% Ensure that the last line of an entry will be filled. Setting |\parfillskip|
% to a negative value prevents `overfull box' messages.
% \begin{macrocode}
\parfillskip -\rightskip
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the paragraph's indentation to the entry's indentation.
% \begin{macrocode}
\parindent \@nameuse{cft#2indent}\relax\@afterindenttrue
% \end{macrocode}
% Try and prevent breaks between lines in a multiline entry.
% \begin{macrocode}
\interlinepenalty\@M
% \end{macrocode}
% Make sure we have left vertical mode.
% \begin{macrocode}
\leavevmode
% \end{macrocode}
% Our version of |\numberline| expects that the width of the number box
% is in |\@tempdima|, and that the three macros |\@cftbsnum|, |\@cftaqsnum|,
% and |\@cftasnumb| are defined. We set all these to the values for this entry.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempdima \@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}\relax
\expandafter\let\expandafter\@cftbsnum\csname cft#2presnum\endcsname
\expandafter\let\expandafter\@cftasnum\csname cft#2aftersnum\endcsname
\expandafter\let\expandafter\@cftasnumb\csname cft#2aftersnumb\endcsname
% \end{macrocode}
% Arrange that the (entry number and) first line of the title is set at
% the current indent, and that any subsequent lines will be further
% indented.
% \begin{macrocode}
\advance\leftskip\@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
% \end{macrocode}
% Print the (number and) title, prohibiting any breqaking.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\@nameuse{cft#2font}##1}\nobreak
% \end{macrocode}
% Print the leader and the page number, and then close the group.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@nameuse{cft#2fillnum}{##2}}
\fi
} % end of \l@#2
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now define all the layout commands used by |\l@X|. The default
% values of these print the entry in a normal font with a dotted
% line between the title and the page number.
% \begin{macro}{\cftbeforeXskip}
% The skip before the title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\newlength\csname cftbefore#2skip\endcsname
\setlength{\@nameuse{cftbefore#2skip}}{\z@ \@plus .2\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXindent}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXnumwidth}
% The indent and width for the number.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\newlength\csname cft#2indent\endcsname
\expandafter\newlength\csname cft#2numwidth\endcsname
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the default values for the indent and numwidth depending on
% the entry's level. A level of 1 corresponds to a figure entry
% (no indent, and space for a number like N.N).
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase #4\relax % 0 (level 1)
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{0em}
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{2.3em}
\or % 1 (level 2)
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{2.3em}
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{3.2em}
\or % 2 (level 3)
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{5.5em}
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{4.1em}
\or % 3 (level 4)
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{8.5em}
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{5.0em}
\else % anything else
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{10.5em}
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{6.0em}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXfont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXpresnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXaftersnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXaftersnumb}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXdotsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXleader}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXpagefont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXafterpnum}
% And the remaining commands; the only ones that are not null are for the
% dotsep, the font and the leader
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{cft#2font}{\normalfont}
\@namedef{cft#2presnum}{}
\@namedef{cft#2aftersnum}{}
\@namedef{cft#2aftersnumb}{}
\@namedef{cft#2dotsep}{\cftdotsep}
\@namedef{cft#2leader}{\normalfont\cftdotfill{\@nameuse{cft#2dotsep}}}
\@namedef{cft#2pagefont}{\normalfont}
\@namedef{cft#2afterpnum}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@X}
% The hyperref package needs a command |\toclevel@X|, holding
% the \meta{level-1} value.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{toclevel@#2}{#4}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftXfillnum}
% Typeset the leader and page number.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{cft#2fillnum}##1{%
{\@nameuse{cft#2leader}}\nobreak
\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{%
\hfil\@nameuse{cft#2pagefont}##1}\@nameuse{cft#2afterpnum}\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% This ends the definition of |\newlistentry|.
% \begin{macrocode}
} % end \newlistentry
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftsetindents}
% |\cftsetindents{|\meta{entry}|}{|\meta{indent}|}{|\meta{numwidth}|}| sets
% the \textit{indent} and \textit{numwidth} for entry \meta{entry}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cftsetindents}[3]{%
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#1indent}}{#2}
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#1numwidth}}{#3}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartname}
% If you want a part entry in the ToC like: \\
% PART I Title ... \\
% then \verb?\renewcommand*{\cftpartname}{PART~}? \\
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{cftpartname}, courtesy Danie Els (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cftpartname}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@part}
% Can't use |\newlistentry| for this because of the initial penalty
% and the final |\nobreak| code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\l@part}[2]{%
\ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax
\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
\addvspace{\cftbeforepartskip}%
\begingroup
{\leftskip \cftpartindent\relax
\rightskip \@tocrmarg
\parfillskip -\rightskip
\parindent \cftpartindent\relax\@afterindenttrue
\interlinepenalty\@M
\leavevmode
\settowidth{\@tempdima}{\cftpartfont\cftpartname}%
\addtolength{\@tempdima}{\cftpartnumwidth}%
\let\@cftbsnum \cftpartpresnum
\let\@cftasnum \cftpartaftersnum
\let\@cftasnumb \cftpartaftersnumb
\advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
{\cftpartfont #1}%
\cftpartfillnum{#2}}
\nobreak
\global\@nobreaktrue
\everypar{\global\@nobreakfalse\everypar{}}%
\endgroup
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\partnumberline}
% |\partnumberline| is a special version of |\numberline| output by |\part|.
% It's default definition uis identical to |\numberline|.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{partnumberline}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\partnumberline}[1]{%
\hb@xt@\@tempdima{%
\cftpartname\@cftbsnum #1\@cftasnum\hfil}\@cftasnumb}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftbeforepartskip}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartnumwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartfont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartpresnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartaftersnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartaftersnumb}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartleader}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartdotsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartpagefont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartafterpnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartindent}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartfillnum}
% These are the user commands to control the typesetting of Part entries.
% They are initialised to give the standard appearance.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Changed \cs{cftpartnumwidth} to cater for
% use of \cs{numberline} in the ToC}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\cftbeforepartskip}
\setlength{\cftbeforepartskip}{2.25em \@plus\p@}
\newlength{\cftpartindent}
\setlength{\cftpartindent}{0em}
\newlength{\cftpartnumwidth}
\setlength{\cftpartnumwidth}{1.5em}
\newcommand{\cftpartfont}{\large\bfseries}
\newcommand{\cftpartpresnum}{}
\newcommand{\cftpartaftersnum}{}
\newcommand{\cftpartaftersnumb}{}
\newcommand{\cftpartleader}{%
\large\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftpartdotsep}}
\newcommand{\cftpartdotsep}{\cftnodots}
\newcommand{\cftpartpagefont}{\large\bfseries}
\newcommand{\cftpartafterpnum}{}
\newcommand{\cftpartfillnum}[1]{%
{\cftpartleader}%
{\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss {\cftpartpagefont #1}}}%
\cftpartafterpnum\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftchaptername}
% If you want a chapter entry in the ToC like: \\
% Chapter 1. A title ... \\
% then \verb?\renewcommand*{\cftchaptername}{\chaptername~}? \\
% \verb?\renewcommand*{\cftchapteraftersnum}{.}? \\
%
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{cftchaptername}, courtesy Danie Els (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cftchaptername}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@chapapp}
% Generic chapter/appendix ToC entry typesetting.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{l@chapapp}, courtesy Danie Els (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\l@chapapp}[3]{%
\ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
\cftchapterbreak
\vskip \cftbeforechapterskip
{\leftskip \cftchapterindent\relax
\rightskip \@tocrmarg
\parfillskip -\rightskip
\parindent \cftchapterindent\relax
\@afterindenttrue
\interlinepenalty\@M
\leavevmode
\let\@cftbsnum \cftchapterpresnum
\let\@cftasnum \cftchapteraftersnum
\let\@cftasnumb \cftchapteraftersnumb
\def\@chapapp@head{#3}%
\settowidth{\@tempdima}{\cftchapterfont\@chapapp@head}%
\addtolength{\@tempdima}{\cftchapternumwidth}%
\advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
{\cftchapterfont #1}\nobreak
\cftchapterfillnum{#2}}
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
% |\l@chapter{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the ToC entry for
% a |chapter| heading. It is a parameterised copy of the default |\l@chapter|
% (see \file{classes.dtx} for the original definition). Can't use
% |\newlistentry| for this because of the intial penalty.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{cftchapterbreak} to \cs{l@chapter}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Defined \cs{l@chapter} in terms of \cs{l@chapapp} (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\l@chapter}[2]{%
\l@chapapp{#1}{#2}{\cftchaptername}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftappendixname}
% If you want a appendixed chapter entry in the ToC like: \\
% Appendix A A title ... \\
% then \verb?\renewcommand*{\cftappendixname}{\appendixname~}? \\
%
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{cftappendixname}, courtesy Danie Els (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cftappendixname}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@appendix}
% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@appendix}
% Similar to \cs{l@chapter} but for an appendix.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{l@apendix} (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\l@appendix}[2]{%
\l@chapapp{#1}{#2}{\cftappendixname}}
\newcommand{\toclevel@appendix}{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapternumberline}
% |\chapternumberline| is a special version of |\numberline| output by
% |\chapter|.
% It's default definition is identical to |\numberline|.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{chapternumberline}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{@chapapp@head} to \cs{chapternumberline} (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\chapternumberline}[1]{%
\hb@xt@\@tempdima{\@chapapp@head\@cftbsnum #1\@cftasnum\hfil}%
\@cftasnumb}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftbeforechapterskip}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterindent}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapternumwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterfont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterpresnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapteraftersnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapteraftersnumb}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterleader}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterdotsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterpagefont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterafterpnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterfillnum}
% These are the user commands to control the typesetting of Chapter entries.
% They are initialised to give the standard appearance.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\cftbeforechapterskip}
\setlength{\cftbeforechapterskip}{1.0em \@plus\p@}
\newlength{\cftchapterindent}
\setlength{\cftchapterindent}{0em}
\newlength{\cftchapternumwidth}
\setlength{\cftchapternumwidth}{1.5em}
\newcommand{\cftchapterfont}{\bfseries}
\newcommand{\cftchapterpresnum}{}
\newcommand{\cftchapteraftersnum}{}
\newcommand{\cftchapteraftersnumb}{}
\newcommand{\cftchapterleader}{%
\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftchapterdotsep}}
\newcommand{\cftchapterdotsep}{\cftnodots}
\newcommand{\cftchapterpagefont}{\bfseries}
\newcommand{\cftchapterafterpnum}{}
\newcommand{\cftchapterfillnum}[1]{
{\cftchapterleader}\nobreak
\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\cftchapterpagefont #1}%
\cftchapterafterpnum\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterbreak}
% Another parameter for |\l@chapter|.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{cftchapterbreak}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cftchapterbreak}{\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection}
% \begin{macro}{\l@subsubsection}
% \begin{macro}{\l@paragraph}
% \begin{macro}{\l@subparagraph}
% |\l@section{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the ToC entry for
% a |section| heading. Similarly |\l@subsection| and |\l@subsubsection|
% for |\subsection| and |\subsubsection| entries, and so on.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Used \cs{newlistentry} for pararaph and
% subparagraph (from patch v1.7)}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Corrected (sub)paragraph ToC indents (mempatch v2.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistentry[chapter]{section}{toc}{0}
\cftsetindents{section}{1.5em}{2.3em}
\newlistentry[section]{subsection}{toc}{1}
\cftsetindents{subsection}{3.8em}{3.2em}
\newlistentry[subsection]{subsubsection}{toc}{2}
\cftsetindents{subsubsection}{7.0em}{4.1em}
\newlistentry[subsubsection]{paragraph}{toc}{3}
\cftsetindents{paragraph}{10.0em}{5.0em}
\newlistentry[paragraph]{subparagraph}{toc}{4}
\cftsetindents{subparagraph}{12.0em}{6.0em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% The typesetting for Figures and Tables is defined later.
%
%
%
% \subsection{Support for the \Lpack{subfigure} package}
%
% The code for supporting the \Lpack{subfigure} package is, in all
% essentials, the same as that for the figure and table captions; only the
% names are changed. However, the code need only be executed if the
% \Lpack{subfigure} package is actually loaded.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@cftl@subfigtab}
% This command redefines the |\l@subfigure| and |\l@subtable| commands.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@cftl@subfigtab}{
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\l@subfigure}
% \begin{macro}{\l@subtable}
% |\l@subfigure{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the LoF entry for
% a |subfigure| caption heading, and |\l@subtable| does the same for subtables.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistentry[figure]{subfigure}{lof}{1}
\cftsetindents{subfigure}{2.3em}{2.5em}
\newlistentry[table]{subtable}{lot}{1}
\cftsetindents{subtable}{2.3em}{2.5em}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% Call the \Lpack{subfigure} package setup code only if the
% \Lopt{subfigure} package has been used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{subfigure}{\@cftl@subfigtab}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Switching page numbering}
%
% It can, at times, be useful to be able to have ToC entries that have
% no printed page numbers.
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumbersoff}
% The user level command for switching off page numbers is
% |\cftpagenumbersoff{|\meta{entry}|}| where \meta{entry} is the
% name of the entry.
% The macro redefines the |\cftXnumfill| command so that there is no leader
% and the page number is ignored.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\cftpagenumbersoff}[1]{%
\@namedef{cft#1fillnum}##1{%
\cftparfillskip\@nameuse{cft#1afterpnum}\par}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumberson}
% |\cftpagenumberson{|\meta{entry}|}| is the user level command for
% reversing the corresponding |\cftpagenumbersoff|.
% The macro defines the |\cftXnumfill| command to correspond to
% the default definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\cftpagenumberson}[1]{%
\@namedef{cft#1fillnum}##1{%
{\@nameuse{cft#1leader}}\nobreak
\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{%
\hfil\@nameuse{cft#1pagefont}##1}\@nameuse{cft#1afterpnum}\par}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
% \subsection{Chapter precis}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapterprecis}
% The command |\chapterprecis{|\meta{text}|}| typesets
% \meta{text} at the point where it is called, and also adds \meta{text}
% to the \file{.toc} file. It is expects to be called immediately after
% a |\chapter| command.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\chapterprecis}[1]{%
\chapterprecishere{#1}
\chapterprecistoc{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapterprecishere}
% |\chapterprecishere{|\meta{text}|}| typesets \meta{text}. It expects
% to be called immediately after a |\chapter| command.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Parameterised \cs{chapterprecishere}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\chapterprecishere}[1]{%
\prechapterprecis #1\postchapterprecis}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\prechapterprecis}
% \begin{macro}{\postchapterprecis}
% These put code before and after |\chapterprecishere| text. By
% default |\prechapterprecis| adds some negative space and starts a
% quote environment using italics. |\postchapterprecis| ends
% the quote environment.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{prechapterprecis} and
% \cs{postchapterprecis}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\prechapterprecis}{%
\vspace*{-2\baselineskip}%
\begin{quote}\normalfont\itshape}
\newcommand{\postchapterprecis}{\end{quote}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\precistocfont}
% Font for typesetting chapter precis in the ToC.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{precistocfont}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\precistocfont}{\normalfont\itshape}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapterprecistoc}
% \begin{macro}{\precistoctext}
% |\chapterprecistoc{|\meta{text}|}| effectively adds \meta{text} to
% the \file{.toc}
% file. The \meta{text} will be typeset within the same margins as the
% the title text of a |\chapter| heading, using the |\precistocfont| font.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{precistoctext}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\chapterprecistoc}[1]{%
\addtocontents{toc}{\precistoctext{#1}}}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\precistoctext}[1]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Start a group to localize changes to the paragraphing. Set the
% left margin to the chapter indent plus the chapter number width.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\leftskip \cftchapterindent\relax
\advance\leftskip \cftchapternumwidth\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the right hand margin to |\@tocrmarg|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\rightskip \@tocrmarg\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Typeset \meta{text} using an italic font, then ensure that the paragraph
% is finished (to use the local skips). Finally close the group and we
% are done.
% \begin{macrocode}
\precistocfont #1\par}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Adding things to the ToC}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftlocalchange}
% |\cftmakelocalchange{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{pnumwidth}|}{|\meta{tocrmarg}|}|
% makes an entry into \meta{file} to change the |\@pnumwidth| and
% the |\@tocrmarg| values.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cftlocalchange}[3]{%
\addtocontents{#1}{\protect\setpnumwidth{#2} \protect\setrmarg{#3}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftaddtitleline}
% |\cftaddtitleline{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{kind}|}{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}|
% adds a |\contentsline| entry to \meta{file} with the given information.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cftaddtitleline}[4]{%
\addtocontents{#1}{\protect\contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftaddnumtitleline}
% |\cftaddnumtitleline{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{kind}|}{|\meta{num}|}{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}|
% adds a |\contentsline| entry to \meta{file} with the given information.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cftaddnumtitleline}[5]{%
\addtocontents{#1}%
{\protect\contentsline{#2}{\protect\numberline{#3}%
{\protect\ignorespaces #4}}{#5}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{ToC and divisional numbering}
%
% Commands are provided, based on the \Lpack{tocvsec2} package, for changing
% the section numbering level and the ToC entry level.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@setclcnt}
% Helper macro to set a sectioning-related counter. Use as
% |\@setclcnt{|\meta{sec}|}{|\meta{counter}|}| to set \Lcount{counter}
% to the level of \meta{sec}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@setclcnt}[2]{
\@tempswafalse
\nametest{#1}{none}
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{-10}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{part}
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{-1}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{chapter}
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{0}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{section}
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{1}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{subsection}
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{2}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{subsubsection}
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{3}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{paragraph}
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{4}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{subparagraph}
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{5}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{all}
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{50}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\if@tempswa\else
\@memerror{%
Unknown document division name (#1)
}{%
I'll ignore it.
Type \space <return> and I'll continue.\MessageBreak
If you haven't mistyped the name then use
\protect\setcounter\space instead.}
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\settocdepth}
% |\settocdepth{|\meta{sec}|}| is the user command for setting
% \Lcount{tocdepth} in the \file{.toc} file to the value corresponding to
% \meta{sec}.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changed \cs{settocdepth} to use \cs{changetocdepth}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\settocdepth}[1]{%
\@tempswafalse
\nametest{#1}{none}
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{-10}}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{part}
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{-1}}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{chapter}
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{0}}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{section}
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{1}}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{subsection}
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{2}}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{subsubsection}
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{3}}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{paragraph}
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{4}}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{subparagraph}
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{5}}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\nametest{#1}{all}
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{50}}
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\if@tempswa\else
\@memerror{%
Unknown document division name (#1)
}{%
I'll ignore it. Type \space <return> and I'll continue.}
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\changetocdepth}
% Changes the |tocdepth| counter. Make it robust as it will be written
% to the *.toc file.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{changetocdepth}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\changetocdepth}[1]{\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\maxtocdepth}
% |\maxtocdepth{|\meta{sec}|}| can be used to initialise \Lcount{tocdepth}
% to the value corresponding to \meta{sec}. This can only be used
% between the end of the preamble and the |\tableofcontents| command.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\maxtocdepth}[1]{%
\@setclcnt{#1}{tocdepth}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setsecnumdepth}
% |\setsecnumdepth{|\meta{sec}|}| is the user command for setting
% \Lcount{secnumdepth} to the value for \meta{sec}. It can only be used after
% the preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setsecnumdepth}[1]{%\leavevmode%
\@setclcnt{#1}{secnumdepth}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\maxsecnumdepth}
% |\maxsecnumdepth{|\meta{sec}|}| can be used to initialise
% \Lcount{secnumdepth}
% to the value corresponding to \meta{sec}.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added maxsecnumdepth counter and modified \cs{maxsecnumdepth}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{maxsecnumdepth}
\newcommand{\maxsecnumdepth}[1]{%
\@setclcnt{#1}{secnumdepth}\@setclcnt{#1}{maxsecnumdepth}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \section{Bibliography}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibindent}
% The \Lopt{open} bibliography uses an indentation of |\bibindent|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\bibindent
\setlength\bibindent{1.5em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibitemsep}
% The vertical separation between items in the bibliography list.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{bibitemsep} (from patch v1.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\bibitemsep}
\setlength{\bibitemsep}{\itemsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\biblistextra}
% A hook into the |bibitemlist|.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{biblistextra} (from patch v1.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\biblistextra}{\itemsep=\bibitemsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{bibitemlist}
% The |thebibliography| environment starts a new document division.
% Internally it tweaks some typesetting aspects; principally it
% uses |\sloppy| because good linebreaking is hard in a bibliography,
% and |\sfcode`\.=1000\relax| causes a full stop not to produce an
% end-of-sentence space. The implementation of the environment is
% based on the generic |list| environment, and uses the |\c@enumiv|
% counter for the labels. The following code is extracted from the
% \Lpack{book} class, plus some additions.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{biblistextra} to bibitemlist (from patch v1.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{bibitemlist}[1]{%
\typeout{bibitemlist}
\list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
{\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
\leftmargin\labelwidth
\advance\leftmargin\labelsep
\@openbib@code
\usecounter{enumiv}%
\let\p@enumiv\@empty
\renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}%
\biblistextra}%
\sloppy
\clubpenalty4000
\@clubpenalty \clubpenalty
\widowpenalty4000%
\sfcode`\.\@m}%
{\def\@noitemerr
{\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}%
\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
% The default is for |\newblock| to provide a small space.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newblock}{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@openbib@code}
% This a an empty hook. It will be modified if the \Lopt{openbib}
% option is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@openbib@code\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setbiblabel}
% \begin{macro}{\@biblabel}
% This is the user command for setting the label for a |\bibitem|.
% The following sets the default definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setbiblabel}[1]{%
\renewcommand*{\@biblabel}[1]{#1}}
\setbiblabel{[#1]\hfill}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memb@bchap}
% \begin{macro}{\@memb@bsec}
% In a \ctt{} thread \textit{memoir, natbib, and chapterbib} in January 2003
% there was a discussion on how to get all three to work together.
% Donald Arseneau suggested that |\bibsection| be used as a `standard'
% way of controlling the sectioning command of a bibliography. Here is
% an implementation of that idea.
%
% |\@memb@bchap| is a copy of memoir's original code for the start
% of the |thebibliography| environment which used a |\chapter*|
% title. |\@memb@bsec| is the much simpler version for a |\section| title.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added support code for implementing \cs{bibsection}
% (patch 1.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@memb@bchap}{%
\chapter*{\bibname}%
\bibmark
\ifnobibintoc\else
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\bibname}%
\fi
\prebibhook}
\newcommand{\@memb@bsec}{\section{\bibname}\prebibhook}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
% Normally treat the bibliography heading as a chapter.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{bibsection} to replace memoir's
% original code for the bibliography (patch 1.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bibsection}{\@memb@bchap}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{thebibliography}
% The definition of the |thebibliography| environment in this class is not
% quite the same as in the standard classes!
%
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Deleted starred version of thebibliography}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Replaced initial code in the bibliography
% environment by \cs{bibsection} (patch 1.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{%
\bibsection
\begin{bibitemlist}{#1}}{\end{bibitemlist}\postbibhook}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnobibintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\bibintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\nobibintoc}
% Flag to control whether or not to add the bibliography title to the ToC,
% and declarations to set the flag.
% Default is to put the title into the ToC.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{ifnobibintoc}, etc.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifnobibintoc
\newcommand*{\bibintoc}{\nobibintocfalse}
\newcommand*{\nobibintoc}{\nobibintoctrue}
\bibintoc
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\prebibhook}
% \begin{macro}{\postbibhook}
% These two macros are called just before starting the bib items and just
% after finishing them. By default they do nothing but can be changed
% by the user to give, say, some introductory information.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\prebibhook}{}
\newcommand{\postbibhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@cite}
% The output of the |\cite| command is produced by this macro. The default
% is used. The \Lpack{cite} package is a good way of changing this.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \renewcommand*{\@cite}[1]{[#1]}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Use with the \Lpack{natbib} and \Lpack{chapterbib} packages}
%
% The \Lpack{natbib} package~\cite{NATBIB} uses its own definition for
% the |\thebibliography| environment, which knows nothing about adding
% the Bibliography to the ToC. The following makes appropriate changes
% to \Lpack{natbib} code to support the class.
%
% The \Lpack{chapterbib} package by Donald Arseneau also may make changes
% to the |\thebibliography| environment --- perhaps memoir's version
% or natbib's version.
%
% As packages get loaded after classes, I have to try and patch any
% non-memoir modifications at begin document time.
% The fixes have to be firstly for \Lpack{natbib}
% and only after those can \Lpack{chapterbib} be considered.
%
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added internal support for the natbib package}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Changed code supporting natbib (patch 1.3)}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added code supporting chapterbib (patch 1.3)}
% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
% \begin{macro}{\endthebibliography}
% Natbib provides |\bibsection| for titling the bibliography. I also have
% to extend the end of the |thebibliography| environment to cater for
% |\postbibhook|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{% natbib is loaded
% \end{macrocode}
% As \Lpack{natbib} is used, change |\endthebibliography| to the class
% definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\addtodef{\endthebibliography}{}{\vskip-\lastskip\postbibhook}
\@ifpackagewith{natbib}{sectionbib}{% with sectionbib option
% \end{macrocode}
% \Lpack{natbib}'s |sectionbib| option is used,
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\bibsection}{\@memb@bsec}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% The |sectionbib| option is not used, so we have a chapter title.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\renewcommand{\bibsection}{\@memb@bchap}}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Finished with any \Lpack{natbib} related changes.
% \begin{macrocode}
{}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Now deal with \Lpack{chapterbib} if necessary.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifpackagewith{chapterbib}{sectionbib}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% \Lpack{chapterbib} is used with its |sectionbib| option. This is the
% only case to worry about. Kill \Lpack{chapterbib}'s |\sectionbib| macro
% which it calls at begin document to do its patch, then make sure
% the class definition is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\sectionbib}[2]{}
\renewcommand{\bibsection}{\@memb@bsec}}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% And we've finished with this bunch of |\AtBeginDocument|.
% \begin{macrocode}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \section{The index}
%
% I allow for a single column index as well as the default double column.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifonecolindex}
% TRUE for a one column index.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added one column index}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifonecolindex
\onecolindexfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{theindex}
% The environment `theindex' can be used for indices. It makes an
% index with two columns, with each entry a separate paragraph. At
% the user level the commands |\item|, |\subitem| and |\subsubitem|
% are used to produce index entries of various levels. When a new
% letter of the alphabet is encountered an amount of |\indexspace|
% white space can be added.
%
%
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Deleted starred version of theindex}
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Changed Index pagestyle to chapter}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Make \cs{indexcolsep} work, courtesy of hazydirk (mempatch v3.11)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{theindex}{%
\if@twocolumn
\@restonecolfalse
\else
\@restonecoltrue
\fi
\ifonecolindex
\onecolumn
\chapter*{\indexname}
\preindexhook
\else
\setlength{\columnseprule}{\indexrule}%
\setlength{\columnsep}{\indexcolsep}%
\twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{\indexname}
\preindexhook]%
\fi
\indexmark
\ifnoindexintoc\else
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}%
\fi
\thispagestyle{chapter}\parindent\z@
\parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
\let\item\@idxitem}%
{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\twocolumn\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnoindexintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\indexintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\noindexintoc}
% Flag to control whether or not to add the index title to the ToC,
% and declarations to set the flag.
% Default is to put the title into the ToC.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{ifnoindexintoc}, etc.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifnoindexintoc
\newcommand*{\indexintoc}{\noindexintocfalse}
\newcommand*{\noindexintoc}{\noindexintoctrue}
\indexintoc
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\indexcolsep}
% \begin{macro}{\indexrule}
% These two lengths control the column separation and the thickness
% of the inter-column rule.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{indexcolsep} and \cs{indexrule}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\indexcolsep} \setlength{\indexcolsep}{35pt}
\newlength{\indexrule} \setlength{\indexrule}{0pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\preindexhook}
% A macro that is called between the index heading and the start of the
% two columns. The user can modify it to add something.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\preindexhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@index}
% Format the index entry in the table of contents.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\l@index}{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{0pt}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@idxitem}
% \begin{macro}{\subitem}
% \begin{macro}{\subsubitem}
% Thsee macros are used to format the entries in the index.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@idxitem} {\par\hangindent 40\p@}
\newcommand{\subitem} {\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{20\p@}}
\newcommand{\subsubitem}{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{30\p@}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\indexspace}
% The amount of white space that is inserted between `letter
% blocks' in the index.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\indexspace}{\par \vskip 10\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeindex}
% \begin{macro}{\index}
% \begin{macro}{\specialindex}
% \begin{macro}{\makememindexhook}
% This is a modified version of the kernel |\makeindex| to allow for
% multiple indexes. It also defines |\index| (which is a modified version
% of the standard |\index|) and |\specialindex|.
%
% |\makememindexhook| is a null op but can be redefined to add extra code
% into |\makeindex|. For example, to incorporate \Lpack{ledmac}'s
% |\edindex| into the scheme:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \renewcommand*{\makememindexhook}{%
% \def\edindex{\@bsphack%
% \@ifnextchar [{\l@d@index}{\l@d@index[\jobname]}}}
% \end{verbatim}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Indexing macros completely redone and extended}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/12}{Added the \cs{makememindexhook} to \cs{makeindex}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Modified \cs{makeindex} for \cs{nofiles}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\makememindexhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\makeindex}{}
\renewcommand*{\makeindex}[1][\jobname]{%
\if@filesw
\def\index{\@bsphack%
\@ifnextchar [{\@index}{\@index[\jobname]}}
\def\specialindex{\@bsphack\@spindex}%
\makememindexhook
\expandafter\newwrite\csname #1@idxfile\endcsname
\expandafter\immediate\openout \csname #1@idxfile\endcsname #1.idx\relax
\typeout{Writing index file #1.idx }%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% Initially define, but emasculate, |\index| and |\specialindex| which are
% defined properly by the user calling |\makeindex|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\index}[2][\jobname]{\@bsphack\@esphack}
\newcommand{\specialindex}[3]{\@bsphack\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printindex}
% The command to read an \file{ind} file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\printindex}[1][\jobname]{\@input@{#1.ind}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifreportnoidxfile}
% \begin{macro}{\ifshowindexmark}
% Two booleans to control reporting on unknown \file{idx} files and
% displaying indexed items in the margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifreportnoidxfile
\reportnoidxfilefalse
\newif\ifshowindexmark
\showindexmarkfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@index}
% |\@index[file]| is first stage of |\index|, handling the \file{idx} file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@index[#1]{%
\@ifundefined{#1@idxfile}%
{\ifreportnoidxfile
\@memwarn{Undefined index file #1}%
\fi
\begingroup
\@sanitize
\@nowrindex}%
{\def\@idxfile{#1}%
\begingroup
\@sanitize
\@wrindexm@m}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@nowrindex}
% Called when there is no \file{idx} file to throw away the indexed item.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@nowrindex}[1]{%
\ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi\endgroup\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@wrindexm@m}
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrindexhyp}
% The next stage in index processing is |\@wrindexm@m{item}|,
% which writes the \file{idx} file name
% and indexed item to the \file{aux} file. The |\@@wrindexhyp| macro
% provides hyperlinks in case the \Lpack{hyperref} package is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@wrindexm@m}[1]{\@@wrindexhyp#1||\\}
\def\@@wrindexhyp#1|#2|#3\\{%
\ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi
\ifx\\#2\\%
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|hyperpage}{\thepage}}%
\else
\def\Hy@temp@A{#2}%
\ifx\Hy@temp@A\HyInd@ParenLeft
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|#2hyperpage}{\thepage}}%
\else
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|#2}{\thepage}}%
\fi
\fi
\endgroup
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hyperpage}
% \begin{macro}{\hyperlink}
% These are defined in the \Lpack{hyperref} package but we need them.
% other hyperstuff is only used if the package itself is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\hyperpage}[1]{#1}
\newcommand{\hyperlink}[2]{#2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrindexm@m}
% The macro |\@@wrindexm@m{file}{item}{page}| has been written into
% the \file{aux} file. It is normally defined so that it calls
% |\@@@wrindexm@m{item}{page}| to finally write to the \file{idx} file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@@wrindexm@m}[1]{\begingroup
\def\@idxfile{\@nameuse{#1@idxfile}}
\@sanitize
\@@@wrindexm@m}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@@wrindexm@m}
% \cs{@@@wrindexm@m}\marg{item}\marg{page} writes the \cs{indexentry} to
% the \file{idx} file. This file is read both at the beginning and end of
% a document so \cs{@@@wrindexm@m} must be disabled for one of these reads
% otherwise the index entries will be doubled up. Initially I disabled it
% after the first read. It eventually dawned on me that this meant two
% LaTeX runs to update the \file{idx}. Enabling it for the second read
% means that the \file{idx} file is updated at the end of each run.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Made \cs{@@@wrindexm@m} obey \cs{nofiles}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{\cs{@@@wrindexm@m} now reads the aux
% file at the end of the document}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@@@wrindexm@m}[2]{\endgroup}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\def\@@@wrindexm@m#1#2{%
\if@filesw
\immediate\write \@idxfile{\string\indexentry{#1}{#2}}%
\fi
\endgroup}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@spindex}
% Now do similar things for \cs{specialindex}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@spindex}[2]{%
\@ifundefined{#1@idxfile}%
{\ifreportnoidxfile
\@memwarn{Undefined index file #1}%
\fi
\begingroup
\@sanitize
\@nowrindex}%
{\def\@idxfile{#1}%
\def\@sptheidx{#2}%
\begingroup
\@sanitize
\@wrspindex}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@wrspindex}
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrspindexhyp}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@wrspindex}[1]{\@@wrspindexhyp#1||\\}
\def\@@wrspindexhyp#1|#2|#3\\{%
\ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi
\ifx\\#2\\%
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}%
{#1|hyperspindexpage(\thepage)}%
{\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
\else
\def\Hy@temp@A{#2}%
\ifx\Hy@temp@A\HyInd@ParenLeft
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}%
{#1|#2hyperspindexpage(\thepage)}%
{\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
\else
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|#2}%
{\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
\fi
\fi
\endgroup
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hyperspindexpage}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\hyperspindexpage(#1)#2{\hyperlink{page.#1}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifmemhyperindex}
% \begin{macro}{\memhyperindextrue}
% \begin{macro}{\memhyperindexfalse}
% Flag to turn off \cs{hyperindexfalse} hyperrefing the index (apparently
% \Lpack{xindy} can't cope with this. Email from Frederic Connes, 2005/07/13:
% \begin{verbatim}
% ...You use |hyperspindex(\thepage) which xindy doesn't
% recognise as a valid markup-locref. And I don't know how
% to add it because xindy only accepts one argument in
% markup-locref (if the number is not a page number, it will
% still point to a page with that number) so replacing it
% with |hyperpage won't work. ...
% \end{verbatim}
%
%
% The default is \cs{memhyperindextrue}. Setting \cs{memhyperindexfalse}
% prohibits a hyper index --- setting whatever option in \Lpack{hyperref}
% to disable hyper indexing will (probably) not work as far as \Lpack{xindy}
% is concerned.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/04}{Added \cs{ifmemhyperindex}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifmemhyperindex
\memhyperindextrue
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrindexhyp}
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrspindexhyp}
% If the \Lpack{hyperref} package is not being used, or \cs{ifmemhyperindex}
% is false, there is no need
% to clutter up the index files.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/28}{Declutter index files if hyperref is not used}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Fixed spaces in non-hyperref index files (mempatch v2.3).
% Reported by Michael W. Daniels.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{}{\memhyperindexfalse}%
% \end{macrocode}
% If the \Lpack{hyperref} package is not being used, or a hyperindex
% is not required, simplify!
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifmemhyperindex\else
\def\@@wrindexhyp#1||\\{%
\ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1}{\thepage}}%
\endgroup
\@esphack}%
\def\@@wrspindexhyp#1||\\{%
\ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1}{\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
\endgroup
\@esphack}%
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\see}
% \begin{macro}{\seename}
% \begin{macro}{\seealso}
% \begin{macro}{\alsoname}
% These definitions are taken from the \Lpack{makeidx} package.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\see}[2]{\emph{\seename} #1}
\newcommand*{\seename}{see}
\newcommand*{\seealso}[2]{\emph{\alsoname} #1}
\newcommand*{\alsoname}{see also}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\citeindexfile}
% For the \Lpack{natbib} package, and possibly other packages that do
% some special indexing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\citeindexfile}{\jobname}
\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{%
\def\NAT@index{\index[\citeindexfile]{\NAT@idxtxt}}}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The next part of the code is essentially the \Lpack{showidx} package.
% I tried putting index entries into marginoars but too many on a page
% led to the `too many floats' problem.
%
% \begin{macro}{\indexmarkstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\@indexbox}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\indexmarkstyle
\indexmarkstyle{\normalfont\footnotesize\ttfamily}
\newinsert\@indexbox
\dimen\@indexbox\maxdimen
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\catcode`\@\active
\expandafter\gdef\csname\string @sanitizeat\endcsname
{\def @{\char`\@}}
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@showidx}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@showidx}[1]{%
\insert\@indexbox{%
\@sanitizeat
\the\indexmarkstyle
\hsize\marginparwidth
\hangindent\marginparsep \parindent\z@
\everypar{}\let\par\@@par \parfillskip\@flushglue
\lineskip\normallineskip
\baselineskip .8\normalbaselineskip\sloppy
\raggedright \leavevmode
\vrule \@height .7\normalbaselineskip \@width \z@\relax
#1\relax
\vrule \@height \z@ \@depth .3\normalbaselineskip \@width \z@\relax
}%
\ifhmode\penalty\@M \hskip\z@skip\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@leftidx}
% \begin{macro}{\@rightidx}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@leftidx}{\hskip-\marginparsep \hskip-\marginparwidth}
\newcommand{\@rightidx}{\hskip\columnwidth \hskip\marginparsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mkidx}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@mkidx}{\vbox to \z@{%
\rlap{%
\if@twocolumn
\if@firstcolumn \@leftidx \else \@rightidx \fi
\else
\if@twoside
\ifodd\c@page \@rightidx \else \@leftidx \fi
\else
\@rightidx
\fi
\fi
\box\@indexbox
}%
\vss
}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\raggedbottom}
% \begin{macro}{\flushbottom}
% \begin{macro}{\@texttop}
% These kernel macros need changing because of the new marginal insert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\raggedbottom}{%
\def\@textbottom{\vskip\z@ plus.0001fil}%
\let\@texttop\@mkidx}
\renewcommand{\flushbottom}{%
\let\@textbottom\relax
\let\@texttop\@mkidx}
\let\@texttop\@mkidx
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Glossaries}
%
% Standard LaTeX provides little and insufficient support for
% glossaries, just a \cs{makeglossary} and \cs{glossary} commands.
% This class does somewhat better. The code follows along the lines
% of that for indexes.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Added glossary code}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifonecolglossary}
% \begin{macro}{\onecolglossarytrue}
% \begin{macro}{\onecolglossaryfalse}
% TRUE for a one column glossary, otherwise its two column.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifonecolglossary
\onecolglossarytrue
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{theglossary}
% The environment \texttt{theglossary} is used for glossaries.
% It makes a glossary with one or two columns, headed by a chapter-like
% title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{theglossary}{%
\if@twocolumn
\@restonecolfalse
\else
\@restonecoltrue
\fi
\ifonecolglossary
\onecolumn
\chapter*{\glossaryname}
\preglossaryhook
\else
\setlength{\columnseprule}{\glossaryrule}
\setlength{\columnsep}{\glossarycolsep}
\twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{\glossaryname}
\preglossaryhook]%
\fi
\glossarymark
\ifnoglossaryintoc\else
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\glossaryname}
\fi
\thispagestyle{chapter}\parindent\z@
\parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
\begintheglossaryhook}%
{\atendtheglossaryhook\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\twocolumn\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\begintheglossaryhook}
% \begin{macro}{\atendtheglossaryhook}
% Two vacuous macros called as the last thing by \verb?\begin{theglossary}?
% and the first thing by \verb?\end{theglossary}? These could be used,
% for example, to insert another kind of environment.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\begintheglossaryhook}{}
\newcommand*{\atendtheglossaryhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\preglossaryhook}
% A vacuous macro called after the title is set and before the listing
% starts. The user can modify it to, for example, add some explanatory
% text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\preglossaryhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnoglossaryintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\glossaryintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\noglossaryintoc}
% Flag and declarations to control whether or not the glossary
% title is added to the ToC. Default is to put the title
% in the ToC.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifnoglossaryintoc
\newcommand*{\glossaryintoc}{\noglossaryintocfalse}
\newcommand*{\noglossaryintoc}{\noglossaryintoctrue}
\glossaryintoc
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\glossarycolsep}
% \begin{macro}{\glossaryrule}
% When the glossary is two column these lengths control the
% column separation and the width of a rule between the columns.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\glossarycolsep \glossarycolsep=35\p@
\newdimen\glossaryrule \glossaryrule=0\p@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\glossaryspace}
% Vertical space between `letter blocks' in the glossary.
% Note that this is a macro, not a length.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glossaryspace}{%
\par \vskip 1.0\onelineskip \@plus 5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeglossary}
% The preamble command to set up a glossary. Output is to the
% \file{\#1.glo} file. We need the \cs{providecommand} in case \cs{nofiles}
% has been called before the class. \cs{makeglossary} sets up several
% file-specific macros.
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\makeglossary}{}
\renewcommand*{\makeglossary}[1][\jobname]{%
\makememglossaryhook
\@namedef{memglsact#1}{@}% actual
\@namedef{memglsnx#1}{}% no ref
\@namedef{memglsn#1}{\thepage}% num by page
\@namedef{memglsnf#1}{|memjustarg}% no special number format
\if@filesw \expandafter\newwrite\csname #1memglofile\endcsname
\expandafter\immediate\openout \csname #1memglofile\endcsname #1.glo\relax
\typeout{Writing glossary file #1.glo }%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makememglossaryhook}
% A vacuous macro called at the start of the \cs{makeglossary} code.
% It is redefinable to do something useful.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\makememglossaryhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\glossary}
% The user command for a raw glossary item. The full calling
% sequence looks like: \\
% \cs{glossary}\oarg{file}\parg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc} \\
% but most is accomplished by lower level macros. It calls
% \cs{@glossary} to handle the first optional argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\glossary{\@bsphack%
\@ifnextchar [{\@glossary}{\@glossary[\jobname]}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@glossary}
% \cs{@glossary}\oarg[file] handles the first of the \cs{glossary} optional
% arguments, even though the calling sequence looks like: \\
% \cs{@glossary}\oarg{file}\parg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc}. \\
% It calls \cs{@@glossary} to handle the second optional argument
% and the rest.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glossary[#1]{%
\@ifnextchar ({\@@glossary[#1]}{\@@glossary[#1]()}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@glossary}
% The base macro for \cs{glossary}. Its real calling sequence is: \\
% \cs{@@glossary}\oarg{file}\parg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc}. \\
% Provided the glossary output file has been set up it calls
% \cs{@wrglom@m} to write the data, otherwise it throws away its
% arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@glossary[#1](#2)#3#4{%
\@ifundefined{#1memglofile}{%
\begingroup
\@sanitize
\endgroup
\@esphack%
}{%
\def\memglofile{#1}%
\begingroup
\@sanitize
% \end{macrocode}
% Use the correct key, \verb?key? if given, otherwise \verb?term?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\@empty#2\@empty
\@wrglom@m{#3}{#3}{#4}%
\else
\@wrglom@m{#2}{#3}{#4}%
\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@wrglom@m}
% \cs{@wrglom@m}\marg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc} writes its three arguments,
% plus the \meta{ref} and the \meta{num} to the \file{aux} file as the
% arguments to the \cs{@@wrglom@m} macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@wrglom@m}[3]{%
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrglom@m{\memglofile}{#1}{#2}{#3}{\@nameuse{memglsnx\memglofile}}{\@nameuse{memglsn\memglofile}}}%
\endgroup
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrglom@m}
% The calling sequence looks like: \\
% \cs{@@wrglom@m}\marg{file}\marg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc}\marg{ref}\marg{num} \\
% but is actually really only \\
% \cs{@@wrglom@m}\marg{file} \\
% It saves the output file identifier in \cs{memglofile} and
% \meta{file} as \cs{m@mgf}, then calls \cs{memwritetoglo}
% to handle the remaining `arguments'.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@@wrglom@m}[1]{\begingroup
\def\memglofile{\@nameuse{#1memglofile}}%
\def\m@mgf{#1}%
\@sanitize
\memwritetoglo}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memwritetoglo}
% \begin{macro}{\@ctualm@mwritetoglo}
% \cs{memwritetoglo}\marg{key}\marg{name}\marg{desc}\marg{ref}\marg{num}
% will, at an appropriate time write the raw glossary data to the
% appropriate \file{glo} file.
%
% The \file{aux} file is read twice, once as one of the initial
% actions at the start of the \texttt{document} environment, and again
% at the end of the \texttt{document} environment. The raw glossary
% data must only be written once from the \file{aux} to the \file{glo} file.
% Initially \cs{memwritetoglo} is defined to do nothing, then, after the
% \file{aux} file has been read at the beginning is redefined to do
% its writing.
%
% The Makeindex program expects its input to be like: \\
% \verb?\glosaryentry{key@data}{num}?
% Very cunningly the raw data is fed to the \file{glo}
% file looking like: \\
% \verb?\glossaryentry{key@{\memgloterm{term} \memglodesc{desc} \memgloref{ref}}{num}? \\
% which as far as Makeindex is concerned is simply: \\
% \verb?\glosaryentry{key@{data}}{num}? \\
% (note where all the braces are).
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memwritetoglo}[5]{\endgroup}
\newcommand{\@ctualm@mwritetoglo}[5]{%
\immediate\write \memglofile{\string\glossaryentry{#1\@nameuse{memglsact\m@mgf}
{\string\memgloterm{#2}}{\string\memglodesc{#3}}
{\string\memgloref{#4}}\@nameuse{memglsnf\m@mgf}}{#5}}%
\endgroup}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\let\memwritetoglo\@ctualm@mwritetoglo}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\changeglossactual}
% \begin{macro}{\changeglossref}
% \begin{macro}{\changeglossnum}
% \begin{macro}{\changeglossnumformat}
% There are internal macros that are file-dependant, their names
% being constructed from the file name plus a fixed name. The
% \cs{makeglossary} command initializes these but the user may well need
% to change them. In the macros below, \texttt{...actual} refers to the
% actual character in a Makeindex configuration file (default \texttt{@}),
% \texttt{...ref} to the \meta{ref} glossary argument, \texttt{...num}
% to the meta{num} argument (default \cs{thepage}) and \texttt{...numformat}
% to the Makeindex encapsulating command. Example uses are:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \changeglossactual[file]{?}
% \changeglossref[file]{\thepage}
% \changeglossnum[file]{\thesection}
% \changeglossnumref[file]{|textbf}
% \end{verbatim}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\changeglossactual}[2][\jobname]{%
\@namedef{memglsact#1}{#2}}
\newcommand*{\changeglossref}[2][\jobname]{%
\@namedef{memglsnx#1}{#2}}
\newcommand*{\changeglossnum}[2][\jobname]{%
\@namedef{memglsn#1}{#2}}
\newcommand*{\changeglossnumformat}[2][\jobname]{%
\@namedef{memglsnf#1}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\glossitem}
% The final sorted glossary data is in the form: \\
% \cs{glossitem}\marg{term}\marg{desc}\marg{ref}\marg{num} \\
% The definition here does little.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\glossitem}[4]{#1 #2 #3 #4\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memgloterm}
% \begin{macro}{\memglodesc}
% \begin{macro}{\memgloref}
% \begin{macro}{\memglonum}
% These are wrappers round the \meta{term}, \meta{desc}, \meta{ref} and
% \meta{num} elements in the final data. They are vacuous to start with.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memgloterm}[1]{#1}
\newcommand*{\memglodesc}[1]{#1}
\newcommand*{\memgloref}[1]{#1}
\newcommand*{\memglonum}[1]{#1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printglossary}
% \cs{printglossary}\oarg{file} inputs the glossary \file{gst} file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\printglossary}[1][\jobname]{\@input@{#1.gls}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \section{Notes}
%
%
% \subsection{Marginpars}
%
% A |\marginpar| is a kind of floating object --- you can't control
% exactly where it will go. There is one problem with the kernel
% definition of |\marginpar| in that sometimes a |\marginpar| may
% end up on the wrong side of the page. The following is an attempt
% to fix that using the odd/even page check provided as part of
% the class.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@addmarginpar}
% The part of the code for |\marginpar| that deals with deciding which
% side of the page it should be printed on is |\@addmarginpar|, buried
% away in the |output| routine. A couple of minor changes are made
% to the kernel code. The first is at the beginning where I have added
% the |\checkoddpage| page checking code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@addmarginpar{%
\checkoddpage
% \end{macrocode}
% Continue with the kernel code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@next\@marbox\@currlist{\@cons\@freelist\@marbox
\@cons\@freelist\@currbox}\@latexbug\@tempcnta\@ne
\if@twocolumn
\if@firstcolumn \@tempcnta\m@ne \fi
\else
\if@mparswitch
% \end{macrocode}
% The next line, reading \\
% |\ifodd\c@page \else\@tempcnta\m@ne \fi| \\
% is where the odd/even page checking is done in the kernel code. I
% replace it with my code, and then continue with the kernel.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifoddpage \else \@tempcnta\m@ne \fi
\fi
\if@reversemargin \@tempcnta -\@tempcnta \fi
\fi
\ifnum\@tempcnta <\z@ \global\setbox\@marbox\box\@currbox \fi
\@tempdima\@mparbottom
\advance\@tempdima -\@pageht
\advance\@tempdima\ht\@marbox
\ifdim\@tempdima >\z@
% \end{macrocode}
% The next line in the kernel reads: \\
% |\@latex@warning@no@line {Marginpar on page \thepage\space moved}| \\
% I have changed the warning message to give the user an indication
% of the severity of the move. Then follow the kernel on to the end.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@latex@warning@no@line {Marginpar on page
\thepage\space moved by \the\@tempdima}%
\else
\@tempdima\z@
\fi
\global\@mparbottom\@pageht
\global\advance\@mparbottom\@tempdima
\global\advance\@mparbottom\dp\@marbox
\global\advance\@mparbottom\marginparpush
\advance\@tempdima -\ht\@marbox
\global\setbox \@marbox
\vbox {\vskip \@tempdima
\box \@marbox}%
\global \ht\@marbox \z@
\global \dp\@marbox \z@
\kern -\@pagedp
\nointerlineskip
\hb@xt@\columnwidth
{\ifnum \@tempcnta >\z@
\hskip\columnwidth \hskip\marginparsep
\else
\hskip -\marginparsep \hskip -\marginparwidth
\fi
\box\@marbox \hss}%
\nointerlineskip
\hbox{\vrule \@height\z@ \@width\z@ \@depth\@pagedp}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{A fixed marginpar}
%
%
% Introduce a non-floating marginpar.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{sidepar} and supports for a fixed
% marginpar (from patch v1.8)}
%
% \begin{macro}{\parnopar}
% From \theTeXbook{} Exercise 14.15. It creates an `invisible' end/start paragraph,
% and may be used for getting \TeX{} to try a pagebreak.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\parnopar}{\parfillskip=0pt\par\parskip=0pt\noindent}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sideparvshift}
% Vertical shift for sidepar to align with text line
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\sideparvshift}
\setlength{\sideparvshift}{-2.08ex}% seems to work for all font sizes
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifreversesidepar}
% \begin{macro}{\ifsideparswitch}
% Analogues of \cs{marginpar} controls.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifreversesidepar
% \reversesideparfalse
\reversesidepartrue
\newif\ifsideparswitch
\sideparswitchfalse
\if@twoside \sideparswitchtrue \fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidepar}
% \cs{sidepar}\oarg{left}\marg{right} (per \cs{marginpar})
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sidepar}{\@dblarg{\@sidepar}}
\long\def\@sidepar[#1]#2{\@bsphack\leavevmode\vadjust{% %
\checkoddpage
\ifsideparswitch
\ifreversesidepar
\ifoddpage
\oddpagefalse
\else
\oddpagetrue
\fi
\fi
\else
\oddpagetrue
\ifreversesidepar
\oddpagefalse
\fi
\fi
\rlap{\kern-\parindent
\if@twocolumn
\if@firstcolumn % put at left
\kern -\marginparsep \kern -\marginparwidth % at left
\else % put at right
\kern \columnwidth \kern \marginparsep % at right
\fi
\else
\ifoddpage % put at right
\kern \textwidth \kern \marginparsep % at right
\else % put at left
\kern -\marginparsep \kern -\marginparwidth % at left
\fi
\fi
\vbox to 0pt{%
\kern \sideparvshift% % vertical shift to align top text lines
\begin{minipage}{\marginparwidth}%
\ifoddpage #2\else #1\fi%
\end{minipage}%
\vss}}}\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Sidebars}
%
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/19}{Added experimental code for sidebars}
%
% On 2002/10/22 Donald Arseneau posted the following code to \ctt{} for adding
% sidebars to plain TeX.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newinsert\sideins
% \skip\sideins=0pt
% \count\sideins=0
% \dimen\sideins=2in
%
% \def\sidebarvsep{25pt}
% \def\sidebarhsep{15pt}
%
% \let\mainpagecontents\pagecontents
%
% \def\sidecontents{%
% \ifvoid\sideins\else
% {\advance\hsize\sidebarhsep
% \moveright\hsize \vtop to0pt{%
% \vskip-\sidebarvsep \vskip\topskip % offset by difference
% \unvbox\sideins \vss}%
% }\fi}
% \def\pagecontents{\sidecontents\mainpagecontents}
% \long\def\sidebar#1{
% \insert\sideins{%
% \splittopskip\sidebarvsep\relax
% \hsize 1.5in \rightskip=0pt plus 20pt \it
% \noindent \vbox to \sidebarvsep{}\ignorespaces #1%
% \ifhmode \unskip\strut\fi \par
% }%
% }
%
% \end{verbatim}
%
% The following is my attempt to rewrite the above into a form suitable
% for LaTeX, and this class in particular.
%
% \begin{macro}{\sideins}
% Create a new insert called |\sideins|, which also creates a corresponding
% skip, count, dimen, and box. \\
% |\skip\sideins| is the extra vertical space to allow on the page for
% the insert, \\
% |\count\sideins| is the magnification factor for page breaking, \\
% |\dimen\sideins| is the maximum insertion size (height) per page, \\
% and the inserted material will be in |\box\sideins| when a page is output.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newinsert\sideins
\skip\sideins=0pt
\count\sideins=0
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setsidebarheight}
% The macro |\setsidebarheight{|\meta{length}|}| sets the total
% height of sidebars on a page to \meta{length}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setsidebarheight}[1]{\dimen\sideins= #1}
\setsidebarheight{20\onelineskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarhsep}
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarvsep}
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarwidth}
% The length |\sidebarhsep| is the gap between the typeblock and the sidebar.
% |\sidebarvsep| is the vertical gap between sidebars on a page.
% The maximum number of sidebar lines on a page is
% |1 + (\dimen\sideins - \sidebarvsep)|, assuming |\dimen\sideins|
% is defined in terms of |\onelineskip|.
% The width of the sidebar is |\sidebarwidth|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\sidebarhsep} \setlength{\sidebarhsep}{\marginparsep}
\newlength{\sidebarvsep} \setlength{\sidebarvsep}{2\onelineskip}
\newlength{\sidebarwidth} \setlength{\sidebarwidth}{\marginparwidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarfont}
% The font for typesetting the contents of a sidebar.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sidebarfont}{\normalfont}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarform}
% |\sidebarform| sets the `raggedness' in a sidebar. The current definition
% is less ragged than |\raggedright|. Examples:
% \begin{verbatim}
% for flushleftright \renewcommand{\sidebarform}{}
% for raggedleft \renewcommand{\sidebarform}{\raggedleft}
% \end{verbatim}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{sidebarform} (from patch v1.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sidebarform}{\rightskip=\z@ \@plus 2em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifsidebaroneside}
% Flag for oneside.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/04/05}{Added \cs{ifsidebaroneside}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifsidebaroneside
\if@twoside\sidebaronesidefalse\else\sidebaronesidetrue\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarmargin}
% \begin{macro}{\m@msidebar@margin}
% \cs{sidebarmargin}\marg{side} sets the side where sidebars will be printed.
% Valid arguments are: left, right, outer, or inner.
% The command is only effective for onecolumn documents with
% \verb?\sidebaronesidefalse?
% (\verb?\sidebarmargin{right}? is equivalent to \verb?\sidebaronesidetrue?).
%
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{sidebarmargin} (mempatch v3.2)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sidebarmargin}[1]{%
\def\@tempa{#1}\def\@tempb{left}%
\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
\gdef\m@msidebar@margin{0}%
\else
\def\@tempb{right}%
\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
\gdef\m@msidebar@margin{1}%
\else
\def\@tempb{outer}%
\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
\gdef\m@msidebar@margin{2}%
\else
\def\@tempb{inner}%
\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
\gdef\m@msidebar@margin{3}%
\else
\@memwarn{Bad \string\sidebarmargin\space argument}%
\gdef\m@msidebar@margin{1}%
\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi}
%%%% default outer
\gdef\m@msidebar@margin{2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidecontents}
% This locates the horizontal position of a sidebar. On two column
% pages it is put in the margin next to the column where |\sidebar|
% is called, otherwise it is put in the outer (foredge) margin, except
% for the oneside option when it is put into the right hand margin.
% This can be separately controlled via \verb?\ifsidebaroneside?.
% Emanuele Vicentini\footnote{\texttt{emanuelevicentini@yahoo.it},
% private email, 2004/04/05}
% suggested to code for the oneside option.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/04/05}{Changed \cs{sidecontents} for oneside option}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Changed \cs{sidecontents} for \cs{sidebarmargin}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sidecontents}{{%
\if@twocolumn% %% put outside nearest column
\if@firstcolumn% %% move to left
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{\sidebarwidth}%
\advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
\moveleft\@tempdimc
\else% %% move to right
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{\columnwidth}%
\advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
\moveright\@tempdimc
\fi
\else% %% put into foremargin?
\ifsidebaroneside% %% put into right hand margin
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{\hsize}%
\advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
\moveright\@tempdimc
\else% %% ???
\ifcase\m@msidebar@margin% 0 to left
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{\sidebarwidth}%
\advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
\moveleft\@tempdimc
\or% 1 to right
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{\hsize}%
\advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
\moveright\@tempdimc
\or% 2 to outer
\ifodd\c@page% %% move to right
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{\hsize}%
\advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
\moveright\@tempdimc
\else% %% move to left
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{\sidebarwidth}%
\advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
\moveleft\@tempdimc
\fi
\or% 3 to inner
\ifodd\c@page% %% move to left
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{\sidebarwidth}%
\advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
\moveleft\@tempdimc
\else% %% move to right
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{\hsize}%
\advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
\moveright\@tempdimc
\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi
\vtop to0pt{%
\vskip\onelineskip
\unvbox\sideins \vss}%
}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidebar}
% |\sidebar{|\meta{text}|}| puts \meta{text} into a sidebar.
%
% Florence Henry (\texttt{florence.henry@obspm.fr}) in the thread
% \textit{Of memoir, sidebar, and justification}, 2003/04/02, pointed
% out that |itemize| in a |\sidebar| could overflow. DA gave the
% solution hint.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Revised \cs{sidebar}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sidebar}[1]{%
\insert\sideins{%
\splittopskip\sidebarvsep\relax
\hsize \sidebarwidth
\@parboxrestore % <- added in v1.4
\sidebarform \sidebarfont
\noindent\vbox to \sidebarvsep{}\ignorespaces #1%
\ifhmode\unskip\strut\fi\par}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now for the nasty bits which involve modifying the LaTeX output
% routine --- always a dangerous thing to do!
%
% \begin{macro}{\memold@makecol}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@makecol}
% A modified version of the kernel |\@makecol|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\memold@makecol\@makecol
\gdef\mem@makecol{%
\ifvoid\footins
\setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
\else
\setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
\boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth
\@tempdima\dp\@cclv
\unvbox\@cclv
\vskip-\@tempdima
\vskip \skip\footins
\color@begingroup
\normalcolor
\footnoterule
\unvbox \footins
\color@endgroup
}
\fi
\ifvoid\sideins\else %%% start of change
\setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
\sidecontents
\unvbox\@outputbox
}
\fi %%% end of change
\xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}%
\global\let\@midlist\@empty
\@combinefloats
\ifvbox\@kludgeins
\@makespecialcolbox
\else
\setbox\@outputbox \vbox to\@colht{%
\boxmaxdepth \maxdepth
\@texttop
\dimen@ \dp\@outputbox
\unvbox \@outputbox
\vskip -\dimen@
\@textbottom
}%
\fi
\global \maxdepth \@maxdepth
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@mem@nofoot}
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@testifnofoot}
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@extranofoot}
% These are from [RS] as \verb?\@doclearpage? should check for more than
% just \verb?\footins? being void. Note that this covers all current
% class defined inserts, including sidebars.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Added \cs{if@mem@nofoot},
% \cs{@mem@testifnofoot}, and
% \cs{@mem@extranofoot}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@mem@nofoot
\newcommand*{\@mem@testifnofoot}{%
\@mem@nofoottrue
\ifvoid\footins\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi
\ifvoid\footinsv@r\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi
\ifvoid\sideins\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi
\@mem@extranofeet}
\newcommand*{\@mem@extranofeet}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memold@doclearpage}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@doclearpage}
% I thought that I could get away with using the kernel's
% \verb?\@doclearpage? but [RS] discovered that I couldn't.
% \changes{v1.62}{2004/03/14}{Redid \cs{@doclearpage} using [RS] code}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\memold@doclearpage\@doclearpage
\newcommand{\mem@doclearpage}{%
%%%% \typeout{Redefining @doclearpage}
\@mem@testifnofoot
\if@mem@nofoot
\setbox\@tempboxa\vsplit\@cclv to\z@ \unvbox\@tempboxa
\setbox\@tempboxa\box\@cclv
\xdef\@deferlist{\@toplist\@botlist\@deferlist}%
\global\let\@toplist\@empty
\global\let\@botlist\@empty
\global\@colroom\@colht
\ifx \@currlist\@empty
\else
\@latexerr{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
\global\let\@currlist\@empty
\fi
\@makefcolumn\@deferlist
\@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi{\@opcol\@makefcolumn\@deferlist}%
\if@twocolumn
\if@firstcolumn
\xdef\@dbldeferlist{\@dbltoplist\@dbldeferlist}%
\global\let\@dbltoplist\@empty
\global\@colht\textheight
\begingroup
\@dblfloatplacement
\@makefcolumn\@dbldeferlist
\@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi{\@outputpage
\@makefcolumn\@dbldeferlist}%
\endgroup
\else
\vbox{}\clearpage
\fi
\fi
\else
\setbox\@cclv\vbox{\box\@cclv\vfil}%
\@makecol\@opcol
\clearpage
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memold@reinserts}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@reinserts}
% Almost a copy of the kernel |\@reinserts|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\memold@reinserts\@reinserts
\gdef\mem@reinserts{%
\ifvoid\footins\else\insert\footins{\unvbox\footins}\fi
\ifvbox\@kludgeins\insert\@kludegins{\unvbox\@kludgeins}\fi
\ifvoid\sideins\else\sidecontents\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makecol}
% \begin{macro}{\@doclearpage}
% Replace the kernel version of |\@makecol| and \verb?\@doclearpage?
% with the memoir versions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\@makecol{\mem@makecol}
\gdef\@doclearpage{\mem@doclearpage}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% I think that the original kernel version of |\@reinserts|
% might be alright, but you never know. If it is not,
% then we can treat it like |\@makecol|, for example.
%
%
% \subsection{Footnotes}
%
% For my reference, in case I want to fiddle with it even more
% than I have already done so, here is the kernel code (from \file{ltfloat.dtx})
% for footnotes.
% \DescribeMacro{\footins}
% The insert for footnotes.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newinsert\footins
% \skip\footins=\bigskipamount
% \count\footins=1000
% \dimen\footins=8in
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\footnoterule}
% Draws the rule separating footnotes from the main text. It is executed
% after a \cs{vspace} of \verb?\skip\footins? and should take no vertical
% space.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule \@width 2in \kern 2.6\p@}
%
% \@definecounter{footnote}
% \def\thefootnote{\@arabic\c@footnote}
% \@definecounter{mpfootnote}
% \def\thempfootnote{\itshape\@alph\c@mpfootnote}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@makefnmark}
% Generates the footnote marker from \cs{@thefnmark}.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}
%
% \DeclareRobustCommand*\textsuperscript[1]{%
% \@textsuperscript{\selectfont#1}}
% \def\@textsuperscript#1{%
% {\m@th\ensuremath{^{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@#1}}}}}
%
% \newdimen\footnotesep
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\footnote}
% \cs{footnote}\oarg{num}\marg{text} is what the user uses for footnoting.
% It defines \cs{@thefnmark} and calls \cs{@footnotemark} and
% \cs{@footnotetext} to do the work.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\footnote{\@ifnextchar[\@xfootnote{\stepcounter\@mpfn
% \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
% \@footnotemark\@footnotetext}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@xfootnote}
% Handles the optional \meta{num} argument to \cs{footnote}.
% It defines \cs{@thefnmark} and calls \cs{@footnotemark} and
% \cs{@footnotetext} to do the work.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@xfootnote[#1]{%
% \begingroup
% \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
% \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
% \endgroup
% \@footnotemark\@footnotetext}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@footnotetext}
% \cs{@footnotetext}\marg{text} sets up for typeseting the footnote
% (at the bottom of the page). It calls \cs{@makefntext}\marg{text}
% to actually do the typesetting (\cs{@makefntext} has to be supplied
% by a class or package).
% \begin{verbatim}
% \long\def\@footnotetext#1{%
% \insert\footins{%
% \reset@font\footnotesize
% \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
% \splittopskip\footnotesep
% \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
% \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
% \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
% \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
% \color@begingroup
% \@makefntext{%
% \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
% \color@endgroup}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\footnotemark}
% \cs{footnotemark}\oarg{num} the user uses this to produce just a
% footnote mark in the text.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\footnotemark{%
% \@ifnextchar[\@xfootnotemark
% {\stepcounter{footnote}%
% \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thefootnote}%
% \@footnotemark}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@xfootnotemark}
% Handles the optional \meta{num} argument to \cs{footnotemark}.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@xfootnotemark[#1]{%
% \begingroup
% \c@footnote #1\relax
% \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thefootnote}%
% \endgroup
% \@footnotemark}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@footnotemark}
% Typesets the mark in the main text, via \cs{@makefnmark}.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@footnotemark{%
% \leavevmode
% \ifhmode\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}\nobreak\fi
% \@makefnmark
% \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
% \relax}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\footnotetext}
% \cs{footnotetext}\oarg{num}\marg{text} is user view for creating a footnote
% without a marker in the main text.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\footnotetext{%
% \@ifnextchar [\@xfootnotenext
% {\protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
% \@footnotetext}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@xfootnotetext}
% Handles the optional \meta{num} argument to \cs{footnotetext}.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@xfootnotenext[#1]{%
% \begingroup
% \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
% \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
% \endgroup
% \@footnotetext}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@mpfn}
% \DescribeMacro{\thempfn}
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@mpfn{footnote}
% \def\thempfn{\thefootnote}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% And from \file{ltboxes.dtx} for the |minipage| environment.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@mpfn}
% \DescribeMacro{\thempfn}
% \DescribeMacro{\@footnotetext}
% When setting up
% the environment, it includes:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}\def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}\c@mpfootnote\z@
% \let\@footnotetext\@mpfootnotetext
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@mpfootnotetext}
% Later it defines \cs{@mpfootnotetext}\marg{text} as the minipage version
% of \cs{@footnotetext}.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \long\def\@mpfootnotetext#1{%
% \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
% \unvbox\@mpfootins
% \reset@font\footnotesize
% \hsize\columnwidth
% \@parboxrestore
% \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
% \csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
% \color@begingroup
% \@makefntext{%
% \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
% \color@endgroup}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% That completes the kernel extracts.
%
% \begin{macro}{\footnoterule}
% Usually, footnotes are separated from the main body of the text
% by a small rule. This rule is drawn by the macro |\footnoterule|.
% We have to make sure that the rule takes no vertical space (see
% \file{plain.tex}) so we compensate for the natural heigth of the
% rule of 0.4pt by adding the right amount of vertical skip.
%
% To prevent the rule from colliding with the footnote we first add
% a little negative vertical skip, then we put the rule and make
% sure we end up at the same point where we begun this operation.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\footnoterule}{%
\kern-3\p@
\hrule width .4\columnwidth
\kern 2.6\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% And just to make sure that we are using memoir's font-dependent
% skips:
% \begin{macrocode}
\skip\footins=\bigskipamount
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@footnote}
% Footnotes are numbered per chapter. The counter is predefined.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@addtoreset{footnote}{chapter}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The footnote mechanism of \LaTeX{} calls the macro |\@makefntext|
% to produce the actual footnote. The macro gets the text of the
% footnote as its argument and should use |\@thefnmark| as the mark
% of the footnote. The macro |\@makefntext| is called when
% effectively inside a |\parbox| of width |\columnwidth| (i.e.,
% with |\hsize| = |\columnwidth|).
%
% An example of what can be achieved is given by the following piece
% of \TeX{} code.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \long\def\@makefntext#1{%
% \@setpar{\@@par
% \@tempdima = \hsize
% \advance\@tempdima-10pt
% \parshape \@ne 10pt \@tempdima}%
% \par
% \parindent 1em\noindent
% \hbox to \z@{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
% \end{verbatim}
% The effect of this definition is that all lines of the footnote
% are indented by 10pt, while the first line of a new paragraph is
% indented by 1em. To change these dimensions, just substitute the
% desired value for `10pt' (in both places) or `1em'. The mark is
% flushright against the footnote.
%
% The standard classes use a simpler macro, in which the
% footnote text is set like an ordinary text paragraph, with no
% indentation except on the first line of a paragraph, and the
% first line of the footnote. Thus, all the macro must do is set
% |\parindent| to the appropriate value for succeeding paragraphs
% and put the proper indentation before the mark.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newcommand{\@makefntext}[1]{%
% \parindent 1em%
% \noindent
% \hb@xt@1.8em{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% This class provides a configurable specification.
%
% Normally, if two or more footnotes are sequentially applied: \\
% |...text\footnote{first}\footnote{second}...| \\
% the markers in the text run together
% (e.g., \ldots text\textsuperscript{12}).
% The class provides a separator between the markers
% (e.g., \ldots text\textsuperscript{1,2}).
% The underlying ideas for this are from the \Lpack{ledmac}
% package~\cite{LEDMAC},
% which in turn got them from the \Lpack{footmisc} package~\cite{FOOTMISC}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added footnote separator (from patch v1.5)}
%
% \begin{macro}{\multfootsep}
% The separator between multiple footnote markers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\multfootsep}{\textsuperscript{\normalfont,}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\multiplefootnotemarker}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mmf@prepare}
% \cs{m@mmf@prepare} is a pair of self-cancelling kerns.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\multiplefootnotemarker}{3sp}
\newcommand*{\m@mmf@prepare}{%
\kern-\multiplefootnotemarker
\kern\multiplefootnotemarker\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mmf@check}
% If \cs{m@mmf@check} recognises the last kern as \cs{multiplefootnotemarker}
% it typesets \cs{multfootsep}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mmf@check}{%
\ifdim\lastkern=\multiplefootnotemarker\relax
\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}%
\unkern
\multfootsep
\spacefactor\@x@sf\relax
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext}
% \begin{macro}{\@footnotemark}
% We have to modify the kernel's \cs{@footnotetext} and \cs{@footnotemark}
% to implement the separator.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Stop body font changes leaking into footnotes (mempatch v3.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\m@mold@footnotetext\@footnotetext
\renewcommand{\@footnotetext}[1]{%
\rest@font\m@mold@footnotetext{#1}\m@mmf@prepare}
\renewcommand*{\@footnotemark}{%
\leavevmode
\ifhmode
\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}%
\m@mmf@check
\nobreak
\fi
\@makefnmark
\m@mmf@prepare
\ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footmarkwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\footmarksep}
% \begin{macro}{\footparindent}
% The mark is typset right justified in a box with width |\footmarkwidth|.
% Second and later lines of the text are offset |\footmarksep| from the
% end of the box. Paragraphs in footnotes are indented by |\parindent|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\footmarkwidth}
\newlength{\footmarksep}
\newlength{\footparindent}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footmarkstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\footscript}
% The marker is typeset according to |\footscript|\marg{marker}. This
% can be specified by the user via |\footmarkstyle|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\footmarkstyle}[1]{\def\footscript##1{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makefootmarkhook}
% A vacuous macro that the user can redefine to do something useful?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makefootmarkhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footfootmark}
% This macro typesets the footnote marker.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\footfootmark}{%
\ifdim\footmarkwidth < \z@
% \end{macrocode}
% Negative width, mark is in the margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
\llap{\hb@xt@ -\footmarkwidth{%
\hss\normalfont\footscript{\@thefnmark}}%
\hspace*{-\footmarkwidth}}%
\else
\ifdim\footmarkwidth = \z@
% \end{macrocode}
% Zero width, mark is at (inside) the margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\normalfont\footscript{\@thefnmark}}%
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Positive width.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hb@xt@\footmarkwidth{\hss\normalfont\footscript{\@thefnmark}}%
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makefootmark}
% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
% The class version of |\@makefntext|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makefootmark}[1]{%
\leavevmode
\parindent \footparindent\noindent
\leftskip\footmarksep\relax
\advance\leftskip \footmarkwidth \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip\relax
\makefootmarkhook\relax
\footfootmark #1}
% \end{macrocode}
% In the thread \textit{memoir and footnote.sty trouble}, 2003/04/02,
% Patrik Nyman (\texttt{patrik.nyman@orient.su.se}) noted that in order
% to stop \file{footnote.sty} (from \texttt{mdwtools}) barfing my original \\
% |\newcommand{\@makefntext}[1]{\makefootmark{#1}}| \\
% had to be changed.
% \changes{v1.4}{2004/11/22}{Revised \cs{@makefntext}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@makefntext}[1]{\makefootmark #1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% All that now remains for the footer part is to set the defaults.
% \begin{macrocode}
\footmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{1.8em}
\setlength{\footmarksep}{-1.8em}
\setlength{\footparindent}{1em}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark}
% The footnote markers that are printed in the text to point to the
% footnotes should be produced by the macro |\@makefnmark|. We use
% the default definition for it.
% \begin{macrocode}
%\renewcommand\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{%
% \normalfont\@thefnmark}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footref}
% Sometimes it is desireable to reference a footnote more than
% once.
% If a footnote is labelled (e.g., |\footnote{text\label{fn}}|) then
% the macro |\footref|\marg{fn} will print the footnote marker.
% The code is essentially a much simplified version of |\footnotemark|
% from \file{ltfloat.dtx}.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/30}{Added \cs{footref}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\footref}[1]{%
\begingroup
\unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\ref{#1}}%
\endgroup
\@footnotemark}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The following code for footnotes that can include verbatims is based
% on Jeremy Gibbons \textit{`Footnotes with verbatim material'}
% in the column \textit{`Hey --- it works'} (edited by Jeremy Gibbons),
% TeX and TUG NEWS, vol 2 no. 4, p 9, October 1993. I have updated
% the basic code so that it works for LaTeX2e.
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbfootnote}
% \begin{macro}{\@xverbfootnote}
% |\verbfootnote| is just like |\footnote| except that it can contain
% verbatim material.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbfootnote{\@ifnextchar[\@xverbfootnote{\stepcounter\@mpfn
\protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
\@footnotemark\@verbfootnotetext}}
\def\@xverbfootnote[#1]{%
\begingroup
\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
\unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
\endgroup
\@footnotemark\@verbfootnotetext}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@verbfootnotetext}
% This is the secret ingredient. It is based on the \cs{footnote} macro
% in \theTeXbook{} page 363, which somehow manages to read an argument
% with verbatims. As Knuth says that it is subtle and involves trickery,
% don't expect me to even try to explain anything.
%
% I'm not at all sure about the color bits, though!
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Fixed colors in \cs{verbfootnote} (mempatch v2.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@verbfootnotetext{%
\insert\footins\bgroup
\footnotesize
\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
\splittopskip\footnotesep
\splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
\hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
%%%% \color@begingroup
\@makefntext{\rule{\z@}{\footnotesep}\ignorespaces}%
\futurelet\next\fo@t
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fo@t}
% \begin{macro}{\f@@t}
% \begin{macro}{\f@t}
% \begin{macro}{\@foot}
% Guess what these do.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
\else \let\next\f@t\fi \next}
\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
\def\f@t#1{%
\color@begingroup
#1\@foot
\color@endgroup}
\def\@foot{%
\strut\egroup
%%%% \color@endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@verbmpfootnotetext}
% Footnotes in minipages are a little different, so another
% version of |\...footnotetext|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@verbmpfootnotetext{%
\global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
\reset@font\footnotesize
\unvbox\@mpfootins
\bgroup
\hsize\columnwidth
\@parboxrestore
\edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\@makefntext{\rule{\z@}{\footnotesep}\ignorespaces}%
}
\futurelet\next\fo@t
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
% To get the |\verbfootnote| to work in a |minipage| we have to use
% |\@verbmpfootnotetext| instead of |\\@verbfootnotetext|. There is
% a nice hook in the kernel |minipage| code for this.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@minipagerestore{\let\@verbfootnotetext\@verbmpfootnotetext}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Major extensions for footnotes}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%% major extension to footnoting
% \end{macrocode}
%
% This all requires modifications to the output routine's \cs{@makecol}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@makecolfloats}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@makecoltext}
% These two macros contain code common to both versions of \cs{@makecol}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@m@makecolfloats}{%
\xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}%
\global\let\@midlist\@empty
\@combinefloats}
\newcommand{\m@m@makecoltext}{%
\ifvbox\@kludgeins
\@makespecialcolbox
\else
\setbox\@outputbox \vbox to\@colht{%
\@texttop
\dimen@ \dp\@outputbox
\unvbox \@outputbox
\vskip -\dimen@
\@textbottom}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@makecolintro}
% A hook into the revised \cs{@makecol}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@m@makecolintro}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@makecol}
% A version \cs{@makecol} giving the standard footnote order (bottom
% floats after footnotes).
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\mem@makecol{%
\m@m@makecolintro
\ifvoid\footins
\setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
\else
\setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
\boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth
\@tempdima\dp\@cclv
\unvbox\@cclv
\vskip \skip\footins
\color@begingroup
\normalcolor
\footnoterule
\unvbox \footins
\color@endgroup
}%
\fi
\m@mdoextrafeet
\ifvoid\sideins\else
\setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
\sidecontents
\unvbox\@outputbox}%
\fi
\m@m@makecolfloats
\m@m@makecoltext
\global \maxdepth \@maxdepth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@makecolbf}
% A version of \cs{@makecol} which puts footnotes at the bottom of the page
% (after any bottom floats).
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\mem@makecolbf{%
\m@m@makecolintro
\setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
\m@m@makecolfloats
\ifvoid\footins
\else
\setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
\boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth
\unvbox\@outputbox
\vskip \skip\footins
\color@begingroup
\normalcolor
\footnoterule
\unvbox \footins
\color@endgroup
}%
\fi
\m@mdoextrafeet
\ifvoid\sideins\else
\setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
\sidecontents
\unvbox\@outputbox}%
\fi
\m@m@makecoltext
\global \maxdepth \@maxdepth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\feetabovefloat}
% \begin{macro}{\feetbelowfloat}
% declarations to put footnotes above bottom floats (standard \LaTeX)
% or at the bottom of the page
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\feetabovefloat}{\gdef\@makecol{\mem@makecol}}
\newcommand{\feetbelowfloat}{\gdef\@makecol{\mem@makecolbf}}
\feetabovefloat
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% All sorts of extra kinds of footnotes.
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mdoextrafeet}
% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetins}
% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetinshook}
% These macros are hooks into \cs{@makecol}.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Fixed memoir/listings spacing problem (from Cartsten Heinz, mempatch v2.3)}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Set \cs{boxmaxdepth} in \cs{extrafeetins} (mmempatch v3.1)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@mdoextrafeet}{\extrafeetins}
\newcommand*{\extrafeetins}{%
\setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
\boxmaxdepth \@maxdepth
\unvbox\@outputbox
\ifvoid\footinsv@r\else\@footstartv@r\@footgroupv@r\fi
\extrafeetinshook}}
\newcommand{\extrafeetinshook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@reinserts}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mdodoreinextrafeet}
% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetreinshook}
% Redefine \cs{@reinserts} with hooks for multiple footnote kinds.
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef \@reinserts{%
\ifvoid\footins\else\insert\footins{\unvbox\footins}\fi
\m@mdodoreinextrafeet
\ifvoid\sideins\else\sidecontents\fi
\ifvbox\@kludgeins\insert\@kludgeins{\unvbox\@kludgeins}\fi}
\newcommand{\m@mdodoreinextrafeet}{%
\ifvoid\footinsv@r\else\insert\footinsv@r{\unvbox\footinsv@r}\fi
\extrafeetreinshook}
\newcommand{\extrafeetreinshook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\foottextfont}
% \begin{macro}{\footinsdim}
% \begin{macro}{\@preamfntext}
% General macros.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\foottextfont}{\footnotesize}
\newlength{\footinsdim}
\setlength{\footinsdim}{8in} % standard for \dimen\footins
\newcommand{\@preamfntext}{%
\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
\floatingpenalty \@MM
\splittopskip=\footnotesep
\splitmaxdepth=\dp\strutbox
\@parboxrestore}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% We are going to change some of the kernel footnote macros
%
% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext}
% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootnotetext}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mold@footnotetext}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mold@mpfootnotetext}
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\@footnotetext}[1]{\insert\footins{%
\foottextfont
\@preamfntext
\hsize\columnwidth
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\@makefntext{%
\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces{\foottextfont #1}%
\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
\color@endgroup}\m@mmf@prepare}
\renewcommand{\@mpfootnotetext}[1]{%
\global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
\unvbox\@mpfootins
\foottextfont \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\@makefntext{%
\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
\color@endgroup}}
% \end{macrocode}
% Save our revised versions of \cs{@footnotetext} and \cs{@mpfootnotetext}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\m@mold@footnotetext\@footnotetext
\let\m@mold@mpfootnotetext\@mpfootnotetext
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% We also to patch the minipage environment. We can use
% \cs{@minipagerestore} for the \texttt{begin} part, but have to
% modify \cs{endminipage}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mdoextrafeetmini}
% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetminihook}
% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@mdoextrafeetmini}{%
\extrafeetminihook}
\newcommand{\extrafeetminihook}{}
\renewcommand{\@minipagerestore}{\m@mdoextrafeetmini}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetendmini}
% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetendminihook}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\extrafeetendmini}{%
\ifvoid\@mpfootinsv@r\else
\vskip\skip\@mpfootins
\normalcolor\footnoterule\mp@footgroupv@r
\fi
\extrafeetendminihook}
\newcommand{\extrafeetendminihook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mdoextrafeetendmini}
% \begin{macro}{\endminipage}
% This is our patched version of \cs{endminipage}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@mdoextrafeetendmini}{\extrafeetendmini}
\def\endminipage{%
\par
\unskip
\ifvoid\@mpfootins\else
\vskip\skip\@mpfootins
\normalcolor
\footnoterule
\unvbox\@mpfootins
\fi
\m@mdoextrafeetendmini
\@minipagefalse
\color@endgroup
\egroup
\expandafter\@iiiparbox\@mpargs{\unvbox\@tempboxa}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\plainfootnotes}
% The declaration for standard footnotes; easy, just use the saved
% versions of \cs{@footnotetext} and \cs{@mpfootnotetext}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\plainfootnotes}{%
\let\@footnotetext\m@mold@footnotetext
\let\@mpfootnotetext\m@mold@mpfootnotetext}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now for lots of somewhat tedious code, interspersed with complex
% `Dirty Tricks' type things.
%
% Robert Schlicht~\footnote{Private email, 2004/03/12,
% (\texttt{w.m.l@gmx.net})} [RS] has provided valuable help in tuning
% up the code.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\newfootnoteseries}
% \cs{newfootnoteseries}\marg{series} creates the set of macros required
% for footnote code (see the kernel code presented earlier).
% The created macros have \meta{series} appended to their name.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Added skip setup to \cs{newfootnoteseries}}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/24}{Use \cs{newcounter} instead of \cs{newcount}
% in \cs{newfootnoteseries}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newfootnoteseries}[1]{%
\expandafter\newinsert\csname footins#1\endcsname% -> \footins#1
\expandafter\skip\csname footins#1\endcsname \bigskipamount%
%%% - > \skip\footins#1 % [RS]
\newcounter{footnote#1}% -> \c@footnote#1
\@nameuse{c@footnote#1} \z@% -> \c@footnote#1=0
\global\@namelet{p@footnote#1} \@empty% -> \p@footnote#1
\@namedef{thefootnote#1}{\arabic{footnote#1}}% -> \thefootnote#1
\@namedef{foottextfont#1}{\foottextfont}% -> \foottextfont#1
\m@makefootnote{#1}% -> \footnote#1
\m@make@xfootnote{#1}% -> \@xfootnote#1
\m@make@footnotetext{#1}% -> \@footnotetext#1
\m@makefootnotemark{#1}% -> \footnotemark#1
\m@make@xfootnotemark{#1}% -> \@xfootnotemark#1
\m@make@footnotemark{#1}% -> \@footnotemark#1
\m@makefootnotetext{#1}% -> \footnotetext#1
\m@make@xfootnotenext{#1}% -> \@xfootnotenext#1
\m@make@mpfn{#1}% -> \@mpfn#1
\m@makethempfn{#1}% -> \thempfn#1
\m@make@makefnmark{#1}% -> \@makefnmark#1
\m@makefootref{#1}% -> \footref#1
\m@makefootfootmark{#1}% -> \footfootmark#1
\m@makemakefootmark{#1}% -> \makefootmark#1
\m@makefootmarkstyle{#1}% -> \footmarkstyle#1
\@namedef{@makefntext#1}##1{\@nameuse{makefootmark#1} ##1}%
\m@make@footstart{#1}% -> \@footstart#1
\m@make@footgroup{#1}% -> \@footgroup#1
\expandafter\newinsert\csname @mpfootins#1\endcsname% -> \@mpfootins#1
\newcounter{mpfootnote#1}% -> \c@mpfootnote#1
\global\@namelet{p@mpfootnote#1}\@empty
\@namedef{thempfootnote#1}{\itshape\alph{mpfootnote#1}}%
\m@make@mpfootnotetext{#1}% -> \@mpfootnotetext#1
% \end{macrocode}
% Reset the counter per chapter, except for articles.
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/03/14}{Added chapter reset for footnote series [RS]}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifartopt\else% [RS]
\expandafter\@cons\csname cl@chapter\endcsname {{footnote#1}}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Add the footnote to the (re)insert hooks.
% \begin{macrocode}
\g@addto@macro{\extrafeetinshook}{%
\ifvoid\@nameuse{footins#1}\else
\@nameuse{@footstart#1}\@nameuse{@footgroup#1}\fi}
\g@addto@macro{\extrafeetreinshook}{%
\ifvoid\@nameuse{footins#1}\else
\insert\@nameuse{footins#1}{\unvbox\@nameuse{footins#1}}\fi}
\g@addto@macro{\extrafeetendminihook}{%
\ifvoid\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}\else
\vskip\skip\@mpfootins
\normalcolor\footnoterule\@nameuse{mp@footgroup#1}\fi}
\g@addto@macro{\extrafeetminihook}{%
\@namedef{@mpfn#1}{mpfootnote#1}
\@namedef{thempfn#1}{\@nameuse{thempfootnote#1}}
\csname c@mpfootnote#1\endcsname\z@
\expandafter\let\expandafter\@t@mp \csname @mpfootnotetext#1\endcsname
\expandafter\let \csname @footnotetext#1\endcsname \@t@mp}
\g@addto@macro{\@mem@extranofeet}{% % [RS]
\ifvoid\@nameuse{footins#1}\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi}
\plainfootstyle{#1}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootnote}
% \cs{m@makefootnote}\marg{series} creates \cs{footnote<series>}
% \changes{v1.4}{2004/01/21}{In \cs{m@makefootnote} changed \cs{advance}
% to \cs{stepcounter} to make change global}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makefootnote}[1]{
\@namedef{footnote#1}{\@ifnextchar[
{\@nameuse{@xfootnote#1}}{%\advance \@nameuse{c@\@mpfn#1} by \@ne
\stepcounter{\@mpfn#1}%
\@name@p@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thempfn#1}}%
\@nameuse{@footnotemark#1}\@nameuse{@footnotetext#1}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@xfootnote}
% \cs{m@make@xfootnote}\marg{series} creates \cs{@xfootnote<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@xfootnote}[1]{
\@namedef{@xfootnote#1}[##1]{%
\begingroup
\csname c@\@mpfn#1\endcsname ##1\relax
\@name@unresp@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thempfn#1}}%
\endgroup
\@nameuse{@footnotemark#1}\@nameuse{@footnotetext#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@footnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@footnotetext}\marg{series} creates \cs{@footnotetext<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@footnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@footnotetext#1}##1{%
\insert\@nameuse{footins#1}{%
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\@preamfntext
\hsize\columnwidth
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote#1\endcsname\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\color@begingroup
\@nameuse{@makefntext#1}{%
\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mpfootnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@mpfootnotetext}\marg{series} creates \cs{@mpfootnotetext<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mpfootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@mpfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\global\setbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}\vbox{%
\unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}%
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote#1\endcsname\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\color@begingroup
\@nameuse{@makefntext#1}{%
\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootnotemark}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/24}{Changed \cs{advance} to \cs{stepcounter}
% in \cs{m@makefootnotemark}}
% \cs{m@makefootnotemark}\marg{series} creates \cs{footnotemark<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makefootnotemark}[1]{
\@namedef{footnotemark#1}{%
\@ifnextchar[ {\@nameuse{@xfootnotemark#1}}
{%\advance\@nameuse{c@footnote#1} by \@ne%
\stepcounter{footnote#1}%
\@name@p@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thefootnote#1}}%
\@nameuse{@footnotemark#1}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@xfootnotemark}
% \cs{m@make@xfootnotemark}\marg{series} creates \cs{@xfootnotemark<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@xfootnotemark}[1]{%
\@namedef{@xfootnotemark#1}[##1]{%
\begingroup
\@nameuse{c@footnote#1} ##1\relax
\@name@unresp@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thefootnote#1}}%
\endgroup
\@nameuse{@footnotemark#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@footnotemark}
% \cs{m@make@footnotemark}\marg{series} creates \cs{@footnotemark<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@footnotemark}[1]{%
\@namedef{@footnotemark#1}{%
\leavevmode
\ifhmode
\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}%
\m@mmf@check
\nobreak
\fi
\@nameuse{@makefnmark#1}%
\m@mmf@prepare
\ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
\relax}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootmarkstyle}
% \cs{m@makefootmarkstyle}\marg{series} creates \cs{footmarkstyle<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makefootmarkstyle}[1]{%
\@namedef{footmarkstyle#1}##1{%
\@namedef{footscript#1}####1{##1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootnotetext}
% \cs{m@makefootnotetext}\marg{series} creates \cs{footnotetext<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makefootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namedef{footnotetext#1}{%
\@ifnextchar[ {\@nameuse{@xfootnotenext#1}}%
{\@name@p@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thempfn#1}}%
\@nameuse{@footnotetext#1}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@xfootnotenext}
% \cs{m@make@xfootnotenext}\marg{series} creates \cs{@xfootnotenext<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@xfootnotenext}[1]{
\@namedef{@xfootnotenext#1}[##1]{%
\begingroup
\csname c@\@mpfn#1\endcsname ##1\relax
\@name@unresp@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thempfn#1}}%
\endgroup
\@nameuse{@footnotetext#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mpfn}
% \cs{m@make@mpfn}\marg{series} creates \cs{@mpfn<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mpfn}[1]{%
\@namedef{@mpfn#1}{\@nameuse{footnote#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makethempfn}
% \cs{m@makethempfn}\marg{series} creates \cs{thempfn<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makethempfn}[1]{%
\@namedef{thempfn#1}{\@nameuse{thefootnote#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@makefnmark}
% \cs{m@make@makefnmark}\marg{series} creates \cs{@makefnmark<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@makefnmark}[1]{%
\@namedef{@makefnmark#1}{%
\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootref}
% \cs{m@makefootref}\marg{series} creates \cs{footref<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makefootref}[1]{%
\@namedef{footref#1}##1{%
\begingroup
\@name@unresp@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\ref{##1}}%
\endgroup
\@nameuse{@footnotemark#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootfootmark}
% \cs{m@makefootfootmark}\marg{series} creates \cs{footfootmark<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makefootfootmark}[1]{%
\@namedef{footfootmark#1}{%
\ifdim\footmarkwidth < \z@
\llap{\hb@xt@ -\footmarkwidth{%
\hss\normalfont\@nameuse{footscript#1}%
{\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}}%
\hspace*{-\footmarkwidth}}%
\else
\ifdim\footmarkwidth = \z@
{\normalfont\@nameuse{footscript#1}{\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}}%
\else
\hb@xt@\footmarkwidth{%
\hss\normalfont\@nameuse{footscript#1}%
{\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}}%
\fi
\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makemakefootmark}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/23}{Removed extraneous space from \cs{m@makemakefootmark}}
% \cs{m@makemakefootmark}\marg{series} creates \cs{makefootmark<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makemakefootmark}[1]{%
\@namedef{makefootmark#1}##1{%
\leavevmode
\parindent \footparindent\noindent
\leftskip\footmarksep\relax
\advance\leftskip \footmarkwidth
\null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip\relax
\makefootmarkhook\relax
\@nameuse{footfootmark#1}##1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@footgroup}
% \cs{m@make@footgroup}\marg{series} creates \cs{@footgroup<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{@footgroup#1}{\unvbox\@nameuse{footins#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makemp@footgroup}
% \cs{m@makemp@footgroup}\marg{series} creates \cs{mp@footgroup<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makemp@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{mp@footgroup#1}{\unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@footstart}
% \cs{m@make@footstart}\marg{series} creates \cs{@footstart<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@footstart}[1]{%
\@namedef{@footstart#1}{%
\vskip\bigskipamount
\leftskip=\z@
\rightskip=\z@
\footnoterule}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\plainfootstyle}
% \cs{plainfootstyle}\marg{series} specifies a plain (normal) footnote
% style for \meta{series}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\plainfootstyle}[1]{%
\m@make@footnotetext{#1}%
\m@make@footgroup{#1}%
\m@make@footstart{#1}%
\m@make@mpfootnotetext{#1}%
\m@makemp@footgroup{#1}%
\@nameuse{footmarkstyle#1}{\textsuperscript{##1}}
\expandafter\dimen\csname footins#1\endcsname=\footinsdim
\expandafter\count\csname footins#1\endcsname=1000\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now the basic code for footnote declarations (we will be
% using \texttt{footnotev@r} instead of the regular \texttt{footnote}).
%
% \begin{macro}{\footinsv@r}
% Define the new \cs{footinsv@r} insert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newinsert\footinsv@r
\skip\footinsv@r\bigskipamount
\count\footinsv@r=1000 % no magnifcation
\dimen\footinsv@r=\footinsdim
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Create a new \verb?v@r? footnote series.
% \begin{macrocode}
\m@make@footstart{v@r}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@footgroupv@r}
% Initialise the \texttt{footgroup} for the series to do nothing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@footgroupv@r}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% And also for minipages:
% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootinsv@r}
% \begin{macro}{\mp@footgroupv@r}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newinsert\@mpfootinsv@r
\newcommand{\mp@footgroupv@r}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \Lpack{ledmac} package style footnotes (see \file{ledmac.dtx} for
% more detailed explanations).
%
% The two- and three-column notes use a macro \cs{m@mrigidbalance}
% to split text into a number of columns. This is based on \theTeXbook,
% page 397.
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@k}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@h}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\m@m@k \newdimen\m@m@h
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mrigidbalance}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mdosplits}
% \begin{macro}{\m@msplitoff}
% \cs{m@mrigidbalance}\marg{box}\marg{num}\marg{length} splits a
% \meta{box} (of text) into \meta{num} columns with \meta{length}
% space between the top baseline and the top of the \cs{vbox}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mrigidbalance}[3]{\setbox0=\box#1 \m@m@k=#2 \m@m@h=#3
\@@line{\splittopskip=\m@m@h \vbadness=\@M \hfilneg
\valign{##\vfill\cr\m@mdosplits}}}
\newcommand*{\m@mdosplits}{\ifnum\m@m@k>0 \noalign{\hfil}\m@msplitoff
\global\advance\m@m@k-1\cr\m@mdosplits\fi}
\newcommand*{\m@msplitoff}{\dimen0=\ht0
\divide\dimen0 by\m@m@k \advance\dimen0 by\m@m@h
\setbox2 \vsplit0 to \dimen0
\unvbox2 }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Two column footnotes}
%
% \begin{macro}{\twocolumnfootnotes}
% Declaration for two column footnotes. This causes the standard
% \cs{footnote} and friends to internally use the \verb?v@r? series,
% which here produces two column footnotes.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Made [RS] change to \cs{twocolumnfootnotes}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\twocolumnfootnotes}{%
\@namedef{foottextfontv@r}{\foottextfont}% % [RS]
\let\@footnotetext\@twocolfootnotetext
\dimen\footinsv@r=2\footinsdim
\count\footinsv@r=500\relax
\m@make@twocol@footgroup{v@r}%
\let\@footgroupv@r\@twocol@footgroupv@r
\let\@mpfootnotetext\@mptwocolfootnotetext
\m@make@mptwocol@footgroup{v@r}%
\let\mp@footgroupv@r\@mptwocol@footgroupv@r}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@twocolfootnotetext}
% \cs{@twocolfootnotetext}\marg{text} is the two column version of
% \cs{@footnotetext} for the \verb?v@r? series.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added missing percent to \cs{@twocolfootnotetext} (mempatch v3.1)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@twocolfootnotetext}[1]{\insert\footinsv@r{%
\foottextfont
\@preamfntext
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\@twocolfootfmt{#1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mmf@prepare}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@preamtwofmt}
% Give each column 0.45 of the textwidth.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@preamtwofmt}{%
\hsize .45\hsize
\parindent=\z@
\tolerance=5000\relax
\raggedright
\leavevmode}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@twocolfootfmt}
% \cs{@twocolfootfmt}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@twocolfootfmt}[1]{%
\@preamtwofmt
{\footfootmark\strut {\foottextfont #1}\strut\par}\allowbreak}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mptwocolfootnotetext}
% \cs{@mptwocolfootnotetext}\marg{text} is the two column version
% of \cs{@mpfootnotetext} for the \verb?v@r? series for minipages.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@mptwocolfootnotetext}[1]{%
\global\setbox\@mpfootinsv@r\vbox{%
\unvbox\@mpfootinsv@r
\foottextfont \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\@twocolfootfmt{#1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mmf@prepare}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\twocolumnfootstyle}
% \cs{twocolumnfootstyle}\marg{series} specifies a two column footnote
% style for \meta{series}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\twocolumnfootstyle}[1]{%
\m@make@twocolfootnotetext{#1}%
\m@make@mptwocolfootnotetext{#1}%
\m@make@twocolfootfmt{#1}%
\m@make@twocol@footgroup{#1}%
\m@make@mptwocol@footgroup{#1}%
\m@make@footstart{#1}%
\@namelongdef{@footnotetext#1}##1{%
\@nameuse{@twocolfootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
\@namelongdef{@mpfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\@nameuse{@mptwocolfootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
\@namedef{@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@twocol@footgroup#1}}%
\@namedef{mp@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@mptwocol@footgroup#1}}%
\expandafter\dimen\csname footins#1\endcsname=2\footinsdim
\expandafter\count\csname footins#1\endcsname=500\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@twocolfootnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@twocolfootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@twocolfootnotetext}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@twocolfootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@twocolfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\insert\@nameuse{footins#1}{
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\@preamfntext
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote#1\endcsname \@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\color@begingroup
\@nameuse{@twocolfootfmt#1}{##1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mptwocolfootnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@mptwocolfootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@mptwocolfootnotetext}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mptwocolfootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@mptwocolfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\global\setbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}\vbox{%
\unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote#1\endcsname\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\color@begingroup
\@nameuse{@twocolfootfmt#1}{##1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@twocolfootfmt}
% \cs{m@make@twocolfootfmt}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@twocolfootfmt}\meta{series}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Removed space from \cs{m@make@twocolfootfmt} [RS]}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@twocolfootfmt}[1]{%
\@namedef{@twocolfootfmt#1}##1{%
\@preamtwofmt
{\@nameuse{footfootmark#1}\strut
{\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}##1}\strut\par}\allowbreak}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@twocol@footgroup}
% \cs{m@make@twocol@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@twocol@footgroup}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@twocol@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{@twocol@footgroup#1}{{%
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
\m@mrigidbalance{\@nameuse{footins#1}}{\tw@}{\splittopskip}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mptwocol@footgroup}
% \cs{m@make@mptwocol@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@mptwocol@footgroup}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mptwocol@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{@mptwocol@footgroup#1}{{%
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
\m@mrigidbalance{\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}}{\tw@}{\splittopskip}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Three column footnotes}
%
% \begin{macro}{\threecolumnfootnotes}
% Declaration for three column footnotres.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Made [RS] change to \cs{threecolumnfootnotes}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\threecolumnfootnotes}{%
\@namedef{foottextfontv@r}{\foottextfont}% % [RS]
\let\@footnotetext\@threecolfootnotetext
\dimen\footinsv@r=3\footinsdim
\count\footinsv@r=333\relax
\m@make@threecol@footgroup{v@r}%
\let\@footgroupv@r\@threecol@footgroupv@r
\let\@mpfootnotetext\@mpthreecolfootnotetext
\m@make@mpthreecol@footgroup{v@r}%
\let\mp@footgroupv@r\@mpthreecol@footgroupv@r}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@threecolfootnotetext}
% \cs{@threecolfootnotetext}\marg{text} is the three column version of
% \cs{@footnotetext}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@threecolfootnotetext}[1]{\insert\footinsv@r{%
\foottextfont
\@preamfntext
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\@threecolfootfmt{#1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mmf@prepare}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@preamthreefmt}
% Give each column 0.3 of the text width.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@preamthreefmt}{%
\hsize .3\hsize
\parindent=\z@
\tolerance=5000\relax
\raggedright
\leavevmode}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@threecolfootfmt}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@threecolfootfmt}[1]{%
\@preamthreefmt
{\footfootmark\strut {\foottextfont #1}\strut\par}\allowbreak}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mpthreecolfootnotetext}
% \cs{@mpthreecolfootnotetext}\marg{text} is the three column version of
% \cs{@mpfootnotetext}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@mpthreecolfootnotetext}[1]{%
\global\setbox\@mpfootinsv@r\vbox{%
\unvbox\@mpfootinsv@r
\foottextfont \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\@threecolfootfmt{#1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mmf@prepare}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\threecolumnfootstyle}
% \cs{threecolumnfootstyle}\marg{series} specifies three column footnote style
% for \meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\threecolumnfootstyle}[1]{%
\m@make@threecolfootnotetext{#1}%
\m@make@mpthreecolfootnotetext{#1}%
\m@make@threecolfootfmt{#1}%
\m@make@threecol@footgroup{#1}%
\m@make@mpthreecol@footgroup{#1}%
\m@make@footstart{#1}%
\@namelongdef{@footnotetext#1}##1{%
\@nameuse{@threecolfootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
\@namelongdef{@mpfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\@nameuse{@mpthreecolfootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
\@namedef{@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@threecol@footgroup#1}}%
\@namedef{mp@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@mpthreecol@footgroup#1}}%
\expandafter\dimen\csname footins#1\endcsname=3\footinsdim
\expandafter\count\csname footins#1\endcsname=333\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@threecolfootnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@threecolfootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@threecolfootnotetext}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@threecolfootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@threecolfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\insert\@nameuse{footins#1}{
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\@preamfntext
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote#1\endcsname \@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\color@begingroup
\@nameuse{@threecolfootfmt#1}{##1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mpthreecolfootnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@mpthreecolfootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@mpthreecolfootnotetext}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mpthreecolfootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@mpthreecolfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\global\setbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}\vbox{%
\unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote#1\endcsname\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\color@begingroup
\@nameuse{@threecolfootfmt#1}{##1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@threecolfootfmt}
% \cs{m@make@threecolfootfmt}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@threecolfootfmt}\meta{series}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Removed space from \cs{m@make@threecolfootfmt} [RS]}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@threecolfootfmt}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@threecolfootfmt#1}##1{%
\@preamthreefmt
{\@nameuse{footfootmark#1}\strut
{\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}##1}\strut\par}\allowbreak}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@threecol@footgroup}
% \cs{m@make@threecol@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@threecol@footgroup}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@threecol@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{@threecol@footgroup#1}{{%
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
\m@mrigidbalance{\@nameuse{footins#1}}{\thr@@}{\splittopskip}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mpthreecol@footgroup}
% \cs{m@make@mpthreecol@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@mpthreecol@footgroup}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mpthreecol@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{@mpthreecol@footgroup#1}{{%
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
\m@mrigidbalance{\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}}{\thr@@}{\splittopskip}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Paragraphed footnotes}
%
% Paragraphed footnotes are based on \theTeXbook, page 398ff, in the
% Dirty Tricks appendix. It does a lot of box manipulations.
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@munvxh}
% \cs{m@munvxh}\marg{vbox}: unvbox, extract the last line, and unhbox it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@munvxh}[1]{%
\setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox#1%
\global\setbox1=\lastbox}%
\unhbox1
\unskip
\unskip
\unpenalty
\hskip\m@mipn@skip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mungebox}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@mungebox}{%
\setbox0=\hbox{\m@munvxh0}%
\dp0=\z@
\ht0=\footfudgefactor\wd0
\box0
\penalty0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mipn@skip}
% \begin{macro}{\m@minterparanoteglue}
% These are `inter-para-note-skip' and `inter-parafootnote' glue, for
% paragraphed footnotes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newskip\m@mipn@skip
\newcommand*{\m@minterparanoteglue}[1]{%
{\foottextfont\global\m@mipn@skip=#1\relax}}
\m@minterparanoteglue{1em plus.4em minus.4em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mmakehboxofhboxes}
% Make an hbox of hboxes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mmakehboxofhboxes}{\setbox0=\hbox{}%
\loop
\unpenalty
\setbox2=\lastbox
\ifhbox2
\setbox0=\hbox{\box2\unhbox0}
\repeat}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mremovehboxes}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mremovehboxes}{\setbox0=\lastbox
\ifhbox0{\m@mremovehboxes}\unhbox0 \fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footfudgefiddle}
% TeX uses \verb?\footfufgefactor? to estimate the space required for
% paragraphed footnotes. If it underestimates then the notes approach,
% or cover, the footer. \verb?\footfudgefiddle? can be changed (upward) from
% its default to improve matters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\footfudgefiddle}{64}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\paragraphfootnotes}
% Declaration for paragraphed footnotes.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Made [RS] change to \cs{paragraphfootnotes}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\paragraphfootnotes}{%
\@namedef{foottextfontv@r}{\foottextfont}% % [RS]
\let\@footnotetext\@parafootnotetext
\dimen\footinsv@r=\footinsdim
\count\footinsv@r=1000\relax
\m@make@para@footgroup{v@r}%
\let\@footgroupv@r\@para@footgroupv@r
\let\@mpfootnotetext\@mpparafootnotetext
\m@make@mppara@footgroup{v@r}%
\let\mp@footgroupv@r\@mppara@footgroupv@r
{\foottextfont
\dimen0=\baselineskip
\multiply\dimen0 by 1024
\divide\dimen0 by \hsize \multiply\dimen0 by \footfudgefiddle
\xdef\footfudgefactor{\expandafter\strip@pt\dimen0 }}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@parafootnotetext}
% \cs{@parafootnotetext}\marg{text} is a paragraph version of
% \cs{@footnotetext}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@parafootnotetext}[1]{\insert\footinsv@r{
\foottextfont
\@preamfntext
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\setbox0=\vbox{\hsize=\maxdimen
\color@begingroup
\noindent \@parafootfmt{#1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mungebox}%
\m@mmf@prepare}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@parafootfmt}
% \cs{@parafootfmt}\marg{text} is a paragraph version of
% \cs{@footfmt}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@parafootfmt}[1]{%
\parindent=\z@
\parfillskip=0pt \@plus 1fil
{\footfootmark\strut {\foottextfont #1}\penalty-10}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mpparafootnotetext}
% \cs{@mpparafootnotetext}\marg{text} is a paragraph version of
% \cs{@mpfootnotetext}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@mpparafootnotetext}[1]{%
\global\setbox\@mpfootinsv@r\vbox{%
\unvbox\@mpfootinsv@r
\foottextfont \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\setbox0=\vbox{\hsize=\maxdimen
\color@begingroup
\noindent \@parafootfmt{#1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mungebox}%
\m@mmf@prepare}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\paragraphfootstyle}
% \cs{paragraphfootstyle}\marg{series} specifies paragraphed footnote style
% for \meta{series}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\paragraphfootstyle}[1]{%
\m@make@parafootnotetext{#1}%
\m@make@mpparafootnotetext{#1}%
\m@make@parafootfmt{#1}%
\m@make@para@footgroup{#1}%
\m@make@mppara@footgroup{#1}%
\m@make@para@footstart{#1}%
\@namelongdef{@footnotetext#1}##1{%
\@nameuse{@parafootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
\@namelongdef{@mpfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\@nameuse{@mpparafootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
\@namedef{@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@para@footgroup#1}}%
\@namedef{mp@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@mppara@footgroup#1}}%
\@namedef{@footstart#1}{\@nameuse{@para@footstart#1}}%
\expandafter\dimen\csname footins#1\endcsname=\footinsdim
\expandafter\count\csname footins#1\endcsname=1000\relax
{\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\dimen0=\baselineskip
\multiply\dimen0 by 1024
\divide\dimen0 by \hsize \multiply\dimen0 by 64
\xdef\footfudgefactor{\expandafter\strip@pt\dimen0 }}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@parafootnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@parafootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@parafootnotetext}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@parafootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@parafootnotetext#1}##1{%
\insert\@nameuse{footins#1}{
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\@preamfntext
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote#1\endcsname \@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\setbox0=\vbox{\hsize=\maxdimen
\color@begingroup
\noindent \@nameuse{@parafootfmt#1}{##1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mungebox}%
\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mpparafootnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@mpparafootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@mpparafootnotetext}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mpparafootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@mpparafootnotetext#1}##1{%
\global\setbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}\vbox{%
\unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote#1\endcsname\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\setbox0=\vbox{\hsize=\maxdimen
\color@begingroup
\noindent \@nameuse{@parafootfmt#1}{##1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mungebox}%
\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@parafootfmt}
% \cs{m@make@parafootfmt}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@parafootfmt}\meta{series}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Removed space from \cs{m@make@parafootfmt} [RS]}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@parafootfmt}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@parafootfmt#1}##1{%
\parindent=\z@
\parfillskip=0pt \@plus 1fil
{\@nameuse{footfootmark#1}\strut
{\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}##1}\penalty-10}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@para@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@para@footgroup}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@para@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{@para@footgroup#1}{%
\unvbox\@nameuse{footins#1}
\m@mmakehboxofhboxes
\setbox0=\hbox{\unhbox0 \m@mremovehboxes}%
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\noindent\unhbox0\par}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mppara@footgroup}
% \cs{m@make@mppara@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@mppara@footgroup}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mppara@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{@mppara@footgroup#1}{%
\unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}
\m@mmakehboxofhboxes
\setbox0=\hbox{\unhbox0 \m@mremovehboxes}%
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\noindent\unhbox0\par}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@para@footstart}
% \cs{m@make@para@footstart}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@para@footstart}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@para@footstart}[1]{%
\@namedef{@para@footstart#1}{%
\vskip\bigskipamount
\leftskip=\z@
\rightskip=\z@
\parindent=\z@
\vskip\skip\@nameuse{footins#1}%
\footnoterule}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \section{Change marks} \label{sec:vct}
%
% When preparing a manuscript it normally goes through
% several iterations. The commands provided may be used to identify
% changes made to a document during its life cycle.
%
% The code for this part of the class is based on the version
% controls in the \Lpack{iso} class~\cite{ISOCLASS}.
%
% \subsection{Print control}
%
% Members of the development group often need to see the changes
% between document versions, while the general public does not.
% \begin{macro}{\ifchangemarks}
% This controls the appearence of the version controls defined
% below.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifchangemarks\changemarksfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% The marks only work properly when the |draft| option
% is in effect. Also, the command |\changemarkstrue| must be
% put in the document preamble.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\v@rid}
% This acts as an alias for |\marginpar| when both |changemarks| is
% true and the |draft| option is in effect, otherwise it throws
% away its two arguments.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{@bsphack} and \cs{@esphack} to \cs{v@rid}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\v@rid}[2]{%
\@bsphack
\ifchangemarks
\ifdraftdoc
\marginpar[#1]{#2}%
\fi\fi
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Change marking}
%
% The following commands flag changes in the typeset document. Each of
% the commands takes one parameter which is intended to be a
% `change number' or comment for tracking purposes. A symbol and
% the \meta{change-id} is put into the margin near where the command
% is given. The marking commands should be attached to some word or
% punctuation mark in the text otherwise extraneous spaces may creep
% into the final document.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{@bsphack} and \cs{@esphack} to changemarks}
% \begin{macro}{\added}
% |\added{|\meta{change-id}|}|
% Flags, with the symbol $\oplus$, that something has been added
% to the manuscript.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\added}[1]{%
\@bsphack
\ifchangemarks
\v@rid{\small$\oplus$ #1}{\small$\oplus$ #1}%
\fi
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\deleted}
% |\deleted{|\meta{change-id}|}|
% Flags, with the symbol $\neq$, that something has been deleted
% from the manuscript.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\deleted}[1]{%
\@bsphack
\ifchangemarks
\v@rid{\small$\neq$ #1}{\small$\neq$ #1}%
\fi
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\changed}
% |\changed{|\meta{change-id}|}|
% Flags, with the symbol $\Leftrightarrow$, that something
% has been changed in the text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\changed}[1]{%
\@bsphack
\ifchangemarks
\v@rid{\small$\Leftrightarrow$ #1}{\small$\Leftrightarrow$ #1}%
\fi
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Trimming marks}
%
% The \Lopt{showtrims} options prints trimming marks at the corners
% of the logical page. The code for this comes from ideas gleaned
% from Martin Schr\"{o}der's \Lpack{everyshi} package~\cite{EVERYSHI}
% and Melchior Franz's \Lpack{crop} package~\cite{CROP}.
% The implementation and any errors are mine.
%
% The implementation up to October 2002 was limited to putting a cross
% at the page corners. The manual directed users to the \Lpack{crop}
% packge if they wanted anything more. In October 2002 the implementation
% was substantially extended. The background to this is below.
%
% Before the release of version 1.7 of \Lpack{crop} in May 2002 its
% author asked me to make some changes to \Lpack{memoir} that would be
% helpful to him, and I did so. Later he told me that the changes were
% unnecessary and I reverted to the original \Lpack{memoir} code.
%
% On 2002/10/06 Peter Heslin (\url{peter.heslin@ucd.ie}) started a
% thread on \url{comp.text.tex} titled `Incompatibility of memoir.cls
% and crop.sty' in which he said that \Lpack{memoir} and \Lpack{crop}
% did not seem to work together. The following are some snippets from
% that thread, identified by the various proponents.
% \begin{description}
% \item[crop] Ah, yes. It cannot work with all those |\settrims| etc.
% crop.sty does only respect |\stock{width,height}|,
% but none of the other memoir specific trim marks stuff \ldots
%
% \item[crop] \ldots I'm not a memoir expert. crop.sty respects all the
% usual LaTeX paper dimensions and simply puts the marks around the
% page. It works with all standard classes and the KOMA classes. memoir
% seems to do things completely differently \ldots
%
% Sorry, but I'm afraid I have to pass the problem to the memoir
% author. \ldots
%
% \item[memoir] I will try and take a look at the problem but I'm
% not a crop expert --- I've never used it. However it seems odd to
% me that crop doesn't work with memopir. Memoir provides a different
% interface for specifying the page layout but then translates everything
% to the standard length variables. \ldots
%
% \item[crop] You've just taken code from it |...:->|
%
% crop doesn't have its own idea at all. It just uses that of DEK
% and LaTeX, which says, that the reference point of the output box
% in the output routine is assumed 1 inch to the left [later corrected
% to right] and 1 inch down
% from the upper left (virtual) paper corner.
%
% \item[crop] With other words: crop changes |\hoffset| and |\voffset|,
% in order to center the logical (virtual) page on the physical sheet
% of paper, in the middle of the crop marks. The length macros
% |\evensidemargin| and |\oddsidemargin| are unchanged and refer still
% to the logical page (modulo 1 inch).
%
% The memoir class, in contrast (mis)uses the LaTeX margins
% |\even(odd)sidemargin| for that purpose.
%
% Thus, the meaning of |\even(odd)sidemargin| is different
% in both packages.
% \end{description}
%
% Given all the above I concluded that \Lpack{crop} would remain
% as it was, and that in order to satisfy Peter Heslin I would have
% to extend the trimming marks. The following is limited to extensions
% asked for by Peter Heslin.
%
% \begin{macro}{\trimmark}
% This is a cross
% in a zero sized picture for marking the corner of a logical page. Up to
% version 1.0 the macro used |\setlength| for adjusting the |\unitlength|
% but Henrik Holm\footnote{Message to \ctt{} on 2002/01/04
% (\texttt{h.holm@spray.no})} discovered that if the \Lpack{calc} package
% is used then LaTeX complains about a missing number.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/04}{Removed \cs{setlength} from \cs{trimmark}. Stops
% problem with the calc package.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\trimmark}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\unitlength 1cm
\thinlines
\put(-2,0){\line(1,0){4}}
\put(0,-2){\line(0,1){4}}
\end{picture}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpictl}
% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpictr}
% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpicbl}
% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpicbr}
% `L' shaped trim marks for four corners.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{Ltrimpictl}, \cs{Ltrimpictr}, \cs{Ltrimpicbl}
% and \cs{Ltrimpicbr}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Ltrimpictl}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\unitlength 1mm
\thinlines
\put(-2,0){\line(-1,0){18}}
\put(0,2){\line(0,1){18}}
\end{picture}}
\newcommand*{\Ltrimpictr}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\unitlength 1mm
\thinlines
\put(2,0){\line(1,0){18}}
\put(0,2){\line(0,1){18}}
\end{picture}}
\newcommand*{\Ltrimpicbl}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\unitlength 1mm
\thinlines
\put(-2,0){\line(-1,0){18}}
\put(0,-2){\line(0,-1){18}}
\end{picture}}
\newcommand*{\Ltrimpicbr}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\unitlength 1mm
\thinlines
\put(2,0){\line(1,0){18}}
\put(0,-2){\line(0,-1){18}}
\end{picture}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Ftrimpicbl}
% Frame the page.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{Ftrimpictl}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Ftrimpicbl}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\unitlength 1pt
\thinlines
\put(0,0){\framebox(\strip@pt\paperwidth,\strip@pt\paperheight){}}
\end{picture}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tmarktl}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarktr}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarkbl}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarkbr}
% The trimming marks used for corner display.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{tmarktl}, \cs{tmarktr}, \cs{tmarkbl}
% and \cs{tmarkbr}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tmarktl}{\trimmark}
\newcommand*{\tmarktr}{\trimmark}
\newcommand*{\tmarkbl}{\trimmark}
\newcommand*{\tmarkbr}{\trimmark}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tmarktm}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarkml}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarkmr}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarkbm}
% The trimming marks used for mid-side display.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{tmarktm}, \cs{tmarkml}, \cs{tmarkmr}
% and \cs{tmarkbm}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tmarktm}{}
\newcommand*{\tmarkml}{}
\newcommand*{\tmarkmr}{}
\newcommand*{\tmarkbm}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\trimXmarks}
% \begin{macro}{\trimLmarks}
% \begin{macro}{\trimFrame}
% \begin{macro}{\trimNone}
% These are declarations for the different kinds of trimming marks.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{trimXmarks}, \cs{trimLmarks},
% \cs{trimFrame} and \cs{trimNone}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\trimXmarks}{%
\let\tmarktl\trimmark
\let\tmarktr\trimmark
\let\tmarkbl\trimmark
\let\tmarkbr\trimmark
}
\newcommand*{\trimLmarks}{%
\let\tmarktl\Ltrimpictl
\let\tmarktr\Ltrimpictr
\let\tmarkbl\Ltrimpicbl
\let\tmarkbr\Ltrimpicbr
}
\newcommand*{\trimFrame}{%
\let\tmarktl\null
\let\tmarktr\null
\let\tmarkbl\Ftrimpicbl
\let\tmarkbr\null
}
\newcommand*{\trimNone}{%
\let\tmarktl\relax
\let\tmarktr\relax
\let\tmarkbl\relax
\let\tmarkbr\relax
\let\tmarktm\relax
\let\tmarkml\relax
\let\tmarkmr\relax
\let\tmarkbm\relax
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\trimmarks}
% This positions four marks (|\trimmark|) at the corners of a
% logical page. It is basically a |\vbox| with zero height and width.
%
% Bastiaan Niels Veelo reported (2003/07/11) odd things (e.g., some
% macros ignored) when changing trim marks. Turns out to be related
% to the use of |\protect|.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{trimmarks} to work properly with the oneside option}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Changed \cs{trimmarks} to use \cs{tmarktl}, etc.,
% instead of four \cs{trimmark}s}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Fiddled \cs{protect} in \cs{trimmaks}
% (from patch v1.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\trimmarks}{%
\vbox to \z@{\vskip-1in \vskip\trimtop % top of logical page
\hb@xt@\z@{\hskip-1in
\ifodd\c@page
\hskip\stockwidth \hskip-\trimedge \hskip-\paperwidth
\else
\if@twoside
\hskip\trimedge % left of logical page
\else
\hskip\stockwidth \hskip-\trimedge \hskip-\paperwidth
\fi
\fi
\vbox to \paperheight{%
\let\protect\relax % <- v1.4 addition
\hb@xt@\paperwidth{\tmarktl\hfil\tmarktm\hfil\tmarktr}%
\vfil
\hb@xt@\paperwidth{\tmarkml\hfil\tmarkmr}%
\vfil
\hb@xt@\paperwidth{\tmarkbl\hfil\tmarkbm\hfil\tmarkbr}}%
\hss}%
\vss}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@sheetsequence}
% Peter Heslin asked for the ability to add a sequential page number
% (1 for the first page, N for the last page, no matter what value
% the page counter has) to the trimming marks.
%
% |\c@sheetsequence| is a new counter for pages starting at the
% beginning and independent
% of the standard page counter. This should not be reset by anything.
% The counter increment has to be added to the output routine.
%
% This may also be useful for page N of M numbering.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added sheetsequence counter.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{sheetsequence}
\setcounter{sheetsequence}{1}
\renewcommand{\thesheetsequence}{\@arabic\c@sheetsequence}
\g@addto@macro{\@outputpage}{\stepcounter{sheetsequence}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@lastsheet}
% \begin{macro}{\c@lastpage}
% While we're at it, might as well provide for lastpage and lastsheet counters
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added lastsheet and lastpage functions.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{lastsheet}
\setcounter{lastsheet}{0}
\newcounter{lastpage}
\setcounter{lastpage}{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dol@stsheet}
% \begin{macro}{\dol@stpage}
% These two macros write the values of lastsheet and lastpage to the
% \file{aux} file. They have to be called at the end of the document
% after a |\clearpage| to flush out any floats.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{In \cs{dol@stpage} use the page counter value,
% not \cs{thepage} otherwise problems with
% non-arabic page numbers (patch 1.1)}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/21}{In \cs{dol@stpage} use the sheet counter value,
% not \cs{thesheetsequence} otherwise problems
% if (e.g., hangul.sty) \cs{@arabic} is redefined}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Made \cs{dol@stsheet} and \cs{dol@stpage}
% obey \cs{nofiles}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\dol@stsheet}{%
\if@filesw
\addtocounter{sheetsequence}{-1}%
\immediate\write\@auxout%
{\string\setcounter{lastsheet}{\the\c@sheetsequence}}%
\stepcounter{sheetsequence}%
\fi}
\newcommand{\dol@stpage}{%
\if@filesw
\addtocounter{page}{-1}%
\immediate\write\@auxout%
{\string\setcounter{lastpage}{\the\c@page}}%
\stepcounter{page}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% I originally used this: \\
% \verb?\AtEndDocument{\clearpage\dol@stsheet\dol@stpage}?
% but following the CTT thread \textit{AtEndDocument produces unwanted page
% break}, 2004/03/11, and in particular Dan Luecking's response I now
% try as hard as possible to do it right at the end, but even this is not
% 100\% reliable. The only way to ensure reliability is to modify the kernel
% \verb?\enddocument? which doesn't seem to be a particularly wise thing
% to do.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Changed location of calls to \cs{dol@stsheet}
% and \cs{dol@stpage}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{\AtEndDocument{\clearpage\dol@stsheet\dol@stpage}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Any marks are put onto the pages by adding to the |\shipout|
% routine.
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@oldshipout}
% Keep a copy of the current version of |\shipout| in |\mem@oldshipout|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\mem@oldshipout\shipout
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@shipi}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@shipii}
% Effectively these will add the |\trimmarks| to the box holding
% the contents of the page. Note that any \cs{makeindex} must come \emph{before} \Lpack{pagesel} (and \Lpack{selectp}) package.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Changed \cs{mem@shipii} for the pagesel package, courtesy James Szinger (mempatch v311)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\mem@shipi}{%
\ifvoid\@cclv\expandafter\aftergroup\fi\mem@shipii}
\newcommand*\mem@shipii{%
\ifvoid\@cclv
\mem@oldshipout\box\@cclv
\else
\mem@oldshipout\vbox{\trimmarks\unvbox\@cclv}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\shipout}
% Our new version of |\shipout|, which is only needed for the
% \Lopt{showtrims} option. This adds |\mem@shipi| to the page box
% which then calls the original version of |\shipout|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifshowtrims
\renewcommand*{\shipout}{\afterassignment\mem@shipi\setbox\@cclv=}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
% \section{Verbatims, boxes, and files}
%
% All the code in this section was added for version 1.2 of the class.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Section `Verbatims, boxes and files' added}
%
% \subsection{Modified version of the verbatim package}
%
% Much of this is from the \Lpack{verbatim} package code~\cite{VERBATIM}.
% Unless indicated otherwise, the code and commentary is from that
% package.
%
%
% \subsubsection{Preliminaries}
%
% \begin{macro}{\every@verbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\afterevery@verbatim}
% The hook (i.e.\ token register) |\every@verbatim|
% is initialized to \meta{empty}.
%
% PW added the |\afterevery@verbatim| hook.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\every@verbatim
\every@verbatim={}
\newtoks\afterevery@verbatim
\afterevery@verbatim={}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makeother}
% |\@makeother| takes as argument a character and changes
% its category code to $12$ (other).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@makeother#1{\catcode`#112\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vobeyspaces}
% The macro |\@vobeyspaces| causes spaces in the input
% to be printed as spaces in the output.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\catcode`\ =\active%
\def\x{\def\@vobeyspaces{\catcode`\ \active\let \@xobeysp}}
\expandafter\endgroup\x
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xobeysp}
% The macro |\@xobeysp| produces exactly one space in
% the output, protected against breaking just before it.
% (|\@M| is an abbreviation for the number $10000$.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xobeysp{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\ }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@line}
% We use a newly defined token register called |\verbatim@line|
% that will be used as the character buffer.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\verbatim@line
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% PW. I have extended the original \Lpack{verbatim} package code to handle
% TABs within verbatims. Normally TeX replaces a TAB by either a single space or
% ignores it altogether. For this purpose I have bits of code from the \Lpack{moreverb}
% package~\cite{MOREVERB} for handling TABs.
%
% \textit{Code and commentary from moreverb.}
%
% We define a few auxiliary macros and counters for expanding tabs.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\tab@position
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xobeytab}
% |\@xobeytab| puts enough spaces in to get to the next nominal
% tab stop
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xobeytab{%
\loop
\toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@\@xobeysp}%
\advance\tab@position-1
\ifnum\tab@position>0 \repeat
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vobeytabs}
% |\@vobeytabs| initialises use of \cs{@xobeytab}. Needs to be
% executed within a group, as mustn't be allowed to leak out into the
% wide world.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\catcode`\^^I=\active
\gdef\@vobeytabs{\catcode`\^^I\active\let^^I\@xobeytab}%
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@tabexpand}
% |\verbatim@tabexpand|\meta{body of line}|\@nil| processes every
% character of a line by tail recursion, counting the characters and
% juggling things when a tab is encountered.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@tabexpand#1{%
\ifx#1\@nil
\the\toks@
\expandafter\par
\else
\ifx#1\@xobeytab
\@xobeytab
\else
% \end{macrocode}
%
% We can safely put |\@xobeysp| into the token register, since it
% does precisely what we need
% \begin{macrocode}
\toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@#1}%
\advance\tab@position\m@ne
\fi
\ifnum\tab@position=0 \tab@position\tab@size \fi
\expandafter\verbatim@tabexpand
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \textit{End of code and commentary from moreverb.}
%
% PW. Some macros for turning tabbing on and off.
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabson}
% \begin{macro}{\tabsoff}
% \begin{macro}{\@maybeobeytabs}
% |\tabson| turns tabbing on, and |\tabsoff| turns it off. Default
% is no tabbing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ift@bs
\newcommand{\tabson}[1][4]{%
\ifnum\@ne > #1\relax
\tabsoff
\else
\t@bstrue
\def\tab@size{#1\relax}%
\def\@maybeobeytabs{\@vobeytabs}%
\fi
}
\newcommand{\tabsoff}{%
\t@bsfalse
\def\tab@size{\z@}%
\def\@maybeobeytabs{}%
}
\tabsoff
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabverbatim@processline}
% Process a line with TABs (extracted from \Lpack{moreverb}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\tabverbatim@processline{\tab@position\tab@size
\toks@{}%
\expandafter\verbatim@tabexpand\the\verbatim@line\@nil}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\notabverbatim@processline}
% Processes a line ignoring TABs (this is the original \Lpack{verbatim}
% package definition of |\verbatim@processline|).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\notabverbatim@processline{\the\verbatim@line\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \textit{We are now back to the \Lpack{verbatim} code.}
%
% The following four macros are defined globally in a way suitable for
% the \texttt{verbatim} and \texttt{verbatim*} environments.
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@startline}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@addtoline}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@processline}
% |\verbatim@startline| initializes processing of a line
% by emptying the character buffer (|\verbatim@line|).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@startline{\verbatim@line{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% |\verbatim@addtoline| adds the tokens in its argument
% to our buffer register |\verbatim@line| without expanding
% them.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@addtoline#1{%
\verbatim@line\expandafter{\the\verbatim@line#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% Processing a line inside a \texttt{verbatim} or \texttt{verbatim*}
% environment means printing it.
% Ending the line means that we have to begin a new paragraph.
% We use |\par| for this purpose. Note that |\par|
% is redefined in |\@verbatim| to force \TeX{} into horizontal
% mode and to insert an empty box so that empty lines in the input
% do appear in the output.
% (PW changed next line from \\
% |\def\verbatim@processline{\the\verbatim@line\par}|
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@processline{\notabverbatim@processline}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@finish}
% As a default, |\verbatim@finish| processes the remaining
% characters.
% When this macro is called we are facing the following problem:
% when the |\end{verbatim}|
% command is encountered |\verbatim@processline| is called
% to process the characters preceding the command on the same
% line. If there are none, an empty line would be output if we
% did not check for this case.
%
% If the line is empty |\the\verbatim@line| expands to
% nothing. To test this we use a trick similar to that on p.\ 376
% of the \TeX{}book, but with |$|\ldots|$| instead of
% the |!| tokens. These |$| tokens can never have the same
% category code as a |$| token that might possibly appear in the
% token register |\verbatim@line|, as such a token will always have
% been read with category code $12$ (other).
% Note that |\ifcat| expands the following tokens so that
% |\the\verbatim@line| is replaced by the accumulated
% characters
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@finish{\ifcat$\the\verbatim@line$\else
\verbatim@processline\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{The \texttt{verbatim} and \texttt{verbatim*} environments}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@font}
% We start by defining the macro |\verbatim@font| that is
% to select the font and to set font-dependent parameters.
% Then we go through |\verbatim@nolig@list| to avoid
% certain ligatures.
% |\verbatim@nolig@list| is a macro defined in the \LaTeXe{} kernel
% to expand to
% \begin{verbatim}
% \do\`\do\<\do\>\do\,\do\'\do\-
% \end{verbatim}
% All the characters in this list can be part of a ligature in some
% font or other.
%
% PW. This is the original version which I'm going to replace.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\verbatim@font{\normalfont\ttfamily
% \hyphenchar\font\m@ne
% \let\do\do@noligs
% \verbatim@nolig@list}
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setverbatimfont}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mverbfont}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@font}
% User level handle for changing the font used for verbatim text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setverbatimfont}[1]{\def\m@mverbfont{#1}}
\setverbatimfont{\normalfont\ttfamily}
\def\verbatim@font{\m@mverbfont
\hyphenchar\font\m@ne
\let\do\do@noligs
\verbatim@nolig@list}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@verbatim}
% The macro |\@verbatim| sets up things properly.
% First of all, the tokens of the |\every@verbatim| hook
% are inserted.
% Then a \texttt{trivlist} environment is started and its first
% |\item| command inserted.
% Each line of the \texttt{verbatim} or \texttt{verbatim*}
% environment will be treated as a separate paragraph.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@verbatim{\the\every@verbatim
\trivlist \item \relax
% \end{macrocode}
% The following extra vertical space is for compatibility with the
% \LaTeX kernel: otherwise, using the |verbatim| package changes
% the vertical spacing of a |verbatim| environment nested within a
% |quote| environment.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% The paragraph parameters are set appropriately:
% the penalty at the beginning of the environment,
% left and right margins, paragraph indentation, the glue to
% fill the last line, and the vertical space between paragraphs.
% The latter space has to be zero since we do not want to add
% extra space between lines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@beginparpenalty \predisplaypenalty
\leftskip\@totalleftmargin\rightskip\z@
\parindent\z@\parfillskip\@flushglue\parskip\z@
% \end{macrocode}
% There's one point to make here:
% the \texttt{list} environment uses \TeX's |\parshape|
% primitive to get a special indentation for the first line
% of the list.
% If the list begins with a \texttt{verbatim} environment
% this |\parshape| is still in effect.
% Therefore we have to reset this internal parameter explicitly.
% We could do this by assigning $0$ to |\parshape|.
% However, there is a simpler way to achieve this:
% we simply tell \TeX{} to start a new paragraph.
% As is explained on p.~103 of the \TeX{}book, this resets
% |\parshape| to zero.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@@par
% \end{macrocode}
% We now ensure that |\par| has the correct definition,
% namely to force \TeX{} into horizontal mode
% and to include an empty box.
% This is to ensure that empty lines do appear in the output.
% Afterwards, we insert the |\interlinepenalty| since \TeX{}
% does not add a penalty between paragraphs (here: lines)
% by its own initiative. Otherwise a |verbatim| environment
% could be broken across pages even if a |\samepage|
% declaration were present.
%
% However, in a top-aligned minipage, this will result in an extra
% empty line added at the top. Therefore, a slightly more
% complicated construct is necessary.
% One of the important things here is the inclusion of
% |\leavevmode| as the first macro in the first line, for example,
% a blank verbatim line is the first thing in a list item.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\par{%
\if@tempswa
\leavevmode\null\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty
\else
\@tempswatrue
\ifhmode\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty\fi
\fi}%
% \end{macrocode}
% But to avoid an error message when the environment
% doesn't contain any text, we redefine |\@noitemerr|
% which will in this case be called by |\endtrivlist|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@noitemerr{\@warning{No verbatim text}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we call |\obeylines| to make the end of line character
% active,
% \begin{macrocode}
\obeylines
% \end{macrocode}
% change the category code of all special characters,
% to $12$ (other).
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\do\@makeother \dospecials
% \end{macrocode}
% and switch to the font to be used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\verbatim@font
% \end{macrocode}
% To avoid a breakpoint after the labels box, we remove the penalty
% put there by the list macros: another use of |\unpenalty|!
% \begin{macrocode}
\everypar \expandafter{\the\everypar \unpenalty}%
% \end{macrocode}
% PW added next code at end of |\@verbatim|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\wrapright\the\afterevery@verbatim}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim*}
% Now we define the toplevel macros.
% |\verbatim| is slightly changed:
% after setting up things properly it calls
% |\verbatim@start|.
% This is done inside a group, so that |\verbatim| can be used
% directly, without |\begin|.
%
% PW. The following is the original code, but I want a version of
% |verbatim| that recognises TABs.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \begin{macrocode}
% \def\verbatim{%
% \begingroup\@verbatim \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces
% \verbatim@start}
% \end{macrocode}
% |\verbatim*| is defined accordingly.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \@namedef{verbatim*}{\begingroup\@verbatim\verbatim@start}
% \def\endverbatim{\endtrivlist\endgroup}
% \expandafter\let\csname endverbatim*\endcsname=\endverbatim
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% PW. My code for these is a modified version of the original \Lpack{verbatim}
% code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim{\begingroup
\ift@bs
\def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
\fi
\@verbatim \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs\verbatim@start}
\@namedef{verbatim*}{\begingroup
\ift@bs
\def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
\fi
\@verbatim\@maybeobeytabs\verbatim@start}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\endverbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\endverbatim*}
% To end the \texttt{verbatim} and \texttt{verbatim*}
% environments it is only necessary to finish the
% \texttt{trivlist} environment started in |\@verbatim| and
% close the corresponding group, and handle\footnote{Noted by
% Zarko Cucej (\url{zarko.cucej@uni-mb.si}).} following (non-) paragraph,
% by using \cs{@doendpe}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{@doendpe} to \cs{endverbatim}
% (from patch v1.8)}
% \changes{v2.0a}{2004/03/01}{Refixed \cs{endverbatim}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endverbatim{\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}
\@namelet{endverbatim*}\endverbatim
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{The \texttt{comment} environment}
%
% The |\comment| macro is similar to |\verbatim*|.
% However, we do not need to switch fonts or set special
% formatting parameters such as |\parindent| or |\parskip|.
% We need only set the category code of all special characters
% to $12$ (other) and that of |^^M| (the end of line character)
% to $13$ (active).
% The latter is needed for macro parameter delimiter matching in
% the internal macros defined below.
% In contrast to the default definitions used by the
% |\verbatim| and |\verbatim*| macros,
% we define |\verbatim@addtoline| to throw away its argument
% and |\verbatim@processline|, |\verbatim@startline|,
% and |\verbatim@finish| to act as no-ops.
% Then we call |\verbatim@|.
% But the first thing we do is to call |\@bsphack| so that
% this environment has no influence whatsoever upon the spacing.
%
% PW: This is the original code for the |comment| environment,
% which I'm going to change.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\comment{\@bsphack
% \let\do\@makeother\dospecials\catcode`\^^M\active
% \let\verbatim@startline\relax
% \let\verbatim@addtoline\@gobble
% \let\verbatim@processline\relax
% \let\verbatim@finish\relax
% \verbatim@}
% \end{verbatim}
% |\endcomment| is very simple: it only calls
% |\@esphack| to take care of the spacing.
% The |\end| macro closes the group and therefore takes care
% of restoring everything we changed.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \let\endcomment=\@esphack
% \end{verbatim}
%
% PW: The remainder of this section is my code.
%
% \begin{macro}{\setupcomment}
% |\setupcomment| does all the |\let|s in the original |\comment| code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setupcomment}{%
\let\do\@makeother\dospecials\catcode`\^^M\active
\let\verbatim@startline\relax
\let\verbatim@addtoline\@gobble
\let\verbatim@processline\relax
\let\verbatim@finish\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The macros below do no checking to see if something has (not) been defined
% previously. It's `user beware' time.
%
% \begin{macro}{\newcomment}
% |\newcomment|\marg{name} creates a new comment environment called
% \meta{name}. This is a generalisation of the original comment code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newcomment}[1]{%
\expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname{\@bsphack\setupcomment\verbatim@}%
\expandafter\let\csname end#1\endcsname=\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\commentsoff}
% |\commentsoff|\marg{name} switches off the \meta{name} comment
% environment by defining the relevent macros to do nothing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\commentsoff}[1]{%
\expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname{}%
\expandafter\def\csname end#1\endcsname{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\commentson}
% |\commentson|\marg{name} switches on the \meta{name} comment
% environment. It has to do the same things as |\newcomment| does,
% so let |\newcomment| do the work.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\commentson}[1]{\newcomment{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% We had better supply the |comment| environment, as promised.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcomment{comment}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% PW: That is the end of my changes and extensions to the original
% |comment| environment code.
%
%
% \subsubsection{The main loop}
%
% Here comes the tricky part:
% During the definition of the macros we need to use the special
% characters |\|, |{|, and |}| not only with their
% normal category codes,
% but also with category code $12$ (other).
% We achieve this by the following trick:
% first we tell \TeX{} that |\|, |{|, and |}|
% are the lowercase versions of |!|, |[|, and |]|.
% Then we replace every occurrence of |\|, |{|, and |}|
% that should be read with category code $12$ by |!|, |[|,
% and |]|, respectively,
% and give the whole list of tokens to |\lowercase|,
% knowing that category codes are not altered by this primitive!
%
% But first we have ensure that
% |!|, |[|, and |]| themselves have
% the correct category code!
% To allow special settings of these codes we hide their setting in
% the macro |\vrb@catcodes|. If it is already defined our new
% definition is skipped.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{vrb@catcodes}%
{\def\vrb@catcodes{%
\catcode`\!12\catcode`\[12\catcode`\]12}}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% This trick allows us to use this code for applications where other
% category codes are in effect.
%
% We start a group to keep the category code changes local.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\vrb@catcodes
\lccode`\!=`\\ \lccode`\[=`\{ \lccode`\]=`\}
% \end{macrocode}
% We also need the end-of-line character |^^M|,
% as an active character.
% If we were to simply write |\catcode`\^^M=\active|
% then we would get an unwanted active end of line character
% at the end of every line of the following macro definitions.
% Therefore we use the same trick as above:
% we write a tilde |~| instead of |^^M| and
% pretend that the
% latter is the lowercase variant of the former.
% Thus we have to ensure now that the tilde character has
% category code $13$ (active).
% \begin{macrocode}
\catcode`\~=\active \lccode`\~=`\^^M
% \end{macrocode}
% The use of the |\lowercase| primitive leads to one problem:
% the uppercase character `|C|' needs to be used in the
% code below and its case must be preserved.
% So we add the command:
% \begin{macrocode}
\lccode`\C=`\C
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we start the token list passed to |\lowercase|.
% We use the following little trick (proposed by Bernd Raichle):
% The very first token in the token list we give to |\lowercase| is
% the |\endgroup| primitive. This means that it is processed by
% \TeX{} immediately after |\lowercase| has finished its operation,
% thus ending the group started by |\begingroup| above. This avoids
% the global definition of all macros.
% \begin{macrocode}
\lowercase{\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@start}
% The purpose of |\verbatim@start| is to check whether there
% are any characters on the same line as the |\begin{verbatim}|
% and to pretend that they were on a line by themselves.
% On the other hand, if there are no characters remaining
% on the current line we shall just find an end of line character.
% |\verbatim@start| performs its task by first grabbing the
% following character (its argument).
% This argument is then compared to an active |^^M|,
% the end of line character.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@start#1{%
\verbatim@startline
\if\noexpand#1\noexpand~%
% \end{macrocode}
% If this is true we transfer control to |\verbatim@|
% to process the next line. We use
% |\next| as the macro which will continue the work.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\next\verbatim@
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise, we define |\next| to expand to a call
% to |\verbatim@| followed by the character just
% read so that it is reinserted into the text.
% This means that those characters remaining on this line
% are handled as if they formed a line by themselves.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else \def\next{\verbatim@#1}\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally we call |\next|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\next}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@}
% The three macros |\verbatim@|, |\verbatim@@|,
% and |\verbatim@@@| form the ``main loop'' of the
% \texttt{verbatim} environment.
% The purpose of |\verbatim@| is to read exactly one line
% of input.
% |\verbatim@@| and |\verbatim@@@| work together to
% find out whether the four characters
% |\end| (all with category code $12$ (other)) occur in that
% line.
% If so, |\verbatim@@@| will call
% |\verbatim@test| to check whether this |\end| is
% part of |\end{verbatim}| and will terminate the environment
% if this is the case.
% Otherwise we continue as if nothing had happened.
% So let's have a look at the definition of |\verbatim@|:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@#1~{\verbatim@@#1!end\@nil}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Note that the |!| character will have been replaced by a
% |\| with category code $12$ (other) by the |\lowercase|
% primitive governing this code before the definition of this
% macro actually takes place.
% That means that
% it takes the line, puts |\end| (four character tokens)
% and |\@nil| (one control sequence token) as a
% delimiter behind it, and
% then calls |\verbatim@@|.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@@}
% |\verbatim@@| takes everything up to the next occurrence of
% the four characters |\end| as its argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@@#1!end{%
% \end{macrocode}
% That means: if they do not occur in the original line, then
% argument |#1| is the
% whole input line, and |\@nil| is the next token
% to be processed.
% However, if the four characters |\end| are part of the
% original line, then
% |#1| consists of the characters in front of |\end|,
% and the next token is the following character (always remember
% that the line was lengthened by five tokens).
% Whatever |#1| may be, it is verbatim text,
% so |#1| is added to the line currently built.
% \begin{macrocode}
\verbatim@addtoline{#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% The next token in the input stream
% is of special interest to us.
% Therefore |\futurelet| defines |\next| to be equal
% to it before calling |\verbatim@@@|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\futurelet\next\verbatim@@@}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@@@}
% |\verbatim@@@| will now read the rest of the tokens on
% the current line,
% up to the final |\@nil| token.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@@@#1\@nil{%
% \end{macrocode}
% If the first of the above two cases occurred, i.e.\ no
% |\end| characters were on that line, |#1| is empty
% and |\next| is equal to |\@nil|.
% This is easily checked.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\next\@nil
% \end{macrocode}
% If so, this was a simple line.
% We finish it by processing the line we accumulated so far.
% Then we prepare to read the next line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\verbatim@processline
\verbatim@startline
\let\next\verbatim@
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise we have to check what follows these |\end|
% tokens.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Before we continue, it's a good idea to stop for a moment
% and remember where we are:
% We have just read the four character tokens |\end|
% and must now check whether the name of the environment (surrounded
% by braces) follows.
% To this end we define a macro called |\@tempa|
% that reads exactly one character and decides what to do next.
% This macro should do the following: skip spaces until
% it encounters either a left brace or the end of the line.
% But it is important to remember which characters are skipped.
% The |\end|\meta{optional spaces}|{| characters
% may be part of the verbatim text, i.e.\ these characters
% must be printed.
%
% Assume for example that the current line contains
% \begin{verbatim*}
% \end {AVeryLongEnvironmentName}
%\end{verbatim*}
% As we shall soon see, the scanning mechanism implemented here
% will not find out that this is text to be printed until
% it has read the right brace.
% Therefore we need a way to accumulate the characters read
% so that we can reinsert them if necessary.
% The token register |\@temptokena| is used for this purpose.
%
% Before we do this we have to get rid of the superfluous
% |\end| tokens at the end of the line.
% To this end we define a temporary macro whose argument
% is delimited by |\end\@nil| (four character tokens
% and one control sequence token) to be used below
% on the rest of the line, after appending a |\@nil| token to it.
% (Note that this token can never appear in |#1|.)
% We use the following definition of
% |\@tempa| to get the rest of the line (after the first
% |\end|).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@tempa##1!end\@nil{##1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% We mentioned already that we use token register
% |\@temptokena|
% to remember the characters we skip, in case we need them again.
% We initialize this with the |\end| we have thrown away
% in the call to |\@tempa|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@temptokena{!end}%
% \end{macrocode}
% We shall now call |\verbatim@test|
% to process the characters
% remaining on the current line.
% But wait a moment: we cannot simply call this macro
% since we have already read the whole line.
% Therefore we have to first expand the macro |\@tempa| to insert
% them again after the |\verbatim@test| token.
% A |^^M| character is appended to denote the end of the line.
% (Remember that this character comes disguised as a tilde.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\next{\expandafter\verbatim@test\@tempa#1\@nil~}%
% \end{macrocode}
% That's almost all, but we still have to
% now call |\next| to do the work.
% \begin{macrocode}
\fi \next}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@test}
% We define |\verbatim@test| to investigate every token
% in turn.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@test#1{%
% \end{macrocode}
% First of all we set |\next| equal to |\verbatim@test|
% in case this macro must call itself recursively in order to
% skip spaces.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\next\verbatim@test
% \end{macrocode}
% We have to distinguish four cases:
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item The next token is a |^^M|, i.e.\ we reached
% the end of the line. That means that nothing
% special was found.
% Note that we use |\if| for the following
% comparisons so that the category code of the
% characters is irrelevant.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if\noexpand#1\noexpand~%
% \end{macrocode}
% We add the characters accumulated in token register
% |\@temptokena| to the current line. Since
% |\verbatim@addtoline| does not expand its argument,
% we have to do the expansion at this point. Then we
% |\let| |\next| equal to |\verbatim@|
% to prepare to read the next line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\the\@temptokena}%
\verbatim@processline
\verbatim@startline
\let\next\verbatim@
% \end{macrocode}
% \item A space character follows.
% This is allowed, so we add it to |\@temptokena|
% and continue.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else \if\noexpand#1
\@temptokena\expandafter{\the\@temptokena#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \item An open brace follows.
% This is the most interesting case.
% We must now collect characters until we read the closing
% brace and check whether they form the environment name.
% This will be done by |\verbatim@testend|, so here
% we let |\next| equal this macro.
% Again we will process the rest of the line, character
% by character.
% The characters forming the name of the environment will
% be accumulated in |\@tempc|.
% We initialize this macro to expand to nothing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else \if\noexpand#1\noexpand[%
\let\@tempc\@empty
\let\next\verbatim@testend
% \end{macrocode}
% Note that the |[| character will be a |{| when
% this macro is defined.
% \item Any other character means that the |\end| was part
% of the verbatim text.
% Add the characters to the current line and prepare to call
% |\verbatim@| to process the rest of the line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\the\@temptokena}%
\def\next{\verbatim@#1}%
\fi\fi\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{enumerate}
% The last thing this macro does is to call |\next|
% to continue processing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\next}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@testend}
% |\verbatim@testend| is called when
% |\end|\meta{optional spaces}|{| was seen.
% Its task is to scan everything up to the next |}|
% and to call |\verbatim@@testend|.
% If no |}| is found it must reinsert the characters it read
% and return to |\verbatim@|.
% The following definition is similar to that of
% |\verbatim@test|:
% it takes the next character and decides what to do.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@testend#1{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Again, we have four cases:
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item |^^M|: As no |}| is found in the current line,
% add the characters to the buffer. To avoid a
% complicated construction for expanding
% |\@temptokena|
% and |\@tempc| we do it in two steps. Then we
% continue with |\verbatim@| to process the
% next line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if\noexpand#1\noexpand~%
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\the\@temptokena[}%
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\@tempc}%
\verbatim@processline
\verbatim@startline
\let\next\verbatim@
% \end{macrocode}
% \item |}|: Call |\verbatim@@testend| to check
% if this is the right environment name.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else\if\noexpand#1\noexpand]%
\let\next\verbatim@@testend
% \end{macrocode}
% \item |\|: This character must not occur in the name of
% an environment. Thus we stop collecting characters.
% In principle, the same argument would apply to other
% characters as well, e.g., |{|.
% However, |\| is a special case, since it may be
% the first character of |\end|. This means that
% we have to look again for
% |\end{|\meta{environment name}|}|.
% Note that we prefixed the |!| by a |\noexpand|
% primitive, to protect ourselves against it being an
% active character.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else\if\noexpand#1\noexpand!%
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\the\@temptokena[}%
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\@tempc}%
\def\next{\verbatim@!}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \item Any other character: collect it and continue.
% We cannot use |\edef| to define |\@tempc|
% since its replacement text might contain active
% character tokens.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempc\expandafter
{\@tempc#1}\fi\fi\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{enumerate}
% As before, the macro ends by calling itself, to
% process the next character if appropriate.
% \begin{macrocode}
\next}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@@testend}
% Unlike the previous macros |\verbatim@@testend| is simple:
% it has only to check if the |\end{|\ldots|}|
% matches the corresponding |\begin{|\ldots|}|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@@testend{%
% \end{macrocode}
% We use |\next| again to define the things that are
% to be done.
% Remember that the name of the current environment is
% held in |\@currenvir|, the characters accumulated
% by |\verbatim@testend| are in |\@tempc|.
% So we simply compare these and prepare to execute
% |\end{|\meta{current environment}|}|
% macro if they match.
% Before we do this we call |\verbatim@finish| to process
% the last line.
% We define |\next| via |\edef| so that
% |\@currenvir| is replaced by its expansion.
% Therefore we need |\noexpand| to inhibit the expansion
% of |\end| at this point.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\@tempc\@currenvir
\verbatim@finish
\edef\next{\noexpand\end{\@currenvir}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Without this trick the |\end| command would not be able
% to correctly check whether its argument matches the name of
% the current environment and you'd get an
% interesting \LaTeX{} error message such as:
% \begin{verbatim}
%! \begin{verbatim*} ended by \end{verbatim*}.
%\end{verbatim}
% But what do we do with the rest of the characters, those
% that remain on that line?
% We call |\verbatim@rescan| to take care of that.
% Its first argument is the name of the environment just
% ended, in case we need it again.
% |\verbatim@rescan| takes the list of characters to be
% reprocessed as its second argument.
% (This token list was inserted after the current macro
% by |\verbatim@@@|.)
% Since we are still in an |\edef| we protect it
% by means of|\noexpand|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\noexpand\verbatim@rescan{\@currenvir}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% If the names do not match, we reinsert everything read up
% to now and prepare to call |\verbatim@| to process
% the rest of the line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\the\@temptokena[}%
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\@tempc]}%
\let\next\verbatim@
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally we call |\next|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\next}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@rescan}
% In principle |\verbatim@rescan| could be used to
% analyse the characters remaining after the |\end{...}|
% command and pretend that these were read
% ``properly'', assuming ``standard'' category codes are in
% force.\footnote{Remember that they were all read with
% category codes $11$ (letter) and $12$ (other) so
% that control sequences are not recognized as such.}
% But this is not always possible (when there are unmatched
% curly braces in the rest of the line).
% Besides, we think that this is not worth the effort:
% After a \texttt{verbatim} or \texttt{verbatim*} environment
% a new line in the output is begun anyway,
% and an |\end{comment}| can easily be put on a line by itself.
% So there is no reason why there should be any text here.
% For the benefit of the user who did put something there
% (a comment, perhaps)
% we simply issue a warning and drop them.
% The method of testing is explained in Appendix~D, p.\ 376 of
% the \TeX{}book. We use |^^M| instead of the |!|
% character used there
% since this is a character that cannot appear in |#1|.
% The two |\noexpand| primitives are necessary to avoid
% expansion of active characters and macros.
%
% One extra subtlety should be noted here: remember that
% the token list we are currently building will first be
% processed by the |\lowercase| primitive before \TeX{}
% carries out the definitions.
% This means that the `|C|' character in the
% argument to the |\@warning| macro must be protected against
% being changed to `|c|'. That's the reason why we added the
% |\lccode`\C=`\C| assignment above.
% We can now finish the argument to |\lowercase| as well as the
% group in which the category codes were changed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@rescan#1#2~{\if\noexpand~\noexpand#2~\else
\@warning{Characters dropped after `\string\end{#1}'}\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{The \cs{verbatiminput} command}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@in@stream}
% We begin by allocating an input stream (out of the 16 available
% input streams).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newread\verbatim@in@stream
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@readfile}
% The macro |\verbatim@readfile| encloses the main loop by calls to
% the macros |\verbatim@startline| and |\verbatim@finish|,
% respectively. This makes sure
% that the user can initialize and finish the command when the file
% is empty or doesn't exist. The \texttt{verbatim} environment has a
% similar behaviour when called with an empty text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@readfile#1{%
\verbatim@startline
% \end{macrocode}
% When the file is not found we issue a warning.
% \begin{macrocode}
\openin\verbatim@in@stream #1\relax
\ifeof\verbatim@in@stream
\typeout{No file #1.}%
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% At this point we pass the name of the file to |\@addtofilelist|
% so that its appears appears in the output of a |\listfiles|
% command.
% In addition, we use |\ProvidesFile| to make a log entry in the
% transcript file and to distinguish files read in via
% |\verbatiminput| from others.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@addtofilelist{#1}%
\ProvidesFile{#1}[(verbatim)]%
% \end{macrocode}
% While reading from the file it is useful to switch off the
% recognition of the end-of-line character. This saves us stripping
% off spaces from the contents of the line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\endlinechar\expandafter\m@ne
\expandafter\verbatim@read@file
\expandafter\endlinechar\the\endlinechar\relax
\closein\verbatim@in@stream
\fi
\verbatim@finish
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@read@file}
% All the work is done in |\verbatim@read@file|. It reads the input
% file line by line and recursively calls itself until the end of
% the file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@read@file{%
\read\verbatim@in@stream to\next
\ifeof\verbatim@in@stream
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% For each line we call |\verbatim@addtoline| with the contents of
% the line. \hskip0pt plus 3cm\penalty0\hskip0pt plus -3cm
% |\verbatim@processline| is called next.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline\expandafter{\next}%
\verbatim@processline
% \end{macrocode}
% After processing the line we call |\verbatim@startline| to
% initialize all before we read the next line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\verbatim@startline
% \end{macrocode}
% Without |\expandafter| each call of |\verbatim@read@file| uses
% space in \TeX's input stack.\footnote{A standard \TeX\ would
% report an overflow error if you try to read a file with more than
% ca.\ 200~lines. The same error occurs if the first line of code
% in \S 390 of \textsl{``TeX: The Program''\/} is missing.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\verbatim@read@file
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatiminput}
% |\verbatiminput| first starts a group to keep font and category
% changes local.
% Then it calls the macro |\verbatim@input| with additional
% arguments, depending on whether an asterisk follows.
%
% PW. I added the TAB checking code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatiminput{\begingroup
\ift@bs
\def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
\fi
\@ifstar{\verbatim@input{\@maybeobeytabs}}%
{\verbatim@input{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@input}
% |\verbatim@input| first checks whether the file exists, using
% the standard macro |\IfFileExists| which leaves the name of the
% file found in |\@filef@und|.
% Then everything is set up as in the |\verbatim| macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@input#1#2{%
\IfFileExists {#2}{\@verbatim #1\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Then it reads in the file, finishes off the \texttt{trivlist}
% environment started by |\@verbatim| and closes the group.
% This restores everything to its normal settings.
% \begin{macrocode}
\verbatim@readfile{\@filef@und}\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
% \end{macrocode}
% If the file is not found a more or less helpful message is
% printed. The final |\endgroup| is needed to close the group
% started in |\verbatiminput| above.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\typeout {No file #2.}\endgroup}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \textit{That completes my borrowings from \Lpack{verbatim}.}
%
% The next bunch of code implements wrapping verbatim lines so they, hopefully,
% stay within the typeblock.
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatimindent}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatimbreakchar}
% \begin{macro}{\setverbatimbreak}
% The length |\verbatimindent| is the distance continuation lines are indented
% from the left margin. |\verbatimbreakchar| is the character to indicate
% a wrapped line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\verbatimindent}
\setlength{\verbatimindent}{3em}
\newcommand*{\verbatimbreakchar}{\char`\%}
\newcommand*{\setverbatimbreak}{%
\vspace*{-\baselineskip}%
\def\@xobeysp{~\discretionary{\verbatimbreakchar}%
{\kern\verbatimindent}{}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\wrappingon}
% \begin{macro}{\wrapright}
% \begin{macro}{\wrappingoff}
% |\wrappingon| and |\wrappingoff| enable/prohibit wrapping. The
% default is |\wrappingoff|.
%
% The macro
% |\wrapright| is used to set paragraph skips; without |\raggedright| lines
% may break at the first space \emph{outside} the text area
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\wrappingon}{%
\def\@xobeysp{~\discretionary{\verbatimbreakchar}%
{\kern\verbatimindent}{}}%
\def\wrapright{\raggedright}%
}
\newcommand{\wrappingoff}{%
\def\@xobeysp{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\ }%
\def\wrapright{}%
}
\wrappingoff
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Writing and boxing verbatim}
%
% This bunch of code is from the \Lpack{moreverb} package.
%
% \begin{environment}{verbatimoutput}
% \verb?\begin{verbatimoutput}?\marg{filename} writes all text in its body to a
% file, the name of which it is given as an argument. (The code was
% written by Rainer Sch\"opf but the environment was called
% \verb?verbatimwrite?). In the code below, uncommenting \\
% \verb?\catcode`\^^I=12? \\
% will result in TABs being written as \verb?^^I?.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/09/27}{Changed name verbatimwrite to
% verbatimoutput (but neither were mentioned in the manual)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newwrite \verbatim@out
\def\verbatimoutput#1{%
\@bsphack
\immediate\openout \verbatim@out #1
\let\do\@makeother\dospecials
\catcode`\^^M\active %% \catcode`\^^I=12
\def\verbatim@processline{%
\immediate\write\verbatim@out
{\the\verbatim@line}}%
\verbatim@start}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endverbatimoutput{%
\immediate\closeout\verbatim@out
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
%
% \begin{environment}{fboxverbatim}
% \texttt{fboxverbatim} puts the contents of a verbatim environment
% in a framing box. (PW: This was originally called |boxedverbatim|).
%
% (Written by Victor Eijkhout.)
%
% Bug fix (supplied by David Carlisle) 1995/12/28, marked
% \verb+%%%DPC%%%+
%
% First, redefine `processline' to produce only a line as wide
% as the natural width of the line
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\fboxverbatim{\begingroup%
\tabsoff %% PW otherwise box fills the width
\def\verbatim@processline{%
{\setbox0=\hbox{\the\verbatim@line}%
\hsize=\wd0 \the\verbatim@line\par}}%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Now save the verbatim code in a box
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\@minipagetrue%%%DPC%%%
\@tempswatrue%%%DPC%%%
\setbox0=\vbox\bgroup \verbatim
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% At the end of the environment, we (umm) simply have to stick the
% results into a frame.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endfboxverbatim{%
\endverbatim
\unskip\setbox0=\lastbox %%%DPC%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Now everything's in the box, so we can close it\dots
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\egroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% To change the code for centring, the next line needs a spot of
% hacking.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\fbox{\box0}% <<<=== change here for centering,...
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
%
% \subsection{The shortvrb package}
%
% The following is the \Lpack{shortvrb} package code (from |doc.dtx|
% by Frank Mittelbach). It has been so useful to me that I wanted
% to include it in the class.
%
% CODE AND COMMENTARY IS BY FRANK MITTELBACH
%
% \begin{macro}{\MakeShortVerb}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\MakeShortVerb#1{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname cc\string#1\endcsname\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@shortvrbinfo{Made }{#1}%
\add@special{#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Then the character's current catcode is stored in |\cc\|\meta{c}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter
\xdef\csname cc\string#1\endcsname{\the\catcode`#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% The character is spliced into the definition using the same trick as
% used in |\verb| (for instance), having activated |~| in a group.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\catcode`\~\active \lccode`\~`#1%
\lowercase{%
% \end{macrocode}
% The character's old meaning is recorded in |\ac\|\meta{c} prior to
% assigning it a new one.
% \begin{macrocode}
\global\expandafter\let
\csname ac\string#1\endcsname~%
\gdef~{\verb~}}%
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally the character is made active.
% \begin{macrocode}
\global\catcode`#1\active
% \end{macrocode}
% If we suspect that \meta{c} is already a short reference, we tell
% the user. Now he or she is responsible if anything goes wrong\,\dots
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@shortvrbinfo\@empty{#1 already}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\DeleteShortVerb}
% Here's the means of undoing a |\MakeShortVerb|, for instance in a
% region where you need to use the character outside a verbatim
% environment. It arranges for |\dospecials| and |\@sanitize| to be
% altered appropriately, restores the saved catcode and, if necessary,
% the character's meaning (as stored by
% |\MakeShortVerb|). If the catcode wasn't stored in
% |\cc\|\meta{c} (by |\MakeShortVerb|) the command is silently
% ignored.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\DeleteShortVerb#1{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname cc\string#1\endcsname\relax
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@shortvrbinfo{Deleted }{#1 as}%
\rem@special{#1}%
\global\catcode`#1\csname cc\string#1\endcsname
% \end{macrocode}
% We must not forget to reset |\cc\|\meta{c}, otherwise the check in
% |\MakeShortVerb| for a repeated definition will not work.
% \begin{macrocode}
\global \expandafter\let \csname cc\string#1\endcsname \relax
\ifnum\catcode`#1=\active
\begingroup
\catcode`\~\active \lccode`\~`#1%
\lowercase{%
\global\expandafter\let\expandafter~%
\csname ac\string#1\endcsname}%
\endgroup \fi \fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@shortvrbinfo}
% Helper function for info messages.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@shortvrbinfo#1#2{%
\PackageInfo{shortvrb}{%
#1\expandafter\@gobble\string#2 a short reference
for \string\verb}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\add@special}
% This helper macro adds its argument to the
% |\dospecials| macro which is conventionally used by verbatim macros
% to alter the catcodes of the currently active characters. We need
% to add |\do\|\meta{c} to the expansion of |\dospecials| after
% removing the character if it was already there to avoid multiple
% copies building up should |\MakeShortVerb| not be balanced by
% |\DeleteShortVerb| (in case anything that uses |\dospecials| cares
% about repetitions).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\add@special#1{%
\rem@special{#1}%
\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\dospecials\expandafter
{\dospecials \do #1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Similarly we have to add |\@makeother\|\meta{c} to |\@sanitize|
% (which is used in things like |\index| to re-catcode all special
% characters except braces).
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\@sanitize\expandafter
{\@sanitize \@makeother #1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\rem@special}
% The inverse of |\add@special| is slightly trickier. |\do| is
% re-defined to expand to nothing if its argument is the character of
% interest, otherwise to expand simply to the argument. We can then
% re-define |\dospecials| to be the expansion of itself. The space
% after |=`##1| prevents an expansion to |\relax|!
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\rem@special#1{%
\def\do##1{%
\ifnum`#1=`##1 \else \noexpand\do\noexpand##1\fi}%
\xdef\dospecials{\dospecials}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Fixing |\@sanitize| is the same except that we need to re-define
% |\@makeother| which obviously needs to be done in a group.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\def\@makeother##1{%
\ifnum`#1=`##1 \else \noexpand\@makeother\noexpand##1\fi}%
\xdef\@sanitize{\@sanitize}%
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% END OF MITTELBACH CODE AND COMMENTARY.
%
% \subsection{General verbatim boxing and line numbering}
%
% A while ago I wrote a package that I never released. Here it is
% now, updated and improved. The package was based on code originally
% posted to \ctt{} by Donald Arseneau on 13 July 2000.
%
% This is DA's posted code.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \RequirePackage{verbatim}
% \def\boxverbflag{14 }
%
% \def\boxedverbatim{%
% \fboxsep=1em
% \def\verbatim@processline{\leavevmode
% \vrule\vbox{\advance\hsize-.8p@ \@@line
% {\strut\kern\fboxsep\the\verbatim@line\hss}%
% \kern\fbozsep}\vrule\par}%
% \@verbatim % but make some replacement settings
% % \ifdim\@totalleftmargin>\fboxsep \fboxsep\@totalleftmargin \fi
% \leftskip\x@skip \rightskip\z@skip
% \interlinepenalty\boxverbflag
% \parfillskip\z@ plus\p@ minus\p@
% \lineskip-\fboxsep \baselineskip\z@skip
% \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces
% \boxverb@toprule
% \verbatim@start}
%
% \def\endboxedverbatim{\hrule\endtrivlist}
%
% \@namefdef{boxedverbatim*}{\let\frenchspacing\@gobble \boxedverbatim}
% \@namefdef{endboxedverbatim*}{\hrule\endtrivlist}
%
% \output=\expandafter{\expandafter\boxverb@split \the\output}
%
% \def\boxverb@toprule{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1\p@
% \@@line{\vrule height2\fboxsep \hss \vrule}}
%
% \def\boxverb@split{\ifnum\outputpenalty=\boxverbflag
% \ifdim\dp\@cclv=\z@
% \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\hrule\kern-.4pt}%
% \null \kern-.7\topskip \boxverb@toprule
% \fi\fi}
% \end{verbatim}
% That's the end of DA's posted code
%
% I have extended this to provide:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item A (multipage) boxed verbatim
% \item A (multipage) boxed verbatim input
% \item Normally each `page' is boxed, but start/end rules can be switched off
% at page boundaries
% \item A heading can be put at the start of `continuation' pages
% \item Lines of verbatim text can be numbered
% \item Can be `degraded' to normal verbatim environment
% \end{itemize}
%
% Before proceeding with the main, here are some macros for aspects
% of line numbering.
%
% \begin{macro}{\linenumberfont}
% \begin{macro}{\vlvnumfont}
% Set line numbering font(s).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\linenumberfont}[1]{\def\vlvnumfont{#1}}
%%% \linenumberfont{\small\rmfamily}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\linenumberfrequency}
% \begin{macro}{\linemodnum}
% Set numbering intervals (number modulo). Default is modulus 0.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\linenumberfrequency}[1]{%
\ifnum #1< \@ne
\def\linemodnum{0\relax}
\bvcountlinesfalse
\else
\def\linemodnum{#1\relax}
\bvcountlinestrue
\fi
}
%%%%\linenumberfrequency{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\getthelinenumber}
% |\getthelinenumber|\marg{counter} returns |\thecounter| if it is exactly
% divisible by |\linenumberfrequency|, provided this is not zero.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\getthelinenumber}[1]{%
\ifnum\@ne=\linemodnum
\@nameuse{the#1}
\else
\ifnum\@ne<\linemodnum
\@tempcnta=\@nameuse{c@#1}
\divide\@tempcnta\linemodnum \multiply\@tempcnta\linemodnum
\ifnum\@tempcnta=\@nameuse{c@#1}\@nameuse{the#1}\fi
\fi
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% OK, on to the main code.
%
% \begin{macro}{\boxverbflag}
% \begin{macro}{\bvboxsep}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\boxverbflag{14 }
\newlength{\bvboxsep} % user can change this
\setlength{\bvboxsep}{1em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifbvperpage % start/end lines on every page of multipage verbatim
\bvperpagetrue
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvtopofpage}
% \begin{macro}{\b@vtop}
% Can use |\bvtopofpage| to put a heading above continued verbatims.
% For example \\
% |\bvtopofpage{\begin{center}\normalfont (Continued)\end{center}}| \\
% It only works for |\bvperpagetrue|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bvtopofpage}[1]{%
\long\def\b@vtop{#1}
}
\def\b@vtop{} % used in \boxverb@split for heading
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\theb@vlinenumber}
% \begin{macro}{\resetbvlinenumber}
% |\resetbvlinenumber| reinitializes the line numbering.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{bvlinectr}
\def\theb@vlinenumber{\getthelinenumber{bvlinectr}}
\newcommand{\resetbvlinenumber}{\setcounter{bvlinectr}{0}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifbvcountlines}
% TRUE for verbatim line numbers to be printed. Default is not
% to print them. Note that |\linenumberfrequency| twiddles with this.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifbvcountlines % TRUE to print line numbers of verbatim lines
\bvcountlinesfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\b@vdocount}
% \begin{macro}{\bvnumlength}
% Increment line number if counting. A line number is printed in
% a space width |\bvnumlength|, which is given a temporary value here.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\b@vdocount{\ifbvcountlines\stepcounter{bvlinectr}\fi}
\newlength{\bvnumlength}
%% \settowidth{\bvnumlength}{\vlvnumfont 9999}
\settowidth{\bvnumlength}{\normalfont 999}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifbvcountinside}
% \begin{macro}{\bvnumbersinside}
% \begin{macro}{\bvnumbersoutside}
% Flag and commands for positioning the numbers. Default is to print
% them inside the box.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifbvcountinside % TRUE if line numbers inside box
\bvcountinsidetrue
\newcommand{\bvnumbersinside}{\bvcountinsidetrue}
\newcommand{\bvnumbersoutside}{\bvcountinsidefalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\b@vdoinside}
% \begin{macro}{\b@vdooutside}
% Print numbers inside (outside) the box.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\b@vdoinside{%
\ifbvcountlines\ifbvcountinside%
\makebox[\bvnumlength][r]{%
\vlvnumfont \theb@vlinenumber\space}%
\fi\fi}
\def\b@vdooutside{%
\ifbvcountlines\ifbvcountinside\else%
\llap{\makebox[\bvnumlength][r]{%
\vlvnumfont \theb@vlinenumber\space}}%
\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\setupboxverb@line}
% Use a macro for the first main part of DA's code for |\boxedverbatim|,
% adding lots of hooks.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setupboxverb@line}{%
\par
\ifbvperpage
\output=\expandafter{\expandafter\boxverb@split \the\output}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@processline}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@processline{\leavevmode
\b@vdocount%
\bvleftsidehook\vbox{\advance\hsize-.8\p@ \@@line
{\b@vdooutside\strut\kern\bvboxsep%
\b@vdoinside%
\ift@bs
\tabverbatim@processline
\else
\the\verbatim@line
\fi
\hss}%
\kern\bvboxsep}\bvrightsidehook\par}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\setupbox@verb}
% Use a macro for the second main part of DA's code, and integrate it
% with the other verbatim codes (e.g., include |\@maybeobeytags|).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setupbox@verb}{%
\leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip
\interlinepenalty\boxverbflag
\parfillskip\z@ plus\p@ minus\p@
\lineskip-\bvboxsep \baselineskip\z@skip
\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs
\boxverb@toprule
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\boxedverbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\endboxedverbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\boxedverbatim*}
% \begin{macro}{\endboxedverbatim*}
% Given the two macros above, we can write a briefer version of DA's
% |\boxedverbatim(*)|.
% As noted by Zarko Cucej\footnote{\url{zarko.cucej@uni-mb.si}}, have to handle
% a following (no-) paragraph.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{@doendpe} to \cs{endboxedverbatim}
% (from patch v1.8)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\boxedverbatim{\begingroup
\setupboxverb@line
\@verbatim
\setupbox@verb
\verbatim@start
}
\def\endboxedverbatim{\bvendrulehook\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}
\@namedef{boxedverbatim*}{\let\frenchspacing\@gobble \boxedverbatim}
\@namelet{endboxedverbatim*}\endboxverbatim
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\boxverb@toprule{\bvtoprulehook
\@@line{\bvleftsidehook \bvtopmidhook \bvrightsidehook}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvendofpage}
% \cs{bvendofpage}\marg{spec} sets the boxed verbatim `end of page' to \meta{spec}.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Added \cs{bvendofpage} (mempatch v2.3d)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\bvendofpage}[1]{%
\def\boxverb@botpage{#1}}
\bvendofpage{\hrule\kern-.4pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\boxverb@split}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\boxverb@split{\ifnum\outputpenalty=\boxverbflag
\ifdim\dp\@cclv=\z@
%%%% \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\hrule\kern-.4pt}%
\setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\boxverb@botpage}%
\null \kern-.7\topskip \b@vtop \boxverb@toprule
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvtoprulehook}
% \begin{macro}{\bvendrulehook}
% \begin{macro}{\bvleftsidehook}
% \begin{macro}{\bvrightsidehook}
% \begin{macro}{\bvtopmidhook}
% The new hooks, for the top, bottom, left and right of the box.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\bvtoprulehook{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1\p@}
\def\bvendrulehook{\hrule}
\def\bvleftsidehook{\vrule}
\def\bvrightsidehook{\vrule}
\def\bvtopmidhook{\rule{0\p@}{2\bvboxsep} \hss}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\boxedverbatiminput}
% \begin{macro}{\boxedverbatim@input}
% |\boxedverbatiminput{filename}| read in filename contents as verbatim
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\boxedverbatiminput}{\begingroup
\@ifstar{\let\frenchspacing\@gobble
\boxedverbatim@input\relax}%
{\boxedverbatim@input{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces}}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\boxedverbatim@input#1#2{%
\setupboxverb@line
\IfFileExists{#2}{\@verbatim #1\relax
\setupbox@verb
\verbatim@readfile{\@filef@und}%
\bvendrulehook\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
{\typeout {No file #2.}\endgroup}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Some prepackaged boxing styles.
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvbox}
% Original (default) boxing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bvbox}{%
\bvperpagetrue%
\renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1\p@}%
\renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{\vrule}%
\renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{\vrule}%
\renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{\hrule}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nobvbox}
% No boxing
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\nobvbox}{%
\bvperpagefalse%
\renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{}%
\renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{}%
\renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{}%
\renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvtopandtail}
% Head and foot horizontal lines only
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bvtopandtail}{%
\bvperpagefalse%
\renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1\p@}%
\renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{}%
\renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{}%
\renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{\hrule}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvsides}
% Side vertical lines only
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bvsides}{%
\bvperpagefalse%
\renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{\vskip 3ex}%
\renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{\vrule}%
\renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{\vrule}%
\renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsection{The framed package}
%
% The following code is the \Lpack{framed} package~\cite{FRAMED}
% by Donald Arseneau.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Updated framed code to v0.8a of the package}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\framed}
% \begin{macro}{\endframed}
% \begin{macro}{\shaded}
% \begin{macro}{\endshaded}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\framed\relax \let\endframed\relax
\let\shaded\relax \let\endshaded\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% DA sent me a pre-release copy of v0.6 of his \Lpack{framed}
% package~\cite{FRAMED}.
% We also discussed good ways of embedding it into the class. One result
% being that I defined some some items |\AtBeginDocument|, but this is
% no longer required as DA has changed \Lpack{framed} to cooperate
% with memoir.
%
% Here is a modified version of \file{framed.sty}. In particular
% I deleted the debugging code (lines starting with \verb?|?).
%
% \begin{verbatim}
% framed.sty v 0.8a 21-Jul-2003
% Copyright (C) 1992-2003 by Donald Arseneau
% These macros may be freely transmitted, reproduced, or modified
% provided that this notice is left intact.
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% Create framed or shaded regions that can break across pages using
% \begin{framed} ... \end{framed} -- ordinary frame box (box at margin)
% \begin{shaded} ... \end{shaded} -- shaded background (into margin)
% ... leftbar ... -- line on left side
%
% The "framed" environment puts the text into "\fbox" with the
% settings "\fboxrule=\FrameRule" and "\fboxsep=\FrameSep".
% You can change these lengths (using "\setlength") and you
% can even change the definition of "\FrameCommand" to use
% much fancier boxes.
%
% In fact, the "shaded" environment just redefines "\FrameCommand"
% to use "\colorbox{shadecolor}" (and you have to define the
% color "shadecolor").
%
% A page break is allowed, and even encouraged, before the framed
% environment. If you want to attach some text (a box title) to the
% frame, then the text should be inserted by \FrameCommand
%
% The contents of the framed regions are restricted:
% Floats, footnotes, marginpars and head-line entries will be lost.
% (Some of these may be handled in a later version.)
% This package will not work with the page breaking of multicol.sty,
% or other systems that perform column-balancing.
%
% The MakeFramed environment does the work. Its "settings" argument
% should contain any adjustments to the text width (applied to \hsize,
% and using the "\width" of the frame itself) as well as a `restore'
% command -- \@parboxrestore or \FrameRestore or something similar.
%
% Expert commands:
% \MakeFramed, \endMakeFramed: the "MakeFramed" environment
% \FrameCommand: command to draw the frame around its argument
% \FrameRestore: restore some text settings, but fewer than \@parboxrestore
% \FrameRule: length register; \fboxrule for default "framed".
% \FrameSep: length register; \fboxsep for default "framed".
% \FrameHeightAdjust: macro; height of frame above baselineskip at
% top of page
%
% This is still a `pre-production' version because I can think of many
% features/improvements that should be made. Nevertheless, starting
% with version 0.5 it should be bug-free.
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%%%% BEGIN FRAMED %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% PW -- can't have \ProvidesPpackage
%%\ProvidesPackage{framed}[2003/07/21 v 0.8a:
%% framed or shaded text with page breaks]
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifframeasnormal}
% \begin{macrocode}
%% PW added \ifframeasnormal % TRUE normal paras, FALSE minipage paras
%% PW default is (FALSE to match DA v0.5, or TRUE to match DA v0.6)
\newif\ifframeasnormal
\frameasnormaltrue
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endMakeFramed}
% \begin{environment}{framed}
% \begin{environment}{shaded}
% \begin{environment}{leftbar}
% \begin{macrocode}
%% PW Define some things AtBeginDocument if they have not already
%% been defined via someone using the framed package.
\AtBeginDocument{\@ifundefined{framed}{%
\def\endMakeFramed{\par
\kern\z@ \penalty-100 % put depth into height
\egroup
\begingroup \put@frame \endgroup}
\newenvironment{framed}% using default \FrameCommand
{\MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
{\endMakeFramed}
\newenvironment{shaded}{%
\def\FrameCommand{\colorbox{shadecolor}}%
\MakeFramed {\FrameRestore}}%
{\endMakeFramed}
\newenvironment{leftbar}{%
\def\FrameCommand{\vrule width 3pt \hspace{10pt}}%
\MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
{\endMakeFramed}
}{}} % end of AtBeginDocument
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\MakeFramed}
% \begin{macrocode}
%% \def\MakeFramed#1{\par %% PW change to \newcommand
\newcommand{\MakeFramed}[1]{\par
% measure added width and height; call result \width and \height
\setbox\z@\vbox{\vskip-1in \hbox{\hskip-1in
\FrameCommand{\hbox{\vrule \@height .7in \@depth.3in \@width 1in}}}%
\vskip\z@skip}%
\def\width{\wd\z@}\def\height{\ht\z@}%
\edef\fb@frw{\the\width}\edef\fb@frh{\the\height}%
% insert pre-penalties and skips
\begingroup
\skip@\lastskip
\if@nobreak\else
\penalty9999 % updates \page parameters
\ifdim\pagefilstretch=\z@ \ifdim\pagefillstretch=\z@
\edef\@tempa{\the\skip@}%
\ifx\@tempa\zero@glue \penalty-30
\else \vskip-\skip@ \penalty-30 \vskip\skip@
\fi\fi\fi
\penalty\z@
% Give a stretchy breakpoint that will always be taken in preference
% to the \penalty 9999 used to update page parameters. The cube root
% of 10000/100 indicates a multiplier of 0.21545, but the maximum
% calculated badness is really 8192, not 10000, so the multiplier
% is 0.2301.
\advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.5\baselineskip
\advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\height
\advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\skip@
\advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\topsep
\vskip-\skip@ \penalty 1800 \vskip\skip@
\fi
\addvspace{\topsep}%
\endgroup
% clear out pending page break
\penalty\@M \vskip 2\baselineskip \vskip\height
\penalty9999 \vskip -2\baselineskip \vskip-\height
\penalty9999 % updates \pagetotal
\fb@adjheight
\setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
#1% Modifications to \hsize (can use \width and \height)
\textwidth\hsize \columnwidth\hsize
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\put@frame}
% |\put@frame| takes the contents of |\@tempboxa| and puts all, or a piece,
% of it on the page with a frame (|\FrameCommand|). It recurses until
% all of |\@tempboxa| has been used up. (|\@tempboxa| must have zero depth.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\put@frame{\relax
\ifdim\pagegoal=\maxdimen \pagegoal\vsize \fi
\ifinner \else
\dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal % space left on page
\ifdim\dimen@<2\baselineskip
\eject \fb@adjheight \put@frame
\else % there's appreciable room left on the page
\begingroup % temporarily set \dimen@ to be...
\advance\dimen@.8\pageshrink % maximum space available on page
\advance\dimen@-\fb@frh\relax % space for frame's contents
\expandafter\endgroup
% restore \dimen@ to real room left on page
\ifdim\dimen@>\ht\@tempboxa % whole box does fit
\else % box must be split
\setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{% simulate frame and flexiblity of page:
\vskip \fb@frh \@plus\pagestretch \@minus.8\pageshrink
\kern137sp\kern-137sp\penalty-30
\unvbox\@tempboxa}%
\edef\fb@resto@set{\boxmaxdepth\the\boxmaxdepth
\splittopskip\the\splittopskip}% % v0.8a
\boxmaxdepth\z@ \splittopskip\z@
\setbox\tw@\vsplit\@tempboxa to\dimen@
\setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@}% natural-sized
% If the split-to size > (\vsize-\topskip),
% then set box to full size
\begingroup
\advance\dimen@\topskip
\expandafter\endgroup
\ifdim\dimen@>\pagegoal
\dimen@ii\pagegoal
\advance\dimen@ii -\topskip
\advance\dimen@ii \FrameHeightAdjust\relax
\else % suspect this is wrong:
% If the split-to size > feasible room_on_page,
% rebox it smaller.
\advance\dimen@.8\pageshrink
\ifdim\ht\tw@>\dimen@
\dimen@ii\dimen@
\else % use natural size
\dimen@ii\ht\tw@
\fi
\fi
% Re-box contents to desired size \dimen@ii
\advance\dimen@ii -\fb@frh
\setbox\tw@\vbox to\dimen@ii \bgroup
% remove simulated frame and page flexibility:
\vskip -\fb@frh \@plus-\pagestretch \@minus-.8\pageshrink
\unvbox\tw@ \unpenalty\unpenalty
\ifdim\lastkern=-137sp % whole box went to next page
\egroup \fb@resto@set \eject
%%% % (\vskip for frame size was discarded) % v 0.8a
\fb@adjheight
\else %
\egroup \fb@resto@set % v0.8a
\ifvoid\@tempboxa % it all fit after all
\setbox\@tempboxa\box\tw@
\else % it really did split
\ifdim\wd\tw@>\z@
\centerline{\FrameCommand{\box\tw@}}% ? \centerline bad idea
\else
\box\tw@
\fi
\hrule \@height\z@
\eject
\fb@adjheight
\put@frame
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
\ifvoid\@tempboxa\else
\centerline{\FrameCommand{\box\@tempboxa}}%
\nointerlineskip \null %{\showoutput \showlists}
\penalty-30 \vskip\topsep
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fb@adjheight}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\fb@adjheight{%
\vbox to\FrameHeightAdjust{}% get proper baseline skip from above.
\penalty\@M \nointerlineskip
\vskip-\FrameHeightAdjust
\penalty\@M} % useful for tops of pages
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\zero@glue}
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\zero@glue{\the\z@skip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\FrameCommand}
% \begin{macro}{\FrameHeightAdjust}
% \begin{macrocode}
%% Define configuration commands:
\def\FrameCommand{\fboxrule=\FrameRule \fboxsep=\FrameSep \fbox}
\newdimen\FrameRule \FrameRule= \fboxrule
\newdimen\FrameSep \FrameSep = 3\fboxsep
%% Height of frame above first baseline when frame starts a page:
%%\def\FrameHeightAdjust{6pt} % PW changed the value
\def\FrameHeightAdjust{0.6em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\FrameRestore}
% |\FrameRestore| has parts of |\@parboxrestore|. See how it is used in the
% `settings' argument of |\MakeFrame|. Previous behaviour can be restored by
% using |\@parboxrestore| there, or redefining:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \makeatletter
% \renewcommand{\FrameRestore}{\@parboxrestore}
% \makeatother
% \end{verbatim}
% However, PW's |\ifframeasnormal| obviates the need for this.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Corrected spelling of \cs{@dischyph} in \cs{FrameRestore} (mempatch v3.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
%% PW: I have added my \ifframeasnormal to the original \FrameRestore
%% The commented out lines are commented out by DA in the
%% framed package
%\def\FrameRestore{% %% PW change to \newcommand
\newcommand{\FrameRestore}{%
\let\if@nobreak\iffalse
\let\if@noskipsec\iffalse
\let\-\@dischyph
\let\'\@acci\let\`\@accii\let\=\@acciii
\linewidth\hsize
\sloppy
\ifframeasnormal\else
\let\par\@@par
\parindent\z@ \parskip\z@skip
\everypar{}%
\@totalleftmargin\z@
\leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip \@rightskip\z@skip
\parfillskip\@flushglue \lineskip\normallineskip
\baselineskip\normalbaselineskip
\let\\\@normalcr
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
% Compatability with previous versions (temporary!):
%%\let\fram@d=\MakeFramed \let\endfram@d=\endMakeFramed
%%%%%%%%%%%% END FRAMED %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{The newfile package}
%
% The following code is from the \Lpack{newfile} package.
% To try and avoid name clashes with other packages, each internal macro
% in this package includes the character string `|stre@m|'.
%
% \begin{macro}{\newoutputstream}
% |\newoutputam|\marg{stream} creates a new output stream called \meta{stream}.
% Different files may be associated with the \meta{stream}. Note that
% TeX permits no more than 16 output streams.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newoutputstream}[1]{%
\@ifundefined{#1outstre@m}%
{\expandafter\newwrite\csname #1outstre@m\endcsname
\csname newif\expandafter\endcsname
\csname ifstre@m#1open\endcsname
\global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname
\expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamopen#1\endcsname\relax
\global\@namedef{atstreamopen#1}{}%
\fi
\expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamclose#1\endcsname\relax
\global\@namedef{atstreamclose#1}{}%
\fi
}%
{\@memwarn{Output stream #1\space is already defined}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newinputstream}
% |\newinputstream|\marg{stream} creates a new input stream called \meta{stream}.
% Different files may be associated with the \meta{stream}. Note that
% TeX permits no more than 16 input streams.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newinputstream}[1]{%
\@ifundefined{#1instre@m}%
{\expandafter\newread\csname #1instre@m\endcsname
\csname newif\expandafter\endcsname
\csname ifstre@m#1open\endcsname
\global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname
\expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamopen#1\endcsname\relax
\global\@namedef{atstreamopen#1}{}%
\fi
\expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamclose#1\endcsname\relax
\global\@namedef{atstreamclose#1}{}%
\fi
}%
{\@memwarn{Input stream #1\space is already defined}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Some checking macros will be useful as some of the checks occur in
% multiple places.
%
% \begin{macro}{\IfStreamOpen}
% |\IfStreamOpen|\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code}\marg{FALSE code}
% checks if stream \meta{stream} is currently open.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\IfStreamOpen}[3]{%
\csname ifstre@m#1open\endcsname#2\else#3\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\instre@mandopen}
% |\instre@mandopen|\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
% is an input stream and is open. If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\instre@mandopen}[2]{%
\@ifundefined{#1instre@m}{%
\@memwarn{#1\space is not an input stream}}%
{\IfStreamOpen{#1}{#2}{%
\@memwarn{Input stream #1\space is not open}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\instre@mandclosed}
% |\instre@mandclosed|\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
% is an input stream and is closed (not open).
% If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\instre@mandclosed}[2]{%
\@ifundefined{#1instre@m}{%
\@memwarn{#1\space is not an input stream}}%
{\IfStreamOpen{#1}{%
\@memwarn{Input stream #1\space is open}}{#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\outstre@mandopen}
% |\outstre@mandopen|\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
% is an output stream and is open. If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\outstre@mandopen}[2]{%
\@ifundefined{#1outstre@m}{%
\@memwarn{#1\space is not an output stream}}%
{\IfStreamOpen{#1}{#2}{%
\@memwarn{Output stream #1\space is not open}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\outstre@mandclosed}
% |\outstre@mandclosed|\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
% is an output stream and is closed (not open).
% If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\outstre@mandclosed}[2]{%
\@ifundefined{#1outstre@m}{%
\@memwarn{#1\space is not an output stream}}%
{\IfStreamOpen{#1}{%
\@memwarn{Output stream #1\space is open}}{#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\openoutputfile}
% |\openoutputfile|\marg{filename}\marg{stream} opens the file called
% \meta{filename} and attaches it to the stream \meta{stream} for
% writing. However, if the |\nofiles| command has been given the
% file is \emph{not} attached to the stream. No more than one file can be
% attached to a stream at any given time.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\openoutputfile}[2]{%
\outstre@mandclosed{#2}{%
\global\@namedef{#1@filename}{#1}%
\if@filesw
\immediate\openout\@nameuse{#2outstre@m}=\@nameuse{#1@filename}%
\fi
\global\csname stre@m#2opentrue\endcsname%
\@nameuse{atstreamopen#2}%
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\closeoutputstream}
% |\closeoutputstream|\marg{stream} closes the stream \meta{stream}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\closeoutputstream}[1]{%
\outstre@mandopen{#1}{%
\@nameuse{atstreamclose#1}%
\immediate\closeout\@nameuse{#1outstre@m}%
\global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\openinputfile}
% |\openinputfile|\marg{filename}\marg{stream} opens the file called
% \meta{filename} and attaches it to the stream \meta{stream} for
% reading. The file is added to the list of files.
% No more than one file can be attached to a stream at
% any given time.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\openinputfile}[2]{%
\IfFileExists{#1}{% file exists
\instre@mandclosed{#2}{%
\@addtofilelist{#1}%
\global\@namedef{#1@filename}{#1}%
\immediate\openin\@nameuse{#2instre@m}=\@nameuse{#1@filename}%
\global\csname stre@m#2opentrue\endcsname%
\@nameuse{atstreamopen#2}}}%
{% file not found
\typeout{No file #1.}
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\closeinputstream}
% |\closeinputstream|\marg{stream} closes the stream \meta{stream}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\closeinputstream}[1]{%
\instre@mandopen{#1}{%
\@nameuse{atstreamclose#1}%
\immediate\closein\@nameuse{#1instre@m}%
\global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{writeverbatim}
% |\begin{writeverbatim}|\marg{stream} writes the contents of
% the environment as verbatim text to the given \meta{stream}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\writeverbatim#1{%
\@bsphack
\let\do\@makeother\dospecials
\catcode`\^^M\active
\def\verbatim@processline{%
\immediate\write\@nameuse{#1outstre@m}{\the\verbatim@line}}%
\verbatim@start}
\def\endwriteverbatim{\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addtostream}
% |\addtostream|\marg{stream}\marg{text} writes \meta{text} to the
% given \meta{stream}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\addtostream}[2]{%
\@bsphack
\outstre@mandopen{#1}{%
{\let\protect\string
\immediate\write\@nameuse{#1outstre@m}{#2}%
}}%
\@esphack
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifstre@mnoteof}
% \begin{macro}{\checkstre@mnoteof}
% |\checkstre@mnoteof|\marg{stream} sets |\ifstre@mnoteof| to TRUE if
% \meta{stream} is not at the end of the file (i.e., it is the opposite
% of |\ifeof|).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifstre@mnoteof
\newcommand{\checkstre@meof}[1]{%
\stre@mnoteoftrue\ifeof\@nameuse{#1instre@m}\stre@mnoteoffalse\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\readstream}
% |\readstream|\marg{stream} reads the contents of
% the given \meta{stream} as |\input| text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\readstream#1{
\instre@mandopen{#1}{%
\loop \checkstre@meof{#1} \ifstre@mnoteof
\read\@nameuse{#1instre@m} to\temptokstre@m
\temptokstre@m
\repeat
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\readaline}
% |\readaline|\marg{stream} reads what TeX considers to be one line
% from the given \meta{stream} as |\input| text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\readaline#1{
\instre@mandopen{#1}{%
\ifeof\@nameuse{#1instre@m}
\@memwarn{No more to read from stream #1}
\else
\read\@nameuse{#1instre@m} to\temptokstre@m
\temptokstre@m
\fi
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\readverbatim}
% |\readverbatim|\marg{stream} reads the contents of
% the given \meta{stream} as verbatim text.
%
% The read verbatim code is a slight variation on code from the
% \Lpack{verbatim} package. Most of the setup is done by the macros
% |\stre@mverb@input|\marg{setup}\marg{stream} and
% |\verbatim@readstre@m|\marg{stream}. Finally, |\verbatim@read@file|
% is a \Lpack{verbatim} package macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\readverbatim{\begingroup
\ift@bs
\def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
\fi
\@ifstar{\stre@mverb@input{\@maybeobeytabs}}%
{\stre@mverb@input{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\stre@mverb@input}
% \begin{macro}{\@verbinstre@m}
% |\stre@mverb@input|\marg{setup}\marg{stream} is a stream
% version of |\verbatim@input|. It defines |\@verbinstre@m|
% to be \meta{stream}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\stre@mverb@input}[2]{%
\IfStreamOpen{#2}%
{\@verbatim #1\relax
\def\@verbinstre@m{\@nameuse{#2instre@m}}
\verb@readstre@m\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
{\@memwarn{Stream #2\space is not open}\endgroup}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verb@readstre@m}
% |\verb@readstre@m| is the stream analogue to |\verbatim@readfile|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\verb@readstre@m}{%
\verbatim@startline
\expandafter\endlinechar\expandafter\m@ne
\expandafter\verbatim@read@stre@m
\expandafter\endlinechar\the\endlinechar\relax
\verbatim@finish
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@read@stre@m}
% |\verbatim@read@stre@m| is the analogue to |\verbatim@readfile|.
% It gets its input from the stream |\@verbinstre@m|, which is defined
% in the |\stre@mverb@input| macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\verbatim@read@stre@m}{%
\read\@verbinstre@m to\next
\ifeof\@verbinstre@m
\else
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline\expandafter{\next}%
\verbatim@processline
\verbatim@startline
\expandafter\verbatim@read@stre@m
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\readboxedverbatim}
% |\readboxedverbatim|\marg{stream} is the equivalent of
% |\readverbtim| except that it generates a boxed verbatim.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\readboxedverbatim}{\begingroup
\@ifstar{\stre@mbvin\relax}%
{\stre@mbvin{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\stre@mbvin}
% |\stre@mbvin|\marg{setup}\marg{stream} is the workhorse for
% |\readboxedverbatim|, and in its turn it uses |\verb@readstre@m|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\stre@mbvin}[2]{%
\IfStreamOpen{#2}%
{\setupboxverb@line
\@verbatim #1\relax
\def\@verbinstre@m{\@nameuse{#2instre@m}}%
\setupbox@verb
\verb@readstre@m\bvendrulehook\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
{\@memwarn{Stream #2\space is not open}\endgroup}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \section{Utilities}
%
%
% \subsection{Extra `provide' commands}
%
% \begin{macro}{\provideenvironment}
% Works like |\providecommand| but for environments.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/04}{Added \cs{provideenvironment} and supports}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\provideenvironment}{\@star@or@long\m@mprovenv}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mprovenv}
% This checks if the environment has been defined. If not it calls
% the kernel code for |\newenvironment| otherwise it calls code to
% discard arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@mprovenv}[1]{\@ifundefined{#1}%
{\new@environment{#1}}% % create new environment
{\@memwarn{Environment `#1' already defined}%
\m@mgobbleoptsandtwo}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mgobbleoptsandtwo}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mgobbleoptandtwo}
% |\m@mgobbleoptsandtwo| gobbles the |[opt][opt]{begin}{end}| arguments to
% |\provideenvironment|. It is actually more general than that as it will
% gobble any sequence of any number of optional arguments followed by
% two required arguments. If there are no optional arguments it disposes
% of the two required ones, other it calls a recursive procedure to
% discard any number of optionals, then two required ones.
%
% |\m@mgobbleoptandtwo| recursively discards optional arguments, then finally
% two required arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@mgobbleoptsandtwo}{%
\@ifnextchar [{\m@mgobbleoptandtwo}{\@gobbletwo}}
\def\m@mgobbleoptandtwo[#1]{%
\@ifnextchar [{\m@mgobbleoptandtwo}{\@gobbletwo}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\providecounter}
% Works like the other |\provide...| commands, but for counters.
% Code is based on |\newcounter| in |ltcounts.dtx|.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/17}{Added \cs{providecounter}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\providecounter}[1]{%
\@ifundefined{c@#1}%
{\newcounter{#1}}%
{\@memwarn{Counter `#1' already defined}%
\@ifnextchar[{\m@mgobbleopt}{}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mgobbleopt}
% Gobble an optional argument.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added \cs{m@mgobbleopt}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\m@mgobbleopt[#1]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\providelength}
% Works like the other |\provide...| commands, but for lengths.
% Code is based on |\provide@command| in |ltdefns.dtx|.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/17}{Added \cs{providelength}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\providelength}[1]{%
\begingroup
\escapechar\m@ne\xdef\@gtempa{{\string#1}}%
\endgroup
\expandafter\@ifundefined\@gtempa
{\newlength{#1}}%
{\@memwarn{Length #1 already defined}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newloglike}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mnewlog}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mnewlogs}
% For defining a new log-like math function.
% |\newloglike{\fun}{string}| or |\newloglike*{\fun}{string}|.
% The starred version is for functions with limits (like an integral sign).
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Added \cs{newloglike}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\newloglike}{\@ifstar{\m@mnewlogs}{\m@mnewlog}}
\newcommand*{\m@mnewlogs}[2]{%
\newcommand*{#1}{\mathop{\operator@font #2}}}
\newcommand*{\m@mnewlog}[2]{%
\newcommand*{#1}{\mathop{\operator@font #2}\nolimits}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\provideloglike}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mprovlogs}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mprovlog}
% The provide version of |\newloglike|.
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Added \cs{provideloglike}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\provideloglike}{\@ifstar{\m@mprovlogs}{\m@mprovlog}}
\newcommand*{\m@mprovlogs}[2]{%
\providecommand*{#1}{\mathop{\operator@font #2}}}
\newcommand*{\m@mprovlog}[2]{%
\providecommand*{#1}{\mathop{\operator@font #2}\nolimits}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Changing counters}
%
% In LaTeX, a new counter called, say `ctr', is created by the command
% |\newcounter{ctr}[within]|. If the optional within argument is given
% the the counter `ctr' is reset to zero each time the counter `within'
% changes. The command |\thectr| typesets the value of the counter ctr.
% This is automatically defined by |\newcounter| and is initialised
% to typeset arabic numerals. Sometimes it may be desireable to change
% the counter definitions.
%
% The following code is based on the \Lpack{chngcntr} package~\cite{CHNGCNTR}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@removefromreset}
% This code uses David Carlisle's |\@removefromreset| command as
% specified in the remreset package~\cite{REMRESET}.
% It is provided here as a convenience to the user, and with
% David Carlisle's permission.
%
% START OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand{\@removefromreset}[2]{{%
\expandafter\let\csname c@#1\endcsname\@removefromreset
\def\@elt##1{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname c@##1\endcsname\@removefromreset
\else
\noexpand\@elt{##1}%
\fi}%
\expandafter\xdef\csname cl@#2\endcsname{%
\csname cl@#2\endcsname}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% END OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ifbothcntrs}
% This is called as \\
% |\@ifbothcntrs{|\meta{cntr}|}{|\meta{within}|}{<code when both are counters>}|.
% This tests if both \meta{cntr} and \meta{within} are counters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@ifbothcntrs}[3]{%
\@ifundefined{c@#1}{% counter undefined
\@memerror{#1 is not a counter}{\@eha}}%
{% else counter is defined
\@ifundefined{c@#2}{% within undefined
\@memerror{#2 is not a counter}{\@eha}}%
{% else both counter and within are defined
#3}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\counterwithin}
% \begin{macro}{\counterwithin*}
% \begin{macro}{\@csinstar}
% \begin{macro}{\@csin}
% It is sometimes desireable to change a counter that has been defined
% by |\newcounter{ctr}| to act as though it had been defined as
% |\newcounter{ctr}[within]|. The command
% |\counterwithin{ctr}{within}| accomplishes this. By default,
% it also redefines the |\thectr| command so that it typesets values
% in the style |\thewithin.\arabic{ctr}|. The starred version of the
% command suppresses the redefinition of |\thectr|.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\counterwithin}{\@ifstar{\@csinstar}{\@csin}}
\newcommand{\@csinstar}[2]{%
\@ifbothcntrs{#1}{#2}{\@addtoreset{#1}{#2}}}
\newcommand{\@csin}[2]{%
\@ifbothcntrs{#1}{#2}{\@addtoreset{#1}{#2}%
\@namedef{the#1}{\@nameuse{the#2}.\arabic{#1}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\counterwithout}
% \begin{macro}{\counterwithout*}
% \begin{macro}{\@csoutstar}
% \begin{macro}{\@csout}
% Likewise, the command |\counterwithout{ctr}{within}| changes a
% counter that has been created by |\newcounter{ctr}[within]| to act
% as though it had been created by |\newcounter{ctr}|. By default it
% also redefines the |\thectr| command so that it just typesets an arabic
% numeral. The starred version of the command suppresses the redefinition
% of |\thectr|.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Deleted chngctr from \cs{@csoutstar} (mempatch v3.4)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\counterwithout}{\@ifstar{\@csoutstar}{\@csout}}
\newcommand{\@csoutstar}[2]{%
\@ifbothcntrs{#1}{#2}{\@removefromreset{#1}{#2}}}
\newcommand{\@csout}[2]{%
\@ifbothcntrs{#1}{#2}{\@removefromreset{#1}{#2}%
\@namedef{the#1}{\arabic{#1}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Any number of |\counterwithin{ctr}{...}| and |\counterwithout{ctr}{...}|
% commands can be issued for a given counter, ctr, if you wish to toggle
% between the two styles. The current value of ctr is unaffected by
% |\counterwithin| and |\counterwithout|. If you want to change the value
% after one of these commands, use |\setcounter{ctr}{...}|, and to change
% the typeseting style use |\renewcommand{\thectr}{...}|.
%
% \subsection{Odd/even page checking}
%
% It is difficult to check robustly if the current page is odd or even.
% This code, which is based on the \Lpack{chngpage} package~\cite{CHNGPAGE},
% provides a method that has proved (so far) to be robust.
% It works by writing out a label and on the next LaTeX run checks
% the page reference for the label.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifoddpage}
% \begin{macro}{\ifstrictpagecheck}
% \begin{macro}{\c@cp@cntr}
% \begin{macro}{\cplabel}
% The boolean |\ifoddpage| is TRUE if the checked page is odd. The
% boolean |\ifstrictpagecheck| is for turning on (TRUE) and off (FALSE)
% the strictest method of page checking. The counter |cp@cntr| is used
% to make unique labels, which start with |\cplabel|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifoddpage
\newif\ifstrictpagecheck
\strictpagecheckfalse
\newcounter{cp@cntr}
\newcommand{\cplabel}{^_}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\checkoddpage}
% This is the user level command to check for odd/even page. It does
% a robust check for |\strictpagecheck| otherwise the simple minded
% check. It sets |\ifoddpage| to TRUE if the page is odd, otherwise
% it sets it to FALSE.
%
% This is now fixed so that it should work for non-arabic page numbering.
% It uses a new label/pageref variant based on the page counter value, not
% its printed representation. This also gets rid of worrying about hyperref!!
% The problem was discovered by Bastiaan Niels Veelo
%
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Complete rewrite of odd page checking
% (from patch v1.6)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\checkoddpage}{%
\oddpagefalse%
\ifstrictpagecheck%
\stepcounter{cp@cntr}\pmemlabel{\cplabel\thecp@cntr}%
\@memcnta=\pmemlabelref{\cplabel\thecp@cntr}\relax
\ifodd\@memcnta\oddpagetrue\fi
\else
\ifodd\c@page\oddpagetrue\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\thepmemc@@page}
% The value of the page counter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\thepmemc@@page{\the\c@page}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pmemprotected@write}
% |\pmemprotected@write| is a modified version of the kernel's
% |\protected@write|.
%
% This version of the macro was provided by Romano Giannetti
% (\url{romano@dea.icai.upco.es}) on 15 July 2003.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\pmemprotected@write#1#2#3{%
\begingroup
\let\thepmemc@@page\relax
#2%
\let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
\edef\reserved@a{\write#1{#3}}%
\reserved@a
\endgroup
\if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pmemlabel}
% A version of |\label| that uses |\pmemprotected@write|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmemlabel}[1]{\@bsphack
\pmemprotected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\newpmemlabel{#1}{\thepmemc@@page}}%
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newpmemlabel}
% \begin{macro}{\pmemlabelref}
% We have to be able to cope with a particular label
% not (yet) being in the the \file{.aux} file when we come to check
% the page number.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newpmemlabel}[2]{{\global\@namedef{m@#1}{#2}}}
\newcommand{\pmemlabelref}[1]{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname m@#1\endcsname\relax
0%
\else
\csname m@#1\endcsname
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Checking for empty arguments}
%
% Like page checking, testing for an empty macro argument is more
% difficult than it might appear at first sight.
%
% The following code is from the \Lpack{ifmtarg} package~\cite{IFMTARG}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ifmtarg}
% \begin{macro}{\@ifnotmtarg}
% |\@ifmtarg{|\meta{arg}|}{<code when empty>}{<code when arg not empty>}| \\
% |\@ifnotmtarg{|\meta{arg}|}{<code when arg not empty>}| \\
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\catcode`\Q=3
\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
\long\gdef\@ifnotmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@firstofone\@gobble\@nil}
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Some example uses:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newcommand{\isempty}[1]{%
% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{YES}}{\typeout{NO}}}
% \newcommand{\isnotempty}[1]{%
% \@ifnotmtarg{#1}{\typeout{YES}}}
%
% \isempty{} -> YES \isnotempty{} ->
% \isempty{ } -> YES \isnotempty{ } ->
% \isempty{A} -> NO \isnotempty{A} -> YES
% \isempty{ A } -> NO \isnotempty{ A } -> YES
% \end{verbatim}
%
%
% \subsection{Changing the page layout in the document}
%
% You should not do this, but\ldots
%
% The following code is essentially from the \Lpack{chngpage}
% package~\cite{CHNGPAGE}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ch@ngetext}
% This macro sets the page output parameters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\ch@ngetext}{%
\setlength{\@colht}{\textheight}\setlength{\@colroom}{\textheight}%
\setlength{\vsize}{\textheight}\setlength{\columnwidth}{\textwidth}%
\if@twocolumn%
\advance\columnwidth-\columnsep \divide\columnwidth\tw@%
\@firstcolumntrue%
\fi%
\setlength{\hsize}{\columnwidth}%
\setlength{\linewidth}{\hsize}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\changetext}
% |\changetext{|\meta{H}|}{|\meta{W}|}{|\meta{E}|}{|\meta{O}|}{|\meta{G}|}|
% adds the given lengths to 5 main bits of the page layout. An empty
% argument means `no change'.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\changetext}[5]{%
\@ifmtarg{#1}{}{\addtolength{\textheight}{#1}}%
\@ifmtarg{#2}{}{\addtolength{\textwidth}{#2}}%
\@ifmtarg{#3}{}{\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{#3}}%
\@ifmtarg{#4}{}{\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{#4}}%
\@ifmtarg{#5}{}{\addtolength{\columnsep}{#5}}%
\ch@ngetext%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Any given change lasts until another |\changetext| command is given.
% A |\changetext| command should only be issued between two paragraphs.
%
% |\changetext| should not be used by anyone unless they really
% know what they are doing. If you really know what you are doing
% then you should know enough not to use it.
%
% \subsection{Temporarily changing the text width}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{adjustwidth}
% \begin{environment}{adjustwidth*}
% |\begin{adjustwidth}{|\meta{left}|}{|\meta{right}|}|
% adds the given lengths to the left and right hand margins. A positive
% value will shorten the text and a negative value will widen it. The
% starred version of the environment will cause the
% margin changes to switch between odd and even pages.
%
% This code is based on the \Lpack{chngpage} package.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Replaced optional arg of adjustwidth by adjustwidth*}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{adjustwidth}[2]{%
\begin{list}{}{%
\topsep\z@%
\listparindent\parindent%
\parsep\parskip%
\@ifmtarg{#1}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{\z@}}%
{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}}%
\@ifmtarg{#2}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{\z@}}%
{\setlength{\rightmargin}{#2}}%
}
\item[]}{\end{list}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{adjustwidth*}[2]{%
\begin{list}{}{%
\topsep\z@%
\listparindent\parindent%
\parsep\parskip%
\checkoddpage
\ifoddpage % odd numbered page
\@ifmtarg{#1}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{\z@}}%
{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}}%
\@ifmtarg{#2}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{\z@}}%
{\setlength{\rightmargin}{#2}}%
\else % even numbered page
\@ifmtarg{#2}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{\z@}}%
{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#2}}%
\@ifmtarg{#1}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{\z@}}%
{\setlength{\rightmargin}{#1}}%
\fi
}
\item[]}{\end{list}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
%
% The environments only work for complete paragraphs.
%
% \begin{macro}{\calccentering}
% This macro calculates the amount to be added to the spine margin
% (and subtracted from the foredge margin)
% in order to center the textblock. Call as \\
% |\calccentering{\length}| and it sets |\length|
% to the required value. Then use as \\
% |\begin{adjustwidth*}{\length}{-\length}...|
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\calccentering}[1]{
#1 = \paperwidth
\advance #1 by -\textwidth
\divide #1 by \tw@
\advance #1 by -\spinemargin
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Moving from the current page}
%
% Much of this code is taken from the \Lpack{nextpage} package~\cite{NEXTPAGE}.
%
% Clear to next page is |\clearpage|.
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleartoevenpage}
% |\cleartoevenpage[|\meta{text}|}| clears to the next even
% numbered page,
% putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cleartoevenpage}[1][\@empty]{%
\clearpage%
\ifodd\c@page\hbox{}#1\clearpage\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Move to the next page without flushing floats is |\newpage|.
%
% \begin{macro}{\movetoevenpage}
% |\movetoevenpage[|\meta{text}|}| moves to the next even
% numbered page without flushing floats,
% putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\movetoevenpage}[1][\@empty]{%
\newpage%
\ifodd\c@page\hbox{}#1\newpage\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Clear to next odd numbered page is \cs{cleardoublepage}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleartooddpage}
% \cs{cleartooddpage}\oarg{text} clears to the next odd
% numbered page,
% putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cleartooddpage}[1][\@empty]{%
\clearpage%
\ifodd\c@page\else\hbox{}#1\clearpage\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\movetooddpage}
% |\movetooddpage[|\meta{text}|}| moves to the next odd
% numbered page without flushing floats,
% putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\movetooddpage}[1][\@empty]{%
\newpage%
\ifodd\c@page\else\hbox{}#1\newpage\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Example uses: \\
% \begin{verbatim}
% \cleartooddpage % same as \cleardouble page
% \cleartooddpage[\thispagestyle{empty}] % No headings on the skipped page
% \cleartoevenpage % go to next even numbered page
% Next example puts text on a skipped page
% \cleartoevenpage[\vspace*{\hfill}THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK\vspace*{\hfill}]
% \end{verbatim}
%
%
%
% \subsection{Needing space at the bottom of a page}
%
% \begin{macro}{\needspace}
% |\needspace{|\meta{length}|}| checks if the is \meta{length} amount
% of vertical space left on the page. If there is not it will start
% a new page. The code is a variant of code thought of for the
% \Lpack{needspace} package~\cite{NEEDSPACE}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added patch v1.4 versions of needspace macros}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\needspace}[1]{\begingroup\setlength{\dimen@}{#1}%
\vskip\z@\@plus\dimen@\penalty -100\vskip\z@\@plus-\dimen@
\vskip\dimen@\penalty 9999\vskip-\dimen@\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Needspace}
% \begin{macro}{\Needspace*}
% |\Needspace| and |\Needspace*| are more robust versions of |\needspace|,
% which depends on penalties. If either |\needspace| or |\Needspace|
% produce a short page it will be ragged bottom, even if |\flushbottom|
% is in effect. The |\Needspace*| version honours the |\...bottom|
% declaration.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\Needspace}{\@ifstar{\M@sneedsp@}{\M@needsp@}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\M@sneedsp@}
% \begin{macro}{\M@needsp@}
% These implement |\Needspace*| and |\Needspace| respectively.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\M@sneedsp@}[1]{\par \penalty-100\begingroup
\setlength{\dimen@}{#1}%
\dimen@ii\pagegoal \advance\dimen@ii-\pagetotal
\ifdim \dimen@>\dimen@ii
\break
\fi\endgroup}
\newcommand{\M@needsp@}[1]{\par \penalty-100\begingroup
\setlength{\dimen@}{#1}%
\dimen@ii\pagegoal \advance\dimen@ii-\pagetotal
\ifdim \dimen@>\dimen@ii
\ifdim \dimen@ii>\z@
\vfil
\fi
\break
\fi\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Text spacing commands}
%
% While we're at it, new text spacing commands to supplement
% the kernel's \\
% \verb?\, (\thinspace) = 3/18 em?
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Extra text spacing macros from patch v1.4}
% \begin{macro}{\medspace}
% \begin{macro}{\:}
% Medium space \verb?\: (\medspace) = 4/18 em?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\medspace}{\kern .22222em }
\DeclareRobustCommand{\:}{%
\relax\ifmmode\mskip\medmuskip\else\medspace\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\!}
% Negative thin space (- 3/18 em).
% Patrik Nyman (private email 2003/10/06) pointed out I had missed
% the final \verb?\fi? !!!!.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\!}{%
\relax\ifmmode\mskip-\thinmuskip\else\negthinspace\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Fractions and subscripts}
%
%
% Styles for fractions like 3/4.
%
% \begin{macro}{\slashfracstyle}
% |\slashfracstyle| based on the kernel |\textsuperscript| macro
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{slashfrac} and supports (from patch v1.4)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\slashfracstyle}[1]{%
{\m@th\ensuremath{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@\selectfont #1}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\slashfrac}
% |\slashfrac| based on TeXbook exercise 11.6
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\slashfrac}[2]{\leavevmode
\raise.5ex\hbox{\slashfracstyle{#1}}\kern-.13em/%
\kern-.15em\lower.25ex\hbox{\slashfracstyle{#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\textsubscript}
% \begin{macro}{\@textsubscript}
% |\textsubscript|, for text subscripts, based on the kernel
% |\textsuperscript| macro.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{textsubscript} and supports
% (from patch v1.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\textsubscript}[1]{%
\@textsubscript{\selectfont#1}}
\newcommand*{\@textsubscript}[1]{%
{\m@th\ensuremath{_{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@#1}}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Numbers to names}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% number formatting
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The macros here convert an integer number in the range 0--2147483647
% (TeX's maximum) into
% the natural language name of the number.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Much extended numbers to names (patch v1.2)}
%
% \begin{macro}{\iflowernumtoname}
% A flag for lowercasing the initial letters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\iflowernumtoname
\lowernumtonamefalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifpriornum}
% \begin{macro}{\ifminusnumber}
% \begin{macro}{\ifnotnumtonameallcaps}
% \begin{macro}{\ifmakeordinal}
% Some new booleans
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifpriornum
\newif\ifminusnumber
\newif\ifnotnumtonameallcaps
\newif\ifmakeordinal
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\namenumberand}
% \begin{macro}{\namenumbercomma}
% \begin{macro}{\lcminusname}
% \begin{macro}{\ucminusname}
% \begin{macro}{\minusname}
% Some macros representing characters/words for number formatting.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\namenumberand}{ and }
\newcommand*{\namenumbercomma}{, }
\newcommand*{\lcminusname}{minus }
\newcommand*{\ucminusname}{Minus }
\let\minusname\lcminusname
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fnumbersep}
% \begin{macro}{\tensunitsep}
% \begin{macro}{\nthstring}
% \begin{macro}{\iststring}
% \begin{macro}{\iindstring}
% \begin{macro}{\iiirdstring}
% \begin{macro}{\tiethstring}
% \begin{macro}{\teenstring}
% More characters/words for formatting
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\fnumbersep}{,}
\newcommand*\tensunitsep{-}
\newcommand*{\nthstring}{th} % nth
\newcommand*{\iststring}{st} % 1st
\newcommand*{\iindstring}{nd} % 2nd
\newcommand*{\iiirdstring}{rd} % 3rd
\newcommand*{\tiethstring}{tieth} % tieth
\newcommand*{\teenstring}{teen} % teen
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ordscript}
% How to format the ordinal string
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\ordscript}[1]{#1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mten}
% An internal shorthand for 10
% \begin{macrocode}
\chardef\m@mten=10 % shorthand for 10
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@ism@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@xsm@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@csm@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@ksm@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@xksm@mctr}
% Counters for digits (units to ten thousands) in a number
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{ism@mctr} % units
\newcounter{xsm@mctr} % tens
\newcounter{csm@mctr} % hundreds
\newcounter{ksm@mctr} % thousands
\newcounter{xksm@mctr} % ten thousands
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@cksm@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@msm@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@xmsm@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@cmsm@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@bsm@mctr}
% Counters for digits (hundred thousands to billions) in a number
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{cksm@mctr} % hundred thousands
\newcounter{msm@mctr} % millions
\newcounter{xmsm@mctr} % ten millions
\newcounter{cmsm@mctr} % hundred millions
\newcounter{bsm@mctr} % billions
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@workm@mctr}
% A `work' counter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{workm@mctr}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\numdigits}
% |\numdigits|\marg{number} splits the \meta{number} into individual digits.
% It sets |\minusnumbertrue| if the number is negative, otherwise it is false.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\numdigits}[1]{%
\setcounter{ism@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{xsm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{csm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{ksm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{xksm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{cksm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{msm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{xmsm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{cmsm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{bsm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{workm@mctr}{#1}%
\minusnumberfalse
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr < \z@ % negative
\minusnumbertrue
\c@workm@mctr = -\c@workm@mctr
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \m@ne % units
\c@ism@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@ism@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % tens
\c@xsm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@xsm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % hundreds
\c@csm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@csm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % thousands
\c@ksm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@ksm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % ten thousands
\c@xksm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@xksm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % hundred thousands
\c@cksm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@cksm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % millions
\c@msm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@msm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % ten millions
\c@xmsm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@xmsm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % hundred millions
\c@cmsm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@cmsm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@% billions
\c@bsm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@bsm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\form@tnumber}
% |\form@tnumber|\marg{number} formats \meta{number} as digits.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\form@tnumber}[1]{%
\numdigits{#1}%
\ifminusnumber-\fi
\priornumfalse
\ifnum \c@bsm@mctr > \z@ % billions
\priornumtrue
\thebsm@mctr\fnumbersep
\fi
\ifpriornum % hundred millions
\thecmsm@mctr
\else
\ifnum \c@cmsm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\thecmsm@mctr
\fi
\fi
\ifpriornum % ten millions
\thexmsm@mctr
\else
\ifnum \c@xmsm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\thexmsm@mctr
\fi
\fi
\ifpriornum % millions
\themsm@mctr\fnumbersep
\else
\ifnum \c@msm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\themsm@mctr\fnumbersep
\fi
\fi
\ifpriornum % hundred thousands
\thecksm@mctr
\else
\ifnum \c@cksm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\thecksm@mctr
\fi
\fi
\ifpriornum % ten thousands
\thexksm@mctr
\else
\ifnum \c@xksm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\thexksm@mctr
\fi
\fi
\ifpriornum % thousands
\theksm@mctr\fnumbersep
\else
\ifnum \c@ksm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\theksm@mctr\fnumbersep
\fi
\fi
\ifpriornum % hundreds
\thecsm@mctr
\else
\ifnum \c@csm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\thecsm@mctr
\fi
\fi
\ifpriornum % tens
\thexsm@mctr
\else
\ifnum \c@xsm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\thexsm@mctr
\fi
\fi
\theism@mctr % units
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cardinal}
% |\cardinal|\marg{number} prints \meta{number} unformatted.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cardinal}[1]{%
\begingroup
\let\fnumbersep\relax
\form@tnumber{#1}%
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fcardinal}
% |\fcardinal|\marg{number} prints \meta{number} formatted.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\fcardinal}[1]{%
\begingroup
\form@tnumber{#1}%
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ordinal}
% |\ordinal|\marg{number} prints \meta{number} as an unformatted ordinal.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ordinal}[1]{%
\begingroup
\let\fnumbersep\relax
\form@tnumber{#1}%
\let\ordstring\nthstring
\ifnum \c@xsm@mctr=\@ne\else
\ifcase \c@ism@mctr
\or \let\ordstring\iststring% 1st
\or \let\ordstring\iindstring% 2nd
\or \let\ordstring\iiirdstring% 3rd
\fi
\fi
\ordscript{\ordstring}%
\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fordinal}
% |\fordinal|\marg{number} prints \meta{number} as a formatted ordinal.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\fordinal}[1]{%
\begingroup
\form@tnumber{#1}%
\let\ordstring\nthstring
\ifnum \c@xsm@mctr=\@ne\else
\ifcase \c@ism@mctr
\or \let\ordstring\iststring% 1st
\or \let\ordstring\iindstring% 2nd
\or \let\ordstring\iiirdstring% 3rd
\fi
\fi
\ordscript{\ordstring}%
\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The next, tedious, code is for translating numbers into names.
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNameo}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamec}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamem}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamemm}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamemmm}
% Names of major numbers: $0$, $10^{2}$, $10^{3}$, $10^{6}$, and $10^{9}$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNameo{\iflowernumtoname z\else Z\fi ero}
\newcommand*\nNamec{\iflowernumtoname h\else H\fi undred}
\newcommand*\nNamem{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi housand}
\newcommand*\nNamemm{\iflowernumtoname m\else M\fi illion}
\newcommand*\nNamemmm{\iflowernumtoname b\else B\fi illion}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamei}
% \begin{macro}{\nNameii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNameiii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNameiv}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamev}
% These are the names for numbers 1 to 5.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamei{\iflowernumtoname o\else O\fi ne}
\newcommand*\nNameii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi wo}
\newcommand*\nNameiii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hree}
\newcommand*\nNameiv{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi our}
\newcommand*\nNamev{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi ive}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamevi}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamevii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNameviii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNameix}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamex}
% These are the names for numbers 6 to 10.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamevi{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi ix}
\newcommand*\nNamevii{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi even}
\newcommand*\nNameviii{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi ight}
\newcommand*\nNameix{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi ine}
\newcommand*\nNamex{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi en}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexi}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexiii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexiv}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexv}
% These are the names for numbers 11 to 15.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamexi{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi leven}
\newcommand*\nNamexii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi welve}
\newcommand*\nNamexiii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hir\teenstring}
\newcommand*\nNamexiv{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi our\teenstring}
\newcommand*\nNamexv{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi if\teenstring}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexvi}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexvii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexviii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexix}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexx}
% These are the names for numbers 16 to 20.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamexvi{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi ix\teenstring}
\newcommand*\nNamexvii{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi even\teenstring}
\newcommand*\nNamexviii{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi igh\teenstring}
\newcommand*\nNamexix{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi ine\teenstring}
\newcommand*\nNamexx{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi wenty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexxx}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexl}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamel}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamelx}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamelxx}
% These are the names for numbers 30 to 70.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamexxx{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hirty}
\newcommand*\nNamexl{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi orty}
\newcommand*\nNamel{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi ifty}
\newcommand*\nNamelx{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi ixty}
\newcommand*\nNamelxx{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi eventy}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamelxxx}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexc}
% These are the names for numbers 80 to 90.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamelxxx{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi ighty}
\newcommand*\nNamexc{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi inety}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\unitnumbername}
% Get the name of a unit (0 -- 9).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\unitnumbername}[1]{%
\ifcase #1 \nNameo\or
\nNamei\or
\nNameii\or
\nNameiii\or
\nNameiv\or
\nNamev\or
\nNamevi\or
\nNamevii\or
\nNameviii\or
\nNameix\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\teennumbername}
% Get the name of a 'teen number (10 -- 19)
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\teennumbername}[1]{%
\ifcase #1 \nNamex\or
\nNamexi\or
\nNamexii\or
\nNamexiii\or
\nNamexiv\or
\nNamexv\or
\nNamexvi\or
\nNamexvii\or
\nNamexviii\or
\nNamexix\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tensnumbername}
% Get the name of a tens number (20 -- 90)
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tensnumbername}[2]{%
\ifnum #1=\@ne
\teennumbername{#2}\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
\else
\ifcase #1
\or
\or \nNamexx
\or \nNamexxx
\or \nNamexl
\or \nNamel
\or \nNamelx
\or \nNamelxx
\or \nNamelxxx
\or \nNamexc
\fi
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
\ifnum #2 > \z@ \tensunitsep\unitnumbername{#2}\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Names of small ordinals. The use of |\nthstring| instead of `th' saves
% some tokens.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nthNameo{\nNameo\nthstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamei{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi irst}
\newcommand*\nthNameii{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi econd}
\newcommand*\nthNameiii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hird}
\newcommand*\nthNameiv{\nNameiv\nthstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamev{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi if\nthstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamevi{\nNamevi\nthstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamevii{\nNamevii\nthstring}
\newcommand*\nthNameviii{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi igh\nthstring}
\newcommand*\nthNameix{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi in\nthstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamexii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi welf\nthstring}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\unitordinalname}
% Get the ordinal name of a unit (0 -- 9)
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\unitordinalname}[1]{%
\ifcase #1 \nthNameo\or
\nthNamei\or
\nthNameii\or
\nthNameiii\or
\nthNameiv\or
\nthNamev\or
\nthNamevi\or
\nthNamevii\or
\nthNameviii\or
\nthNameix\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\teenordinalname}
% Get the ordinal name of a 'teen number (10 -- 19). Using |\nthstring|
% instead of `th' to save some tokens.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\teenordinalname}[1]{%
\ifcase #1 \nNamex\nthstring\or
\nNamexi\nthstring\or
\nthNamexii\or
\nNamexiii\nthstring\or
\nNamexiv\nthstring\or
\nNamexv\nthstring\or
\nNamexvi\nthstring\or
\nNamexvii\nthstring\or
\nNamexviii\nthstring\or
\nNamexix\nthstring\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tensordinalname}
% Get the ordinal name of a tens number (20 -- 90)
% (Mathew Dafilis (\texttt{mpd@swin.edu.au}) sent Email on 2003/11/14
% saying that \cs{ordinaltoname} didn't work for 20, 30, etc. He was
% correct. It is now fixed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tensordinalname}[2]{%
\ifnum #1=\@ne
\teenordinalname{#2}\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
\else
\ifnum #2> \z@
\ifcase #1
\or
\or \nNamexx
\or \nNamexxx
\or \nNamexl
\or \nNamel
\or \nNamelx
\or \nNamelxx
\or \nNamelxxx
\or \nNamexc
\fi
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
\tensunitsep\unitordinalname{#2}
\else
\ifcase #1
\or
\or \nthNamexx
\or \nthNamexxx
\or \nthNamexl
\or \nthNamel
\or \nthNamelx
\or \nthNamelxx
\or \nthNamelxxx
\or \nthNamexc
\fi
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The names of tens ordinals. The use of |\tiethstring| instead
% of `tieth' saves somes tokens.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nthNamexx{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi wen\tiethstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamexxx{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hir\tiethstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamexl{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi or\tiethstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamel{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi if\tiethstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamelx{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi ix\tiethstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamelxx{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi even\tiethstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamelxxx{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi igh\tiethstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamexc{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi ine\tiethstring}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\n@me@number}
% |\n@me@number|\meta{number} is an internal macro to convert a
% \meta{number} to names.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\n@me@number}[1]{%
\begingroup
\numdigits{#1}%
\ifminusnumber\minusname\fi
\priornumfalse
%% billions
\ifnum \c@bsm@mctr > \z@
\unitnumbername{\thebsm@mctr}\space
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi\nNamemmm
\priornumtrue
\fi
%% hundred millions
\ifnum \c@cmsm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\namenumbercomma\fi
\unitnumbername{\thecmsm@mctr}\space
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi\nNamec
\priornumtrue
\fi
%% tens/units millions
\ifnum \c@xmsm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum
\ifnum\c@cmsm@mctr>\z@\namenumberand\else\namenumbercomma\fi
\fi
\tensnumbername{\thexmsm@mctr}{\themsm@mctr}%
\priornumtrue
\else
\ifnum \c@msm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum
\ifnum\c@cmsm@mctr>\z@\namenumberand\else\namenumbercomma\fi
\fi
\unitnumbername{\themsm@mctr}%
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
\priornumtrue
\fi
\fi
\ifnum \c@cmsm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\space\fi
\nNamemm
\else
\ifnum \c@xmsm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\space\fi
\nNamemm
\else
\ifnum \c@msm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\space\fi
\nNamemm
\fi
\fi
\fi
%% hundred thousands
\ifnum \c@cksm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\namenumbercomma\fi
\unitnumbername{\thecksm@mctr}\space
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi\nNamec
\priornumtrue
\fi
%% tens/units thousands
\ifnum \c@xksm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum
\ifnum\c@cksm@mctr>\z@\namenumberand\else\namenumbercomma\fi
\fi
\tensnumbername{\thexksm@mctr}{\theksm@mctr}%
\priornumtrue
\else
\ifnum \c@ksm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum
\ifnum\c@cksm@mctr>\z@\namenumberand\else\namenumbercomma\fi
\fi
\unitnumbername{\theksm@mctr}%
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
\priornumtrue
\fi
\fi
\ifnum \c@cksm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\space\fi
\nNamem
\else
\ifnum \c@xksm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\space\fi
\nNamem
\else
\ifnum \c@ksm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\space\fi
\nNamem
\fi
\fi
\fi
%% hundreds
\ifnum \c@csm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\namenumbercomma\fi
\unitnumbername{\thecsm@mctr}\space
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi\nNamec
\priornumtrue
\fi
%% tens/units
\ifmakeordinal
\ifnum \c@xsm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\namenumberand\fi
\tensordinalname{\thexsm@mctr}{\theism@mctr}%
\else
\ifnum \c@ism@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\namenumberand\fi
\unitordinalname{\theism@mctr}%
\else
\ifpriornum\nthstring\else\unitordinalname{\theism@mctr}\fi
\fi
\fi
\else % not ordinal
\ifnum \c@xsm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\namenumberand\fi
\tensnumbername{\thexsm@mctr}{\theism@mctr}%
\else
\ifnum \c@ism@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\namenumberand\fi
\unitnumbername{\theism@mctr}%
\else
\ifpriornum\else\unitnumbername{\theism@mctr}\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi % end ifmakeordinal
\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\numtoname}
% Lowercase all names
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\numtoname}[1]{%
\makeordinalfalse
\notnumtonameallcapstrue%
\lowernumtonametrue%
\n@me@number{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\numtoName}
% Uppercase first letter of first name (all else lowercase).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\numtoName}[1]{%
\makeordinalfalse
\notnumtonameallcapstrue%
\lowernumtonamefalse%
\n@me@number{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\NumToName}
% Uppercase first letter of all names (all else lowercase).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\NumToName}[1]{%
\makeordinalfalse
\notnumtonameallcapsfalse%
\lowernumtonamefalse%
\n@me@number{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ordinaltoname}
% Lowercase all ordinal names
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ordinaltoname}[1]{%
\makeordinaltrue
\notnumtonameallcapstrue%
\lowernumtonametrue%
\n@me@number{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ordinaltoName}
% Uppercase first letter of first ordinal name (all else lowercase).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ordinaltoName}[1]{%
\makeordinaltrue
\notnumtonameallcapstrue%
\lowernumtonamefalse%
\n@me@number{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\OrdinalToName}
% Uppercase first letter of all ordinal names (all else lowercase).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\OrdinalToName}[1]{%
\makeordinaltrue
\notnumtonameallcapsfalse%
\lowernumtonamefalse%
\n@me@number{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{A fix for two column headings}
%
%
% This is from a posting by Donald Arseneau to \ctt{} on 23 April 2001 to fix
% a problem --- `When I use |\onecolumn\chapter...| its headline
% is printed lower on the page than for two-column chapters'
%
% DA and I had previously discussed this in relation to the Index
% and I had put a hack into the \Lpack{tocbibind} package to fix the Index.
%
% Donald posted the following.
%
% |\vspace*| gives bad spacing after a pagebreak and |\@makechapterhead|
% starts with |\vspace*|.
% The biggest problem is the definition of |\@topnewpage|, which is used
% for the two-column spanning text. Here is a redefinition:
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added DA's redefinition of \cs{@topnewpage}}
% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def \@topnewpage [#1]{%
\@nodocument
\@next\@currbox\@freelist{}{}%
\global \setbox\@currbox
\vbox {%
\break
\prevdepth\z@
\begingroup
\normalcolor
\hsize\textwidth
\@parboxrestore
\col@number \@ne
#1%
\vskip -\dbltextfloatsep
\endgroup
\null % ordinary \baselineskip
\vskip -\topskip
}%
\begingroup %% \showbox\@currbox
\splitmaxdepth\maxdepth \splittopskip\topskip
\setbox\@tempboxa \vsplit\@currbox to \z@
\endgroup %% \showbox\@currbox
\ifdim \ht\@currbox>\textheight
\ht\@currbox \textheight
\fi
\global \count\@currbox \tw@
\@tempdima -\ht\@currbox
\advance \@tempdima -\dbltextfloatsep
\global \advance \@colht \@tempdima
\ifx \@dbltoplist \@empty
\else
\@latexerr{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
\let \@dbltoplist \@empty
\fi
\@cons \@dbltoplist \@currbox
\global \@dbltopnum \m@ne
\ifdim \@colht<2.5\baselineskip
\@latex@warning@no@line {Optional argument of \noexpand\twocolumn
too tall on page \thepage}%
\@emptycol
\if@firstcolumn
\else
\@emptycol
\fi
\else
\global \vsize \@colht
\global \@colroom \@colht
\@floatplacement
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The original version of |\@topnewpage| is in \file{ltouput.dtx}, line 159.
%
%
%
% \section{Initialization} \label{sec:init}
%
% \subsection{Words and phrases}
%
% This document class is for documents prepared in the English language.
% To prepare a version for another language, various English words
% and phrases must
% be replaced. The English elements that require replacement are
% defined below in command names.
%
% \begin{macro}{\abstractname}
% \begin{macro}{\contentsname}
% \begin{macro}{\listfigurename}
% \begin{macro}{\listtablename}
% \begin{macro}{\partname}
% \begin{macro}{\chaptername}
% \begin{macro}{\appendixname}
% \begin{macro}{\appendixtocname}
% \begin{macro}{\appendixpagename}
% \begin{macro}{\bibname}
% \begin{macro}{\indexname}
% \begin{macro}{\glossaryname}
%
% This list is for titles of document sections.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\abstractname}{Abstract}
\newcommand*{\contentsname}{Contents}
\newcommand*{\listfigurename}{List of Figures}
\newcommand*{\listtablename}{List of Tables}
\newcommand*{\partname}{Part}
\newcommand*{\chaptername}{Chapter}
\newcommand*{\appendixname}{Appendix}
\newcommand*{\appendixtocname}{Appendices}
\newcommand*{\appendixpagename}{Appendices}
\newcommand*{\bibname}{Bibliography}
\newcommand*{\indexname}{Index}
\newcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\figurename}
% \begin{macro}{\tablename}
% \begin{macro}{\figurerefname}
% \begin{macro}{\tablerefname}
% \begin{macro}{\pagename}
% \begin{macro}{\pagrefename}
%
% These are the names and phrases used for general elements.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\figurename}{Figure}
\newcommand*{\tablename}{Table}
\newcommand*{\figurerefname}{Figure}
\newcommand*{\tablerefname}{Table}
\newcommand*{\pagename}{page}
\newcommand*{\pagerefname}{page}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\partrefname}
% \begin{macro}{\chapterrefname}
% \begin{macro}{\sectionrefname}
% More names for referencing.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{partrefname}, \cs{chapterrefname}
% and \cs{sectionrefname}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\partrefname}{Part~}
\newcommand*{\chapterrefname}{Chapter~}
\newcommand*{\sectionrefname}{\S}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Date}
%
% \begin{macro}{\today}
% This macro uses the \TeX\ primitives |\month|, |\day| and |\year|
% to provide the date of the \LaTeX-run.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\today}{\ifcase\month\or
January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
\space\number\day, \number\year}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Two column mode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\columnsep}
% This gives the distance between two columns in two column mode.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\columnsep{10\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\columnseprule}
% This gives the width of the rule between two columns in two
% column mode. We have no visible rule.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\columnseprule{0\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The page style and counters}
% We use the page style \pstyle{headings} by
% default and arabic page numbering.
% \begin{macrocode}
\pagestyle{headings}
\pagenumbering{arabic}
% \end{macrocode}
% We set the sectional counters to zero, the |tocdepth| to
% one (sections and above listed), the |secnumdepth| to
% two (sections and above numbered), and |\maxsecnumdepth| to
% the same.
% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/04/28}{Added initialisation of \cs{maxsecnumdepth}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{part}{0}
\setcounter{chapter}{0}
\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{2}
\maxsecnumdepth{section}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Set the |\linenumberfrequency| to zero to prohibit line numbering
% and also set the font for line numbers. Can now set the final space
% for boxed verbatim line numbers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\linenumberfrequency{0}
\linenumberfont{\small\rmfamily}
\settowidth{\bvnumlength}{\vlvnumfont 9999}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Single or double sided printing}
%
%
% Unless the \Lopt{twoside} wasn't specified, We do not try to make
% each page of equal height.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twoside
\else
\raggedbottom
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% When the \Lopt{twocolumn} option was specified we call
% |\twocolumn| to activate this mode. We try to make each column as
% long as the others, but call |sloppy| to make our life easier.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
\twocolumn
\sloppy
\flushbottom
% \end{macrocode}
% Normally we call |\onecolumn| to initiate typesetting in one
% column.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
\onecolumn
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Floats}
%
% Here are the implementations of the figure and table environments
% and their accompanying List of\ldots
%
% \begin{environment}{figure}
% \begin{environment}{figure*}
% This is the definition of the actual environment. The form with the
% |*| is used for double column figures. We use |\newfloat| to set it.
% In this class figures are numbered per chapter, but we need to change
% the default definition of |\thefigure| if a figure
% is in a pre-numbered chapter.
% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% figure float}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newfloat[chapter]{figure}{lof}{\figurename}
\kill@lastcounter{lofdepth}
\renewcommand{\thefigure}{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@figure}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures*}
% These macros request that LaTeX produces a list of figures.
% The LoF heading is added to the ToC unless the starred
% version is used.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% list of figures}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistof{listoffigures}{lof}{\listfigurename}
\kill@lastcounter{lofdepth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@figure}
% |\l@figure{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the LoF entry for
% a |figure| caption heading.
% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Deleted \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% figure listentry}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistentry[chapter]{figure}{lof}{0}
\cftsetindents{figure}{0em}{2.3em}
%% \kill@lastcounter{lofdepth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{table}
% \begin{environment}{table*}
% The definition for tables is almost identical.
% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% table float}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newfloat[chapter]{table}{lot}{\tablename}
\kill@lastcounter{lotdepth}
\renewcommand{\thetable}{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@table}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
% \begin{macro}{\listoftables*}
% These macros request that LaTeX produces a list of tables.
% The LoT heading is added to the ToC unless the starred
% version is used.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% list of tables}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistof{listoftables}{lot}{\listtablename}
\kill@lastcounter{lotdepth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@table}
% |\l@table{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the LoT entry for
% a |table| caption heading.
% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Deleted \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% table listentry}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistentry[chapter]{table}{lot}{0}
\cftsetindents{table}{0em}{2.3em}
%% \kill@lastcounter{lotdepth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The \Lpack{subfigure} package defines |lofdepth| and |lotdepth|
% counters. If is not used, then we have to define them.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}%
{\newcounter{lofdepth}\setcounter{lofdepth}{1}}{}
\@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}%
{\newcounter{lotdepth}\setcounter{lotdepth}{1}}{}
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{article} option}
%
% The \Lopt{article} option requires changes to the default chapterstyle,
% and the numbering of floats, etc.
%
% Emanuele Vicentini (2003/07/21) suggested making |\maketitle| more
% closely match the real article's appearance.
% Alan Budden\footnote{\texttt{alan.s.budden@bristol.ac.uk}} commented
% on 2003/12/18 that the equation counter should be continuous.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/12/07}{Added footnote and chaptername changes to the article option}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added some resets of maketitle macros to
% the article option (from patch v1.7)}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/12/18}{Added equation counter to article resets}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifartopt
\chapterstyle{article}
\counterwithout{figure}{chapter}
\counterwithout{table}{chapter}
\counterwithout{footnote}{chapter}
\counterwithout{equation}{chapter}
\renewcommand{\chaptername}{}
\renewcommand{\maketitlehookb}{%
\vskip -1.5\topsep\vskip -1.5\partopsep}
\renewcommand{\maketitlehookc}{%
\vskip -1.5\topsep\vskip -1.5\partopsep}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{ms} option}
%
% This should be done last as it makes various changes to the defaults.
%
% \begin{macro}{\msdoublespacing}
% \begin{macro}{\mssinglespacing}
% These do nothing unless the \Lopt{ms} option is used; then they change
% the |\baselinestretch|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\msdoublespacing}{}
\newcommand{\mssinglespacing}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifmsdoc
\renewcommand{\msdoublespacing}{%
\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.6}\large\normalsize}
\renewcommand{\mssinglespacing}{%
\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.0}\large\normalsize}
\renewcommand{\familydefault}{cmtt}
\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{cmtt}
\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{cmtt}
\renewcommand{\bfdefault}{m}
\renewcommand{\itdefault}{n}
\renewcommand{\sldefault}{n}
\renewcommand{\scdefault}{n}
\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.6}
\@twocolumnfalse
\onecolumn
\sloppy
\@twosidefalse
\raggedbottom
\pagestyle{plain}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Emulated packages}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\EmulatedPackage{abstract}
\EmulatedPackage{appendix}
\EmulatedPackage{array}
\EmulatedPackage{booktabs}
\EmulatedPackage{ccaption}
\EmulatedPackage{chngcntr}
\EmulatedPackage{chngpage}
\EmulatedPackage{crop}
\EmulatedPackage{dcolumn}
\EmulatedPackage{delarray}
\EmulatedPackage{enumerate}
\EmulatedPackage{epigraph}
\EmulatedPackage{framed}
\EmulatedPackage{ifmtarg}
\EmulatedPackage{ifpdf}
\EmulatedPackage{index}
\EmulatedPackage{makeidx}
\EmulatedPackage{moreverb}
\EmulatedPackage{needspace}
\EmulatedPackage{newfile}
\EmulatedPackage{nextpage}
\EmulatedPackage{patchcmd}
\EmulatedPackage{shortvrb}
\EmulatedPackage{showidx}
\EmulatedPackage{tabularx}
\EmulatedPackage{titleref}
\EmulatedPackage{titling}
\EmulatedPackage{tocbibind}
\EmulatedPackage{tocloft}
\EmulatedPackage{verbatim}
\EmulatedPackage{verse}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Patch file}
%
% At the suggestion of Danie Els (\texttt{DanieEls@sun.ac.za}), Dan Leucking
% (\texttt{luecking@uark.edu}) and others, input a patch file, if one exists,
% as the final act. (This is preferable to my series of \file{memfixa.sty},
% \file{memfixb.sty} packages, and so on, for each release of the class.)
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added input of mempatch.sty}
% \begin{macrocode}
\InputIfFileExists{mempatch.sty} % should be this
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The end of the class definitions.
% \begin{macrocode}
%</class>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{Glossary Makeindex style file}
%
% Here is the basic style (configuration) file for Makeindex
% for use with the default glossary setup.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Added basic.gst file}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*gst>
%%%%% basic.gst basic makeindex glossary configuration file for memoir
%%%%% Output style parameters
preamble "\\begin{theglossary}"
postamble "\n\\end{theglossary}\n"
group_skip "\n\\glossaryspace\n"
item_0 "\n\\glossitem"
delim_0 "{\\memglonum{"
encap_suffix "}}}"
%%% Input style parameters
keyword "\\glossaryentry"
%</gst>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The end of the configuration file code
%
% \bibliographystyle{alpha}
% \begingroup
% \raggedright
% \begin{thebibliography}{GMSN94A}
%
%
% \bibitem[ABH90]{bk:Impatient}
% Paul W.~Abrahams, Karl Berry and Kathryn A.~Hargreaves.
% \newblock \emph{TeX{} for the Impatient}.
% \newblock
% Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1990.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in \texttt{info/impatient})
%
% \bibitem[Ars01a]{TITLEREF}
% Donald Arseneau.
% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{Titleref} package (version 3.1)}.
% \newblock April 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTN as
% \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/misc/titleref.sty})
%
% \bibitem[Ars01b]{CHAPTERBIB}
% Donald Arseneau.
% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{Chapterbib} package (version 1.9)}.
% \newblock September 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTN as
% \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/misc/chapterbib.sty})
%
% \bibitem[Ars03]{FRAMED}
% Donald Arseneau.
% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{Framed} package (version 0.8a)}.
% \newblock July 2003.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN as
% \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/misc/framed.sty})
%
% \bibitem[ArWi00]{IFMTARG}
% Donald Arseneau and Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The ifmtarg package}.
% \newblock March, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/misc})
%
%
% \bibitem[Car94]{DELARRAY}
% David Carlisle.
% \newblock \emph{The \Lpack{delarray} package}.
% \newblock March 1994.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
%
%
% \bibitem[Car98a]{ENUMERATE}
% David Carlisle.
% \newblock \emph{The enumerate package}.
% \newblock August, 1998.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
%
% \bibitem[Car98b]{REMRESET}
% David Carlisle.
% \newblock \emph{The remreset package}.
% \newblock August, 1998.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/carlisle})
%
% \bibitem[Car99]{TABULARX}
% David Carlisle.
% \newblock \emph{The \Lpack{tabularx} package}.
% \newblock January 1999.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
%
% \bibitem[Car01]{DCOLUMN}
% David Carlisle.
% \newblock \emph{The \Lpack{dcolumn} package}.
% \newblock May 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
%
% \bibitem[Coc02]{SUBFIGURE}
% Steven Douglas Cochran.
% \newblock \emph{The subfigure package}.
% \newblock March, 2002.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/subfigure})
%
% \bibitem[Dal99]{NATBIB}
% Patrick W. Daly.
% \newblock \emph{Natural Sciences Citations and References}.
% \newblock May, 1999.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/natbib})
%
% \bibitem[Dow00]{PATCHCMD}
% Michael J. Downes
% \newblock \emph{The patchcmd package}.
% \newblock July 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/patchcmd})
%
% \bibitem[Fai98]{MOREVERB}
% Robin Fairbairns.
% \newblock \emph{The moreverb package}.
% \newblock December, 1998.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/moreverb})
%
% \bibitem[Fai03]{FOOTMISC}
% Robin Fairbairns.
% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{footmisc} --- a portmanteau package for
% customising footnotes in LaTeX}.
% \newblock February 2003.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/footmisc})
%
%
% \bibitem[Fea03]{BOOKTABS}
% Simon Fear.
% \newblock \emph{Publication quality tables in \LaTeX}.
% \newblock March, 2003.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/booktabs})
%
% \bibitem[Fra00]{CROP}
% Melchior Franz.
% \newblock \emph{The crop package}.
% \newblock February, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/crop})
%
%
% \bibitem[GMS94]{GOOSSENS94}
% Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and Alexander Samarin.
% \newblock {\em The LaTeX Companion}.
% \newblock Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1994.
%
%
%
% \bibitem[Knu84]{bk:knuth}
% Donald E. Knuth.
% \newblock \emph{The \TeX{}book}.
% \newblock
% Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1984.
%
% \bibitem[Lam94]{bk:lamport}
% Leslie Lamport.
% \newblock \emph{\LaTeX\ --- A Document Preparation System}.
% \newblock
% Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1994.
%
% \bibitem[LMB99]{CLASSES}
% Leslie Lamport, Frank Mittelbach and Johannes Braams.
% \newblock \emph{Standard Document Classes for LaTeX version 2e}.
% \newblock September, 1999.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN as
% \texttt{/macros/latex/base/classes.dtx})
%
% \bibitem[MC98]{ARRAY}
% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle.
% \newblock \emph{A new implementation of LaTeX's tabular and array
% environment}
% \newblock May 1998.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
%
% \bibitem[Oos96]{FANCYHDR}
% Piet van Oostrum.
% \newblock \emph{Page layout in LaTeX}.
% \newblock June, 1996.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr})
%
%
% \bibitem[Rah01]{NAMEREF}
% Sebastian Rahtz.
% \newblock \emph{Section name references in LaTeX}.
% \newblock January 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref})
%
% \bibitem[Rah02]{HYPERREF}
% Sebastian Rahtz.
% \newblock \emph{Hypertext marks in LaTeX}.
% \newblock March 2002.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref})
%
%
% \bibitem[Sch98]{EVERYSHI}
% Martin Schr\"{o}der.
% \newblock \emph{The everyshi package}.
% \newblock August, 1998.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/ms})
%
% \bibitem[SRR01]{VERBATIM}
% Rainer Sch\"{o}pf, Bernd Raichle and Chris Rowley.
% \newblock \emph{A new implementation of LaTeX's verbatim and verbatim*
% environments}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
%
% \bibitem[Wil99]{TOCVSEC2}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The tocvsec2 package}.
% \newblock January, 1999.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/tocvsec2})
%
% \bibitem[Wil00a]{EPIGRAPH}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The epigraph package}.
% \newblock February, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/epigraph})
%
% \bibitem[Wil00b]{ISOCLASS}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{LaTeX files for typesetting ISO standards}.
% \newblock February, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/isostds/iso})
%
% \bibitem[Wil00c]{NEXTPAGE}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The nextpage package}.
% \newblock February, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/misc})
%
% \bibitem[Wil00d]{NEEDSPACE}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The needspace package}.
% \newblock March, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/misc})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01a]{ABSTRACT}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The abstract package}.
% \newblock February, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/abstract})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01b]{CHNGPAGE}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The chngpage package}.
% \newblock February, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/misc})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01c]{APPENDIX}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The appendix package}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/appendix})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01d]{CCAPTION}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The ccaption package}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/ccaption})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01e]{CHNGCNTR}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The chngcntr package}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/misc})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01f]{HANGING}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The hanging package}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/hanging})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01g]{TITLING}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The titling package}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/titling})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01h]{TOCBIBIND}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The tocbibind package}.
% \newblock April, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/tocbibind})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01i]{TOCLOFT}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The tocloft package}.
% \newblock April, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/tocloft})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01j]{VERSE}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{Typesetting simple verse with LaTeX}.
% \newblock August, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/verse})
%
%
% \bibitem[Wil03]{LEDMAC}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{ledmac}: A presumptuous attempt to port EDMAC and
% TABMAC to LaTeX}.
% \newblock August 2003.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/ledmac})
%
%
%
%
%
% \end{thebibliography}
% \endgroup
%
%
% \Finale
%
\endinput
%% \CharacterTable
%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%%